S30i - S31i - S32i Handbook B63947 En01 - v1

FANUC Series 30*/300*/300*s-MODEL A
FANUC Series 31*/310*/310*s-MODEL A5

OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE

HANDBOOK
B-63947EN/01
Vol. 1 of 2
• No part of this manual may be reproduced in any form.
• All specifications and designs are subject to change without
notice.
The products in this manual are controlled based on Japan’s

“Foreign Exchange and Foreign Trade Law”. The export of Series
30i/300i/300is-MODEL A, Series 31i/310i/310is-MODEL A5 from
Japan is subject to an export license by the government of Japan.
Other models in this manual may also be subject to export
controls.
Further, re-export to another country may be subject to the
license of the government of the country from where the product
is re-exported. Furthermore, the product may also be controlled
by re-export regulations of the United States government.
Should you wish to export or re-export these products, please
contact FANUC for advice.
In this manual we have tried as much as possible to describe all

the various matters.
However, we cannot describe all the matters which must not be
done, or which cannot be done, because there are so many
possibilities.
Therefore, matters which are not especially described as possible
in this manual should be regarded as ”impossible”.
This manual contains the program names or device names of

other companies, some of which are registered trademarks of
respective owners. However, these names are not followed by 
or  in the main body.
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
This section describes the safety precautions related to the use of CNC
units.
It is essential that these precautions be observed by users to ensure the
safe operation of machines equipped with a CNC unit (all descriptions in
this section assume this configuration). Note that some precautions are
related only to specific functions, and thus may not be applicable to
certain CNC units.
Users must also observe the safety precautions related to the machine,
as described in the relevant manual supplied by the machine tool builder.
Before attempting to operate the machine or create a program to control
the operation of the machine, the operator must become fully familiar
with the contents of this manual and relevant manual supplied by the
machine tool builder.
DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE

This manual includes safety precautions for protecting the user and
preventing damage to the machine. Precautions are classified into
Warning and Caution according to their bearing on safety. Also,
supplementary information is described as a Note. Read the Warning,
Caution, and Note thoroughly before attempting to use the machine.
WARNING
Applied when there is a danger of the user being injured or when there is a
danger of both the user being injured and the equipment being damaged if
the approved procedure is not observed.
CAUTION
Applied when there is a danger of the equipment being damaged, if the
approved procedure is not observed.
NOTE
The Note is used to indicate supplementary information other than
Warning and Caution.
• Read this manual carefully, and store it in a safe place.
GENERAL WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS

WARNING
1 Never attempt to machine a workpiece without first checking the operation
of the machine. Before starting a production run, ensure that the machine
is operating correctly by performing a trial run using, for example, the
single block, feedrate override, or machine lock function or by operating
the machine with neither a tool nor workpiece mounted. Failure to confirm
the correct operation of the machine may result in the machine behaving
unexpectedly, possibly causing damage to the workpiece and/or machine
itself, or injury to the user.
2 Before operating the machine, thoroughly check the entered data.
Operating the machine with incorrectly specified data may result in the
machine behaving unexpectedly, possibly causing damage to the
workpiece and/or machine itself, or injury to the user.
3 Ensure that the specified feedrate is appropriate for the intended
operation. Generally, for each machine, there is a maximum allowable
feedrate. The appropriate feedrate varies with the intended operation.
Refer to the manual provided with the machine to determine the maximum
allowable feedrate.
If a machine is run at other than the correct speed, it may behave
4 When using a tool compensation function, thoroughly check the direction
and amount of compensation. Operating the machine with incorrectly
specified data may result in the machine behaving unexpectedly, possibly
causing damage to the workpiece and/or machine itself, or injury to the
user.
s-1
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
WARNING
5 The parameters for the CNC and PMC are factory-set. Usually, there is not
need to change them. When, however, there is not alternative other than
to change a parameter, ensure that you fully understand the function of the
parameter before making any change.
Failure to set a parameter correctly may result in the machine behaving
CAUTION
1 Immediately after switching on the power, do not touch any of the keys on
the MDI panel until the position display or alarm screen appears on the
CNC unit.
Some of the keys on the MDI panel are dedicated to maintenance or other
special operations. Pressing any of these keys may place the CNC unit in
other than its normal state. Starting the machine in this state may cause it
to behave unexpectedly.
2 The User’s Manual and programming manual supplied with a CNC unit
provide an overall description of the machine's functions, including any
optional functions. Note that the optional functions will vary from one
machine model to another. Therefore, some functions described in the
manuals may not actually be available for a particular model. Check the
specification of the machine if in doubt.
3 Some functions may have been implemented at the request of the
machine-tool builder. When using such functions, refer to the manual
supplied by the machine-tool builder for details of their use and any related
cautions.
4 The liquid-crystal display is manufactured with very precise fabrication
technology. Some pixels may not be turned on or may remain on. This
phenomenon is a common attribute of LCDs and is not a defect.
NOTE
Programs, parameters, and macro variables are stored in nonvolatile
memory in the CNC unit. Usually, they are retained even if the power is
turned off. Such data may be deleted inadvertently, however, or it may
prove necessary to delete all data from nonvolatile memory as part of error
recovery. To guard against the occurrence of the above, and assure quick
restoration of deleted data, backup all vital data, and keep the backup
copy in a safe place.
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS RELATED TO

PROGRAMMING
This section covers the major safety precautions related to programming.
Before attempting to perform programming, read the supplied User’s
Manual carefully such that you are fully familiar with their contents.
WARNING
1 Coordinate system setting
If a coordinate system is established incorrectly, the machine may behave
unexpectedly as a result of the program issuing an otherwise valid move
command. Such an unexpected operation may damage the tool, the
machine itself, the workpiece, or cause injury to the user.
2 Positioning by nonlinear interpolation
When performing positioning by nonlinear interpolation (positioning by
nonlinear movement between the start and end points), the tool path must
be carefully confirmed before performing programming. Positioning
involves rapid traverse. If the tool collides with the workpiece, it may
damage the tool, the machine itself, the workpiece, or cause injury to the
user.
s-2
B-63947EN/01
WARNING
3 Function involving a rotary axis
When programming polar coordinate interpolation or normal-direction
(perpendicular) control, pay careful attention to the speed of the rotary
axis. Incorrect programming may result in the rotary axis speed becoming
excessively high, such that centrifugal force causes the chuck to lose its
grip on the workpiece if the latter is not mounted securely. Such mishap is
likely to damage the tool, the machine itself, the workpiece, or cause injury
to the user.
4 Inch/metric conversion
Switching between inch and metric inputs does not convert the
measurement units of data such as the workpiece origin offset, parameter,
and current position. Before starting the machine, therefore, determine
which measurement units are being used. Attempting to perform an
operation with invalid data specified may damage the tool, the machine
itself, the workpiece, or cause injury to the user.
5 Constant surface speed control
When an axis subject to constant surface speed control approaches the
origin of the workpiece coordinate system, the spindle speed may become
excessively high. Therefore, it is necessary to specify a maximum
allowable speed. Specifying the maximum allowable speed incorrectly
may damage the tool, the machine itself, the workpiece, or cause injury to
the user.
6 Stroke check
After switching on the power, perform a manual reference position return
as required. Stroke check is not possible before manual reference position
return is performed. Note that when stroke check is disabled, an alarm is
not issued even if a stroke limit is exceeded, possibly damaging the tool,
the machine itself, the workpiece, or causing injury to the user.
7 Tool post interference check
A tool post interference check is performed based on the tool data
specified during automatic operation. If the tool specification does not
match the tool actually being used, the interference check cannot be made
correctly, possibly damaging the tool or the machine itself, or causing
injury to the user. After switching on the power, or after selecting a tool
post manually, always start automatic operation and specify the tool
number of the tool to be used.
CAUTION
1 Absolute/incremental mode
If a program created with absolute values is run in incremental mode, or
vice versa, the machine may behave unexpectedly.
2 Plane selection
If an incorrect plane is specified for circular interpolation, helical
interpolation, or a canned cycle, the machine may behave unexpectedly.
Refer to the descriptions of the respective functions for details.
3 Torque limit skip
Before attempting a torque limit skip, apply the torque limit. If a torque limit
skip is specified without the torque limit actually being applied, a move
command will be executed without performing a skip.
4 Programmable mirror image
Note that programmed operations vary considerably when a
programmable mirror image is enabled.
5 Compensation function
If a command based on the machine coordinate system or a reference
position return command is issued in compensation function mode,
compensation is temporarily canceled, resulting in the unexpected
behavior of the machine.
Before issuing any of the above commands, therefore, always cancel
compensation function mode.
s-3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS RELATED TO
HANDLING
This section presents safety precautions related to the handling of
machine tools. Before attempting to operate your machine, read the
supplied User’s Manual carefully, such that you are fully familiar with
their contents.
WARNING
1 Manual operation
When operating the machine manually, determine the current position of
the tool and workpiece, and ensure that the movement axis, direction, and
feedrate have been specified correctly. Incorrect operation of the machine
may damage the tool, the machine itself, the workpiece, or cause injury to
the operator.
2 Manual reference position return
After switching on the power, perform manual reference position return as
required.
If the machine is operated without first performing manual reference
position return, it may behave unexpectedly. Stroke check is not possible
before manual reference position return is performed.
An unexpected operation of the machine may damage the tool, the
machine itself, the workpiece, or cause injury to the user.
3 Manual numeric command
When issuing a manual numeric command, determine the current position
of the tool and workpiece, and ensure that the movement axis, direction,
and command have been specified correctly, and that the entered values
are valid.
Attempting to operate the machine with an invalid command specified may
damage the tool, the machine itself, the workpiece, or cause injury to the
operator.
4 Manual handle feed
In manual handle feed, rotating the handle with a large scale factor, such
as 100, applied causes the tool and table to move rapidly. Careless
handling may damage the tool and/or machine, or cause injury to the user.
5 Disabled override
If override is disabled (according to the specification in a macro variable)
during threading, rigid tapping, or other tapping, the speed cannot be
predicted, possibly damaging the tool, the machine itself, the workpiece, or
causing injury to the operator.
6 Origin/preset operation
Basically, never attempt an origin/preset operation when the machine is
operating under the control of a program. Otherwise, the machine may
behave unexpectedly, possibly damaging the tool, the machine itself, the
tool, or causing injury to the user.
7 Workpiece coordinate system shift
Manual intervention, machine lock, or mirror imaging may shift the
workpiece coordinate system. Before attempting to operate the machine
under the control of a program, confirm the coordinate system carefully.
If the machine is operated under the control of a program without making
allowances for any shift in the workpiece coordinate system, the machine
may behave unexpectedly, possibly damaging the tool, the machine itself,
the workpiece, or causing injury to the operator.
8 Software operator's panel and menu switches
Using the software operator's panel and menu switches, in combination
with the MDI panel, it is possible to specify operations not supported by the
machine operator's panel, such as mode change, override value change,
and jog feed commands.
Note, however, that if the MDI panel keys are operated inadvertently, the
machine may behave unexpectedly, possibly damaging the tool, the
machine itself, the workpiece, or causing injury to the user.
s-4
B-63947EN/01
WARNING
9 RESET key
Pressing the RESET key stops the currently running program. As a result,
the servo axes are stopped. However, the RESET key may fail to function
for reasons such as an MDI panel problem. So, when the motors must be
stopped, use the emergency stop button instead of the RESET key to
ensure security.
CAUTION
1 Manual intervention
If manual intervention is performed during programmed operation of the
machine, the tool path may vary when the machine is restarted. Before
restarting the machine after manual intervention, therefore, confirm the
settings of the manual absolute switches, parameters, and
absolute/incremental command mode.
2 Feed hold, override, and single block
The feed hold, feedrate override, and single block functions can be
disabled using custom macro system variable #3004. Be careful when
operating the machine in this case.
3 Dry run
Usually, a dry run is used to confirm the operation of the machine. During a
dry run, the machine operates at dry run speed, which differs from the
corresponding programmed feedrate. Note that the dry run speed may
sometimes be higher than the programmed feed rate.
4 Tool radius and tool nose radius compensation in MDI mode
Pay careful attention to a tool path specified by a command in MDI mode,
because tool radius or tool nose radius compensation is not applied. When
a command is entered from the MDI to interrupt in automatic operation in
tool radius or tool nose radius compensation mode, pay particular attention
to the tool path when automatic operation is subsequently resumed. Refer
to the descriptions of the corresponding functions for details.
5 Program editing
If the machine is stopped, after which the machining program is edited
(modification, insertion, or deletion), the machine may behave
unexpectedly if machining is resumed under the control of that program.
Basically, do not modify, insert, or delete commands from a machining
program while it is in use.
WARNINGS RELATED TO DAILY MAINTENANCE

WARNING
1 Memory backup battery replacement
When replacing the memory backup batteries, keep the power to the
machine (CNC) turned on, and apply an emergency stop to the machine.
Because this work is performed with the power on and the cabinet open,
only those personnel who have received approved safety and
maintenance training may perform this work.
When replacing the batteries, be careful not to touch the high-voltage
circuits (marked and fitted with an insulating cover).
Touching the uncovered high-voltage circuits presents an extremely
dangerous electric shock hazard.
NOTE
The CNC uses batteries to preserve the contents of its memory, because it
must retain data such as programs, offsets, and parameters even while
external power is not applied.
If the battery voltage drops, a low battery voltage alarm is displayed on the
machine operator's panel or screen.
When a low battery voltage alarm is displayed, replace the batteries within
a week. Otherwise, the contents of the CNC's memory will be lost.
Refer to the Section “Method of replacing battery” of the Part IV,
“Maintenance” in the User’s Manual (Common to T/M series) for details of
the battery replacement procedure.
s-5
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
WARNING
2 Absolute Pulsecoder battery replacement
When replacing the memory backup batteries, keep the power to the
machine (CNC) turned on, and apply an emergency stop to the machine.
Because this work is performed with the power on and the cabinet open,
only those personnel who have received approved safety and
maintenance training may perform this work.
When replacing the batteries, be careful not to touch the high-voltage
circuits (marked and fitted with an insulating cover).
Touching the uncovered high-voltage circuits presents an extremely
NOTE
The absolute Pulsecoder uses batteries to preserve its absolute position.
If the battery voltage drops, a low battery voltage alarm is displayed on the
machine operator's panel or screen.
When a low battery voltage alarm is displayed, replace the batteries within
a week. Otherwise, the absolute position data held by the Pulsecoder will
be lost.
Refer to the FANUC SERVO MOTOR αi series Maintenance Manual for
details of the battery replacement procedure.
WARNING
3 Fuse replacement
Before replacing a blown fuse, however, it is necessary to locate and
remove the cause of the blown fuse.
For this reason, only those personnel who have received approved safety
and maintenance training may perform this work.
When replacing a fuse with the cabinet open, be careful not to touch the
high-voltage circuits (marked and fitted with an insulating cover).
Touching an uncovered high-voltage circuit presents an extremely
s-6
PREFACE
The Operation and Maintenance Handbook is for persons who are
familiar with NC programs and operations. It is used to refer to
necessary information quickly in operating or maintaining NC machine
tools at a work site.
The Handbook only contains reference information. It does not contain
other types of information, such as essential information or notes. Read
the following manuals first.
The Handbook assumes that the reader is familiar with the information in
the following manuals.
For information on safety precautions, be sure to read "SAFETY
PRECAUTIONS" described on the first page of the manual.
(1) Applicable models

This manual describes the models indicated in the table below.
In the text, the abbreviations indicated below may be used.
Model name Abbreviation
FANUC Series 30i-MODEL A 30i-A Series 30i
FANUC Series 300is-MODEL A 300is-A Series 300is
FANUC Series 31i-MODEL A5 31i-A5
Series 31i
FANUC Series 31i-MODEL A 31i-A
FANUC Series 310i-MODEL A5 310i-A5
Series 310i
FANUC Series 310i-MODEL A 310i-A
FANUC Series 310is-MODEL A5 310is-A5
Series 310is
FANUC Series 310is-MODEL A 310is-A
FANUC Series 320is-MODEL A 320is-A Series 320is
NOTE
1 For an explanatory purpose, the following descriptions may be used
according to the types of path control used:
• T series: For the lathe system
• M series: For the machining center system
2 Unless otherwise noted, the model names 31i/310i/310is-A,
31i/310i/310is-A5, and 32i/320i/320is-A are collectively referred to as
30i/300i/300is. However, this convention is not necessarily observed
when item 3 below is applicable.
3 Some functions described in this manual may not be applied to some
products. For details, refer to the DESCRIPTIONS (B-63942EN).
(2) Special symbols

This manual uses the following symbols:
M
-
Indicates a description that is valid only for the machine center system
set as system control type (in parameter No. 0983).
In a general description of the method of machining, a machining center
system operation is identified by a phase such as "for milling machining".
T
-
Indicates a description that is valid only for the lathe system set as
system control type (in parameter No. 0983).
In a general description of the method of machining, a lathe system
operation is identified by a phrase such as "for lathe cutting".
p-1
B-63947EN/01
-
Indicates the end of a description of a system control type.
When a system control type mark mentioned above is not followed by
this mark, the description of the system control type is assumed to
continue until the next item or paragraph begins. In this case, the next
item or paragraph provides a description common to the control types.
(3) Description of parameters

Parameters are classified by data type as follows:
Data type Valid data range Remarks
Bit
Bit machine group
Bit path 0 or 1
Bit axis
Bit spindle
Byte
Byte machine group
Some parameters handle these
Byte path -128 to 127
types of data as unsigned data.
Byte axis
Byte spindle
Word
Word machine group
Some parameters handle these
Word path -32768 to 32767
types of data as unsigned data.
Word axis
Word spindle
2-word
2-word machine
group Some parameters handle these
0 to ±999999999
2-word path types of data as unsigned data.
2-word axis
2-word spindle
Real
Real machine group See the standard
Real path parameter
setting tables.
Real axis
Real spindle
NOTE
1 Each of the parameters of the bit, bit machine group, bit path, bit axis, and
bit spindle types consists of 8 bits for one data number (parameters with
eight different meanings).
2 For machine group types, parameters corresponding to the maximum
number of machine groups are present, so that independent data can be
set for each machine group.
3 For path types, parameters corresponding to the maximum number of
paths are present, so that independent data can be set for each path.
4 For axis types, parameters corresponding to the maximum number of
control axes are present, so that independent data can be set for each
control axis.
5 For spindle types, parameters corresponding to the maximum number of
spindles are present, so that independent data can be set for each spindle
axis.
6 The valid data range for each data type indicates a general range. The
range varies according to the parameters. For the valid data range of a
specific parameter, see the explanation of the parameter.
p-2
PREFACE
(4) Related manuals of Series 30i/300i/300is- MODEL A,
Series 31i/310i/310is- MODEL A, Series 31i/310i/310is- MODEL A5,
Series 32i/320i/320is- MODEL A
The following table lists the manuals related to Series 30i/300i/300is-A,
Series 31i/310i/310is-A, Series 31i/310i/310is-A5, Series
32i/320i/320is-A. This manual is indicated by an asterisk (*).
Specification
Manual name
number
DESCRIPTIONS B-63942EN
CONNECTION MANUAL (HARDWARE) B-63943EN
CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION) B-63943EN-1
USER’S MANUAL B-63944EN
(Common to Lathe System/Machining Center System)
USER’S MANUAL (For Lathe System) B-63944EN-1
USER’S MANUAL (For Machining Center System) B-63944EN-2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL B-63945EN
PARAMETER MANUAL B-65950EN
Programming
Macro Compiler / Macro Executor B-63943EN-2
PROGRAMMING MANUAL
Macro Compiler OPERATOR’S MANUAL B-66264EN
C Language Executor OPERATOR’S MANUAL B-63944EN-3
PMC
PMC PROGRAMMING MANUAL B-63983EN
Network
PROFIBUS-DP Board OPERATOR’S MANUAL B-63994EN
Fast Ethernet / Fast Data Server OPERATOR’S MANUAL B-64014EN
DeviceNet Board OPERATOR’S MANUAL B-64044EN
FL-net Board OPERATOR’S MANUAL B-64164EN
Operation guidance function
MANUAL GUIDE i OPERATOR’S MANUAL B-63874EN
MANUAL GUIDE i Set-up Guidance B-63874EN-1
OPERATOR’S MANUAL
(5) Related manuals of SERVO MOTOR αi series, SPINDLE MOTOR αi

series, SERVO AMPLIFIER αi series
The following table lists the manuals related to SERVO MOTOR αi
series, SPINDLE MOTOR αi series, and SERVO AMPLIFIER αi series.
Specification
Manual name
number
FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR αis series
FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR αi series B-65262EN
DESCRIPTIONS
FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR αiS/αiF/βiS series
B-65270EN
PARAMETER MANUAL
FANUC AC SPINDLE MOTOR αi series DESCRIPTIONS B-65272EN
FANUC AC SPINDLE MOTOR αi/βi series
B-65280EN
PARAMETER MANUAL
FANUC SERVO AMPLIFIER αi series DESCRIPTIONS B-65282EN
p-3
B-63947EN/01
Specification
Manual name
number
FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR αis/αi series
FANUC AC SPINDLE MOTOR αi series
B-65285EN
FANUC SERVO AMPLIFIER αi series
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Either of the following servo motors and the corresponding spindle can
be connected to the CNC covered in this manual.
This manual mainly assumes that the FANUC SERVO MOTOR αi series
of servo motor is used. For servo motor and spindle information, refer to
the manuals for the servo motor and spindle that are actually connected.
p-4
Table of Contents
Volume 1 of 2
1 SCREEN DISPLAY AND OPERATION ................................... 1 1
2 OPERATION LIST ................................................................. 57 2
3 G CODE ................................................................................. 67 3
4 PROGRAM FORMAT ............................................................ 79 4
5 CUSTOM MACRO ................................................................. 97 5
6 HARDWARE ........................................................................ 123 6
7 PARAMETERS .................................................................... 237 7

Volume 2 of 2
8 ALARM LIST ........................................................................ 397 8
9 SIGNAL LIST (X/Y, G/F) ...................................................... 501 9
10 PMC...................................................................................... 569 10
11 ETHERNET .......................................................................... 645 11
12 POWER MATE CNC MANAGER FUNCTION..................... 683 12
13 DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION ............................................... 689 13
14 HISTORY FUNCTION .......................................................... 705 14
15 WAVEFORM DIAGNOSIS ................................................... 717 15
16 DIGITAL SERVO.................................................................. 723 16
17 AC SPINDLE ........................................................................ 753 17
18 MAINTENANCE INFORMATION......................................... 767 18
19 MAINTENANCE FUNCTION ............................................... 793 19
c-1
Table of Contents Volume 1 of 2
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS ............................................................. s-1
DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE ......................... s-1
GENERAL WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS .......................................... s-1
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS RELATED TO PROGRAMMING ........ s-2
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS RELATED TO HANDLING.................. s-4
WARNINGS RELATED TO DAILY MAINTENANCE........................... s-5
PREFACE .....................................................................................p-1
1 SCREEN DISPLAY AND OPERATION ................................... 1
1.1 SETTING AND DISPLAY UNITS ................................................. 1
1.1.1 7.2" LCD CNC Display Panel ........................................ 1
1.1.2 8.4" LCD CNC Display Panel ........................................ 1
1.1.3 10.4" LCD CNC Display Panel ...................................... 2
1.1.4 12.1" LCD CNC Display Panel ...................................... 2
1.1.5 15" LCD CNC Display Panel ......................................... 3
1.1.6 Standard MDI Unit (ONG Key) ...................................... 4
1.1.7 Standard MDI Unit (QWERTY Key)............................... 4
1.1.8 Small MDI Unit (ONG Key)............................................ 5
1.1.9 Explanation of the MDI Keyboard .................................. 6
1.2 FUNCTION KEYS AND SOFT KEYS .......................................... 9
1.2.1 General Screen Operations........................................... 9
1.3 SCREENS DISPLAYED BY FUNCTION KEY ................ 15
1.3.1 Position Display in the Workpiece Coordinate System 15
1.3.2 Position Display in the Relative Coordinate System .... 17
1.3.3 Overall Position Display .............................................. 19
1.3.4 Handle Interrupt Display.............................................. 20
1.3.5 Operating Monitor Display ........................................... 21
1.4 SCREENS DISPLAYED BY FUNCTION KEY
(MEMORY MODE) .................................................................... 23
1.4.1 Program Contents Display........................................... 23
1.4.2 Program Check Screen ............................................... 24
1.4.3 Next Block Display Screen .......................................... 25
(EDIT MODE) ............................................................................ 26
1.5.1 Editing a Program........................................................ 26
1.5.2 Program Folder Screen ............................................... 28
1.6.1 Setting and Displaying the Tool Offset Value .............. 29
1.6.2 Displaying and Entering Setting Data .......................... 32
1.6.3 Displaying and Setting the Workpiece Origin Offset
Value........................................................................... 34
1.6.4 Direct Input of Workpiece Origin Offset Value
Measured .................................................................... 35
1.6.5 Displaying and Setting Custom Macro Common
Variables ..................................................................... 36
1.6.6 Displaying and Setting the Software Operator's Panel 37
1.6.7 Character-to-Codes Correspondence Table................ 39
1.7.1 Displaying and Setting Parameters ............................. 40
1.7.2 Checking by Self-Diagnosis Screen ............................ 41
1.7.3 Coordinate System on Part Drawing and Coordinate
System Specified by CNC - Coordinate System .......... 42
1.7.4 Displaying and Setting Pitch Error Compensation
Data ............................................................................ 46
1.8.1 Alarm Display .............................................................. 49
1.8.2 Alarm History Display .................................................. 51
1.9 HELP FUNCTION...................................................................... 52
1.9.1 Initial Menu Screen...................................................... 52
c-2
B-63947EN/01
1.9.2 Alarm Detail Screen .................................................... 53

1.9.3 Operation Method Screen ........................................... 55
1.9.4 Parameter Table Screen ............................................. 56
2 OPERATION LIST ................................................................. 57
3 G CODE ................................................................................. 67
3.1 G CODE LIST IN THE MACHINING CENTER SYSTEM ........... 69
3.2 G CODE LIST IN THE LATHE SYSTEM ................................... 73
4 PROGRAM FORMAT ............................................................ 79
5 CUSTOM MACRO ................................................................. 97
5.1 TYPES OF VARIABLES ............................................................ 97
5.2 SYSTEM VARIABLE ................................................................. 97
5.3 ARGUMENT SPECIFICATION I/II ........................................... 112
5.4 ARITHMETIC AND LOGIC OPERATION ................................ 112
5.5 CONTROL COMMAND ........................................................... 113
5.6 MACRO CALL ......................................................................... 114
5.6.1 Simple Call (G65) ...................................................... 114
5.6.2 Modal Call: Call After the Move Command (G66)...... 114
5.6.3 Modal Call: Each Block Call (G66.1) ......................... 115
5.6.4 Macro Call Using a G Code....................................... 115
5.6.5 Macro Call Using an M Code..................................... 116
5.6.6 Subprogram Call Using an M Code ........................... 116
5.6.7 Subprogram Calls Using a T Code ............................ 117
5.6.8 Subprogram Calls Using an S Code.......................... 117
5.6.9 Subprogram Calls Using a Secondary Auxiliary
Function .................................................................... 117
5.6.10 Subprogram Call Using a Specific Address ............... 118
5.7 INTERRUPTION TYPE CUSTOM MACRO ............................. 119
5.8 EXTERNAL OUTPUT COMMANDS ........................................ 120
5.9 COMMAND RANGE ................................................................ 121
6 HARDWARE ........................................................................ 123
6.1 LCD-MOUNTED TYPE Series 30i/31i/32i
HARDWARE ............................................................. 123
6.1.1 Hardware Structure ................................................... 123
6.1.2 Overview of Hardware............................................... 124
6.1.3 Total Connection Diagrams ....................................... 125
6.1.4 Configuration of Printed Circuit Board Connectors
and Cards.................................................................. 128
6.1.4.1 Printed circuit board for 7.2”/8.4”/10.4”
display unit ................................................ 128
6.1.4.2 Printed circuit board for 15” display unit..... 135
6.1.5 List of Units and Printed Circuit Boards ..................... 147
6.1.5.1 Basic unit................................................... 147
6.1.5.2 Display unit................................................ 147
6.1.5.3 MDI unit ..................................................... 147
6.1.5.4 Printed circuit board................................... 148
6.1.6 I/O ............................................................................. 150
6.1.6.1 Others ....................................................... 151
6.2 LCD-MOUNTED TYPE Series 300is/310is/320is
HARDWARE............................................................................ 152
6.2.4 Configuration of Printed Circuit Board Connectors
and Cards.................................................................. 153
6.2.4.1 Main board ................................................ 153
6.2.4.2 Inverter PCBs, connector units, and fan
adapter PCBs ............................................ 162
6.2.5 List of Printed Circuit Boards and Units ..................... 165
6.2.5.1 List of printed circuit boards....................... 165
6.2.5.2 List of units ................................................ 166
6.2.5.3 Others ....................................................... 167
6.2.6 Backup Unit............................................................... 169
c-3
Table of Contents
6.3 STAND-ALONE TYPE 30i SERIES HARDWARE ................... 170
6.3.4 Control Unit ............................................................... 175
6.3.5 Display Unit for 30i/31i/32ii ....................................... 180
6.3.5.1 10.4” display unit ....................................... 180
6.3.5.2 15” display unit .......................................... 185
6.3.6 Display Unit for 300is/310is/320is ............................. 191
6.3.6.1 Main board of display unit for is series
CNC .......................................................... 191
6.3.6.2 Inverter PCBs, fan adapter PCBs, and
connector units .......................................... 198
6.3.6.3 Backup unit................................................ 200
6.3.7 List of Printed Circuit Boards and Units ..................... 201
6.3.7.1 Basic unit................................................... 201
6.3.7.2 List of printed circuit boards of control unit. 201
6.3.7.3 List of display unit for 30i/31i/32i ............... 202
6.3.7.4 Display unit for 300is/310is/320is.............. 204
6.3.7.5 MDI unit ..................................................... 208
6.3.8 I/O ............................................................................. 209
6.3.8.1 Others ....................................................... 210
6.4 MATTERS COMMON TO BOTH LCD-MOUNTED TYPE AND
STAND-ALONE TYPE (HARDWARE)..................................... 212
6.4.1 Optional Board .......................................................... 212
6.4.1.1 Fast Ethernet board................................... 212
6.4.1.2 Additional axis board ................................. 216
6.4.1.3 Additional spindle board ............................ 217
6.4.1.4 HSSB interface board................................ 218
6.4.1.5 FL-net board.............................................. 219
6.4.1.6 PROFIBUS board ...................................... 223
6.4.1.7 DeviceNet board........................................ 225
6.4.1.8 Mounting locations of optional boards........ 231
6.4.2 Other Units ................................................................ 232
6.4.2.1 Separate detector interface unit................. 232
6.4.2.2 Analog input separate detector interface
unit ............................................................ 234
7 PARAMETERS .................................................................... 237
7.1 HOW TO ENTER THE PARAMETERS ................................... 237
7.2 PARAMETER LIST.................................................................. 239
7.2.1 Setting....................................................................... 241
7.2.2 DNC1/DNC2 Interface............................................... 242
7.2.3 System Configuration ................................................ 243
7.2.4 Axis Control............................................................... 243
7.2.5 Coordinate System.................................................... 245
7.2.6 Stroke Limit Check .................................................... 246
7.2.7 Chuck and Tail Stock Barrier..................................... 247
7.2.8 Feedrate.................................................................... 248
7.2.9 Acceleration/Deceleration Control ............................. 250
7.2.10 Servo......................................................................... 252
7.2.11 DI/DO ........................................................................ 267
7.2.12 Display and Edit ........................................................ 269
7.2.13 Programs .................................................................. 276
7.2.14 Pitch Error Compensation ......................................... 280
7.2.15 Spindle Control.......................................................... 281
7.2.16 Serial Spindle ............................................................ 286
7.2.17 Spindle Control 2....................................................... 302
7.2.18 Tool Compensation ................................................... 303
7.2.19 Canned Cycle............................................................ 307
7.2.20 Rigid Tapping ............................................................ 310
7.2.21 Scaling/Coordinate Rotation...................................... 313
7.2.22 Single Direction Positioning....................................... 314
7.2.23 Polar Coordinate Interpolation................................... 314
7.2.24 Normal Direction Control ........................................... 314
7.2.25 Index Table ............................................................... 314
c-4
B-63947EN/01
7.2.26 Involute Interpolation ................................................. 315

7.2.27 Exponential Interpolation ........................................... 315
7.2.28 Flexible Synchronous Control.................................... 315
7.2.29 Straightness Compensation ...................................... 316
7.2.30 Inclination Compensation .......................................... 317
7.2.31 Custom Macros ......................................................... 317
7.2.32 Skip Functions........................................................... 322
7.2.33 External Data Input.................................................... 325
7.2.34 Manual Handle Retrace............................................. 326
7.2.35 Graphic Display......................................................... 328
7.2.36 Screen Display Colors............................................... 328
7.2.37 Run Hour and Parts Count Display............................ 328
7.2.38 Tool Life Management............................................... 329
7.2.39 Position Switch.......................................................... 331
7.2.40 Manual/Automatic Operation Functions..................... 333
7.2.41 Manual Handle .......................................................... 334
7.2.42 Reference Position with Mechanical Stopper ............ 334
7.2.43 Software Operator's Panel ........................................ 335
7.2.44 Program Restart........................................................ 338
7.2.45 Software Operator's Panel 2...................................... 338
7.2.46 High-speed Cutting.................................................... 340
7.2.47 Fixture Offset............................................................. 340
7.2.48 Polygon Turning ........................................................ 341
7.2.49 Electric Gear Box (EGB)............................................ 342
7.2.50 Axis Control by PMC ................................................. 344
7.2.51 Multi-path .................................................................. 346
7.2.52 Interference Check for Each Path.............................. 346
7.2.53 Synchronous/Composite Control and Superimposed
Control ...................................................................... 347
7.2.54 Angular Axis Control.................................................. 350
7.2.55 Axis Synchronous Control ......................................... 350
7.2.56 Sequence Number Comparison and Stop ................. 352
7.2.57 Chopping................................................................... 352
7.2.58 AI Contour Control..................................................... 352
7.2.59 High-speed Position Switch....................................... 353
7.2.60 Others ....................................................................... 355
7.2.61 Maintenance.............................................................. 355
7.2.62 Macro Executor ......................................................... 356
7.2.63 Wrong Operation Prevention Function ...................... 358
7.2.64 Screen Display Colors 2 ............................................ 360
7.2.65 Dual Check Safety..................................................... 360
7.2.66 Diagnosis .................................................................. 360
7.2.67 Three-dimensional Error Compensation .................... 361
7.2.68 Rotation Area Interference Check ............................. 361
7.2.69 Spindle Control Based on Servo Motor/Cs Contour
Control ...................................................................... 361
7.2.70 Path Table Operation Function.................................. 363
7.2.71 PMC .......................................................................... 366
7.2.72 Dual Check Safety 2.................................................. 367
7.2.73 Embedded Macro Functions...................................... 367
7.2.74 High-speed Position Switch 2.................................... 368
7.2.75 Malfunction Protection............................................... 368
7.2.76 Manual Handle 2 ....................................................... 368
7.2.77 Display and Edit 2 ..................................................... 375
7.2.78 Tool Management Functions ..................................... 376
7.2.79 Straightness Compensation 2 ................................... 378
7.2.80 Machining Condition Selection Functions .................. 380
7.2.81 Dual Check Safety 3.................................................. 381
7.2.82 FSSB......................................................................... 383
7.2.83 Embedded Ethernet .................................................. 386
7.2.84 Rotation Area Interference Check 2 .......................... 386
7.2.85 Pitch Error Compensation 2 ...................................... 389
7.2.86 AI Contour Control 2.................................................. 389
7.2.87 Optimum Torque Acceleration/Deceleration .............. 390
7.2.88 Nano Smoothing ....................................................... 391
7.2.89 Tool Compensation 2 ................................................ 391
c-5
Table of Contents Volume 2 of 2
8 ALARM LIST ........................................................................ 397

8.1 ALARM LIST (CNC)................................................................. 397
8.1.1 Alarms on Program and Operation (PS Alarm),
Background Edit Alarms (BG Alarm), Communication
Alarms (SR Alarm) .................................................... 397
8.1.2 Parameter Writing Alarm (SW Alarm)........................ 431
8.1.3 Servo Alarms (SV Alarm) .......................................... 432
8.1.4 Overtravel Alarms (OT Alarm) ................................... 440
8.1.5 Memory File Alarms (IO Alarm) ................................. 441
8.1.6 Alarms Requiring Power to be Turned Off
(PW Alarm)................................................................ 441
8.1.7 Spindle Alarms (SP Alarm)........................................ 443
8.1.8 Overheat Alarms (OH Alarm) .................................... 446
8.1.9 Other Alarms (DS Alarm)........................................... 446
8.1.10 Malfunction Prevention Function Alarms (IE Alarm) .. 450
8.2 ALARM LIST (SERIAL SPINDLE) ........................................... 451
8.3 SYSTEM ALARMS .................................................................. 462
8.3.1 Overview ................................................................... 462
8.3.2 Operations on the System Alarm Screen................... 463
8.3.3 System Alarms Detected by Hardware ...................... 466
8.3.4 System Alarms 114 to 130 (Alarms on the FSSB) ..... 467
8.4 SYSTEM ALARMS RELATED TO THE PMC AND I/O LINK ... 469
8.5 MESSAGES THAT MAY BE DISPLAYED ON THE PMC
SCREEN ................................................................................. 473
8.5.1 PMC Alarm Messages............................................... 473
8.5.2 PMC System Alarm Messages.................................. 478
8.5.3 Operation Errors........................................................ 481
8.5.3.1 Error messages that may be displayed on
the LADDER DIAGRAM VIEWER screen.. 481
the LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR screen .. 482
the LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR screen
(when updating)......................................... 483
the NET EDITOR screen ........................... 487
the TITLE DATA EDITOR screen .............. 488
the SYMBOL & COMMENT DATA
EDITOR screen ......................................... 488
the MESSAGE DATA EDITOR screen ...... 489
the I/O MODULE EDITOR screen ............. 490
the SYSTEM PARAMETER screen ........... 491
the SIGNAL STATUS screen..................... 491
the PMC PARAM screen ........................... 492
the SIGNAL TRACE screen....................... 492
the trace setting screen ............................. 492
8.5.4 I/O Communication Error Messages.......................... 492
8.6 POWER MATE CNC MANAGER FUNCTION ......................... 497
8.7 ERROR DISPLAY ON THE SPINDLE AMPLIFIER ................. 498
9 SIGNAL LIST (X/Y, G/F) ...................................................... 501
9.1 LIST OF SIGNALS .................................................................. 503
9.1.1 List of Signals (in Order of Symbols) ......................... 503
9.1.2 List of Signals (in Order of Addresses) ...................... 521
9.2 LIST OF ADDRESSES ............................................................ 543
c-6
B-63947EN/01
10 PMC...................................................................................... 569
10.1 OPERATING THE PMC SCREEN........................................... 569
10.1.1 Transition of the PMC Screens.................................. 570
10.2 PMC DIAGNOSIS/MAINTENANCE SCREEN
([PMC MAINTE])...................................................................... 571
10.2.1 Monitoring PMC Signal Status ([STATUS] Screen) ... 572
10.2.2 Checking PMC Alarms ([PMC ALARM] Screen)........ 573
10.2.3 Setting and Displaying Variable Timers
([TIMER] Screen) ...................................................... 573
10.2.4 Setting and Displaying Counter Values
([COUNTR] Screen) .................................................. 575
10.2.5 Setting and Displaying Keep Relays
([KEEP RELAY] Screen) ........................................... 576
10.2.6 Setting and Displaying Data Tables ([DATA] Screen) 581
10.2.7 Data Input/Output ([I/O] Screen)................................ 585
10.2.8 Displaying I/O Link Connection Status
([I/O LINK] Screen).................................................... 587
10.2.9 Signal Trace Function ([TRACE] Screen) .................. 589
10.2.10 Setting of Trace Parameter
([TRACE SETING] Screen) ....................................... 589
10.2.11 Execution of Trace .................................................... 592
10.2.12 Monitoring the Network Communication Status and
the PMC Signal Status ([I/O DGN] Screen) ............... 593
10.3 LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR SCREENS
([PMC LADDER])..................................................................... 595
10.3.1 Displaying a Program List ([LIST] Screen)................. 596
10.3.2 Monitoring Ladder Diagrams ([LADDER] Screen) ..... 597
10.3.3 Collective Monitor Function ....................................... 598
10.3.4 Editing Ladder Programs........................................... 600
10.3.5 NET EDITOR Screen ................................................ 601
10.3.6 PROGRAM LIST EDITOR Screen............................. 603
10.3.7 Duplicate Coil Check Function .................................. 604
10.4 PMC CONFIGURATION DATA SETTING SCREENS
([PMC CONFIG]) ..................................................................... 605
10.4.1 Displaying and Editing Title Data ([TITLE] Screens).. 606
10.4.1.1 PMC title data display screen .................... 606
10.4.1.2 Title (message) data display screen .......... 607
10.4.2 Displaying and Editing Symbol and Comment Data
([SYMBOL] Screens)................................................. 607
10.4.2.1 SYMBOL & COMMENT DATA VIEWER
screen (basic format)................................. 607
10.4.2.2 SYMBOL & COMMENT DATA VIEWER
screen (extended format)........................... 608
10.4.3 Displaying and Editing Message Data ([MESAGE]
Screens).................................................................... 609
10.4.4 Displaying and Editing I/O Module Allocation Data
([MODULE] Screens) ................................................ 609
10.4.4.1 I/O MODULE VIEWER screen................... 609
10.4.5 Displaying and Editing PMC Settings
([SETING] Screens) .................................................. 610
10.4.6 Displaying the Status of PMCs and Changing the
Target PMC ([PMC STATUS] Screens)..................... 613
10.4.7 Displaying and Setting Parameters for the Online
Function ([ONLINE] Screen)...................................... 613
10.4.8 Displaying and Setting System Parameters
([SYSTEM PARAM] Screens) ................................... 614
10.4.9 Displaying and Setting Configuration Parameters
([CONFIG PARAM] Screens) .................................... 616
10.4.9.1 MENU screen ............................................ 616
10.4.9.2 CNC-PMC INTERFACE screen................. 617
10.4.9.3 MACHINE SIGNAL INTERFACE screen ... 618
10.4.9.4 LADDER EXECUTION screen................... 619
10.4.9.5 PMC MEMORY SETTING screen ............. 620
10.5 FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS .............................................. 621
10.5.1 List of Functional Instructions .................................... 621
10.5.2 Details of Functional Instructions............................... 625
c-7
Table of Contents
10.5.2.1 Timer ......................................................... 625
10.5.2.2 Counter ..................................................... 625
10.5.2.3 Data transfer.............................................. 626
10.5.2.4 Comparison ............................................... 627
10.5.2.5 Data search ............................................... 630
10.5.2.6 Bit operation .............................................. 630
10.5.2.7 Code conversion........................................ 631
10.5.2.8 Operation instruction ................................. 633
10.5.2.9 CNC functions ........................................... 635
10.5.2.10 Program control ......................................... 636
10.5.2.11 Rotation control ......................................... 638
10.5.3 Functional Instructions (Arranged in Sequence of
SUB No.)................................................................... 639
10.6 I/O MODULE ASSIGNMENT NAMES ..................................... 642
11 ETHERNET .......................................................................... 645
11.1 OVERVIEW ............................................................................. 645
11.2 ETHERNET MOUNTING LOCATIONS ................................... 645
11.3 LIST OF ETHERNET-RELATED SCREENS ........................... 646
11.3.1 Setting and Maintenance (SYSTEM key) .................. 646
11.3.2 File Operation (PROG Key)....................................... 647
11.3.3 Error Message (MESSAGE Key)............................... 647
11.4 EMBEDDED ETHERNET ........................................................ 648
11.4.1 Parameter Setting Screen ......................................... 648
11.4.2 FTP File Transfer Operation Screen.......................... 652
11.4.3 Maintenance Screen for Embedded Ethernet
Function .................................................................... 653
11.4.4 Log Screen of the Embedded Ethernet Function ....... 657
11.5 ETHERNET OPTIONAL BOARD............................................. 660
11.5.1 Parameter Setting Screen ......................................... 660
11.5.2 Fast Data Server Operation Screen .......................... 667
11.5.3 Machine Remote Diagnosis Operation Screens ........ 671
11.5.4 Maintenance Screen (for Data Server Function)........ 673
11.5.5 Maintenance Screen ................................................. 675
11.5.6 Error Message Screen .............................................. 678
11.6 TROUBLESHOOTING............................................................. 681
11.6.1 Confirmation of Connection with the Hub Unit ........... 681
11.6.2 Confirmation of Each Parameter Setting ................... 682
11.6.3 Confirmation of Communications Based on the Ping
Command.................................................................. 682
12 POWER MATE CNC MANAGER FUNCTION..................... 683
12.1 SCREEN DISPLAY.................................................................. 683
12.2 PARAMETERS........................................................................ 687
12.3 WARNING ............................................................................... 688
13 DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION ............................................... 689
13.1 DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION ......................................................... 689
13.1.1 Displaying Diagnosis Screen..................................... 689
13.2 LIST OF DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION (DGN) ......................... 689
13.2.1 Display of Causes of Instructions not Functioning ..... 689
13.2.2 State of TH Alarm...................................................... 689
13.2.3 Details of Serial Pulsecoder ...................................... 690
13.2.4 Details of Separate Serial Pulsecoder Alarms ........... 691
13.2.5 Details of Invalid Servo Parameter Alarms
(on the CNC Side) ..................................................... 691
13.2.6 Position Error Amount ............................................... 691
13.2.7 Machine Position ....................................................... 691
13.2.8 Reference Position Shift Function ............................. 691
13.2.9 Reference Counter .................................................... 691
13.2.10 Machine Coordinates on the Angular/Cartesian Axes 692
13.2.11 Servo Motor Temperature Information....................... 692
13.2.12 Cause that Sets Parameter APZ (No. 1815#4) to 0... 692
13.2.13 Details of Invalid Servo Parameter Setting Alarms
(on the Servo Side) ................................................... 693
13.2.14 Detailed Descriptions about Invalid Servo Parameter
Setting Alarms........................................................... 693
c-8
B-63947EN/01
13.2.15 Diagnosis Data Related to the Inductosyn Absolute

Position Detector ....................................................... 697
13.2.16 Diagnosis Data Related to the Serial Spindles .......... 697
13.2.17 Diagnosis Data Related to Rigid Tapping .................. 698
13.2.18 Diagnosis Data Related to the Small-hole Peck
Drilling Cycle ............................................................. 699
13.2.19 Diagnosis Data Related to the Dual Position
Feedback Function.................................................... 700
13.2.20 State of High-speed HRV Current Control ................. 701
13.2.21 Thermal Growth Compensation along Tool Vector .... 701
13.2.22 Spindle Error and Warning States ............................. 701
13.2.23 Digital Servo (2) ........................................................ 701
13.2.24 Automatic Data Backup............................................. 702
13.2.25 Diagnosis Data Related to Axis Synchronous
Control ...................................................................... 702
13.2.26 Diagnosis Data Related to Synchronous/Composite
Control ...................................................................... 702
13.2.27 Diagnosis Data Related to Linear Scale with
Absolute Address Reference Marks .......................... 703
14 HISTORY FUNCTION .......................................................... 705
14.1 OVERVIEW OF HISTORY FUNCTION ................................... 705
14.2 ALARM HISTORY ................................................................... 705
14.2.1 Screen Display .......................................................... 705
14.2.2 Erasing History Data from the ALARM HISTORY
Screen....................................................................... 706
14.2.3 External/Macro Alarm Display ................................... 706
14.3 EXTERNAL OPERATOR MESSAGE HISTORY ..................... 707
14.3.1 Screen Display .......................................................... 707
14.3.2 Erasing History Data from the External Operator
Message History Screen ........................................... 707
14.3.3 Parameter Setting ..................................................... 708
14.4 OPERATION HISTORY........................................................... 708
14.4.2 Screen Display .......................................................... 710
14.4.3 Inputting and Outputting Operation History Data ....... 712
14.4.3.1 Outputting operation history data............... 712
14.4.4 History Data Not Displayed on the Screen ................ 712
14.4.5 Erasing History Data from the Operation History
Screen....................................................................... 713
14.5 SELECTING OPERATION HISTORY SIGNALS ..................... 713
14.6 OUTPUTTING ALL HISTORY DATA....................................... 715
15 WAVEFORM DIAGNOSIS ................................................... 717
15.1 WAVEFORM DIAGNOSIS PARAMETER SCREEN ................ 717
15.1.1 Tracing Data.............................................................. 718
15.1.2 Outputting Data ......................................................... 719
16 DIGITAL SERVO.................................................................. 723
16.1 INITIAL SETTING SERVO PARAMETERS ............................. 723
16.2 FSSB SETTING SCREEN ....................................................... 732
16.2.1 FSSB Display and Setting Screen ............................. 732
16.3 SERVO TUNING SCREEN...................................................... 738
16.3.2 Displaying Servo Tuning Screen ............................... 738
16.3.3 Alarms Related to Amplifiers and Motors................... 739
16.3.4 Alarms related to the Pulsecoder and Separate
Serial Pulsecoder ...................................................... 740
16.3.5 Alarms Related to Serial Communication .................. 741
16.3.6 Alarms Related to Disconnection............................... 742
16.3.7 Alarm Related to Invalid Parameter Settings ............. 742
16.3.8 Others ....................................................................... 743
16.4 αi SERVO INFORMATION SCREEN ...................................... 744
16.5 αi SERVO WARNING INTERFACE ........................................ 748
16.6 ADJUSTING REFERENCE POSITION (DOG METHOD)........ 749
16.7 REFERENCE POSITION SETTING WITHOUT DOGS ........... 751
c-9
Table of Contents
17 AC SPINDLE ........................................................................ 753
17.1 SERIAL INTERFACE AC SPINDLE......................................... 753
17.1.1 Overview of Spindle Control ...................................... 753
17.1.1.1 Method A of gear change for M series
(parameter SGB (No. 3705#2)=0) ............. 753
17.1.1.2 Method B of gear change for M series
(parameter SGB (No. 3705#2)=1) ............. 754
17.1.1.3 T series ..................................................... 754
17.1.2 Automatic Setting of Standard Parameters................ 754
17.1.3 Spindle Setting and Tuning Screen ........................... 755
17.1.3.1 Display method.......................................... 755
17.1.3.2 Spindle setting screen ............................... 756
17.1.3.3 Spindle tuning screen ................................ 757
17.1.3.4 Spindle monitor screen .............................. 758
17.1.3.5 Correspondence between operation mode
and parameters on spindle tuning screen .. 760
17.1.4 Warning Interface ...................................................... 762
17.1.5 Spindle Information Screen ....................................... 763
18 MAINTENANCE INFORMATION......................................... 767
18.1 SCREEN DISPLAY AT POWER ON ....................................... 767
18.1.1 Display until the CNC Starts ...................................... 767
18.1.2 IPL Display ................................................................ 767
18.1.3 System Label Check Error......................................... 768
18.2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION SCREEN DISPLAY ................... 768
18.2.1 Hardware Configuration Screen ................................ 769
18.2.2 Software Configuration Screen.................................. 770
18.3 CNC STATE DISPLAY ............................................................ 772
18.4 PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE SCREEN ................................ 775
18.4.1 Overview ................................................................... 775
18.4.1.1 Screen configuration.................................. 775
18.4.1.2 Procedure.................................................. 775
18.4.2 Screen Display and Setting ....................................... 775
18.4.2.1 Status screen display and setting .............. 776
18.4.2.2 Setting screen display and setting ............. 781
18.4.3 Registered Data Input/Output.................................... 783
18.4.3.1 Data output................................................ 784
18.4.3.2 Data input .................................................. 784
18.4.4 Parameter ................................................................. 784
18.4.5 Warning..................................................................... 785
18.5 MAINTENANCE INFORMATION SCREEN ............................. 786
18.5.1 Overview ................................................................... 786
18.5.2 Screen Display and Operation................................... 786
18.5.2.1 Screen display........................................... 786
18.5.2.2 Edit operation ............................................ 787
18.5.2.3 Operation of soft keys................................ 788
18.5.2.4 Input/output of maintenance information.... 789
18.5.2.5 Half-size kana input ................................... 790
18.5.3 Parameter ................................................................. 791
18.5.4 Warning..................................................................... 792
19 MAINTENANCE FUNCTION ............................................... 793
19.1 INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA ............................................. 793
19.1.1 Setting Parameters for Input/Output .......................... 793
19.1.2 Inputting/Outputting Data........................................... 794
19.1.2.1 Confirming the parameters required for
data output ................................................ 795
19.1.2.2 Outputting CNC parameters ...................... 796
19.1.2.3 Outputting pitch error compensation
amount ...................................................... 796
19.1.2.4 Outputting custom macro variable values .. 796
19.1.2.5 Outputting tool compensation amount ....... 796
19.1.2.6 Outputting part program............................. 796
19.1.2.7 Inputting CNC parameters ......................... 797
19.1.2.8 Inputting pitch error compensation amount 798
19.1.2.9 Inputting custom macro variable values..... 798
19.1.2.10 Inputting tool compensation amount .......... 799
c-10
B-63947EN/01
19.1.2.11 Inputting part programs.............................. 799

19.1.3 Input/Output on the ALL IO Screen ........................... 799
19.1.3.1 Inputting/outputting a program................... 800
19.1.3.2 Inputting/outputting parameters ................. 800
19.1.3.3 Inputting/outputting offset data................... 801
19.1.3.4 Inputting/outputting custom macro common
variables .................................................... 802
19.2 MEMRY CARD SLOT.............................................................. 803
19.2.1 Overview ................................................................... 803
19.2.2 Hardware Configuration ............................................ 803
19.3 BOOT SYSTEM....................................................................... 804
19.3.1 Overview ................................................................... 804
19.3.1.1 Displaying the power ON sequence........... 804
19.3.1.2 Starting the boot system ............................ 805
19.3.1.3 System files and user files ......................... 805
19.3.2 Screen Configuration and Operating Procedure ........ 806
19.3.2.1 USER DATA LOADING/SYSTEM DATA
LOADING screen....................................... 807
19.3.2.2 SYSTEM DATA CHECK screen ................ 809
19.3.2.3 SYSTEM DATA DELETE screen............... 811
19.3.2.4 SYSTEM DATA SAVE screen ................... 813
19.3.2.5 SRAM DATA UTILITY screen.................... 814
19.3.2.6 MEMORY CARD FORMAT screen............ 815
19.3.2.7 Quitting BOOT........................................... 816
19.3.3 Error Messages and Required Actions ...................... 816
19.4 LED DISPLAY ......................................................................... 818
19.4.1 Overview ................................................................... 818
19.4.2 7-segment LED Indications (Turned on) .................... 818
19.4.3 7-segment LED Indications (Blinking)........................ 819
19.5 MAINTENANCE OF OPEN CNC (BOOT-UP AND IPL)........... 821
19.5.1 Overview ................................................................... 821
19.5.2 Changing Start Sequences........................................ 822
19.5.3 Explanation of Screens ............................................. 823
19.5.3.1 BOOT screen ............................................ 823
19.5.3.2 IPL screen ................................................. 825
19.5.4 Other Screens ........................................................... 826
19.5.4.1 CNC alarm screen ..................................... 826
19.5.4.2 Status screen (Series 300i/310i/320i only) 826
19.5.4.3 Option setting screen................................. 827
19.6 COLOR SETTING SCREEN.................................................... 829
19.6.1 Screen Display .......................................................... 829
19.6.2 Operations for Color Setting ...................................... 829
19.7 MONOCHROME LCD BRIGHTNESS ADJUSTMENT............. 831
c-11
1 SCREEN DISPLAY AND OPERATION
1.1 SETTING AND DISPLAY UNITS
The setting and display units are shown in Subsections 1.1.1 to 1.1.8.
7.2" LCD CNC Display Panel ...........................................................1.1.1

8.4" LCD CNC Display Panel ...........................................................1.1.2
10.4" LCD CNC Display Panel .........................................................1.1.3
12.1" LCD CNC Display Panel .........................................................1.1.4
15" LCD CNC Display Panel ............................................................1.1.5
Standard MDI Unit (ONG Key) .........................................................1.1.6
Standard MDI Unit (QWERTY Key)..................................................1.1.7
Small MDI Unit (ONG Key)...............................................................1.1.8
1.1.1 7.2" LCD CNC Display Panel
1
B-63947EN/01

1
2
1.1.5 15" LCD CNC Display Panel
3
B-63947EN/01
1.1.6 Standard MDI Unit (ONG Key)

- Unit with machining center system
1
Help key Reset key Address/numeric keys
Edit keys
Uppercase/
lowercase
switch key
Cancel
(CAN) key
Shift key Input key
AUX key
CTRL key
ALT key
TAB key
Page change keys Cursor move keys Function keys

(Page keys) (Cursor keys)
- Unit with lathe system

Help key Reset key Address/numeric keys
Edit keys
Uppercase/
lowercase
switch key
Cancel
(CAN) key
Shift key Input key
AUX key
CTRL key
ALT key
TAB key
Page change keys Cursor move keys Function keys

1.1.7 Standard MDI Unit (QWERTY Key)

Help key Function keys
Reset key
Address keys
Uppercase/
lowercase Numeric
switch key keys
AUX key
CTRL key Shift

key
ALT key Input
key
TAB key
Page change keys Cursor move keys Edit keys Cancel (CAN) key
4
1.1.8 Small MDI Unit (ONG Key)
- Unit with machining center system
Address/numeric keys
Cancel (CAN) key

Input key
Function keys Shift key
Help key
Page change keys
(Page keys)
Reset key
Edit keys
Cursor move keys

(Cursor keys)
- Unit with lathe system
Address/numeric keys
Cancel (CAN) key

Input key
Function keys
Shift key
Help key
Page change keys
(Page keys)
Reset key
Edit keys
Cursor move keys

(Cursor keys)
5
B-63947EN/01
1.1.9 Explanation of the MDI Keyboard
Table 1.1 (a) Explanation of the MDI keyboard 1

No. Name Explanation
Reset key Press this key to reset the CNC, to cancel an
1
alarm, etc.
Help key Press this button to use the help function when
2 uncertain about the operation of an MDI key (help
function).
The soft keys have various functions, according
3 Soft keys to the Applications. The soft key functions are
displayed on the display unit.
Address and
numeric keys Press these keys to input alphabetic, numeric,
4
and other characters.
Some keys have two characters on their keytop.

Shift key Pressing the key switches the characters.
5 Special character ^ is displayed on the screen
when a character indicated at the bottom right
corner on the keytop can be entered.
When an address or a numerical key is pressed,
the data is input to the buffer, and it is displayed
on the screen. To copy the data in the key input
Input key
6 buffer to the offset register, etc., press the
key. This key is equivalent to the [INPUT] key of
the soft keys, and either can be pressed to
produce the same result.
Press this key to delete the last character or
symbol input to the key input buffer.
Example) When the key input buffer displays
> N001X100Z_
Cancel (CAN) key
7 >N001X100Z_
and the cancel key is pressed,
Z is canceled and
>N001X100_
is displayed.
Press these keys when editing the program.
Edit keys : ALTER

8
: INSERT
: DELETE
Press theses keys to switch display screens for

Function keys
each function.
9
See Sections 1.3 to 1.8 for details of the function
...
keys.
6
No. Name Explanation
There are four different cursor move keys.
: This key is used to move the cursor to
the right or in the forward direction. The
cursor is moved in short units in the
forward direction.
: This key is used to move the cursor to
Cursor move keys
the left or in the reverse direction. The
(Cursor keys)
cursor is moved in short units in the
10 reverse direction.
: This key is used to move the cursor in a
downward or forward direction. The
cursor is moved in large units in the
forward direction.
: This key is used to move the cursor in an
upward or reverse direction. The cursor
is moved in large units in the reverse
direction.
Two kinds of page change keys are described
Page change keys below.
(Page keys)
: This key is used to changeover the page
11
on the screen in the forward direction.
: This key is used to changeover the page
on the screen in the reverse direction.
Uppercase/
lowercase switch Press this key to switch between uppercase and
12 key lowercase when entering alphabetic characters.
PC function key
These keys are used with the personal computer
13
function of the 300i/300is, 310i/310is, 320i/320is.
7
B-63947EN/01
Explanation
- 15” LCD/MDI soft key configuration
The 15” LCD panel has 12 soft keys horizontally and 9 soft keys 1
vertically.
As shown below, the 8 vertical soft keys and the lowermost key are used
as chapter selection soft keys. By pressing each of these keys, the
screen (chapter) belonging to each function can be selected. The
horizontal 12 soft keys are used to perform operations on the screen
selected with a vertical soft key.
For an LCD display with a touch panel, touch a soft key on the screen to
select it.
Vertical soft keys
Displays operations on selected chapter.
Horizontal soft keys
In this manual, the descriptions below assume a 10.4" LCD display panel
with 12 soft keys.
- Key operation with multi-path control

In the multi-path control, be sure to select the tool post for which data is
specified, using the path selection switch on the machine operator's
panel. Then, perform keyboard operation, such as displaying or
specifying various data items, and editing a program.
8
1.2 FUNCTION KEYS AND SOFT KEYS
The function keys are used to select the type of screen (function) to be
displayed. When a soft key (section select soft key) is pressed
immediately after a function key, the screen (section) corresponding to
the selected function can be selected.
1.2.1 General Screen Operations

- Procedure
1 By pressing a function key on the MDI panel, the chapter selection
soft keys that belong to the function are displayed.
Example 1)
Operation selection key
Chapter selection soft keys Continuous menu key
2 When one of the chapter selection soft keys is pressed, the screen
of the chapter is displayed. If the soft key of a desired chapter is not
displayed, press the continuous menu key.
In a chapter, a further choice may be made from multiple chapters.
3 When the screen of a desired chapter is displayed, press the

operation selection key to display operations to be performed.
4 Select a desired operation with the operation selection soft key.

Depending on the operation to be executed, an auxiliary menu of
soft keys is displayed. Perform an operation according to the
indications on the auxiliary menu.
Example 2)
Return menu key Operation selection soft keys

Example 3)
Auxiliary menu
5 To return to the display of chapter selection soft keys, press the

return menu key.
A general screen display procedure is provided above.

The actual display procedure varies from one screen to another.
For details, see each description of operation.
9
B-63947EN/01
Position display screen

The chapter selection soft keys that belong to the function key and
1
the function of each screen are described below.
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
ABS REL ALL HNDL (OPRT) +

Page 1
(6) (7) (8) (9) (10)
MONI 5AXMAN (OPRT) +

Page 2
Table 1.2.1 (a) Position display screen

Chapter
No. Description
menu
(1) ABS Selects the absolute coordinate display screen.
(2) REL Selects the relative coordinate display screen.
(3) ALL Selects the overall coordinate display screen.
(4) HNDL Selects the operation screen for manual handle operation.
(6) MONI Selects the screen for displaying the servo axis load meter,
serial spindle load meter, and speedometer.
(7) 5AXMAN Displays a handle pulse interrupt amount in 3-dimensional
manual feed.
Program screen
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
PROGRA FOLDER NEXT CHECK (OPRT) +

Page 1
M
(6) (7) (8) (9) (10)
RSTR JOG (OPRT) +

Page 2
Table 1.2.1 (b) Program

Chapter
No. Description
menu
(1) PROGRAM Selects the screen for displaying and editing of contents of
part programs currently registered.
(2) FOLDER Selects the screen for displaying a list of part programs
currently registered.
(3) NEXT Selects the screen for displaying the command values of
the block currently executed and the next block to be
executed among the command values.
(4) CHECK Selects the screen for displaying programs, position data,
modal information, and so forth simultaneously.
(6) RSTR Selects the operation screen for restarting an interrupted
program operation.
(7) JOG Selects the screen for executing, in the JOG mode, data
specified in the program format from the MDI.
10
Offset/setting screen
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
OFFSET SETTING WORK (OPRT) +

Page 1
(6) (7) (8) (9) (10)
MACRO OPR TOOL (OPRT) +

Page 2 MANAGER
(11) (12) (13) (14) (15)
OFST.2 W.SHFT GEOM.2 (OPRT) +

Page 3
(16) (17) (18) (19) (20)
PR-LV CHOP (OPRT) +

Page 4
(21) (22) (23) (24) (25)
CHUCK LANG. PROTECT GUARD (OPRT) +

Page 5 TAIL
Table 1.2.1 (c) Offset

Chapter
No. Description
menu
(1) OFFSET Selects the screen for setting tool offset values.
(2) SETTING Selects the screen for setting the setting parameters.
(3) WORK Selects the screen for setting a workpiece coordinate
system offset.
(6) MACRO Selects the screen for setting macro variables.
(8) OPR Selects the screen for operating some operation
switches on the machine operator's panel as soft
switches.
(9) TOOL Selects the screen for setting data related to tool
MANAGER management.
(11) OFST.2 Selects the screen for setting a Y-axis offset.
(12) W.SHFT Selects the screen for setting a workpiece coordinate
system shift value.
(13) GEOM.2 Selects the screen for setting a second geometry offset.
(17) PR-LV Selects the screen for setting a precision level.
(19) CHOP Selects the screen for setting a chopping.
(21) CHUCK Selects the chuck tail stock barrier screen.
TAIL
(22) LANG. Selects the screen for setting a display language.
(23) PROTECT Selects the screen for setting data protection.
(24) GUARD Selects the screen for setting wrong operation
prevention.
11
B-63947EN/01
System screen
1
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
PARAM DGNOS SERVO SYSTEM (OPRT) +

Page 1 GUIDEM
(6) (7) (8) (9) (10)
MEMORY PITCH SERVO SP.SET (OPRT) +

Page 2 PARAM
(11) (12) (13) (14) (15)

PMC PMC PMC (OPRT) +
Page 3 MAINTE LADDER CONFIG
(16) (17) (18) (19) (20)

MCNG ALL IO ALL IO OPEHIS (OPRT) +
Page 4 TUNING
(21) (22) (23) (24) (25)
COLOR MAINTE M-INFO W. DGNS (OPRT) +

Page 5
(26) (27) (28) (29) (30)
FSSB PRMTUN P.MATE (OPRT) +

Page 6 MGR.
(31) (32) (33) (34) (35)

EMBEDD PCMCIA ETHNET PROFI- (OPRT) +
Page 7 ED LAN BOARD BUS MST
(36) (37) (38) (39) (40)
M CODE 3D ERR (OPRT) ＋

Page 8 COMP
(41) (42) (43) (44) (45)
(OPRT) ＋
Page 9
(46) (47) (48) (49) (50)
DUAL R.TIME (OPRT) ＋

Page 10 CHECK MACRO
Table 1.2.1 (d) System

Chapter
No. Description
menu
(1) PARAM Selects the screen for setting parameters.
(2) DGNOS Selects the screen for displaying CNC state.
(3) SERVO Selects the screen for displaying the servo guide mate.
GUIDEM
(4) SYSTEM Selects the screen for displaying the current system
status.
(6) MEMORY Selects the screen for displaying the contents of
memory.
(7) PITCH Selects the screen for setting pith error compensation.
(8) SERVO Selects the screen for setting the servo-related
PARAM parameters.
(9) SP.SET Selects the screen for spindle-related setting.
(11) PMC Selects the screen related to PMC maintenance such as
MAINTE PMC signal state monitoring and tracing, and PMC
parameter display/editing.
12
Chapter
No. Description
menu
(12) PMC Selects the screen related to ladder display/editing.
LADDER
(13) PMC Displays the screen for displaying/editing data other
CONFIG than ladders that makes up a sequence program and for
setting the PMC function.
(16) MCNG Displays the screen for setting the parameter set for
TUNING emphasis on speed (LV1) or emphasis on precision
(LV10).
(17) ALL IO Selects the screen for data I/O.
(18) ALL IO Selects the screen for data input to and output from the
memory card.
(19) OPEHIS Selects the screen for displaying the history of
operations performed by the operator and issued
alarms.
(21) COLOR Selects the screen for setting colors to be used on the
screen.
(22) MAINTE Selects the screen for setting maintenance items to be
managed periodically.
(23) M-INFO Selects the screen for displaying information about
maintenance performed.
(24) W.DGNS Selects the screen for displaying data such as servo
positional deviation values, torque values, machine
signals, and so forth as graphs.
(27) FSSB Selects the screen for making settings related to the
high-speed serial servo bus (FSSB: Fanuc Serial Servo
Bus).
(28) PRMTUN Selects the screen for setting parameters necessary for
start-up and tuning.
(29) P.MATE Selects the screen for displaying Power Mate CNC
MGR. maneger.
(31) EMBEDD Selects the screen for making settings related to the
ED embedded Ethernet (embedded port).
(32) PCMCIA Selects the screen for making settings related to the
LAN embedded Ethernet (PCMCIA Ethernet card).
(33) ETHNET Selects the screen for making settings related to the fast
BOARD Ethernet/fast data server.
(34) PROFI-BUS Selects the screen for making settings related to the
MST profibus master function.
(37) M CODE Selects the screen for setting an M code group.
(39) PROFI Selects the screen for setting 3-dimensional error
SLAVE compensation data.
(46) DUAL Selects the screen for displaying dual check safety
CHECK diagnostic data.
(47) R.TIME Selects the screen for making settings related to the
MACRO real-time custom macro function.
13
B-63947EN/01
Message screen
1
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
ALARM MSG HISTRY MSGHIS (OPRT) +

Page 1
(6) (7) (8) (9) (10)

EMBED PCMCIA BOARD (OPRT) +
Page 2 LOG LOG LOG
Table 1.2.1 (e) Message

Chapter
No. Description
menu
(1) ALARM Selects the alarm message screen.
(2) MSG Selects the operator message screen.
(3) HISTRY Selects the screen for displaying the details of alarms
issued so far.
(4) MSGHIS Selects the external operator message screen.
(6) EMBED Selects the screen for displaying error messages related to
LOG the embedded Ethernet (embedded port).
(7) PCMCIA Selects the screen for displaying error messages related to
LOG the embedded Ethernet (PCMCIA Ethernet card).
(8) BOARD Selects the screen for displaying error messages related to
LOG the fast Ethernet/fast data server.
Graphic screen
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
PARAM GRAPH (OPRT) +

Page 1
Table 1.2.1 (f) Graphic

Chapter
No. Description
menu
(1) PARAM Selects the screen for setting graphic parameters.
(2) GRAPH Selects the screen for graphically displaying the tool path.
14
Press function key to display the current position of the tool.

The following three screens are used to display the current position of
the tool:
• Current position display screen for the workpiece coordinate
system.
• Current position display screen for the relative coordinate system.
• Current overall position display screen.
The above screens can also display the feedrate, run time, and the
number of parts. In addition, a floating reference position can be set on
these screens.
Function key can also be used to display the load on the servo
motor and spindle motor and the rotation speed of the spindle motor
(operating monitor display).
Function key can also be used to display the screen for displaying
the distance moved by handle interruption. See Subsection 1.3.4,
“Handle Interrupt Display” for details on this screen.
1.3.1 Position Display in the Workpiece Coordinate

System
Displays the current position of the tool in the workpiece coordinate
system. The current position changes as the tool moves. The least input
increment is used as the unit for numeric values. The title at the top of
the screen indicates that absolute coordinates are used.
Display procedure for the current position screen in the workpiece coordinate
Procedure
1 Press function key .
2 Press soft key [ABS].
Fig. 1.3.1 (a) Current position (absolute) screen (M series)
15
B-63947EN/01
Fig. 1.3.1 (b) Current position (absolute) screen (T series)
Explanation
- Display including compensation values
M
Parameters DAL, DAC (No. 3104#6, #7) can be used to select whether
the displayed values include tool length compensation and tool radius
compensation.
T
Parameters DAP (No. 3129#1), DAC (No.3104#7) can be used to select

whether the displayed values include tool offset and tool nose radius
compensation.
16
1.3.2 Position Display in the Relative Coordinate
System
Displays the current position of the tool in a relative coordinate system
based on the coordinates (see Explanation) set by the operator. The
current position changes as the tool moves. The increment system is
used as the unit for numeric values.
The title at the top of the screen indicates that relative coordinates are
used.
Display procedure for the current position screen with the relative coordinate
system
Procedure
2 Press soft key [REL].
Fig. 1.3.2 (a) Current position (relative) screen (M series)
Fig. 1.3.2 (b) Current position (relative) screen (T series)
See Explanation for the procedure for setting the coordinates.
Explanation
- Setting the relative coordinates
The current position of the tool in the relative coordinate system can be
reset to 0 or preset to a specified value as follows:
17
B-63947EN/01
Procedure to set the axis coordinate to a specified value

Procedure
1
1 To reset the coordinate to 0, press soft key [ORIGIN].
Key in an axis name to be reset (such as X or Y), then press soft key
[EXEC].
2 For presetting to a specified value, key in an axis name to be preset
and a preset value (such as X100.000), then press soft key
[PRESET].
- Display including compensation values

M
Parameters DRL, DRC (No. 3104#4, #5) can be used to select whether
the displayed values include tool length compensation and tool radius
compensation.
Parameters DRP (No.3129#0), DRC (No.3104#5) can be used to select

whether the displayed values include tool offset and tool nose radius
compensation.
- Presetting by setting a coordinate system

M
Parameter PPD (No. 3104#3) can be used to specify whether the

position indication values in the absolute coordinate system are preset
as those in the relative coordinate system during coordinate system
setting or manual reference position return by the G92 command.
Parameter PPD (No. 3104#3) can be used to specify whether the

position indication values in the absolute coordinate system are preset
as those in the relative coordinate system during coordinate system
setting or manual reference position return by the G50 command (for G
code system A) or G92 command (for G code system B or C).
18
1.3.3 Overall Position Display
Displays the following positions on a screen: Current positions of the tool
in the workpiece coordinate system, relative coordinate system, and
machine coordinate system, and the remaining distance. The relative
coordinates can also be set on this screen. See Subsection 1.3.2,
“Position Display in the Relative Coordinate System” for the procedure.
Procedure for displaying overall position display screen
Procedure
2 Press soft key [ALL].
Fig. 1.3.3 (a) Current position (overall) screen (M series)
Fig. 1.3.3 (b) Current position (overall) screen (T series)
Explanation
- Coordinate display
The current positions of the tool in the following coordinate systems are
displayed at the same time:
• Current position in the relative coordinate system (relative coordinate)
• Current position in the workpiece coordinate system (absolute
coordinate)
• Current position in the machine coordinate system (machine
coordinate)
• Distance to go (distance to go)
19
B-63947EN/01
- Distance to go
The distance remaining is displayed in the MEMORY or MDI mode. The
distance the tool is yet to be moved in the current block is displayed. 1
- Machine coordinate system
The least command increment is used as the unit for values displayed in
the machine coordinate system. However, the least input increment can
be used by setting parameter MCN (No. 3104#0).
- Resetting the relative coordinates
The total position display screen also supports the resetting of the
relative coordinates to 0 or presetting of them to specified values. See
the procedure for resetting the relative coordinates described in
Subsection 1.3.2, “Position Display in the Relative Coordinate System”.
1.3.4 Handle Interrupt Display

Displays the distance traveled due to a handle interrupt.
The distance is displayed as four types of data, input unit, output unit,
relative coordinates, and remaining distance to go, at the same time.
Procedure for displaying manual handle interruption screen
Procedure
2 Press soft key [HANDLE].
Fig. 1.3.4 (a) Manual handle interruption screen
Explanation
- Data to be displayed
The following types of data are displayed at the same time:
• Distance traveled due to a handle interrupt in input units (input unit)
• Distance traveled due to a handle interrupt in output units (output unit)
• Position in relative coordinates (relative coordinates)
• Remaining distance to go in the current block (remaining distance to
go)
- Input unit
The distance traveled due to a handle interrupt is displayed in the least
input increment.
- Output unit
The distance traveled due to a handle interrupt is displayed in the least
command increment.
- Relative coordinates
Not related to the distance traveled due to a handle interrupt.
- Distance to go
Not related to the distance traveled due to a handle interrupt.
The distance traveled due to a handle interrupt is cleared upon
completion of the manual reference position return for each axis.
20
- Display for five or more axes
The display on a system with five or more axes is the same as the overall
position display.
1.3.5 Operating Monitor Display

The reading on the load meter can be displayed for each servo axis and
the serial spindle by setting parameter OPM (No. 3111#5) to 1. The
reading on the speedometer can also be displayed for the serial spindle.
Procedure for displaying the operating monitor
Procedure
2 Press the continuous menu key .
3 Press soft key [MONITOR].
Fig. 1.3.5 (a) Operating monitor (M series)
Fig. 1.3.5 (b) Operating monitor (T series)
Explanation
- Display of the servo axes
Servo axis load meters as many as the maximum number of controlled
axes of the path can be displayed. One screen displays load meters for
up to five axes at a time. By pressing the [MONITOR] soft key, load
meters for the 6th axis and up are displayed.
21
B-63947EN/01
- Display of the spindle axes

When serial spindles are used, the reading on the load meter and
speedometer can be displayed only for the main serial spindle. 1
- Unit of graph
The bar graph for the load meter shows load up to 200% (only a value is
displayed for load exceeding 200%). The bar graph for the speedometer
shows the ratio of the current spindle speed to the maximum spindle
speed (100%).
- Load meter
The reading on the load meter depends on servo parameter (No. 2086)
and spindle parameter (No. 4127).
- Speedometer
Although the speedometer normally indicates the speed of the spindle
motor, it can also be used to indicate the speed of the spindle by setting
parameter OPS (No. 3111#6) to 1.
The spindle speed to be displayed during operation monitoring is
calculated from the speed of the spindle motor (see the formula below).
The spindle speed can therefore be displayed, during operation
monitoring, even when no position coder is used. To display the correct
spindle speed, however, the maximum spindle speed for each gear
(spindle speed at each gear ratio when the spindle motor rotates at the
maximum speed) must be set in parameters (No. 3741 to No.3744).
The input of the clutch and gear signals for the first serial spindle is used
to determine the gear which is currently selected. Control the input of the
CTH1A and CTH2A signals according to the gear selection, by referring
to the table below.
(Formula for calculating the spindle speed to be displayed)
Spindle speed Speed of spindle motor Maximum spindle
displayed during = Maximum speed of × speed with the
operation monitoring spindle motor gear being used
The following table lists the correspondence between clutch and gear
selection signals CTH1A and CTH2A, used to determine the gear being
used, and parameters:
Serial spindle
CTH1A CTH2A Parameter
specification
=No.3741 (Maximum spindle speed with
0 0 HIGH
gear 1)
0 1 MEDIUM HIGH
gear 2)
1 0 MEDIUM LOW
gear 3)
1 1 LOW
gear 4)
The speed of the spindle motor and spindle can be displayed, during
operation monitoring, only for the first serial spindle and the spindle
switching axis for the first serial spindle. It cannot be displayed for the
second spindle.
- Color of graph
If the value of a load meter exceeds 100%, the bar graph turns purple on
a color LCD.
22
(MEMORY MODE)
This section describes the screens displayed by pressing function key
. The screens include a program editing screen, program folder list
display screen, and screens for displaying the command states of the
program currently being executed.
1. Program screen
2. Program folder screen
3. Next block display screen
4. Program check screen
On the program screen, you edit the program that is currently selected,
and display the block that is currently executed during program operation.
In MDI mode, you also edit an MDI operation program, and display the
block that is currently executed.
1.4.1 Program Contents Display

Displays the program currently being executed in MEMORY mode.
Displaying the program being executed
Procedure
1 Press function key to display the program screen.
2 Press chapter selection soft key [PROGRAM].
The cursor is positioned at the block currently being executed.
Fig. 1.4.1 (a) Screen for displaying the program being executed
23
B-63947EN/01
1.4.2 Program Check Screen

Displays the program currently being executed, current position of the
tool, and modal data. 1
Procedure for displaying the program check screen
Procedure
2 Press chapter selection soft key [CHECK].
The program currently being executed, current position of the tool,
and modal data are displayed.
Fig. 1.4.2 (a) Program check screen
Explanation
- Program display
The program currently being executed is displayed.
The block being executed is displayed in reverse video.
- Current position display
The current position in the relative coordinate system, workpiece
coordinate system, and machine coordinate system, and the remaining
amount of travel are displayed.
- Modal G codes
Up to 24 modal G codes are displayed.
24
1.4.3 Next Block Display Screen
Displays the block currently being executed and the block to be executed
next.
Procedure for displaying the next block display screen
Procedure
2 Press chapter selection soft key [NEXT].
The G codes, addresses, command values specified in the block
currently being executed and the next block are displayed.
Fig. 1.4.3 (a) Next block display screen
25
B-63947EN/01

(EDIT MODE) 1
This section describes the screens displayed by pressing function key
. The screens include a program editing screen, program folder list
display screen, and screens for displaying the command states of the
program currently being executed.
1. Program screen
2. Program folder screen
3. Next block display screen
4. Program check screen
On the program screen, you edit the program that is currently selected,
and display the block that is currently executed during program operation.
In MDI mode, you also edit an MDI operation program, and display the
block that is currently executed.
1.5.1 Editing a Program

A program can be edited in the EDIT mode.
Two modes of editing are available. One mode is word editing, which
performs word-by-word editing. The other is character editing, which
performs character-by-character editing. For program creation and
editing operation, see Chapter III-9, "Creating Programs" and Chapter
III-10, "Editing Programs" in the User’s Manual (Common to Lathe
System/Machining Center System)”.
Displaying the program editing screen
Procedure
- Word editing
Editing operations such as text insertion, modification, and deletion, and
cursor movements are performed on a word-by-word basis.
Fig. 1.5.1 (a) Program word editing screen
26
- Character editing
Program editing operations and cursor movements are performed on a
character-by-character basis as with a general text editor.
Text is input directly to the cursor position instead of using the key input
buffer.
Fig. 1.5.1 (b) Program character editing screen
Switching between program editing modes

You can switch between word editing and character editing with soft
keys.
Procedure
3 Press operation soft key [(OPRT)].
4 Pressing the [CHANGE EDITOR] operation soft key switches the
editing mode between word editing and character editing.
27
B-63947EN/01
1.5.2 Program Folder Screen

A list of programs registered in the program memory is displayed.
For the program folder screen, see Chapter III-11, "Program 1
Management" in the User’s Manual (Common to Lathe
System/Machining Center System)”.
Displaying the program folder screen
Procedure
2 Press chapter selection soft key [FOLDER].
Fig. 1.5.2 (a) Program folder screen
28
Press function key to display or set tool compensation values and

other data.
This section describes how to display or set the following data:
1. Tool compensation value
2. Settings
3. Sequence number comparison and stop
4. Run time and part count
4. Workpiece origin offset value
5. Custom macro common variables
7. Software operator's panel
8. Tool management data
9. Display language switching
10. Protection of data at eight levels
11. Precision level selection
The software operator's panel, display language switching, and precision
level selection depend on the specifications of the machine tool builder.
See the manual issued by the machine tool builder for details.
1.6.1 Setting and Displaying the Tool Offset Value

Dedicated screens are provided for displaying and setting tool offset
values and tool nose radius compensation values.
Setting and displaying the tool offset value and the tool nose radius
compensation value
Procedure
When using a multi-path system, select, in advance, a path for
which a tool offset value is to be set, by using the path selection
switch.
2 Press chapter selection soft key [OFFSET] or press function key
several times until the tool compensation screen is displayed.
Different screens are displayed depending on whether tool
geometry offset, wear offset, or neither is applied.
Fig. 1.6.1 (a) Without tool geometry/wear offset
29
B-63947EN/01
Fig. 1.6.1 (b) With tool geometry offset
Fig. 1.6.1 (c) With tool wear offset
3 Move the cursor to the compensation value to be set or changed

using page keys and cursor keys, or enter the compensation
number for the compensation value to be set or changed and press
soft key [NO.SRH].
4 To set a compensation value, enter a value and press soft key
[INPUT]. To change the compensation value, enter a value to add to
the current value (a negative value to reduce the current value) and
press soft key [+INPUT].
TIP is the number of the imaginary tool nose.

TIP may be specified on the geometry compensation screen or on
the wear compensation screen.
30
Explanation
- Decimal point input
A decimal point can be used when entering a compensation value.
- Other method
An external input/output device can be used to input or output a tool
radius compensation value. See Chapter III-8 “Data Input/Output” in the
User’s Manual (Common to Lathe System/Machining Center System).
Tool length compensation values can be set using the following
functions described in subsequent subsections: direct input of tool offset
value measured, direct input of tool offset value measured B, and
counter input of offset value.
- Number of tool compensation values
16 groups are provided for tool compensation. The number of groups
can be optionally extended to 32, 64, or 999. For the multi-path control,
the above number of groups can be used for each path. Tool geometry
compensation or wear compensation can be selected for each group.
- Disabling entry of compensation values
In some cases, tool wear compensation or tool geometry compensation
values cannot be input because of the settings in parameters WOF, GOF
(No. 3290#0, #1). The input of tool compensation values from the MDI
can be inhibited for a specified range of offset numbers. The first offset
number for which the input of a value is inhibited is set in parameter (No.
3294). The number of offset numbers, starting from the specified first
number, for which the input of a value is inhibited is set in parameter (No.
3295).
Consecutive input values are set as follows:
1) When values are input for offset numbers, starting from one for
which input is not inhibited to one for which input is inhibited, a
warning is issued and values are set only for those offset numbers
for which input is not inhibited.
2) When values are input for offset numbers, starting from one for
which input is inhibited to one for which input is not inhibited, a
warning is issued and no values are set.
- Displaying radius and TIP
The radius and TIP are not displayed if the tool nose radius
compensation option is not displayed.
- Changing offset values during automatic operation
When offset values have been changed during automatic operation, bit 4
(LGT) and bit 6 (LWM) of parameter 5002 can be used for specifying
whether new offset values become valid in the next move command or in
the next T code command.
Fig. 1.6.1 (a)
When geometry When geometry compensation
compensation values and values and wear compensation
LGT LWM
wear compensation values values are not separately
are separately specified specified
Become valid in the next T Become valid in the next T code
0 0
code block block
Become valid in the next T Become valid in the next T code
1 0
code block block
Become valid in the next T Become valid in the next move
0 1
code block command
Become valid in the next Become valid in the next move
1 1
move command command
31
B-63947EN/01
1.6.2 Displaying and Entering Setting Data

Data such as the TV check flag and punch code is set on the setting data
screen. On this screen, the operator can also enable/disable parameter 1
writing, enable/disable the automatic insertion of sequence numbers in
program editing, and perform settings for the sequence number
comparison and stop function.
See Section III-9.2, “Automatic Insertion of Sequence Numbers” in the
User’s Manual (Common to Lathe System/Machining Center System) for
automatic insertion of sequence numbers.
See Subsection III-12.3.2, “Sequence Number Comparison and Stop” in
the User’s Manual (Common to Lathe System/Machining Center
System) for the sequence number comparison and stop function. This
subsection describes how to set data.
Procedure for setting the setting data
Procedure
1 Select the MDI mode.
3 Press soft key [SETTING] to display the setting data screen.
This screen consists of several pages.
Press page key or until the desired screen is displayed.
An example of the setting data screen is shown below.
32
4 Move the cursor to the item to be changed by pressing cursor keys
.
5 Enter a new value and press soft key [INPUT].
Explanation
- PARAMETER WRITE
Setting whether parameter writing is enabled or disabled.
0 : Disabled
1 : Enabled
- TV CHECK
Setting to perform TV check.
0 : No TV check
1 : Perform TV check
- PUNCH CODE
Setting code when data is output through reader/puncher interface.
0 : EIA code output
1 : ISO code output
- INPUT UNIT
Setting a program input unit, inch or metric system
0 : Metric
1 : Inch
- I/O CHANNEL
Using channel of reader/puncher interface.
0 : Channel 0
1 : Channel 1
2 : Channel 2
- SEQUENCE NO.
Setting of whether to perform automatic insertion of the sequence
number or not at program edit in the EDIT mode.
0 : Does not perform automatic sequence number insertion.
1 : Perform automatic sequence number insertion.
- PROGRAM FORMAT
Setting of whether to use the Series 15 format.
0: Uses the standard format.
1: Uses the Series 15 format.
For the Series 15 format, refer to Chapter II-6, “Memory Operation by
Series 15 Format” in the User's Manual (Lathe System) or Chapter II-7,
“Memory Operation by Series 15 Format” in the User's Manual
(Machining Center System).
- SEQUENCE STOP
Setting the sequence number with which the operation stops for the
sequence number comparison and stop function and the number of the
program to which the sequence number belongs
- MIRROR IMAGE
Setting of mirror image ON/OFF for each axis.
0 : Mirror image off
1 : Mirror image on
- Others
Page key or can also be pressed to display the SETTING
(TIMER) screen. See Subsection 12.3.3, “Displaying and Setting Run
Time, Parts Count, and Time” in the User's Manual (Machining Center
System) for this screen.
33
B-63947EN/01
1.6.3 Displaying and Setting the Workpiece Origin

Offset Value
1
Displays the workpiece origin offset for each workpiece coordinate
system (G54 to G59, G54.1 P1 to G54.1 P48 and G54.1 P1 to G54.1
P300) and external workpiece origin offset. The workpiece origin offset
and external workpiece origin offset can be set on this screen.
Procedure for displaying and setting the workpiece origin offset value
Procedure
2 Press chapter selection soft key [WORK].
The workpiece coordinate system setting screen is displayed.
3 The screen for displaying the workpiece origin offset values consists
of two or more pages. Display a desired page in either of the
following two ways:
• Press the page key or .
• Enter the workpiece coordinate system number (0 : external
workpiece origin offset, 1 to 6: workpiece coordinate systems
G54 to G59, P1 to P48 : workpiece coordinate systems G54.1
P1 to G54.1 P48, P1 to P300 : workpiece coordinate systems
G54.1 P1 to G54.1 P300) and press operation selection soft
key [NO.SRH].
4 Turn off the data protection key to enable writing.
5 Move the cursor to the workpiece origin offset to be changed.
6 Enter a desired value by pressing numeric keys, then press soft key
[INPUT]. The entered value is specified in the workpiece origin
offset value. Or, by entering a desired value with numeric keys and
pressing soft key [+INPUT], the entered value can be added to the
previous offset value.
7 Repeat 5 and 6 to change other offset values.
8 Turn on the data protection key to disable writing.
34
1.6.4 Direct Input of Workpiece Origin Offset Value
Measured
This function is used to compensate for the difference between the
programmed workpiece coordinate system and the actual workpiece
coordinate system. The measured offset for the origin of the workpiece
coordinate system can be input on the screen such that the command
values match the actual dimensions.
Selecting the new coordinate system matches the programmed
coordinate system with the actual coordinate system.
Procedure for direct input of workpiece origin offset value measured
Procedure
Y y
Surface A
Programmed workpiece
origin α
Surface B
O'
X
New offset
x
O β
Origin
Previous offset
1 When the workpiece is shaped as shown above, position the

reference tool manually until it touches surface A of the workpiece.
2 Retract the tool without changing the Y coordinate.
3 Measure distance α between surface A and the programmed origin
of the workpiece coordinate system as shown above.
5 To display the workpiece origin offset setting screen, press the
chapter selection soft key [WORK].
6 Position the cursor to the workpiece origin offset value to be set.

7 Press the address key for the axis along which the offset is to be set
(Y-axis in this example).
8 Enter the measured value (α) then press the [MEASUR] soft key.
9 Move the reference tool manually until it touches surface B of the
workpiece.
10 Retract the tool without changing the X coordinate.
11 Enter the measured value of distance (β) to surface B as an X value
as with steps 7 and 8.
35
B-63947EN/01
Limitation
- Consecutive input
Offsets for two or more axes cannot be input at the same time. 1
- During program execution
This function cannot be used while a program is being executed.
1.6.5 Displaying and Setting Custom Macro Common

Variables
Displays common variables (#100 to #149 or #100 to #199, and #500 to
#531 or #500 to #999) on the screen. The values for variables can be set
on this screen. Relative coordinates can also be set to variables.
Procedure for displaying and setting custom macro common variables
Procedure
2 Press the continuous menu key , then press chapter selection
soft key [MACRO]. The following screen is displayed.
3 Move the cursor to the variable number to set using either of the
following methods:
• Enter the variable number and press soft key [NO.SRH].
• Move the cursor to the variable number to set by pressing page
keys and/or and cursor keys , , ,
and/or .
4 Enter data with numeric keys and press soft key [INPUT].
5 To set a relative coordinate in a variable, press address key ,
, or , then press soft key [INP.C.].

6 To set a blank in a variable, just press soft key [INPUT]. The value
field for the variable becomes blank.
Explanation
If the value of a variable produced by an operation is not displayable, an
indication below is provided.
When the significant number of digits is 12 (with parameter F16 (No.
6008#0) set to 0):
Variable value range Variable value indication
0 < Variable value < +0.00000000001 +Underflow
0 > Variable value > -0.00000000001 -Underflow
Variable value > 999999999999 +Overflow
Variable value < -999999999999 -Overflow
36
When the significant number of digits is 8 (with parameter F16 (No.
6008#0) set to 1):
Variable value range Variable value indication
0 < Variable value < +0.0000001 +Underflow
0 > Variable value > -0.0000001 -Underflow
Variable value > 99999999 +Overflow
Variable value < -99999999 -Overflow
1.6.6 Displaying and Setting the Software Operator's

Panel
Operations on the MDI panel can substitute for the functions of switches
on the machine operator's panel. This means that a mode selection, jog
feed override selection, and so forth can be made with operations on the
MDI panel, eliminating the need to use the corresponding switches on
the machine operator's panel.
Jog feed can be performed using numeric keys.
Procedure for displaying and setting the software operator's panel
Procedure

soft key [OPR].
3 The screen consists of several pages. Press page key or
until the desired screen is displayed.
Fig. 1.6.6 (a) Without the manual handle feed function
37
B-63947EN/01
Fig. 1.6.6 (b) With the manual handle feed function
Fig. 1.6.6 (c)
4 Move the cursor to the desired switch by pressing cursor key
or .
5 Push the cursor key or to match the mark to an

arbitrary position and set the desired condition.
6 Press one of the following arrow keys to perform jog feed. Press the
key together with an arrow key to perform jog rapid traverse.
Fig. 1.6.6 (d) MDI arrow keys
38
Explanation
- Valid operations
The valid operations on the software operator's panel are shown below.
Whether to use each group can be chosen using parameter No. 7200.
Those groups that are not used are not displayed on the software
operator's panel.
Group 1 : Mode selection
Group 2 : Selection of jog feed axis, Manual rapid traverse
Group 3 : Selection of manual pulse generator feed axis, selection of
manual pulse magnification
Group 4 : Jog federate, federate override, rapid traverse override
Group 5 : Optional block skip, single block, machine lock, dry run
Group 6 : Protect key
Group 7 : Feed hold
- Screens on which jog feed is valid
When the LCD indicates other than the software operator's panel screen
and self-diagnosis screen, jog feed is not conducted even if the arrow
key is pushed.
- Jog feed and arrow keys
The feed axis and direction corresponding to the arrow keys can be set
with parameters (Nos. 7210 to 7217).
- General purpose switches
For the meanings of these switches, refer to the manual issued by
1.6.7 Character-to-Codes Correspondence Table

Character Code Comment Character Code Comment
A 065 6 054
B 066 7 055
C 067 8 056
D 068 9 057
E 069 032 Space
F 070 ! 033 Exclamation mark
G 071 ” 034 Quotation mark
H 072 # 035 Sharp
I 073 $ 036 Dollar sign
J 074 % 037 Percent
K 075 & 038 Ampersand
L 076 ’ 039 Apostrophe
M 077 ( 040 Left parenthesis
N 078 ) 041 Right parenthesis
O 079 * 042 Asterisk
P 080 + 043 Plus sign
Q 081 , 044 Comma
R 082 - 045 Minus sign
S 083 . 046 Period
T 084 / 047 Slash
U 085 : 058 Colon
V 086 ; 059 Semicolon
W 087 < 060 Left angle bracket
X 088 = 061 Equal sign
Y 089 > 062 Right angle bracket
Z 090 ? 063 Question mark
0 048 @ 064 At mark
1 049 [ 091 Left square bracket
2 050 ] 093 Right square bracket
3 051 ^ 094
4 052 _ 095 Underscore
5 053
39
B-63947EN/01

1
When the CNC and machine are connected, parameters must be set to
determine the specifications and functions of the machine in order to fully
utilize the characteristics of the servo motor or other parts.
This chapter describes how to set parameters on the MDI panel.
Parameters can also be set with external input/output devices such as
the memory card (see Chapter III-8, “Data Input/Output” in the User’s
Manual (Common to Lathe System/Machining Center System)).
In addition, pitch error compensation data used for improving the
precision in positioning with the ball screw on the machine can be set or
displayed by the operations under function key .
See Chapter III-7, “Alarm and Self-diagnosis Functions” in the User’s
Manual (Common to Lathe System/Machining Center System) for the
diagnosis screens displayed by pressing function key .
1.7.1 Displaying and Setting Parameters

When the CNC and machine are connected, parameters are set to
determine the specifications and functions of the machine in order to fully
utilize the characteristics of the servo motor. The setting of parameters
depends on the machine. Refer to the parameter list prepared by the
Normally, the user need not change parameter setting.
Procedure for displaying and setting parameters
Procedure
1 Set 1 (ENABLE) for PARAMETER WRITE to enable writing. See the
procedure for enabling/disabling parameter writing described below.
3 Press chapter selection soft key [PARAM] to display the parameter
screen.
Fig. 1.7.1 (a)
4 Move the cursor to the parameter number to be set or displayed in

either of the following ways:
• Enter the parameter number and press soft key [NO.SRH] .
• Move the cursor to the parameter number using the page keys,
and , and cursor keys, , , , and
40
5 To set the parameter, enter a new value with numeric keys and
press soft key [INPUT]. The parameter is set to the entered value
and the value is displayed.
6 Set 0 (DISABLE) for PARAMETER WRITE to disable writing.
1.7.2 Checking by Self-Diagnosis Screen

The system may sometimes seem to be at a halt, although no alarm has
occurred. In this case, the system may be performing some processing.
The state of the system can be checked by displaying the self-diagnosis
screen.
Checking by self-diagnosis screen
Procedure
2 Press the chapter selection soft key [DGNOS].
3 The diagnosis screen has more than 1 page. Select the screen by
the following operation.
(1) Change the page by the page keys and .
(2) Method by soft key
• Key input the number of the diagnosis data to be
displayed.
• Press soft key [NO.SRH].
Fig. 1.7 (a) Self-diagnosis screen
41
B-63947EN/01
1.7.3 Coordinate System on Part Drawing and

Coordinate System Specified by CNC -
1
Coordinate System
• For milling machining
Z
Z
Y Program Y
X X
Coordinate system
Part drawing CNC
Tool
Command
Tool
Z
Y
Workpiece
X
Machine tool
• For lathe cutting
X X
Program
Z
Z
Coordinate system
Part drawing CNC
Command
Workpiece
Machine tool
Fig. 1.7.3 (a) Coordinate system
42
Explanation
- Coordinate system
The following two coordinate systems are specified at different locations:
(See Chapter II-7, “Coordinate System” in the User’s Manual (Common
to Lathe System/Machining Center System).)
1 Coordinate system on part drawing
The coordinate system is written on the part drawing. As the
program data, the coordinate values on this coordinate system are
used.
2 Coordinate system specified by the CNC
The coordinate system is prepared on the actual machine tool table.
This can be achieved by programming the distance from the current
position of the tool to the zero point of the coordinate system to be
set.
Y
230 Present tool position
300 Distance to the zero point of a

coordinate system to be set
Program
origin X
X
Fig. 1.7.3 (b) Coordinate system specified by the CNC
Concrete programming methods for setting coordinate systems specified

by the CNC are explained in II-7, "Coordinate System" in the User’s
Manual (Common to Lathe System/Machining Center System).
The positional relation between these two coordinate systems is
determined when a workpiece is set on the table.
• For milling machining
Coordinate system on part drawing
estab lished on the workpiece
Coordinate system specified by the
CNC established on the table
Y Y
Workpiece
X
Table
• For lathe cutting

Coordinate system specified by
Coordinate system on part drawing
the CNC established on the chuck
established on the workpiece
X X
Workpiece
Z Z
Chuck
Fig. 1.7.3 (c) Coordinate system specified by CNC and coordinate system on
part drawing
43
B-63947EN/01
The tool moves on the coordinate system specified by the CNC in

accordance with the command program generated with respect to the
coordinate system on the part drawing, and cuts a workpiece into a 1
shape on the drawing.
Therefore, in order to correctly cut the workpiece as specified on the
drawing, the two coordinate systems must be set at the same position.
- Methods of setting the two coordinate systems in the same

position
M
To set the two coordinate systems at the same position, simple methods
shall be used according to workpiece shape, the number of machinings.
1. Using a standard plane and point of the workpiece.

Y
Workpiece's
Fixed distance standard point
Fixed distance
Program
origin
X
Bring the tool center to the workpiece standard point.
And set the coordinate system specified by CNC at this position.
2. Mounting a workpiece directly against the jig
Program origin
Jig
Meet the tool center to the reference position. And set the coordinate
system specified by CNC at this position. (Jig shall be mounted on the
predetermined point from the reference position.)
3. Mounting a workpiece on a pallet, then mounting the workpiece and

pallet on the jig
Pallet
Jig
Workpiece
(Jig and coordinate system shall be specified by the same as (2)).
44
T
The following method is usually used to define two coordinate systems at

the same location.
1 When coordinate zero point is set at chuck face

- Coordinates and X
dimensions on part drawing
Workpiece
Z
60 40
40
150
- Coordinate system on
lathe as specified by CNC
X
Chuck
Workpiece
Program origin Z
When the coordinate system on the part drawing and the coordinate
system specified by the CNC are set at the same position, the
program origin can be set on the chuck face.
2 When coordinate zero point is set at workpiece end face.

- Coordinates and X
dimensions on part drawing
60 Workpiece 30
Z
30
80
100
- Coordinate system on
lathe as specified by CNC
Chuck X
Workpiece
Z
Program origin
When the coordinate system on the part drawing and the coordinate
system specified by the CNC are set at the same position, the
program origin can be set on the end face of the workpiece.
45
B-63947EN/01
1.7.4 Displaying and Setting Pitch Error

Compensation Data
1
If pitch error compensation data is specified, pitch errors of each axis
can be compensated in detection unit per axis.
Pitch error compensation data is set for each compensation point at the
intervals specified for each axis. The origin of compensation is the
reference position to which the tool is returned.
The pitch error compensation data is set according to the characteristics
of the machine connected to the NC. The content of this data varies
according to the machine model. If it is changed, the machine accuracy
is reduced.
In principle, the end user must not alter this data.
Pitch error compensation data can be set with external devices such as
the memory card (see Chapter III-8, “Data Input/Output” in the User’s
Manual (Common to Lathe System/Machining Center System)).
Compensation data can also be written directly with the MDI panel.
The following parameters must be set for pitch error compensation. Set
the pitch error compensation value for each pitch error compensation
point number set by these parameters.
In the following example, 33 is set for the pitch error compensation point
at the reference position.
Pitch error compensation value (absolute value)
Compensation number
Compensation number parameter for the
parameter for the reference 3
compensation point having
position (No. 3620) the largest value (No. 3622)
2
31 32 33 34 35 36 37
Reference
position
-1
Compensation magnification
parameter (No. 3623)
-2
Compensation number parameter for Compensation interval
the compensation point having the parameter (No. 3624)
smallest value (No. 3621)
Compensation position 31 32 33 34 35 36 37
number
Compensation value to be set -3 +1 +1 +1 +2 -1 -3
• Number of the pitch error compensation point at the reference

position (for each axis): Parameter No. 3620
• Number of the pitch error compensation point having the smallest
value (for each axis): Parameter No. 3621
• Number of the pitch error compensation point having the largest
value (for each axis): Parameter No. 3622
• Pitch error compensation magnification (for each axis): Parameter
No. 3623
• Interval of the pitch error compensation points (for each axis):
Parameter No. 3624
• Travel distance per revolution of pitch error compensation of the
rotary axis type (for each axis): Parameter No. 3625
46
- Bi-directional pitch error compensation
The bi-directional pitch error compensation function allows independent
pitch error compensation in different travel directions. (When the
movement is reversed, compensation is automatically carried out as in a
backlash.)
To use this function, specify pitch error compensation for each travel
direction, that is, separately for the positive and negative directions of a
movement.
When using bi-directional pitch error compensation (setting the
parameter BDP (No. 3605#0) to 1), specify the following parameters in
addition to the pitch error compensation parameter.
• Number of the pitch error compensation point at the negative end
(for travel in the positive direction, for each axis): Parameter No.
3621
• Number of the pitch error compensation point at the positive end (for
travel in the positive direction, for each axis): Parameter No. 3622
• Number of the pitch error compensation point at the negative end
(for travel in the negative direction, for each axis): Parameter 3626
• Pitch error compensation in the reference position when moving to
the reference position from opposite to the reference position return
direction (for each axis): Parameter No. 3627
Procedure for displaying and setting the pitch error compensation data
Procedure
1 Set the following parameters:
• Number of the pitch error compensation point at the reference
position (for each axis): Parameter No. 3620
• Number of the pitch error compensation point having the
smallest value (for each axis): Parameter No. 3621
• Number of the pitch error compensation point having the
largest value (for each axis): Parameter No. 3622
• Pitch error compensation magnification (for each axis):
Parameter No. 3623
• Interval of the pitch error compensation points (for each axis):
Parameter No. 3624
• Travel distance per revolution of pitch error compensation of
the rotary axis type (for each axis): Parameter No. 3625
When using bi-directional pitch error compensation (setting the
parameter BDP (No. 3605#0) to 1), specify the following parameters
in addition to the pitch error compensation parameter.
• Number of the pitch error compensation point at the negative
end (for travel in the positive direction, for each axis):
Parameter No. 3621
• Number of the pitch error compensation point at the positive
end (for travel in the positive direction, for each axis):
Parameter No. 3622
• Number of the pitch error compensation point at the negative
end (for travel in the negative direction, for each axis):
Parameter No. 3626
• Pitch error compensation in the reference position when
moving to the reference position from opposite to the reference
position return direction (for each axis): Parameter No. 3627
47
B-63947EN/01

soft key [PITCH].
The following screen is displayed: 1
4 Move the cursor to the compensation point number to be set in

either of the following ways:
• Enter the compensation point number and press the [NO.SRH]
soft key.
• Move the cursor to the compensation point number using the
page keys, and , and cursor keys, , ,
, and .
5 Enter a value with numeric keys and press the [INPUT] soft key.
48
By pressing the function key , data such as alarms, and alarm

history data can be displayed.
For information relating to alarm display, see Section III-7.1, “Alarm
Display” in the User’s Manual (Common to Lathe System/Machining
Center System). For information relating to alarm history display, see
Section III-7.2, “Alarm History Display” in the User’s Manual (Common to
Lathe System/Machining Center System).
1.8.1 Alarm Display

Explanation
- Alarm screen
When an alarm is issued, the display changes to the alarm screen. Two
alarm screens "DETAIL" and "ALL PATH" are provided. You can choose
one of the screens by pressing the corresponding soft key.
• Detail screen
Alarm information for the currently selected path is displayed.
Fig. 1.8 (a) Alarm detail screen
• All path screen

Alarm information for all paths is displayed sequentially from path 1.
Fig. 1.8 (b) All path screen
49
B-63947EN/01
- Displaying an alarm screen

ALM is sometimes indicated in the bottom part of the screen display 1
without displaying an alarm screen.
Fig. 1.8 (c) Parameter screen
In this case, display the alarm screen by following the steps below.
2 Press the chapter selection soft key [ALARM].
3 Pressing the soft key [ALARM] changes the screen display to the
"DETAIL" screen (or the alarm screen selected previously), and the
soft keys [DETAIL] and [ALL PATH] appears.
• Pressing the soft key [DETAIL] displays the "DETAIL" screen.
• Pressing the soft key [ALL PATH] displays the "ALL PATH"
screen.
If the number of paths is 1, pressing the soft key [ALARM] displays
the "DETAIL" screen, but the soft key [ALARM] indication remains
unchanged.
4 You can change pages by using the page keys.
- Releasing alarm
The cause of an alarm can be determined from the error code, number,
and associated message. To release the alarm, generally correct the
cause, then press the key.
- Error code and number
The type of an alarm is indicated by an error code and number.
Example: PS0010, SV0004, etc.
For details, see Chapter 8, "Alarm List".
50
1.8.2 Alarm History Display
Up to 60 alarms (in 10 screen pages) issued by the CNC including the
latest alarm are stored and displayed on the screen.
The display procedure is explained below.
Alarm history display
Procedure
2 Press the chapter selection soft key [HISTRY].
An alarm history is displayed.
The following information is displayed:
<1> Date and time of alarm issuance
<2> Alarm type
<3> Alarm number
<4> Alarm message (sometimes not displayed depending on the
alarm)
<5> Page No.
3 You can change pages by using the page keys.
Fig. 1.8 (a) Alarm history screen
51
B-63947EN/01
1.9 HELP FUNCTION

This function, which provides alarm information, operation methods, and 1
a table of parameter numbers, etc., can be used instead of the
handbook.
The help function displays the following:
• Initial menu screen

The initial menu screen is displayed by pressing the key when the
CNC screen is displayed.
From the initial menu screen, you can go to each of the help screens,
alarm detail, operation method, and parameter table.
• Alarm detail screen

If you make an error while operating the CNC or attempt to execute an
erroneous machining program, the CNC enters an alarm status. If you
display the help screen while in this status, the screen shows the cause
of the alarm that has been generated at that time and how to release it.
• Operation method screen

If you do not know how to operate the CNC, you can refer to this help
screen, which displays the operation method for each operation item.
• Parameter table screen

If you do not know the number of the parameter you want to set or view,
you can refer to this help screen, which displays a list of parameter
numbers for each function.
1.9.1 Initial Menu Screen

Press the key on the MDI panel, and the initial menu screen of the
help function is displayed.
Fig. 1.9.1 (a) Initial help screen of the help function
To return to the original screen, press the key or the function key
again.
From the initial menu screen of the help function, you can select each
help screen.
Operation
On the initial menu screen, you can go to each help screen by

performing the following:
52
• Soft key [SELECT]
- Enter a menu number in the key input buffer and press soft key
[SELECT].
- Select a menu with the cursor and press soft key [SELECT].
• key
- Enter a menu number in the key input buffer and press the
key.
- Select a menu with the cursor and press the key.
1.9.2 Alarm Detail Screen

On the initial menu screen of the help function, you can display the alarm
detail screen by performing either of the following:
• Press soft key [ALARM].
• Select "1. ALARM DETAIL" with the cursor and press either
or soft key [SELECT].
• Enter 1 in the key input buffer and press either or soft key
[SELECT].
If an alarm has been generated

If you display the alarm detail screen when an alarm has been generated,
the screen shows the details of the alarm that has been generated at that
time. If more than one alarm has been generated, the screen shows the
alarm displayed at the top of the alarm screen.
Fig. 1.9.2 (a) Alarm detail screen displayed if an alarm has been generated
If all alarms are reset, the alarm detail screen changes to the display
when no alarm has been generated (Fig. 1.9.2 (b)).
53
B-63947EN/01
If no alarm has been generated

If you display the alarm detail screen when no alarm has been generated,
the screen shows the following: 1
Fig. 1.9.2 (b) Alarm detail screen displayed if no alarm has been generated
Operation
On the alarm detail screen, you can perform the following:

• key
Enter an alarm number in the key input buffer. Press key or

soft key [SELECT] to search for the alarm number and display the
details of the alarm.
If the detailed message spans more than one page, you can switch
between pages by using the cursor keys and or the
page keys and .

<Alarm search example>
Enter an alarm group name plus an alarm number.
For example, if you want to know the details of alarm PS123,
enter "PS123" in the key input buffer and press key or
soft key [SELECT].
• Soft key [MENU]
Use this key to go to the initial menu screen of the help function.
54
1.9.3 Operation Method Screen
1 On the initial help menu of the help function, you can display the
operation method menu screen by performing either of the
following:
• Press soft key [OPERATION].
• Select "2. OPERATION METHOD" with the cursor and press
key or soft key [SELECT].
• Enter 2 in the key input buffer and press key or soft key
[SELECT].
Fig. 1.9.3 (a) Operation method menu screen
2 Display an operation method screen by performing either of the

following:
• Enter an item number in the key input buffer and press
key or soft key [SELECT].
• Select an item with the cursor and press key or soft key
[SELECT].
On each operation method screen, you can switch between pages
by using the cursor keys and or the page keys
and . The current page number is displayed at the upper right

corner of the screen.
3 If you want to select another operation method screen directly, key
in the desired item number and press key or soft key
[SELECT].
<Example>
On the operation method screen for "4. RESET", key in 8.
Press soft key [SELECT], and the screen changes to the
operation method screen for "8. MEMORY CLEAR".
Operation
On the operation method menu screen and on an operation method
screen, you can perform the following:
• key
Enter the item number of the desired operation method in the key
input buffer and press key or soft key [SELECT], and the
corresponding operation method screen is displayed.
On the operation method menu screen, you can select an item
number with the cursor.
55
B-63947EN/01
• Soft key [MENU]

Press this key to go to the initial menu screen of the help function.
1
1.9.4 Parameter Table Screen
1 On the initial menu screen of the help function, you can display a list
of parameter numbers screen by performing either of the following:
• Press soft key [PARAMETER].
• Select "3. PARAMETER TABLE" with the cursor and press
either key or soft key [SELECT].
• Enter 3 in the key input buffer and press key or soft key
[SELECT].
On the table of parameters screen, you can switch between pages
by using the cursor keys and or the page keys
and . The current page number is displayed at the upper right

corner of the screen.
Fig. 1.9.4 (a) Parameter table screen
Operation
On the table of parameters screen, you can perform the following:

• Soft key [MENU]
Press this key to go to the initial menu screen of the help function.
56
2 OPERATION LIST
(1) Reset
KEY PWE Function
Function Mode Operation
SW = 1 key
Operating time [(OPRT)] → [RUNPRE] →
[EXEC]
Number of [(OPRT)] → [PTSPRE] →
machined parts [EXEC]
Alarm 100 "RESET while pressing
(SW0100) "CAN"
(2) Input from MDI

KEY PWE Function
SW = 1 key
Parameter MDI or [PARAM] → Parameter
emergency No. → [NO.SRH] → Data
stop → "INPUT" or [INPUT] →
PWE = 0
Offset [OFFSET] → Offset No.
→ [NO.SRH] → Offset
value → "INPUT"
Setting (Handy, MDI or [SETTING] → "↑" and "↓"
Timer, Mirror emergency → Data → "INPUT" or
image) stop [INPUT]
Setting MDI or [SETTING] → Parameter
(Parameter) emergency No. → [NO.SRH] → Data
stop → "INPUT" or [INPUT]
PMC parameter → [PMC MAINTE] →
(Timer, Counter,
Keep relay, Data →
table) Timer
[TIMER] → Data →
“INPUT”
Counter
[COUNTR] → Data →
“INPUT”
Keep relay
[KEEP RELAY] → Data →
“INPUT”
Data table
[DATA] → Data →
“INPUT”
Tool length JOG "POS" → [REL] →
measurement [ORIGIN] → [ALL AXIS] or
Axis name → [EXEC] →
"OFS" → [OFFSET] →
Jog the tool to measuring
position → Offset No. →
[NO.SRH] → Axis name
[INP.C.]
Pitch error MDI or → [PITCH] →
compensation emergency Compensation point
value stop
number → [NO.SRH] →
Data → "INPUT" or
[INPUT]
57
B-63947EN/01
(3) Input from I/O device

KEY PWE Function
SW = 1 key
Parameter EDIT or [PARAM] → [(OPRT)] →
emergency [READ] → [EXEC] 2
stop
PMC data [PMC MAINTE] → [I/O] →
(Loader, Move cursor to PMC →
Parameter) Select desired PMC → Move
cursor to "DEVICE" →
(Supplement) Select desired device →
[PMC CONFIG] Move cursor to "FUNCTION"
→ [SETING] → → Select [READ] →
Move cursor to [(OPRT)] → [LIST] →
"ENABLE [SELECT], enter file number
PROGRAMMER
or file name → [EXEC]
FUNCTION" →
[YES]
Pitch error EDIT or → [PITCH] → [(OPRT)]
compensation emergency
value stop → → [READ] (→ File
name) → [EXEC]
Offset EDIT or [OFFSET] → [(OPRT)] →
emergency [READ] (→ File name) →
stop [EXEC]
Custom macro EDIT [OFFSET] → →
variable
[MACRO] → [(OPRT)] →
→ [READ] (→ File
name) → [EXEC]
All programs in EDIT [(OPRT)] → → [READ]
folder
→ [EXEC]
One program, EDIT [(OPRT)] → → [READ]
→ [P SET, F SET] →
[EXEC]
(4) Output to I/O device

KEY PWE Function
SW = 1 key
Parameter EDIT or [PARAM] → [(OPRT)] →
emergency [PUNCH] → [EXEC]
stop
PMC data EDIT [PMC MAINTE] → [I/O] →
(Loader, Move cursor to PMC →
Parameter) Select desired PMC → Move
cursor to "DEVICE" → Select
desired device → Move
cursor to "FUNCTION" →
Select [WRITE] → Move
cursor to "DATA TYPE" →
Select desired data →
[(OPRT)] → [NEW NAME] or
enter file name → [EXEC]
Pitch error EDIT or → [PITCH] → [(OPRT)]
compensation emergency
value stop → → [PUNCH] (→ File
name) → [EXEC]
58
2 OPERATION LIST
KEY PWE Function
SW = 1 key
Offset EDIT or [OFFSET] → [(OPRT)] →
emergency [PUNCH] (→ File name) →
stop [EXEC]
Custom macro EDIT or [OFFSET] → →
variable emergency
[MACRO] → [(OPRT)] →
stop
→ [PUNCH] (→ File
name) → [EXEC]
All programs [(OPRT)] → →
[PUNCH] → [EXEC]
One program [(OPRT)] → →
[PUNCH] → [P SET, F SET]
→ [EXEC]
(5) Search
KEY PWE Function
SW = 1 key
Program No. "O" + Program No. →
[PROGRM SEARCH] or
[PROGRM SEARCH] → "O" +
Program No. →
[PROGRM NAME]
Main program [PROGRM SEARCH] →
[MAIN SRCH]
Sequence No., [SEARCH] → Sequence No.,
Address + Word, Address + Word, Address →
Address only [↑ SEARCH, ↓ SEARCH] →
[↑ SEARCH, ↓ SEARCH]
Line [LINE SEARCH] → [LINE
NUMBER (character mode),
TOP, BOTTOM (Word mode,
character mode)]
Offset No. [OFFSET] → Offset No. →
[NO.SRH]
Diagnosis No. [DGNOS] → Diagnosis No. →
[NO.SRH]
Parameter No. [PARAM] → Parameter No. →
[NO.SRH]
(6) Program editing

KEY PWE Function
SW = 1 key
Creation of new [FOLDER] → [(OPRT)] →
program “O” + Program name →
[CREATE PROGRM]
Creation of new [FOLDER] → [(OPRT)] →
folder Folder name →
[CREATE FOLDER]
Deletion of all EDIT [PROGRM] → “O” + -9999 →
programs from “DELETE”
folder
59
B-63947EN/01
KEY PWE Function

SW = 1 key
Deletion of all [FOLDER] → [SELECT
specified START] → Select desired
programs program with [SELECT] → 2
[DELETE] → [EXEC]
Deletion of one [PROGRM] → “O” + Program
program No. → “DELETE” → [EXEC] or
move cursor to program →
[DELETE] → [EXEC]
Delete folder [FOLDER] → [(OPRT)] →
Move cursor to program →
[DELETE]
Copying of [FOLDER] →
program from one [SELEC TSTART] → Select
holder to another desired program with
[SELECT] → [SELECT END]
→ Move cursor to destination
folder → [COPY]
Movement of [FOLDER] →
program from one [SELEC TSTART] → Select
folder to another desired program with
[SELECT] → [SELECT END]
→ Move cursor to destination
folder → [MOVE]
Word insertion EDIT [PROGRM] (→ Search for word
before which to insert) → New
word → “INSERT”
Word overwriting EDIT [PROGRM] (→ Search for word
to overwrite) → New word →
“ALTER”
Word/address EDIT [PROGRM] → [(OPRT)] →
replacement [REPLCE] → [BEFORE] →
[AFTER] → [↑ SEARCH,
↓ SEARCH] → [REPLCE]
([REPLCE ALL] → [YES])
Deletion of one EDIT [PROGRM] → Move cursor to
block line to delete → “EOB” +
“DELETE”
Word deletion EDIT [PROGRM] (→ Search for word
to delete) → ”DELETE”
Copying of words EDIT [PROGRM] → [(OPRT)] →
in specified range [SELECT] → Select range →
[COPY] → [PASTE]
Movement of EDIT [PROGRM] → [(OPRT)] →
words in specified [SELECT] → Select range →
range [CUT] → [PASTE]
Character EDIT [PROGRM] → [(OPRT)] →
insertion → [INPUT MODE] →
Enter insert mode
[PROGRM] (→ Search for
character before which to
insert) → New character
60
2 OPERATION LIST
KEY PWE Function
SW = 1 key
Character EDIT [PROGRM] → [(OPRT)] →
overwriting → [INPUT MODE] →
Overwrite mode is entered
[PROGRM] (→ Search for
character to overwrite) → New
character
Character string EDIT [PROGRM] → [(OPRT)] →
replacement [REPLCE] → Enter character
string in search/replace dialog
box → [↑ SEARCH,
↓ SEARCH] → [REPLCE,
REPLCE ALL]
Character EDIT [PROGRM] (→ Search for
deletion character to delete) →
“DELETE”
Copying of EDIT [PROGRM] → [(OPRT)] →
character string in [SELECT] → Select range →
specified range [COPY] → [PASTE]
Movement of EDIT [PROGRM] → [(OPRT)] →
character string in [SELECT] → Select range →
specified range [CUT] → [PASTE]
Undoing EDIT [PROGRM] → [(OPRT)] →
[UNDO]
Program insertion EDIT [PROGRM] → [(OPRT)] →
→ [INSERT] →
[CURSOR POSITION,
BOTTOM] → Enter program
name → [EXEC]
Editor change EDIT [PROGRM] → [(OPRT)] →
→ [CHANGE EDITOR]
Program memory [FOLDER] → [(OPRT)] →
condensation [PROGRM CNDENS]
(7) I/O to and from Handy File

KEY PWE Function
SW = 1 key
File head search [FOLDER] → [(OPRT)] → File
number → [F SRH]
File deletion EDIT [FOLDER] → [(OPRT)] →
Move cursor to desired
program and press [DELETE]
→ [EXEC]
Input of all EDIT [FOLDER] → [(OPRT)] →
programs [READ] → [EXEC]
Input of one EDIT [FOLDER] → [(OPRT)] →
program [READ] → [F SET, P SET] →
[EXEC]
Output of all EDIT [FOLDER] → [(OPRT)] →
programs [PUNCH] → [EXEC]
Output of one EDIT [FOLDER] → [(OPRT)] →
program [PUNCH] → [F SET, P SET] →
[EXEC]
61
B-63947EN/01
(8) Playback
KEY PWE Function
SW = 1 key
NC data input TJOG, Move tool → "X" , "Y" or "Z" →
THND "INSERT" → NC data → 2
"INSERT" → "EOB" →
"INSERT"
(9) Clear
KEY PWE Function
SW =1 key
Memory all clear At "RESET" and
power-up "DELETE"
RAM for PMC ladder storage At X and O
(Ladder programs are power-up
cleared from the memory for
execution. The previous
state is restored when the
power is turned on again.)
PMC nonvolatile memory Z and O
(PMC parameters and so
forth are cleared.)
(10) Manual operation

KEY PWE Function
SW = 1 key
Manual reference REF Use "axis selection switch" to
position return select axis on which to perform
reference position return →
Turn "operate button" ON →
"Reference position return
lamp ON"
Jog feed JOG Use "axis selection switch" to
select axis along which to move
→ Turn "operate button" ON
Press "rapid traverse button" if
required.
Incremental feed INC Use "axis selection switch" to
select axis along which to move
→ Turn "movement operate
button" ON → Move in least
input increment
Magnifications of 10, 100, and
1000 can be applied.
Press "rapid traverse button" if
required.
Manual handle HND Use "axis selection switch" to
feed select axis along which to move
→ Turn "manual pulse
generation"
Magnifications of 10, 100, and
1000 can be applied.
62
2 OPERATION LIST
(11) Display
KEY PWE Function
SW = 1 key
Display of [FOLDER]
program memory
used and
contents of
current folder
Display of MEM Currently executed program in
specified value or memory
MDI [PROGRM]
Specified value under
execution, next specified value
to be executed, and current
position
[NEXT]
Currently executed program in
memory and current position
[CHECK]
Display of current Display of position in workpiece
position coordinate system
[ABS]
Display of position in relative
coordinate system
[REL]
Overall position display
[ALL]
Operating →[MONITOR]
monitor screen
Alarm display When an alarm is issued
[ALARM]
Operator When there is a message to
message display the operator from the outside
[MSG]
Alarm history [HISTRY]
display
Parameter setting [PARAM]
display
System [SYSTEM]
configuration
Servo information [SYSTEM] → [SERVO INFO]
Spindle [SYSTEM] → [SPINDLE INFO]

information
Servo adjustment Parameter (No.3111#0) = 1
screen → [SERVO PARAM]
Spindle Parameter (No.3111#1) = 1
adjustment → [SP.SET]
screen
Machining → [M-TUN]
parameter * Option required
adjustment
screen
63
B-63947EN/01
KEY PWE Function

SW = 1 key
Operation history → [OPEHIS]
display
2
Periodic → [MAINTE]
maintenance
screen
Maintenance → [M-INFO]
information
screen
Servo waveform → [W.DGNS]
display
Parameter setting → [PRMTUN]
assistance
screen
Power Mate CNC → [P.MATE MGR.]
manager
Multi-language → [LANG.]
display
Software → [OPR]
operator's panel * Option required
Precision level → [PR-LEV]
selection screen
* Option required
Data protection → [PROTECT]
* Option required.
Screen clear Press “CAN” and function key
simultaneously.
Press function key to redisplay.
(12) Graphic function (*option required)

KEY PWE Function
SW = 1 key
Parameter setting [PARAM]
Tool path drawing Select graphic drawing screen

[GRAPH]
Start drawing, end it
[(OPRT)] → [START], [END]
Tool path clear [(OPRT)] → [CLEAR]
Tool path scale [(OPRT)] → [SCALE]

Specify center magnification for
enlargement/reduction
[CENTER] → Use MDI keys to
enter magnification → [INPUT]
→ [EXEC]
Enlarge portion selected with
an arrow
[AREA] → Move cursor to
select portion to enlarge →
[EXEC]
Use [CURSOR CHANGE] to
change moving cursor
64
2 OPERATION LIST
(13) Help function
KEY PWE Function
SW = 1 key
Displaying
INITIAL MENU
screen
Displaying [ALARM] → Alarm No. →
ALARM DETAIL [SELECT]
screen
Displaying [OPERATION] →
OPERATION Item No. of operation method
METHOD screen → [SELECT]
Displaying [PARAMETER]
PARAMETER
TABLE screen
(14) Self-diagnosis function

KEY PWE Function
SW = 1 key
Displaying [DGNOS] →
DIAGNOSIS 1. Page change keys
screen
2. Number of the diagnosis

data
[NO.SRH]
(15)Screen hard copy

KEY PWE Function
SW = 1 key
Screen hard copy Parameter (No. 0020) = 4,
parameter (No.3301#7) = 1 →
Insert memory card → Display
screen whose hard copy is to
be produced → key (5
seconds or more)
• Clock display stops. →
Screen hard copy operation
is executed.
• Clock display restarts. →
Screen hard copy operation
stops.
Supplement:
Copy operation can also be
started with the signal
<G67#7>.
(16) BOOT
KEY PWE Function
SW = 1 key
Displaying At and the soft key to its left
system monitor power-
screen up
65
B-63947EN/01
KEY PWE Function

SW = 1 key
Reading file User data
from memory Move cursor to 2.USER DATA
card LOADING on system monitor
2
screen → [SELECT] → Move
cursor to file to be read →
[SELECT] → [YES]
System data
Move cursor to 3.SYSTEM
DATA LOADING on system
monitor screen → [SELECT] →
Move cursor to file to be read →
[SELECT] → [YES]
Displaying detail Move cursor to 4.SYSTEM
screen for flash DATA CHECK on system
ROM or memory monitor screen → [SELECT] →
card file list Move cursor to system data to
read → [SELECT] → Move
cursor to file to read →
[SELECT] → [YES]
Deleting user file Move cursor to 5. SYSTEM
in flash ROM or DATA DELETE on system
memory card file monitor screen → [SELECT] →
Move cursor to system data to
delete → [SELECT] → Move
cursor to file to delete →
[SELECT] → [YES]
Outputting user Move cursor to 6.SYSTEM
file in flash ROM DATA SAVE on system monitor
to memory card screen → [SELECT] → Move
cursor to file to be output →
[SELECT] → [YES]
Batch input and Move cursor to 7. SRAM DATA
output of SRAM UTILITY on system monitor
data screen → [SELECT]
Output from CNC to memory
card
Move cursor to 1.SRAM
BACKUP → [SELECT] → [YES]
Input from memory card to CNC
RESTORE → [SELECT] →
[YES]
Input auto backup data in
FROM to CNC
RESTORE → [SELECT] →
[YES]
Formatting Move cursor to 8.MEMORY
memory card CARD FORMAT on system
monitor screen → [SE LECT] →
[YES]
Exiting system Move cursor to 1.END on
monitor system monitor screen →
[SELECT] → [YES]
66
3 G CODE
A number following address G determines the meaning of the command
for the concerned block.
G codes are divided into the following two types.
Type Meaning
The G code is effective only in the block in which it is
One-shot G code
specified.
The G code is effective until another G code of the same
Modal G code
group is specified.
[Example]
G01 and G00 are modal G codes in group 01.
G01 X_ ;
Z_ ; G01 is effective in this range.
X_ ;
G00 Z_ ; G00 is effective in this range.
X_ ;
G01 X_ ;
:
T
There are three G code systems in the lathe system : A, B, and C (Table
3.1). Select a G code system using the parameters GSB and GSC (No.
3401#6 and #7). To use G code system B or C, the corresponding option
is needed. Generally, This Handbook describes the use of G code
system A, except when the described item can use only G code system
B or C. In such cases, the use of G code system B or C is described.
Explanation
1. When the clear state (parameter CLR (No. 3402#6)) is set at
power-up or reset, the modal G codes are placed in the states
described below.
(1) The modal G codes are placed in the states marked with (*) as
indicated in Tables 3.1 and 3.2.
(2) G20 and G21 remain unchanged when the clear state is set at
power-up or reset.
(3) Which status G22 or G23 at power on is set by parameter G23
(No. 3402#7). However, G22 and G23 remain unchanged when
the clear state is set at reset.
(4) The user can select G00 or G01 by setting parameter G01 (No.
3402#0).
(5) The user can select G90 or G91 by setting parameter G91 (No.
3402#3).
When G code system B or C is used in the lathe system, setting
parameter G91 (No. 3402#3) determines which code, either
G90 or G91, is effective.
(6) In the machining center system, the user can select G17, G18,
or G19 by setting parameters G18 and G19 (No. 3402#1 and
#2).
2. G codes other than G10 and G11 are one-shot G codes in group 00.
3. When a G code not listed in the G code list is specified, or a G code
that has no corresponding option is specified, alarm PS0010 occurs.
4. Multiple G codes can be specified in the same block if each G code
belongs to a different group. If multiple G codes that belong to the
same group are specified in the same block, only the last G code
specified is valid.
5. If a G code belonging to group 01 is specified in a canned cycle for
drilling, the canned cycle for drilling is cancelled. This means that
the same state set by specifying G80 is set. Note that the G codes in
group 01 are not affected by a G code specifying a canned cycle for
drilling.
6. G codes are indicated by group.
7. The group of G60 is switched according to the setting of the
parameter MDL (No. 5431#0). (When the MDL bit is set to 0, the 00
group is selected. When the MDL bit is set to 1, the 01 group is
selected.)
67
B-63947EN/01
8. When G code system A is used, absolute or incremental

programming is specified not by a G code (G90/G91) but by an
address word (X/U, Z/W, C/H, Y/V). Only the initial level is provided
at the return point of the canned cycle for drilling..
68
3 G CODE
3.1 G CODE LIST IN THE MACHINING CENTER
SYSTEM
Table 3.1 G code list
G code Group Function
G00 (*) Positioning (rapid traverse)
G01 (*) Linear interpolation (cutting feed)
Circular interpolation CW or
G02
helical interpolation CW
01 Circular interpolation CCW or
G03
helical interpolation CCW
G02.2, G03.2 Involute interpolation CW/CCW
G02.3, G03.3 Exponential interpolation CW/CCW
G02.4, G03.4 Three-dimensional coordinate conversion CW/CCW
G04 Dwell
AI contour control (high-precision contour control
G05
compatible command)
00
AI contour control / Nano smoothing /
G05.1
Smooth interpolation
G05.4 HRV3,4 on/off
G06.2 01 NURBS interpolation
G07 Hypothetical axis interpolation
G07.1 (G107) Cylindrical interpolation
AI contour control (advanced preview control
G08
compatible command)
G09 Exact stop
00
G10 Programmable data input
G10.6 Tool retract and recover
Programmable switching of diameter/radius
G10.9
specification
G11 Programmable data input mode cancel
G12.1 Polar coordinate interpolation mode
21
G13.1 (*) Polar coordinate interpolation cancel mode
G12.4 Clockwise continuous circular motion
00
G13.4 Counterclockwise continuous circular motion
G15 (*) Polar coordinates command cancel
17
G16 Polar coordinates command
G17 (*) XpYp plane selection Xp: X axis or its parallel axis
G18 (*) 02 ZpXp plane selection Yp: Y axis or its parallel axis
Zp: Z axis or its parallel axis
G19 (*) YpZp plane selection
G20 (G70) Inch input
06
G21 (G71) Metrci input
G22 (*) Stored stroke check function on
04
G23 Stored stroke check function off
G25 (*) Spindle speed fluctuation detection off
19
G26 Spindle speed fluctuation detection on
G27 Reference position return check
G28 Automatic return to reference position
00
G29 Movement from reference position
G30 2nd, 3rd, and 4th reference position return
69
B-63947EN/01

G30.1 Floating reference position return
G31 00 Skip function
G31.8 EGB-axis skip
G33 Threading
G34 Variable lead threading 3
01
G35 Circular threading CW
G36 Circular threading CCW
G37 Automatic tool length measurement
Tool radius and tool nose radius compensation :
G38 00 preserve vector
G39
corner circular interpolation
G40 (*) cancel
Three-dimensional tool compensation : cancel
Tool radius and tool nose radius compensation : left
G41
Three-dimensional tool compensation : left
G41.2 3-dimensional cutter compensation : left (type 1)
3-dimensional cutter compensation :
G41.3
(leading edge offset)
3-dimensional cutter compensation : left (type 1)
G41.4
(FS16i-compatible command)
3-dimensional cutter compensation : left (type 1)
G41.5 07 (FS16i-compatible command)
G41.6 3-dimensional cutter compensation : left (type 2)
G42 right
Three-dimensional tool compensation : right
G42.2 3-dimensional cutter compensation : right (type 1)
3-dimensional cutter compensation : right (type 1)
G42.4
3-dimensional cutter compensation : right (type 1)
G42.5
G42.6 3-dimensional cutter compensation : right (type 2)
G40.1 Normal direction control cancel mode
G41.1 19 Normal direction control on : left
G42.1 Normal direction control on : right
G43 Tool length compensation +
G44 Tool length compensation -
G43.1 08 Tool length compensation in tool axis direction
G43.4 Tool center point control (type 1)
G43.5 Tool center point control (type 2)
G45 Tool offset increase
G46 Tool offset decrease
00
G47 Tool offset double increase
G48 Tool offset double decrease
G49 (G49.1) (*) 08 Tool length compensation cancel
G50 (*) Scaling cancel
11
G51 Scaling
70
3 G CODE
G50.1 (*) Programmable mirror image cancel
22
G51.1 Programmable mirror image
G50.2 Polygon turning cancel
31
G51.2 Polygon turning
G52 Local coordinate system setting
G53 00 Machine coordinate system setting
G53.1 Tool axis direction control
G54 (G54.1) (*) Workpiece coordinate system 1 selection
G55 Workpiece coordinate system 2 selection
14
G54.2 23 Rotary table dynamic fixture offset
G54.4 33 Work setting error compensation
G60 00 Single direction positioning
G61 Exact stop mode
G62 Automatic corner override
15
G63 Tapping mode
G64 (*) Cutting mode
G65 00 Macro call
G66 Macro modal call A
G66.1 12 Macro modal call B
G67 (*) Macro modal call A/B cancel
Coordinate system rotation start or 3-dimensional
G68
coordinate conversion mode on
Coordinate system rotation cancel or 3-dimensional
G69 (*)
16 coordinate conversion mode off
G68.2 Tilted working plane command
Tilted working plane specification in tool axis
G68.3
direction
G72.1 Figure copy (rotation copy)
00
G72.2 Figure copy (linear copy)
G73 Peck drilling cycle
G74 Left-handed tapping cycle
G76 09 Fine boring cycle
Canned cycle cancel /
G80 (*)
Electronic gear box: synchronization cancellation
G80.4 34 Electronic gear box: synchronization cancellation
Electronic gear box 2 pair:
G80.5 24
synchronization cancellation
Drilling cycle or spot boring cycle /
G81 09
Electronic gear box: synchronization start
G81.1 00 Chopping
G81.4 34 Electronic gear box: synchronization start
G81.5 24 Electronic gear box 2 pair: synchronization start
G82 Drilling cycle or counter boring cycle
09
G83 Peck drilling cycle
71
B-63947EN/01

G84 Tapping cycle
G84.2 Rigid tapping cycle (FS15 format)
G84.3 Left-handed rigid tapping cycle (FS15 format)
G85 Boring cycle
09
G86 Boring cycle 3
G87 Back boring cycle
G88 Boring cycle
G89 Boring cycle
G90 (*) Absolute programming
03
G91 (*) Incremental programming
G91.1 Checking the maximum incremental amount specified
00 Setting for workpiece coordinate system or clamp at

G92
maximum spindle speed
G92.1 Workpiece coordinate system preset
G93 Inverse time feed
G94 (*) 05 Feed per minute
G95 Feed per revolution
G96 13 Constant surface speed control
G96.1 Spindle indexing (waiting for completion)
G96.2 Spindle indexing (not waiting for completion)
00
G96.3 Spindle indexing completion check
G96.4 SV rotation control mode ON
G97 (*) 13 Constant surface speed control cancel
G98 (*) Canned cycle : return to initial level
10
G99 Canned cycle : return to R point level
G107 00 Cylindrical interpolation
G112 Polar coordinate interpolation mode
21
G113 Polar coordinate interpolation mode cancel
72
3 G CODE
3.2 G CODE LIST IN THE LATHE SYSTEM
Table 3.2 G code list
G code system
Group Function
A B C
G00 (*) G00 (*) G00 (*) Positioning (Rapid traverse)
G01 G01 G01 Linear interpolation (Cutting feed)
Circular interpolation CW or
G02 G02 G02
helical interpolation CW
Circular interpolation CCW or
G03 G03 G03
helical interpolation CCW
G02.2 G02.2 G02.2 Involute interpolation CW
01
G02.3 G02.3 G02.3 Exponential interpolation CW
Three-dimensional coordinate
G02.4 G02.4 G02.4
conversion CW
G03.2 G03.2 G03.2 Involute interpolation CCW
G03.3 G03.3 G03.3 Exponential interpolation CCW
Three-dimensional coordinate
G03.4 G03.4 G03.4
conversion CCW
G04 G04 G04 Dwell
AI contour control (command
G05 G05 G05 compatible with high precision contour
00 control)
AI contour control / Nano smoothing /
G05.1 G05.1 G05.1
Smooth interpolation
G05.4 G05.4 G05.4 HRV3, 4 on/off
G06.2 G06.2 G06.2 01 NURBS interpolation
G07 G07 G07 Hypothetical axis interpolation
G07.1 G07.1 G07.1
Cylindrical interpolation
(G107) (G107) (G107)
G08 G08 G08 Advanced preview control
G09 G09 G09 Exact stop
00
G10 G10 G10 Programmable data input
G10.6 G10.6 G10.6 Tool retract and recover
Programmable switching of
G10.9 G10.9 G10.9
diameter/radius specification
G11 G11 G11 Programmable data input mode cancel
G12.1 G12.1 G12.1
Polar coordinate interpolation mode
(G112) (G112) (G112)
G13.1 G13.1 G13.1 21
Polar coordinate interpolation cancel
(G113) (G113) (G113)
mode
(*) (*) (*)
G15 G15 G15 Polar coordinate command cancel
24
G16 G16 G16 Polar coordinate command
G17 G17 G17 XpYp plane selection
G18 (*) G18 (*) G18 (*) 16 ZpXp plane selection
G19 G19 G19 YpZp plane selection
G20 G20 G70 Inch input
06
G21 G21 G71 Metrci input
G22 (*) G22 (*) G22 (*) Stored stroke check function on
09
G23 G23 G23 Stored stroke check function off
73
B-63947EN/01
G code system
Group Function
A B C
G25 (*) G25 (*) G25 (*) Spindle speed fluctuation detection off
08
G26 G26 G26 Spindle speed fluctuation detection on
G27 G27 G27 Reference position return check
G28 G28 G28 Return to reference position 3
G29 G29 G29 Movement from reference position
00 2nd, 3rd and 4th reference position

G30 G30 G30
return
G30.1 G30.1 G30.1 Floating reference position return
G31 G31 G31 Skip function
G31.8 G31.8 G31.8 EGB-axis skip
G32 G33 G33 Thread cutting
G34 G34 G34 Variable lead thread cutting
G35 G35 G35 Circular thread cutting CW
Circular thread cutting CCW (When the
parameter G36 (No. 3405#3) is set to
G36 G36 G36 1) or Automatic tool offset (X axis)
(When the parameter G36 (No.
3405#3) is set to 0)
Automatic tool offset (Z axis) (When
G37 G37 G37 the parameter G36 (No. 3405#3) is set
01 to 0)
Automatic tool offset (X axis) (When
G37.1 G37.1 G37.1 the parameter G36 (No. 3405#3) is set
to 1)
Automatic tool offset (Z axis) (When
G37.2 G37.2 G37.2 the parameter G36 (No. 3405#3) is set
to 1)
Tool radius and tool nose radius
G38 G38 G38
compensation: with vector held
G39 G39 G39 compensation: corner rounding
interpolation
G40 (*) G40 (*) G40 (*)
compensation : cancel
G41 G41 G41
compensation : left
G42 G42 G42
compensation : right
G41.2 G41.2 G41.2
left (type 1)
G41.3 G41.3 G41.3
07 (leading edge offset)
G41.4 G41.4 G41.4 left (type 1) (FS16i-compatible
command)
G41.5 G41.5 G41.5 left (type 1) (FS16i-compatible
command)
G41.6 G41.6 G41.6
left (type 2)
G42.2 G42.2 G42.2
right (type 1)
74
3 G CODE
G code system
Group Function
A B C
G42.4 G42.4 G42.4 right (type 1) (FS16i-compatible
command)
07 3-dimensional cutter compensation :

G42.5 G42.5 G42.5 right (type 1) (FS16i-compatible
command)
G42.6 G42.6 G42.6
right (type 2)
G43 G43 G43 Tool length compensation +
G44 G44 G44 Tool length compensation -
Tool length compensation in tool axis
G43.1 G43.1 G43.1
direction
G43.4 G43.4 G43.4 23 Tool center point control (type 1)
G43.5 G43.5 G43.5 Tool center point control (type 2)
G43.7 G43.7 G43.7
Tool offset (lathe system ATC type)
(G44.7) (G44.7) (G44.7)
G49 G49 G49
Tool length compensation cancel
(G49.1) (G49.1) (G49.1)
Coordinate system setting or
G50 G92 G92
00 max. spindle speed clamp
G50.3 G92.1 G92.1 Workpiece coordinate system preset
- G50 G50 Scaling cancel
18
- G51 G51 Scaling
G50.1 G50.1 G50.1 Programmable mirror image cancel
22
G51.1 G51.1 G51.1 Programmable mirror image
G50.2 G50.2 G50.2
(G250) (G250) (G250) Polygon turning cancel
(*) (*) (*) 20
G51.2 G51.2 G51.2
Polygon turning
(G251) (G251) (G251)
G52 G52 G52 Local coordinate system setting
G53 G53 G53 00 Machine coordinate system setting
G53.1 G53.1 G53.1 Tool axis direction control
G54 G54 G54
Workpiece coordinate system 1
(G54.1) (G54.1) (G54.1)
selection
(*) (*) (*)
G55 G55 G55
selection
G56 G56 G56
14 selection
G57 G57 G57
selection
G58 G58 G58
selection
G59 G59 G59
selection
G60 G60 G60 00 Single direction positioning
G61 G61 G61 Exact stop mode
G62 G62 G62 15 Automatic corner override mode
G63 G63 G63 Tapping mode
75
B-63947EN/01
G code system
Group Function
A B C
G64 G64 G64 15 Cutting mode
G65 G65 G65 00 Macro call
G66 G66 G66 Macro modal call A
G66.1 G66.1 G66.1 12 Macro modal call B 3
G67 (*) G67 (*) G67 (*) Macro modal call A/B cancel
Mirror image on for double turret or
G68 G68 G68 04
balance cutting mode
Coordinate system rotation start or
G68.1 G68.1 G68.1 3-dimensional coordinate conversion
mode on
17
G68.2 G68.2 G68.2 Tilted working plane command
Tilted working plane specification in
G68.3 G68.3 G68.3
tool axis direction
Mirror image off for double turret or
G69 (*) G69 (*) G69 (*) 04
balance cutting mode cancel
Coordinate system rotation cancel or
G69.1 G69.1 G69.1 17 3-dimensional coordinate conversion
mode off
G70 G70 G72 Finishing cycle
G71 G71 G73 Stock removal in turning
G72 G72 G74 Stock removal in facing
G73 G73 G75 Pattern repeating cycle
G74 G74 G76 00 End face peck drilling cycle
Outer diameter/internal diameter
G75 G75 G77
drilling cycle
G76 G76 G78 Multiple-thread cutting cycle
G72.1 G72.1 G72.1 Figure copy (rotation copy)
G72.2 G72.2 G72.2 Figure copy (parallel copy)
Canned cycle cancel for drilling /
G80 (*) G80 (*) G80 (*) 10 Electronic gear box: synchronization
cancellation
Electronic gear box: synchronization
G80.4 G80.4 G80.4 28
cancellation
Electronic gear box 2 pair: synchronization
G80.5 G80.5 G80.5 27
cancellation
Spot drilling (FS15-T format) /
G81 G81 G81 10
Electronic gear box: synchronization start
G81.4 G81.4 G81.4 28 Electronic gear box: synchronization start
Electronic gear box 2 pair:
G81.5 G81.5 G81.5 27
synchronization start
G82 G82 G82 Counter boring (FS15-T format)
G83 G83 G83 Cycle for face drilling
High-speed peck drilling cycle (FS15-T
G83.1 G83.1 G83.1
format)
G83.5 G83.5 G83.5 10 High-speed peck drilling cycle
G83.6 G83.6 G83.6 Peck drilling cycle
G84 G84 G84 Cycle for face tapping
G84.2 G84.2 G84.2 Rigid tapping cycle (FS15 format)
G85 G85 G85 Cycle for face boring
76
3 G CODE
G code system
Group Function
A B C
G87 G87 G87 Cycle for side drilling
G87.5 G87.5 G87.5 High-speed peck drilling cycle
G87.6 G87.6 G87.6 10 Peck drilling cycle
G88 G88 G88 Cycle for side tapping
G89 G89 G89 Cycle for side boring
Outer diameter/internal diameter
G90 G77 G20 01
cutting cycle
Maximum specified incremental
G91.1 G91.1 G91.1 00
amount check
G92 G78 G21 01 Thread cutting cycle
G93 G93 G93 05 Inverse time feed
G94 G79 G24 01 End face turning cycle
G96 G96 G96 02 Constant surface speed control
Spindle indexing (waiting for
G96.1 G96.1 G96.1
completion)
Spindle indexing (not waiting for
G96.2 G96.2 G96.2 00 completion)
G96.3 G96.3 G96.3 Spindle indexing completion check
G96.4 G96.4 G96.4 SV rotation control mode ON
G97 (*) G97 (*) G97 (*) 02 Constant surface speed control cancel
G98 G94 G94 Feed per minute
05
G99 (*) G95 (*) G95 (*) Feed per revolution
- G90 (*) G90 (*) Absolute programming
03
- G91 G91 Incremental programming
- G98 G98 Canned cycle : return to initial level
11
- G99 G99 Canned cycle : return to R point level
77
4 PROGRAM FORMAT
Function Positioning (G00)
Program format G00 IP_ ;
Illustration IP
Start point
Function Linear interpolation (G01)

Program format G01 IP_ F_;
Illustration IP
Start point
Function Circular interpolation (G02, G03)

Program format - For machining center system
G02 R_
G17 X_ Y_ F_ ;
G03 I_ J_
G02 R_
G18 X_ Z_ F_ ;
G03 I_ K_
G02 R_
G19 Y_ Z_ F_ ;
G03 J_ K_
- For lathe system
G02 R_
X_ Z_ F_ ;
G03 I_ K_
Illustration (x, y)
G03
Start point
n
R G02
J R
J
I
I Start point
(x, y)
Function Helical interpolation (G02, G03)

Program format G02 R_
G17 X_ Y_ α_F_ ;
G03 I_ J_
G02 R_
G18 X_ Z_ α_F_ ;
G03 I_ K_
G02 R_
G19 Y_ Z_ α_F_ ;
G03 J_ K_
α : Any address other than circular interpolation axes.
Illustration z
Start
point (xyz)
(x, y)
In case of G03 on X-Y plane
79
B-63947EN/01
Function Involute interpolation (G02.2, G03.2)

Program format G02.2
G17 Xp_ Yp_ I_ J_ R_ F_ ;
G03.2
G02.2
G18 Zp_Xp_ K_ I_ R_ F_ ;
G03.2
G02.2
G19 Yp_ Zp_ J_ K_ R_ F_ ; 4
G03.2
Illustration Yp
End point
Start Pe
point I
Ps Po
J
0 R
Base circle
Xp
In case of X-Y plane
Function Exponential interpolation (G02.3, G03.3)
Program format Positive rotation
G02.3 X_ Y_ Z_ I_ J_ K_ R_ F_ Q_ ;
Negative rotation
G03.3 X_ Y_ Z_ I_ J_ K_ R_ F_ Q_ ;
Illustration A (Rotary axis)
∆A
X (Linear axis)
∆X
Relationship between X-axis and A-axis
Function Three-dimensional circular interpolation (G02.4, G03.4)
Program format G02.4 XX1 YY1 ZZ1 αα1 ββ1 ;
First block (mid-point of the arc)
XX2 YY2 ZZ2 αα2 ββ2 ;
Second block (end point of the arc)
α,β: Arbitrary axes other than the 3-dimensional circular
interpolation axis (up to two axes)
G03.4 can also be specified instead of G02.4.
Illustration Intermediate point
X (X1,Y1,Z1)
Y
Z
Start
point End point (X2,Y2,Z2)
Function Dwell (G04)

Program format X_
G04 ;
P_
Function AI contour control (G05)

Program format G05 P10000 ; AI contour control start
G05 P0 ; AI contour control end
80
4 PROGRAM FORMAT
Function AI contour control (G05.1)
Program format G05.1 Q1 ; AI contour control mode on
G05.1 Q0 ; AI contour control mode off
Function Nano smoothing (G05.1)
Program format G05.1 Q3 IP0 ; Nano smoothing mode on
G05.1 Q0 ; Nano smoothing mode off
Function Smooth interpolation (G05.1)
Program format G05.1 Q2 ; Smooth interpolation mode on
G05.1 Q0 ; Smooth interpolation mode off
Function NURBS interpolation (G06.2)
Program format G06.2[P_] K_ IP_ [R_] [F_]; NURBS interpolation mode on
P : Rank of NURBS curve
IP : Control point
R : Weight
K : Knot
F : Feedrate
Function Hypothetical axis interpolation (G07)
Program format G07 IP0 ; Hypothetical axis setting
G07 IP1 ; Hypothetical axis cancel
Function Cylindrical interpolation (G07.1)
Program format G07 IP_ ｒ_; Cylindrical interpolation mode
r : Cylinder radius
G07 IP 0; Cylindrical interpolation mode cancel
Function AI contour control (Advanced preview control) (G08)
Program format G08 P1 ; AI contour control mode on
G08 P0 ; AI contour control mode off
Function Exact stop (G09)
Program format G01
G09 G02 　IP_ ;
G03
Illustration Speed
Time
In-position check
81
B-63947EN/01
Function Programmable data input (G10)

Tool compensation memory A
G10 L01 P_ R_ ;
Tool compensation memory B
G10 L10 P_ R_ ; (Geometry offset amount)
G10 L11 P_ R_ ; (Wear offset amount)
Tool compensation memory C
G10 L10 P_ R_ ; (Geometry offset amount/H)
G10 L11 P_ R_ ; (Wear offset amount/H) 4
G10 L12 P_ R_ ; (Geometry offset amount/D)
G10 L13 P_ R_ ; (Wear offset amount/D)
- For lathe system
Geometry offset amount
G10 P_ X_ Z_ R_ Q_ ;
P = 10000 + Geometry offset number
Wear offset amount
G10 P_ X_ Z_ C_ Q_ ;
P = Wear offset number
- For machining center system

Tool life
G10 L3 P_ ; (No P: Registration, P1: Change, P2:
Deletion)
P_L_ ; (P: Group number, L: Tool life)
T_H_D_ ;
- For lathe system
Tool life
G10 L3 P_ ; (No P: Registration, P1: Change, P2:
Deletion)
P_L_ ; (P: Group number, L: Tool life)
T_(D_) ;
Interference check
G10 L6 P_Q_X_Z_I_K_ ; (P: Tool number, Q: Area)
- Common to lathe system/machining center system

Setting of workpiece origin offset
G10 L2 Pp IP_ ;
p=0 : External workpiece origin offset
p=1 to 6 : Workpiece origin offset for workpiece
coordinate systems 1 to 6
IP_ : Absolute programming
→ Workpiece origin offset for an axis
Incremental programming
→ Value to be added to the workpiece origin
offset for an axis that is set
82
4 PROGRAM FORMAT
Function Programmable parameter input (G10, G11)
Program format For parameter input mode
G10 L52 ; Parameter input mode setting
N_ R_ ; Non-axis parameter input
N_ P_ R_ ; Axis parameter input
:
G11 ; Parameter input mode cancel
N_ : Parameter No.
R_ : Parameter setting (leading zero omissible)
P_ : Axis number 1 to maximum number of controlled
axes (to be specified when an axis or spindle
parameter is input)
For pitch error compensation data input mode

G10 L50 ; Pitch error compensation data input mode
setting
N_ R_ ; Pitch error compensation data input
:
G11 ; Pitch error compensation data input mode
cancel
N_ : Pitch error compensation point No. + 10,000

R_ : Pitch error compensation data
Function Tool retract and recover (G10.6)
Program format G10.6 IP_ ; Specify the amount of retraction
G10.6 (as a single block containing no other commands) ;
Cancel the amount of retraction
Illustration
Withdrawal
Return
IP
Retract Repositioning
Function Polar coordinate interpolation (G12.1, G13.1)

Program format G12.1 ; Polar coordinate interpolation mode on
G13.1 ; Polar coordinate interpolation cancel
Function Grooving command with continuous circular motion
(G12.4, G13.4)
Program format - For machining center system only
G12.4 Ｐ1 I_ K_ Q_ F_ ; Clockwise continuous circular
motion on
G13.4 Ｐ1 I_ K_ Q_ F_ ; Counterclockwise continuous
circular motion on
G12.4 Ｐ0 ; Clockwise continuous circular
motion off
G13.4 Ｐ0 ; Counterclockwise continuous
circular motion off
I : Groove width
K : Tool diameter
Q : Amount of travel (pitch) in grooving path direction
for one continuous circular motion
F : Feedrate (central speed of the tool during
continuous circular motion)
83
B-63947EN/01
Function Polar coordinate command (G15, G16)

Program format G17 G16 Xp_ Yp_ … ;
G18 G16 Zp_ Xp_ … ;
G19 G16 Yp_ Zp_ … ;
G15 ; Cancel
Illustration Local coordinate system
Yp
Xp
Yp 4
Xp
Workpiece coordinate system
Function Plane selection (G17, G18, G19)

Program format G17 ; Xp Yp-plane selection
G18 ; Zp Xp-plane selection
G19 ; Yp Zp-plane selection
Function Inch/metric conversion (G20, G21)
Program format Inch input G20 ;
Metric input G21 ;
Function Stored stroke check (G22, G23)
Program format G22 X_ Y_ Z_ I_ J_ K_ ;
G23 ; Cancel
Illustration (XYZ)
(IJK)
Function Reference position return check (G27)

Illustration IP
Start point
Function Reference position return (G28)

2nd Reference position return (G30)
Illustration Reference position (G28)
Intermediate point
IP
Start point
2nd reference position(G30)

G30 IP_ ;
Function Movement from reference position (G29)
Illustration Reference position
IP
Intermediate point
84
4 PROGRAM FORMAT
Function Floating reference position return (G30.1)
Program format G30.1 IP_ ;
Illustration Floating reference position
Intermediate point
IP Start
point
Function Skip function (G31)

Program format G31 IP_ F_ ;
Illustration IP
Start point Skip signal
Function EGB skip function (G31.8)

Program format G81 T_ L_ ; (EGB mode on)
G31.8 G91 α0 P_ Q_ R_ ; (EGB skip command)
α : Specify an EGB slave axis. The value must always be
"0".
P : Start number of the custom macro variable used to
store the machine coordinates when a skip signal is
input.
Q : Number of times a skip signal can be input during the
execution of G31.8
(Valid range: 1 to 200)
R : Number of the custom macro variable used to store
the number of times a skip signal is input. The value
specified in Q is stored in the custom macro variable
specified in R. You need not necessarily specify it.
Specify it if you want to check the number of times a
signal is input.
Function Thread cutting (G33)
Thread cutting (G32)
G33 IP_ F_ ;
F : Lead
- For lathe system
Equal lead threading
G32 P_ F_ ;
Illustration F
Function Tool radius and tool nose radius compensation,

three-dimensional tool compensation (G38, G39, G40 to
G42)
G17
G18 G41 D_ ;
G19 G42
D: Tool compensation number

G40: Cancel
Illustration G41
G42
G40
85
B-63947EN/01
Function Tool radius and tool nose radius compensation (G40 to

G42) (G38, G39)
Program format - For lathe system only
G41
IP ;
G42
G40 : Cancel
Function 3-dimensional cutter compensation

4
- Tool side offset (G41.2, G42.2)
- Leading edge offset (G41.3)
Program format G41.2
G42.2 IP_ D_ ;
Tool side offset
G40 IP_ ; Cancellation of cutter compensation
G41.3 D_ ; Leading edge offset
G40 ; Canceling the leading edge offset
Illustration Tool side offset
Tool vector Programmed path
(path before compensation)
Cutter compensation
vector
Tool center path

(path after
compensation)
Z
Y
Compensation Cutter compensation X
plane amount
Leading edge offset

Tool vector
Tool used
Reference
tool
Tool center path

(path after
compensation)
Programmed
Cutter path
compensation Cutter compensation
vector amount
Function Normal direction control (G40.1, G41.1, G42.1)

Program format G41.1 ; Normal direction control on : right
G42.1 ; Normal direction control on : left
G40.1 ; Normal direction control cancel
Illustration Programmed
C-axis path
C-axis
Tool
Tool
Normal direction (in

which the tool moves)
86
4 PROGRAM FORMAT
Function Tool length compensation (G43, G44, G49)
Program format
G43
Z_ H_ ;
G44
G43
H_ ;
G44
H: Tool compensation number

G49: Cancel
Illustration
Compensation
Function Tool length compensation in tool axis direction (G43.1)

Program format G43.1 H_ ; Tool length compensation in tool axis
direction
H: Compensation number
G49 ; Compensation cancel
Illustration
Tool axis direction
B C
Z
Workpiece C
B
Y
X
Function Tool center point control (TYPE1) (G43.4)

Program format G43.4 IP_ α_ β_ H_ ; Tool center point control (TYPE1)
start
IP_ α_ β_ ;
IP: In the case of an absolute command, the coordinate
value of the end point of the tool tip movement
In the case of an incremental command, the amount
of the tool tip movement
α,β: In the case of an absolute command, the coordinate
value of the end point of the rotation axes
In the case of an incremental command, the amount
of the rotation axis movement
Function Tool center point control (TYPE2) (G43.5)
Program format G43.5 IP_ H_ Q_ ; Tool center point control (TYPE2) start
IP_ I_ J_ K_ ;
IP: In the case of an absolute command, the
coordinate value of the end point of the tool tip
movement
In the case of an incremental command, the
amount of the tool tip movement
I,J,K: Tool axis direction at the block end point as seen
from the programming coordinate system
Q: Inclination angle of the tool (in degrees)
87
B-63947EN/01
Function Tool offset (G43.7/G44.7)

G43.7 IP_ D_ ;
G44.7
D: Tool offset No.

Function Tool offset (G45 to G48)
G45 4
G46 IP_ D_ ;
G47
G48
D: Tool offset No.
Illustration
G 45 Increase
G 46 IP Decrease
G 47 Double increase
G 48 IP Double decrease
Offset amount
Function Scaling (G50, G51)

G51 X_ Y_ Z_ 　P_
I_ J_ K_ ;
P, I, J, K: Scaling magnification
X, Y, Z: Control position of scaling
G50: Cancel
- For lathe system only
Enabled when G code system B/C is used
Illustration P4 P3
P 4’ P 3'
IP
P 1’ P 2’
P1 P2
Function Programmable mirror image (G50.1, G51.1)

G50.1 ; Cancel
Illustration Mirror
IP
Function Coordinate system setting (G50)

Maximum spindle speed clamp (G50)
G50 IP_ ; (Coordinate system setting)
G50 S_ ; (Maximum spindle speed clamp)
Illustration X
Function Workpiece coordinate system preset (G50.3)

G50.3 IP 0 ;
88
4 PROGRAM FORMAT
Function Local coordinate system setting (G52)
Illustration Local coordinate
system
x
IP Workpiece
y coordinate system
Function Command in machine coordinate system (G53)

Function Tool axis direction control (G53.1)
Program format G53.1 ; Tool axis direction control
Function Selection of workpiece coordinate system (G54 to G59)
Program format G54
・
・ IP_ ;
G59
Illustration
IP
Workpiece
origin
offset
Workpiece coordinate system
Machine coordinate system
Function Rotary table dynamic fixture offset (G54.2)

G54.2 P_ ; Fixture offset
P: Reference fixture offset value number
G54.2 P0 ; Offset cancel
Illustration Y
Y
Y
X
X
F0
F
θ θ0
X
Rotation axis
center
C
Z
W
W : Workpiece origin offset value
θ0 : Reference angle
Machine coordinate F0 : Reference fixture offset value
system origin θ : Rotation axis angle
F : Fixture offset value
Function Work setting error compensation (G54.4)

Program format G54.4 P_ ; Work setting error compensation
P: Work setting error number
G54.4 P0 ; Cancelling the work setting error compensation
Illustration Z c b
Y
x, y, z
X
x: Error in the X direction
y: Error in the Y direction
z: Error in the Z direction
a: Error in the rotation direction (about the X-axis)
b: Error in the rotation direction (about the Y-axis)
c: Error in the rotation direction (about the Z-axis)
89
B-63947EN/01
Function Single direction positioning (G60)

Illustration IP
Function Cutting mode (G64)

Exact stop mode (G61)
Tapping mode (G63)
Program format G64_ ; Cutting mode 4
G61_ ; Exact stop mode
G63_ ; Tapping mode
Illustration
v
G64
t
Function Automatic corner override (G62)

Program format G62_ ; Automatic corner override
Illustration
v
G61
t
Function Custom macro (G65, G66, G66.1, G67)

Program format One-shot call
G65 P_ L_ <Argument assignment> ;
P : Program number
L : Number of repetition
Modal call
G66 P_ L_ <Argument assignment> ;
Call after the move command
G66.1 P_ L_ <Argument assignment> ;
Each block call
G67 ; Cancel
Illustration Macro
O_ ;
G65 P_L_ ;
M99 ;
Function Mirror image for double turret (G68, G69)

G68 : Mirror image on for double turret
G69 : Mirror image cancel
Illustration
90
4 PROGRAM FORMAT
Function Coordinate system rotation, Three-dimensional coordinate
conversion (G68, G69), (G68.1, G69.1)
G17 X_ Y_
G68 G18 Z_ X_ Rα;
G19 Y_ Z_
G69 ; Cancel
- For lathe system
G17 X_ Y_
G68.1 G18 Z_ X_ Rα;
G19 Y_ Z_
G69.1 ; Cancel
Illustration In case of X-Y plane
Y
α
(x y)
X
Function Tilted working plane command (G68.2)

Program format G68.2 X_ Y_ Z_ I_ J_ K_ ;
G69 ; Cancel
X, Y, Z : Feature coordinate system origin
I, J, K : Euler angles for determining the orientation of
the feature coordinate system
Function Tilted working plan specification in tool direction (G68.3)
Program format G68.3 X_ Y_ Z_ R_ ;
G69 ; Cancel
X, Y, Z : Feature coordinate system origin
R : Angle of rotation about the Z-axis in the feature
coordinate system
Illustration
Feature coordinate system Xc-Yc-Zc
Zc
Yc
Xc
91
B-63947EN/01
Function Figure copy (G72.1, G72.2)

Program format Rotational copy
(G17) X_ Y_
(G18) G72.1 P_ L_ Z_ X_ R_ ;
(G19) Y_ Z_
Linear copy
(G17) I_ J_
(G18) G72.2 P_ L_ K_ I_ ;
(G19) J_ K_ 4
Illustration Rotational copy
Y
P1
P0
Start point
60°
Linear copy
Y
P1
Start point P0 X
Function Canned cycle for drilling (G73, G74, G80 to G89)

G80 ; Cancel
G73
G74
G76 X_Y_Z_P_Q_R_F_K_ ;
G81
:
G89
Function Canned cycle for turning (G71 to G76) (G90, G92, G94)
N_ G70 P_ Q_ ;
G71 U_ R_ ;
G71 P_ Q_ U_ W_ F_ S_ T_ ;
G72 W_ R_ ;
G72 P_ Q_ U_ W_ F_ S_ T_ ;
G73 U_ W_ R_ ;
G73 P_ Q_ U_ W_ F_ S_ T_ ;
G74 R_ ;
G74 X(U)_ Z(W)_ P_ Q_ R_ F_ ;
G75 R_ ;
G75 X(U)_ Z(W)_ P_ Q_ R_ F_ ;
G76 P_ Q_ R_ ;
G76 X(U)_ Z(W)_ P_ Q_ R_ F_ ;
G90
X_ Z_ I_ F_ ;
G92
G94 X_ Z_ K_ F_ ;
92
4 PROGRAM FORMAT
Function Electric gear box (EGB) (G81, G80)
Program format G81 T_ (L_) (Q_ P_) ; Starts synchronization.
G80 ; Cancels synchronization.
T : Number of teeth (specifiable range: 1 to 1000)
L : Number of hob threads (specifiable range: -200 to
200)
Q : Module or diametral pitch
Specify a module in the case of metric input.
(Unit: 0.00001 mm, Specifiable range: 0.01 to 25.0
mm)
Specify a diametral pitch in the case of inch input.
(Unit: 0.00001 inch-1, Specifiable range: 0.01 to 25.0
inch-1)
P : Gear helix angle
(Unit: 0.0001 deg, Specifiable range: .90.0 to 90.0
deg.)
* When specifying Q and P, the user can use a decimal
point.
Function Electric gear box automatic phase synchronization (G81,
G80)
Program format - Acceleration/deceleration type
G81 T_ L_ R1 ; Synchronization start
G80 R1 ; Synchronization end
- Acceleration/deceleration plus automatic phase
synchronization type
G81 T_ L_ R2 ; Synchronization start
G80 R2 ; Synchronization end
T : Number of teeth (specifiable range: 1 to 1000)

L : Number of hob threads (specifiable range: -200 to
200)
When L is positive, the direction of rotation about the
workpiece axis is positive (+ direction).
When L is negative, the direction of rotation about the
workpiece axis is negative (- direction).
Function Electronic gear box 2 pair (G81.5, G80.5)
Program format Tt βj
G81.5 ; Starts synchr
Pp Β0Ll
Master-axis travel Slave-axis travel
Specify the master-axis travel in either of the following

ways.
1. Master-axis speed
T t: Maxter-axis speed (1 ≤ t ≤ 1000)
2. Master-axis pulse count
P p: Master-axis pulse count (1 ≤ p ≤ 999999999)
Specify a pulse count on the condition that four pulses
correspond to one period in the A and B phases.
Specify the slave-axis travel in either of the following ways.

1. Slave-axis travel
βj : β: Slave-axis address
j: Slave-axis indicated in units of the minimum travel
increments the range of valid settings for usual axis
movement applies)
2. Slave-axis speed
β0 L±l : β: Slave-axis address
l: Slave axis speed (1 ≤ l ≤ 200)
G80.5 β0 ; Ends synchronization.

β: Slave axis address
93
B-63947EN/01
Function Absolute/incremental programming (G90/G91)

G90_ ; Absolute programming
G91_ ; Incremental programming
:
G90_ G91_ ; Programming in both modes
- For lathe system
X_ Z_ C_ : Absolute programming
U_ W_ H_ : Incremental programming
(Distinguished by an address specified in combined use 4
with a G function such as G00 and G01.)
Function Maximum incremental command value check (G91.1)
IP_ ; Maximum incremental value
Set 0 to cancel maximum incremental value check.
Function Change of workpiece coordinate system (G92)
Maximum spindle speed clamp (G92)
G92 IP_ ; Change of workpiece coordinate system
G92 S_ ; Constant surface speed control :
Maximum spindle speed clamp
Illustration
IP
Function Workpiece coordinate system preset (G92.1)

Program format G92.1 IP 0 ;
Function Inverse time feed (G93)
Program format G93 ; Inverse time setting mode
Function Feed per minute, Feed per revolution (G94, G95) (G98,
G99)
G94 F_ ; Feed per minute
G95 F_ ; Feed per revolution
- For lathe system
G94 (G98 when G code system A) F_ ;
Feed per minute
G95 (G98 when G code system A) F_ ;
Feed per revolution
Illustration mm/min inch/min
mm/rev inch/rev
Function Constant surface speed control (G96, G97)
Program format G96 S_ ; Constant surface speed control on (surface
speed specification)
G97 S_ ; Constant surface speed control off (spindle
speed specification)
Illustration Surface speed (m/min or feet/min)
Spindle speed
N (min-1)
94
4 PROGRAM FORMAT
Function SV rotation control mode command (G96.1, G96.2, G96.3,
G96.4)
Program format G96.1 P_ ;
G96.2 P_ ;
G96.3 P_ ;
G96.4 P_ ;
Function Initial point return / R point return (G98, G99)
G98_ ;
G99_ ;
Illustration G98
Initial level
G99
R level
Z point
Function Optional chamfering/corner R

Chamfering/corner R
,C_: Chamfering
,R_: Corner R
- For lathe system only
C±K
X_ ; P_;
R_
C±K
Z_ ; P_;
R_
Illustration K
95
5 CUSTOM MACRO
5.1 TYPES OF VARIABLES
Variable name Variable number Remarks
Local variable #1 - #33
Common variable ＃100 - #149 (#199) Variables #150 to #199 and #549
＃500 - #549 (#999) to #999 are optional.
System variable greater than #1000 See Section 5.2 for details.
- Setting of common variable names and command (SETVN)

Using the command below, you can assign a name of up to eight
characters to each of the 50 common variables #500 to #549.
SETVN n[ VAR500,VAR501,VAR502,……] ;
where n denotes the start number of the common variable to which a
name is to be assigned.
VAR500, VAR501, VAR502, and so on are the variable names of
variables n, n+1, n+2, and so on. Once assigned, the variable names are
available in the program. For example, if you substitute 10 for variable
#510, you can specify [#TOOL_NO]=10;, instead of #510=10;.
5.2 SYSTEM VARIABLE

List of system variables and constants
n represents a subscript.
R, W, and R/W are attributes of a variable and indicate read-only,
write-only, and read/write enabled, respectively.
- Interface signals
System System
Attri-
variable variable Description
bute
number name
#1000 - [#_UI[n]] R Interface input signals (BIT), UI000-UI031
#1031 (Note)Subscript n represents a BIT position (0-31)
Corresponds to <Gn054 - Gn057>, respectively
#1032 - [#_UIL[n]] R Interface input signals (LONG), UI000 - UI031
#1035 / UI100 - UI131 / UI200 - UI231 / UI300 - UI331
(Note) Subscript n (0 - 3) 0=UI000 - UI031,
1=UI100 - UI131, 2=UI200 - UI231,
3=UI300 - UI331
Unified input of <Gn054 - Gn057>
#1100 - [#_UO[n]] R/W Interface output signals (BIT), UO000 - UO031
#1131 (Note)Subscript n represents a BIT position (0-31).
Corresponds to <Fn054 - Fn057>, respectively
#1132 - [#_UOL[n]] R/W Interface output signals (LONG),UO000 - UO031/
#1135 UO100 - UO131 / UO200 - UO231 /
UO300 - UO331
(Note) Subscript n (0 - 3): 0=UO000 - UO031,
1=UO100 - UO131, 2=UO200 - UO231,
3=UO300 - UO331
Unified output of <Fn054 - Fn057>
- Tool compensation value

M
Tool compensation memory A

System
System Attri-
variable Description
variable name bute
number
#2001 - [#_OFS[n]] R/W Tool compensation value
#2200 (Note) Subscript n represents a
compensation number (1 - 200).
#10001 - When the number of sets is larger than 200,
#10999 the numbers to the left can also be used.
(Note) Subscript n represents a
compensation number (1 - 999).
97
B-63947EN/01
Tool compensation memory B when parameter V15 (No.6000#3) = 0

System
System Attri-
variable name bute
number
#2001 - [#_OFSW[n]] R/W Tool compensation value (wear)
#2200 (Note) Subscript n represents a compensation
number (1 - 200).
#10001 - The numbers to the left can also be used.
number (1 - 999).
#2201 - [#_OFSG[n]] R/W Tool compensation value (H code, geometry) 5
number (1 - 200).
number (1 - 999).
Tool compensation memory B when parameter V15 (No.6000#3) = 1

System
System Attri-
variable name bute
number
#2001 - [#_OFSG[n]] R/W Tool compensation value (geometry)
number (1 - 200).
number (1 - 999).
#2201 - [#_OFSW[n]] R/W Tool compensation value (H code, wear)
number (1 - 200).
number (1 - 999).
Tool compensation memory C when parameter V15 (No.6000#3) = 0

System
System Attri-
variable name bute
number
#2001 - [#_OFSHW[n]] R/W Tool compensation value (H code, wear)
number (1 - 200).
number (1 - 999).
#2201 - [#_OFSHG[n]] R/W Tool compensation value (H code, geometry)
number (1 - 200).
number (1 - 999).
#12001 - [#_OFSDW[n]] R/W Tool compensation value (D code, wear)
number (1 - 999).
# 13001 [#_OFSDG[n]] R/W Tool compensation value (D code, geometry)
- #13999 (Note) Subscript n represents a compensation
number (1 - 999).
98
5 CUSTOM MACRO
Tool compensation memory C when parameter V15 (No.6000#3) = 1
System
System Attri-
variable name bute
number
#2001 - [#_OFSHG[n]] R/W Tool compensation value (H code, geometry)
number (1 - 200).
number (1 - 999).
#2201 - [#_OFSHW[n]] R/W Tool compensation value (H code, wear)
number (1 - 200).
number (1 - 999).
#2401 - [#_OFSDG[n]] R/W Tool compensation value (D code, geometry)
#2600 (Note 1)
Subscript n represents a compensation
number (1 - 200).
(Note 1) Enabled when parameter D15
(No.6004#5) = 1.
number (1 - 999).
#2601 - [#_OFSDW[n]] R/W Tool compensation value (D code, wear)
#2800 (Note 1)
Subscript n represents a compensation
number (1 - 200).
(Note 1) Enabled when parameter D15
(No.6004#5) = 1.
number (1 - 999).
- Tool compensation value

T
Without tool geometry/wear compensation memory

System
System Attri-
variable name bute
number
#2001 - [#_OFSX[n]] R/W X-axis compensation value (*1)
number (1 - 64).
#10999 the numbers to the left can be used.
(Note) Subscript n represents a compensation
number (1 - 999).
#2101 - [#_OFSZ[n]] R/W Z-axis compensation value (*1)
number (1 - 64).
number (1 - 999).
#2201 - [#_OFSR[n]] R/W Tool nose radius compensation value
number (1 - 64).
number (1 - 999).
99
B-63947EN/01
Without tool geometry/wear compensation memory

System
System Attri-
variable name bute
number
#2301 - [#_OFST[n]] R/W Virtual tool tip T position
number (1 - 64).
number (1 - 999).
#2401 - [#_OFSY[n]] R/W Y-axis compensation value (*1) 5
number (1 - 49).
number (1 - 999).
(*1) X-axis: X-axis of basic three axes, Z-axis: Z-axis of basic three axes,
Y-axis: Y-axis of basic three axes
With tool geometry/wear compensation memory

System
System Attri-
variable name bute
number
#2001 - [#_OFSXW[n]] R/W X-axis compensation value (wear) (*1)
number (1 - 64).
number (1 - 999).
#2101 - [#_OFSZW[n]] R/W Z-axis compensation value (wear) (*1)
number (1 - 64).
number (1 - 999).
#2201 - [#_OFSRW[n]] R/W Tool nose radius compensation value (wear)
number (1 - 64).
number (1 - 999).
#2301 - [#_OFST[n]] R/W Virtual tool tip T position
number (1 - 64).
number (1 - 999).
#2401 - [#_OFSYW[n]] R/W Y-axis compensation value (wear) (*1)
number (1 - 49).
number (1 - 999).
100
5 CUSTOM MACRO
With tool geometry/wear compensation memory
System
System Attri-
variable name bute
number
#2451 - [#_OFSYG[n]] R/W Y-axis compensation value (geometry) (*1)
number (1 - 49).
number (1 - 999).
#2701 - [#_OFSXG[n]] R/W X-axis compensation value (geometry) (*1)
number (1 - 49).
number (1 - 49).
#2801 - [#_OFSZG[n]] R/W Z-axis compensation value (geometry) (*1)
number (1 - 49).
number (1 - 999).
#2901 - [#_OFSRG[n]] R/W Tool nose radius compensation value
#2964 (geometry)
#17001 - number (1 - 64).
#17999 When the number of sets is larger than 64,
the numbers to the left can be used.
number (1 - 999).
(*1) X-axis: X-axis of basic three axes, Z-axis: Z-axis of basic three axes,
- Workpiece coordinate system shift amount

T
System
System Attri-
variable name bute
number
#2501 [#_WKSFTX] R/W X-axis workpiece shift amount (*1)
#2601 [#_WKSFTZ] R/W Z-axis workpiece shift amount (*1)
(*1) X-axis: X-axis of basic three axes, Z-axis: Z-axis of basic three axes
- Automatic operation or the like

System System
Attri-
bute
number name
#3000 [#_ALM] W Macro alarm
#3001 [#_CLOCK1] R/W Clock 1 (Unit: ms)
#3002 [#_CLOCK2] R/W Clock 2 (Unit: hr)
#3003 [#_CNTL1] R/W Enable or disable the suppression of single
block stop.
Enable or disable the waiting of the auxiliary
function completion signal.
#3003 bit0 [#_M_SBK] R/W Enable or disable the suppression of single
block stop.
#3003 bit1 [#_M_FIN] R/W Enable or disable waiting for the auxiliary
function completion signal.
101
B-63947EN/01
System System
Attri-
bute
number name
#3004 [#_CNTL2] R/W Enable or disable feed hold.
Enable or disable feedrate override.
Enable or disable exact stop check.
#3004 bit0 [#_M_FHD] R/W Enable or disable feed hold.
#3004 bit1 [#_M_OV] R/W Enable or disable feedrate override.
#3004 bit2 [#_M_EST] R/W Enable or disable exact stop check.
#3005 [#_SETDT] R/W Read/write setting data.
#3006 [#_MSGSTP] W Stop with a message.
5
#3007 [#_MRIMG] R Status of a mirror image (DI and setting)
#3008 [#_PRSTR] R Restarting/not restarting a program
- Time
System
System variable Attri-
name bute
number
#3011 [#_DATE] R Year/Month/Date
#3012 [#_TIME] R Hour/Minute/Second
- Number of parts
System
name bute
number
#3901 [#_PRTSA] R/W Total number of parts
#3902 [#_PRTSN] R/W Number of required parts
- Tool compensation memory

M
System
System Attri-
variable name bute
number
#3980 [#_OFSMEM] R Tool compensation memory information
- Main program number

System
System Attri-
variable name bute
number
#4000 [#_MAINO] R Main program number
- Modal information
M
System System
Attri-
bute
number name
#4001 - [#_BUFG[n]] R Modal information on blocks that have been
#4030 specified by last minute (G code)
(Note) Subscript n represents a G code group
number.
#4102 [#_BUFB] R Modal information on blocks that have been
specified by last minute (B code)
#4107 [#_BUFD] R Modal information on blocks that have been
specified by last minute (D code)
#4108 [#_BUFE] R Modal information on blocks that have been
specified by last minute (E code)
#4109 [#_BUFF] R Modal information on blocks that have been
specified by last minute (F code)
102
5 CUSTOM MACRO
System System
Attri-
bute
number name
#4111 [#_BUFH] R Modal information on blocks that have been
specified by last minute (H code)
#4113 [#_BUFM] R Modal information on blocks that have been
specified by last minute (M code)
#4114 [#_BUFN] R Modal information on blocks that have been
specified by last minute (sequence number)
#4115 [#_BUFO] R Modal information on blocks that have been
specified by last minute (program number)
#4119 [#_BUFS] R Modal information on blocks that have been
specified by last minute (S code)
#4120 [#_BUFT] R Modal information on blocks that have been
specified by last minute (T code)
#4130 [#_BUFWZP] R Modal information on blocks that have been
specified by last minute (additional workpiece
coordinate system number)
#4201 - [#_ACTG[n]] R Modal information on the block currently being
#4230 executed (G code)
number.
#4302 [#_ACTB] R Modal information on the block currently being
executed (B code)
#4307 [#_ACTD] R Modal information on the block currently being
executed (D code)
#4308 [#_ACTE] R Modal information on the block currently being
executed (E code)
#4309 [#_ACTF] R Modal information on the block currently being
executed (F code)
#4311 [#_ACTH] R Modal information on the block currently being
executed (H code)
#4313 [#_ACTM] R Modal information on the block currently being
executed (M code)
#4314 [#_ACTN] R Modal information on the block currently being
executed (sequence number)
#4315 [#_ACTO] R Modal information on the block currently being
executed (program number)
#4319 [#_ACTS] R Modal information on the block currently being
executed (S code)
#4320 [#_ACTT] R Modal information on the block currently being
executed (T code)
#4330 [#_ACTWZP] R Modal information on the block currently being
executed (additional workpiece coordinate
system number)
#4502 [#_INTB] R Modal information on interrupted blocks (B code)
#4507 [#_INTD] R Modal information on interrupted blocks (D code)
#4508 [#_INTE] R Modal information on interrupted blocks (E code)
#4509 [#_INTF] R Modal information on interrupted blocks (F code)
#4511 [#_INTH] R Modal information on interrupted blocks (H code)
#4513 [#_INTM] R Modal information on interrupted blocks (M code)
#4514 [#_INTN] R Modal information on interrupted blocks
(sequence number)
#4515 [#_INTO] R Modal information on interrupted blocks
(program number)
#4519 [#_INTS] R Modal information on interrupted blocks (S code)
#4520 [#_INTT] R Modal information on interrupted blocks (T code)
#4530 [#_INTWZP] R Modal information on interrupted blocks
(additional workpiece coordinate system
number)
103
B-63947EN/01
System System
Attri-
bute
number name
#4001 - [#_BUFG[n]] R Modal information on blocks that have been
#4030 specified by last minute (G code)
number.
#4108 [#_BUFE] R Modal information on blocks that have been
specified by last minute (E code)
#4109 [#_BUFF] R Modal information on blocks that have been 5
specified by last minute (F code)
#4113 [#_BUFM] R Modal information on blocks that have been
specified by last minute (M code)
#4114 [#_BUFN] R Modal information on blocks that have been
specified by last minute (sequence number)
#4115 [#_BUFO] R Modal information on blocks that have been
specified by last minute (program number)
#4119 [#_BUFS] R Modal information on blocks that have been
specified by last minute (S code)
#4120 [#_BUFT] R Modal information on blocks that have been
specified by last minute (T code)
#4130 [#_BUFWZP] R Modal information on blocks that have been
specified by last minute (additional workpiece
coordinate system number)
#4201 - [#_ACTG[n]] R Modal information on the block currently being
#4230 executed (G code)
number.
#4308 [#_ACTE] R Modal information on the block currently being
executed (E code)
#4309 [#_ACTF] R Modal information on the block currently being
executed (F code)
#4313 [#_ACTM] R Modal information on the block currently being
executed (M code)
#4314 [#_ACTN] R Modal information on the block currently being
executed (sequence number)
#4315 [#_ACTO] R Modal information on the block currently being
executed (program number)
#4319 [#_ACTS] R Modal information on the block currently being
executed (S code)
#4320 [#_ACTT] R Modal information on the block currently being
executed (T code)
#4330 [#_ACTWZP] R Modal information on the block currently being
executed (additional workpiece coordinate
system number)
#4401 - [#_INTG[n]] R Modal information on interrupted blocks (G code)
#4430 (Note) Subscript n represents a G code group
number.
#4508 [#_INTE] R Modal information on interrupted blocks (E code)
#4509 [#_INTF] R Modal information on interrupted blocks (F code)
#4513 [#_INTM] R Modal information on interrupted blocks (M code)
#4514 [#_INTN] R Modal information on interrupted blocks
(sequence number)
#4515 [#_INTO] R Modal information on interrupted blocks
(program number)
#4519 [#_INTS] R Modal information on interrupted blocks (S code)
#4520 [#_INTT] R Modal information on interrupted blocks (T code)
104
5 CUSTOM MACRO
System System
Attri-
bute
number name
#4530 [#_INTWZP] R Modal information on interrupted blocks
(additional workpiece coordinate system
number)
- Position information
System
System Attri-
variable name bute
number
#5001 - [#_ABSIO[n]] R End point position of the previous block
#5020 (workpiece coordinate system)
(Note) Subscript n represents an axis
number (1 - 20).
#100050 (Note) Subscript n represents an axis
number (1 - 50).
#5021 - [#_ABSMT[n]] R Specified current position (machine
#5040 coordinate system)
number (1 - 20).
number (1 - 50).
#5041 - [#_ABSOT[n]] R Specified current position (workpiece
#5060 coordinate system)
number (1 - 20).
number (1 - 50).
#5061 - [#_ABSKP[n]] R Skip position (workpiece coordinate system)
number (1 - 20).
number (1 - 50).
- Tool length compensation value

M
System
System Attri-
variable name bute
number
#5081 - [#_TOFS[n]] R Tool length compensation value
number (1 - 20).
number (1 - 50).
- Tool offset value

T
System variable System Attri-

Description
number variable name bute
#5081, #100201 [#_TOFSWX] R X-axis tool offset (wear)
#5082, #100202 [#_TOFSWZ] Z-axis tool offset (wear)
#5083, #100203 [#_TOFSWY] Y-axis tool offset (wear)
105
B-63947EN/01
System variable System Attri-

Description
number variable name bute
#5084 - #5100 [#_TOFS[n]] R Tool position offset on an arbitrary
axis (wear)
(Note) Subscript n represents an
axis number (4 - 20).
#100204 - The numbers to the left can also be
#100250 used.
#5121, #100901 [#_TOFSGX] R X-axis tool offset (geometry)
#5122, #100902 [#_TOFSGZ] Z-axis tool offset (geometry) 5
#5123, #100903 [#_TOFSGY] Y-axis tool offset (geometry)
#5124 - #5140 [#_TOFSG[n]] R Tool position offset on an arbitrary
axis (geometry)
#100904 - The numbers to the left can also be
#100950 used.
X-axis: X-axis of basic three axes, Z-axis: Z-axis of basic three axes,
- Servo position deviation

System
System Attri-
variable name bute
number
#5101 - [#_SVERR[n]] R Servo position deviation
number (1 - 20).
number (1 - 50).
- Manual handle interruption

System
System Attri-
variable name bute
number
#5121 - [#_MIRTP[n]] R Manual handle interruption
number (1 - 20).
100700 (Note) Subscript n represents an axis
number (1 - 50).
- Distance to go
System
System Attri-
variable name bute
number
#5181 - [#_DIST[n]] R Distance to go
number (1 - 20).
number (1 - 50).
106
5 CUSTOM MACRO
- Workpiece origin offset value, extended workpiece origin offset
value
M
System
System Attri-
variable name bute
number
#5201 - [#_WZCMN[n]] R/W Common workpiece origin offset value
number (1 - 20).
#5221 - [#_WZG54[n]] R/W G54 workpiece origin offset value
number (1 - 20).
number (1 - 20).
number (1 - 20).
number (1 - 20).
number (1 - 20).
number (1 - 20).
#100301 - [#_WZCMN[n]] R/W Common workpiece origin offset value
number (1 - 50).
number (1 - 50).
number (1 - 50).
number (1 - 50).
number (1 - 50).
number (1 - 50).
number (1 - 50).
Extended workpiece origin offset value
#7001 - [#_WZP1[n]] R/W G54.1P1 workpiece origin offset value
number (1 - 20).
number (1 - 20).
: : : :
number (1 - 20).
number (1 - 20).
107
B-63947EN/01
System
System Attri-
variable name bute
number
number (1 - 20).
: : : :
number (1 - 20).
#101050 (Note) Subscript n represents an axis 5
number (1 - 50).
number (1 - 50).
: : : :
number (1 - 50).
number (1 - 50).
System
System Attri-
variable name bute
number
#5201 - [#_WZCMN[n]] R/W External workpiece origin offset value
number (1 - 20).
number (1 - 20).
number (1 - 20).
number (1 - 20).
number (1 - 20).
number (1 - 20).
number (1 - 20).
#100301 - [#_WZCMN[n]] R/W External workpiece origin offset value
number (1 - 50).
number (1 - 50).
number (1 - 50).
number (1 - 50).
108
5 CUSTOM MACRO
System
System Attri-
variable name bute
number
number (1 - 50).
number (1 - 50).
number (1 - 50).
Extended workpiece origin offset value
number (1 - 20).
number (1 - 20).
: : : :
number (1 - 20).
number (1 - 50).
number (1 - 50).
: : : :
number (1 - 50).
number (1 - 50).
- Skip position (detection unit)

System
name bute
number
#5421 - [#_SKPDTC[n]] R Skip position (detection unit)
number (1 - 20).
number (1 - 50).
- Rotary table dynamic fixture offset value

M
System
name bute
number
#5500 [#_FOFSP] R Number of the standard fixture offset
being selected (P)
109
B-63947EN/01
System
name bute
number
#5501 - [#_FOFSVAL[n]] R Offset value of the standard fixture offset
#5520 being selected
number (1 - 20).
number (1 - 50).
#5521 - [#_FOFS1[n]] R/W Standard fixture offset value (first set)
#5540 (Note) Subscript n represents an axis 5
number (1 - 20).
number (1 - 50).
#5541 - [#_FOFS2[n]] R/W Standard fixture offset value (second set)
number (1 - 20).
number (1 - 50).
#5561 - [#_FOFS3[n]] R/W Standard fixture offset value (third set)
number (1 - 20).
number (1 - 50).
#5581 - [#_FOFS4[n]] R/W Standard fixture offset value (fourth set)
number (1 - 20).
number (1 - 50).
#5601 - [#_FOFS5[n]] R/W Standard fixture offset value (fifth set)
number (1 - 20).
number (1 - 50).
#5621 - [#_FOFS6[n]] R/W Standard fixture offset value (sixth set)
number (1 - 20).
number (1 - 50).
#5641 - [#_FOFS7[n]] R/W Standard fixture offset value (seventh
#5660 set)
number (1 - 20).
number (1 - 50).
#5661 - [#_FOFS8[n]] R/W Standard fixture offset value (eighth set)
number (1 - 20).
number (1 - 50).
110
5 CUSTOM MACRO
- Dynamic standard tool compensation value
M
System
System Attri-
variable name bute
number
#118051 - [#_DOFS1[n]] R/W Dynamic standard tool compensation value
#118100 (first set)
number (1 - 50).
#118150 (second set)
number (1 - 50).
#118200 (third set)
number (1 - 50).
#118250 (fourth set)
number (1 - 50).
#118300 (fifth set)
number (1 - 50).
#118350 (sixth set)
number (1 - 50).
#118400 (seventh set)
number (1 - 50).
#118450 (eighth set)
number (1 - 50).
- Others
System System
Attri-
bute
number name
＃8570 R/W Switching between P-CODE/system variables
(#10000 and above)
#8570=0 : System variable
#8570=1 : P code variable
- System variable
System constant System
Attribute Description
number constant name
#0 , #3100 [#_EMPTY] R Null
#3101 [#_PI] R Circular constant
π = 3.14159265358979323846
#3102 [#_E] R Base of natural logarithm
e = 2.71828182845904523536
111
B-63947EN/01
5.3 ARGUMENT SPECIFICATION I/II

• Argument specification I addresses and corresponding variables in
macros
Address Variable Address Variable Address Variable
number number number
A #1 I #4 T #20
B #2 J #5 U #21
C #3 K #6 V #22
D #7 M #13 W #23
E #8 Q #17 X #24
F #9 R #18 Y #25
H #11 S #19 Z #26
5
I, J, and K need to be specified alphabetically.
Argument specification I is always used for I, J, and K by setting
parameter IJK (No. 6008#7) to 1. In this case, you need not specify
them in alphabetical order.
• Argument specification II addresses and corresponding variables in

macros
Argument specification II uses A, B, and C once each and uses I, J,
and K up to ten times. Argument specification II is used to pass
values such as three-dimensional coordinates as arguments.
Address Variable Address Variable Address Variable
number number number
A #1 IK3 #12 J7 #23
B #2 I4 #13 K7 #24
C #3 J4 #14 I8 #25
I1 #4 K4 #15 J8 #26
J1 #5 I5 #16 K8 #27
K1 #6 J5 #17 I9 #28
I2 #7 K5 #18 J9 #29
J2 #8 I6 #19 K9 #30
K2 #9 J6 #20 I10 #31
I3 #10 K6 #21 J10 #32
J3 #11 I7 #22 K10 #33
• Subscripts of I, J, and K for indicating the order of argument

specification are not written in the actual program.
• If parameter IJK (No. 6008#7) is 1, argument specification II cannot
be used.
5.4 ARITHMETIC AND LOGIC OPERATION

Type of
Operation Description
operation
<1> #i=#j Definition or replacement of a variable
Definition or
replacement
<2> #i=#j+#k Addition
Addition- type #i=#j-#k Subtraction
operations #i=#j OR #k Logical OR (bit by bit of 32 bits)
#i=#j XOR #k Exclusive OR (bit by bit of 32 bits)
<3> #i=#j*#k Multiplication
Multiplication- #i=#j/#k Division
type #i=#j AND #k Logical AND (bit by bit of 32 bits)
operations #i=#j MOD #k Remainder (A remainder is obtained after #j
and #k are rounded to their nearest whole
numbers. When #j is a negative value, #i is
assumed to be a negative value.)
112
5 CUSTOM MACRO
Type of
Operation Description
operation
<4> #i=SIN[#j] Sine (in degrees)
Functions #i=COS[#j] Cosine (in degrees)
#i=TAN[#j] Tangent (in degrees)
#i=ASIN[#j] Arc sine
#i=ACOS[#j] Arc cosine
#i=ATAN[#j] Arc tangent (one argument), ATN can also
be used.
#i=ATAN[#j]/[#k] Arc tangent (two arguments), ATN can also
be used.
#i=ATAN[#j,#k] Arc tangent (two arguments), ATN can also
be used.
#i=SQRT[#j] Square root, SQR can also be used.
#i=ABS[#j] Absolute value
#i=BIN[#j] Conversion from BCD to binary
#i=BCD[#j] Conversion from binary to BCD
#i=ROUND[#j] Rounding off, RND can also be used.
#i=FIX[#j] Rounding down to an integer
#i=FUP[#j] Rounding up to an integer
#i=LN[#j] Natural logarithm
#i=EXP[#j] Exponent using base e (2.718...)
#i=POW[#j,#k] Power (#j to the #kth power)
#i=ADP[#j] Addition of a decimal point
5.5 CONTROL COMMAND

Purpose Expression Kind of operation (operator)
Unconditional GOTOn
branch n : Sequence number
(1-99999999)
Branch to sequence number n
unconditionally.
Conditional IF[<conditional expression #j EQ #k(=) Equal to
branch >]GOTOn #j NE #k(≠) Not equal to
Branch to sequence number n #j GT #k(>) Greater than
when <conditional expression> is #j LT #k(<) Less than
satisfied (true); otherwise, execute #j GE #k(≥) Greater than
the next block. or equal to
#j LE #k(≤) Less than or
IF[<conditional expression equal
>]THEN
Execute the macro statement
specified after THEN when
<conditional expression> is
satisfied (true). Only one macro
statement may be specified.
Repetition WHILE [conditional expression ] #j EQ #k(=) Equal to
DO m ; (m=1,2,3) #j NE #k(≠) Not equal to
Processing #j GT #k(>) Greater than
END m #j LT #k(<) Less than
#j GE #k(≥) Greater than
or equal to
#j LE #k(≤) Less than or
equal
113
B-63947EN/01
5.6 MACRO CALL

Macro call Simple call (G65)
Modal call (G66, G66.1, G67)
Macro call using a G code
Macro call using an M code
Subprogram call Subprogram call using an M code
Subprogram call using a T code
Subprogram call using an S code
Subprogram call using a second auxiliary function code
Subprogram call using a specific code
- Called program and folders to be searched 5

The order in which folders are called depends on the method of calling a
macro or subprogram.
Folders are searched in sequence and the program found first is called.
Call nesting
The macro call nesting level is five, including simple calls (G65) and
modal calls (G66/G66.1). The subprogram call nesting level is 15,
including macro calls.
5.6.1 Simple Call (G65)

G65 P p L l <argument-specification> ; P : Number of the program to call
l : Repetition count (1 by default)
Argument : Data passed to the macro
O0001 ; O9010 ;
: #3=#1+#2 ;
G65 P9010 L2 A1.0 B2.0 ; IF [#3 GT 360] GOTO 9 ;
: G00 G91 X#3 ;
M30 ; N9 M99 ;
5.6.2 Modal Call: Call After the Move Command (G66)

Once G66 is issued to specify a modal call a macro is called after a block
specifying movement along axes is executed. This continues until G67 is
issued to cancel a modal call.
G66 P p L l <argument-specification> ; P : Number of the program to call
O0001 ; O9100 ;
: :
G66 P9100 L2 A1.0 B2.0 ; G00 Z-#1 ;
G00 G90 X100.0 ; G01 Z-#2 F300 ;
Y200.0 ; :
X150.0 Y300.0 ; :
G67 ; :
: :
M30 ; M99 ;
114
5 CUSTOM MACRO
5.6.3 Modal Call: Each Block Call (G66.1)
Specified macro is unconditionally called for each NC command block.
All data other than O, file name, N, and G codes that is specified in each
block is not executed and is used as arguments.
P : Number of the program to call
G66.1 P p L l <argument-specification> ;
O0001 ; O9100 ;
: :
G66.1 P9100 L2 A1.0 G00 Z-#1 ;
B2.0 ; G01 Z-#2 F#9 ;
A10.0 B20.0 F300 ; :
A0 B-30.0 ; :
F1000 ; :
G67 ; :
: M99 ;
5.6.4 Macro Call Using a G Code

By setting a G code number used to call a macro program in a parameter,
the macro program can be called in the same way as for a simple call
(G65).
O0001 ; O9010 ;
: :
G81 X10.0 Y20.0 Z-10.0 ; :
: :
M30 ; N9 M99 ;
Parameter No.6050=81
- Correspondence between parameter numbers and program

numbers
G code with no decimal point G code with a decimal point
Parameter Program Parameter Program
number number number number
6050 O9010 6060 O9040
6051 O9011 6061 O9041
6052 O9012 6062 O9042
6053 O9013 6063 O9043
6054 O9014 6064 O9044
6055 O9015 6065 O9045
6056 O9016 6066 O9046
6057 O9017 6067 O9047
6058 O9018 6068 O9048
6059 O9019 6069 O9049
115
B-63947EN/01
5.6.5 Macro Call Using an M Code

By setting an M code number used to call a macro program in a
parameter, the macro program can be called in the same way as with a
simple call (G65).
O0001 ; O9020 ;
: :
M50 A1.0 B2.0 ; :
: :
M30 ; M99 ;
5
numbers
Parameter number Corresponding program number
6080 O9020
6081 O9021
6082 O9022
6083 O9023
6084 O9024
6085 O9025
6086 O9026
6087 O9027
6088 O9028
6089 O9029
5.6.6 Subprogram Call Using an M Code

By setting an M code number used to call a subprogram (macro
program) in a parameter, the macro program can be called in the same
way as with a subprogram call (M98).
O0001 ; O9001 ;
: :
M03 ; :
: :
M30 ; M99 ;

numbers
Parameter number Program number
6071 O9001
6072 O9002
6073 O9003
6074 O9004
6075 O9005
6076 O9006
6077 O9007
6078 O9008
6079 O9009
116
5 CUSTOM MACRO
5.6.7 Subprogram Calls Using a T Code
By enabling subprograms to be called with a T code in a parameter, a
subprogram can be called each time the T code is specified in the
machining program.
O0001 ; O9000 ;
: :
T23 ; :
: :
M30 ; M99 ;
Parameter No.6001#5=1
By setting parameter TCS (No. 6001#5) to 1, subprogram O9000 can be

called each time a T code is specified in a machining program. A T code
specified in a machining program is assigned to common variable #149.
5.6.8 Subprogram Calls Using an S Code

By enabling subprograms to be called with an S code in a parameter, a
subprogram can be called each time the S code is specified in the
machining program.
O0001 ; O9029 ;
: :
S23 ; :
: :
M30 ; M99 ;
By setting parameter SCS (No. 6007#1) to 1, subprogram O9029 can be

called each time a S code is specified in a machining program. An S
code specified in a machining program is assigned to common variable
#147.
5.6.9 Subprogram Calls Using a Secondary Auxiliary

Function
By enabling subprograms to be called with a secondary auxiliary function
in a parameter, a subprogram can be called each time the secondary
auxiliary function is specified in the machining program.
O0001 ; O9028 ;
: :
B23 ; :
: :
M30 ; M99 ;
By setting parameter BCS (No. 6007#2) to 1, subprogram O9028 can be

called each time a secondary auxiliary function code is specified in a
machining program. A secondary auxiliary function specified in a
machining program is assigned to common variable #146.
117
B-63947EN/01
5.6.10 Subprogram Call Using a Specific Address

By enabling subprograms to be called with a specific address in a
parameter, a subprogram can be called each time the specific address is
specified in the machining program.
O0001 ; O9004 ;(#146=100.)

: :
B100. ; :
: :
M30 ; M99 ;
Parameter No.6090=66(B)
5
By setting the code (ASCII code converted to decimal) corresponding to
a specific address in parameter (No. 6090 or No. 6091), the custom
macro program, O9004 or O9005, corresponding to each parameter can
be called when the specific address is specified in a machining program.
The code value corresponding to a specific address specified in a
machining program is assigned to the common variables (#146, #147).
The table below indicates the addresses that can be set.
Address Parameter setting

A 65
B 66
D 68
F 70
H 72
I 73
J 74
K 75
L 76
M 77
P 80
Q 81
R 82
S 83
T 84
V 86
X 88
Y 89
Z 90
NOTE
When address L is set, the number of repetitions cannot be set.

A 65
B 66
F 70
H 72
I 73
J 74
K 75
L 76
M 77
P 80
118
5 CUSTOM MACRO
Q 81
R 82
S 83
T 84
NOTE
When address L is set, the number of repetitions cannot be set.

numbers and between the parameter numbers and common
variables
Parameter number Program number Common variable
6090 O9004 #146
6091 O9005 #147
5.7 INTERRUPTION TYPE CUSTOM MACRO

When a program is being executed, another program can be called by
inputting an interrupt signal (UINT) from the machine.
This function is referred to as an interruption type custom macro function.
Program an interrupt command in the following format:
Format
M96Pxxxx ; Enables custom macro interrupt
M97 ; Disables custom macro interrupt
M96 Pxxxxxxxx;
Interrupt signal
(UINT) * O xxxxxxxx;
Interrupt signal
(UINT) **
M99 (Pxxxxxxxx) ;
Nxxxxxxxx ;
M97 ; Interrupt signal

(UINT) *
119
B-63947EN/01
5.8 EXTERNAL OUTPUT COMMANDS

In addition to the standard custom macro commands, the following
macro commands are available. They are referred to as external output
commands.
• BPRNT
• DPRNT
• POPEN
• PCLOS
These commands are provided to output variable values and characters
through the reader/puncher interface.
- Open command POPEN 5

The POPEN command establishes a connection to an external
input/output device. It must be specified before a sequence of data
output commands. The CNC outputs a DC2 control code.
- Data output command BPRNT
The BPRNT command outputs characters and variable values in binary.
BPRNT [ a #b [c] --- ]
Number of significant decimal places

Variable
Character
(i) Specified characters are converted to the codes according to the
setting data (ISO) that is output at that time.
Specifiable characters are as follows:
• Letters (A to Z)
• Numbers
• Special characters (*, /, +, -, ?, @, &, _)
(ii) All variables are stored with a decimal point. Specify a variable
followed by the number of significant decimal places enclosed in
brackets. A variable value is treated as 2-word (32-bit) data,
including the decimal digits. It is output as binary data starting from
the highest byte.
(iii) When specified data has been output, an EOB code is output
according to the setting code (ISO).
(iv) <Null> variables are regarded as 0.
- Data output command DPRNT
DPRNT [ a #b [c d] --- ]
Number of significant decimal places
Number of significant digits in the integer part

Variable
Character
The DPRNT command outputs characters and each digit in the value of
a variable according to the code set in the settings (ISO).
(i) For an explanation of the DPRNT command, see Items (i), (iii), and
(iv) for the BPRNT command.
(ii) When outputting a variable, specify # followed by the variable
number, then specify the number of digits in the integer part and the
number of decimal places enclosed in brackets.
For the value of a variable, as many codes as the specified number
of digits are output according to the settings one by one, starting
with the highest digit. The decimal point is also output using the set
code. Each variable must be a numeric value consisting of up to
nine digits. When high-order digits are zeros, these zeros are not
output if parameter PRT (No. 6001#1) is 1. If parameter PRT is 0, a
space code is output each time a zero is encountered.
When the number of decimal places is not zero, digits in the decimal
part are always output. If the number of decimal places is zero, no
decimal point is output. When parameter PRT (No. 6001#1) is 0, a
space code is output to indicate a positive number instead of +; if
parameter PRT is 1, no code is output.
120
5 CUSTOM MACRO
- Close command PCLOS

The PCLOS command releases a connection to an external input/output
device. Specify this command when all data output commands have
terminated. DC4 control code is output from the CNC.
5.9 COMMAND RANGE

Item Contents
Usable variable Local variable: #1-#33
Common variable: #100-#149, #500-#549
Additional common variable: #100-#199, #500-#999
System variable:
greater than #1000, greater than #100000
Usable value of variable When parameter F16 (No.6008#0) = 0
Maximum value: Approx. ±10308
Minimum value: Approx. ±10-308
When parameter F16 (No.6008#0) = 1
Maximum value: Approx. ±1047
Minimum value: Approx. ±10-29
Constant value usable Maximum value: ±999999999999
in <expression> Minimum value: ±0.00000000001
The maximum allowable number of digits is 12 in
decimal notation.
Decimal 15 digits
Arithmetic precision
Decimal 8 digits
Macro call duplex Max. 5 loops
Iteration 1-3
Nesting Max. 5 loops
Nesting of subprograms Max. 10 loops (15 loops including macro calls)
121
6 HARDWARE
6.1 LCD-MOUNTED TYPE Series 30i/31i/32i
HARDWARE
This section describes the printed circuit boards in the LCD-mounted
type Series 30i/31i/32i control units and the functions of the card PCBs
on the printed circuit boards.
6.1.1 Hardware Structure.................................................................. 123
6.1.2 Overview of Hardware ............................................................. 124
6.1.3 Total Connection Diagrams ..................................................... 125
6.1.4 Configuration of Printed Circuit Board Connectors and Cards . 128
6.1.5 List of Units and Printed Circuit Boards ................................... 147
6.1.6 I/O ........................................................................................... 150
6.1.1 Hardware Structure

Control/LCD unit MDI unit
Optical cable Servo motor
Servo amplifier
I/O Link
Distributed I/O module,

I/O Unit MODEL-A
Machine operator's panel / Power magnetics circuit etc.
123
B-63947EN/01
6.1.2 Overview of Hardware
Main board
• CPU for controlling CNC
• Power supply
• 2-axis to 24-axis control
• Spindle interface
• LCD/MDI interface
• I/O Link
• PMC control function
• High-speed DI
• RS-232C
Fast Ethernet board • Memory card interface
Data server function • PC function
Ethernet communication function (for 300is/310is/320is)
6
Additional axis board
Basic system
Additional axis control function
I/O Link
Additional spindle board

Additional spindle control function
HSSB interface board

High-speed serial bus interface
Various types of network boards Options

FL-net board
PROFIBUS master board
PROFIBUS slave board
DeviceNet master board
DeviceNet slave board Unit without optional slots
or
Unit having one optional slot
or
Unit having two optional slots
On a unit with optional slots, as many optional boards as the slots can be
mounted.
124
6 HARDWARE
6.1.3 Total Connection Diagrams
Main board
LCD unit 24V-IN(CPD16A) 24 VDC power supply
MDI UNIT
MDI(CA55) CK27
R232-1(JD56A) RS-232-C I/O device

5th and 6th serial spindles
R232-2(JD36A
/JD54) { RS-232-C I/O device
Touch panel
HDI(JA40)
High-peed skip input
Distributed I/O Manual pulse generator

board
24VDC CPD1 JA3
JD1B Operator's
I/O Link(JD51A)
JD1A panel
24VDC CPD1 Distributed Power

JD1B I/O board, magnetics
JD1A I/O unit, etc. cabinet
SPDL(JA41)
Circuit breaker
200VAC
AC reactor 200VAC
MCC Circuit breaker
3rd and 4th
spindles PSM
Position coder
SPM
To 2nd spindle Serial spindle motor
FSSB(COP10A-1) COP10B
SVM Servo motor
COP10A
SVM Servo motor
COP10A
COP10B
SVM Servo motor
COP10A
COP10B
SVM Servo motor
COP10A
(In this figure, a 1-axis amplifier is used.)

Separate detector interface unit 1
24VDC CP11A JF101 Linear scale, axis 1

JF102 Linear scale, axis 2
COP10B JF103 Linear scale, axis 3
COP10A JF104 Linear scale, axis 4
CNF1 JA4A Absolute scale battery

(Required only when an absolute scale is used)
CP11A JF101 Linear scale, axis 1
ETHERNET(CD38A Ethernet
/CD38S)
125
B-63947EN/01
When optional functions are provided
Optional slot
SPDL(JA41L)
PSM Position coder
7th spindle
SPM
Additional axis board To 8th spindle
Servo motor
6
SVM
COP10A
COP10B
SVM Servo motor
COP10A
COP10B
SVM Servo motor
COP10A
COP10B
SVM Servo motor
COP10A

board
24VDC CPD1 JA3
I/O Link(JD1A) JD1B Operator's
panel
JD1A
24VDC CPD1 Distributed I/O

board, I/O unit, Power
JD1B etc. magnetics
cabinet
JD1A
126
6 HARDWARE
When optional functions are provided
Fast Ethernet board
ATA card The user should provide an ATA card.

Optional slot
ETHERNET(CD38R) Ethernet
HSSB board
HSSB(COP21N) Personal Computer or

PANEL i
(Note 1)
PROFIBUS
master board
PROFI(CN1) Another NC
or another PROFIBUS unit
PROFIBUS slave
board
or another PROFIBUS unit
DeviceNet master
board
DVNET(TBL) Another NC
or another DeviceNet unit
DeviceNet slave
board
or another DeviceNet unit
FL-net board
FLNET(CD38N) FL-net unit
NOTE 1 The 30i/31i/32i model is still used when a

personal computer or PANEL i is connected
using an HSSB interface.
127
B-63947EN/01
6.1.4 Configuration of Printed Circuit Board

Connectors and Cards
6.1.4.1 Printed circuit board for 7.2”/8.4”/10.4” display unit
Specification of main board
Name CNC model Specification
Main board A1 30i-A, 31i-A5 A20B-8100-0980
Main board A2 31i-A, 32i-A A20B-8100-0981
Main board A3 32i-A (without Ethernet) A20B-8100-0982
Main board A4 30i-A, 31i-A5 A20B-8101-0400
Main board A5 31i-A, 32i-A A20B-8101-0401
Main board A6 32i-A (without Ethernet) A20B-8101-0402 6
Connector mounting location

Connector unit
Fan motor Fan motor
Battery
Rear of unit
COP10A-1 COP10A-2
(COP10A is a connector installed on the servo card.)
CA55 JD56A JA40 JA41

CD38A
CK20A
CK21A CDP16A
JD36A JD51A
CA79A
JGM CA87A
CA88A
Main board
CA55 JD56A JA40 JA41

CD38A
CK20A
CK21A CPD16A
JD36A JD51A
128
6 HARDWARE
Connector No. Application
COP10A-1, COP10A-2 Servo amplifier (FSSB)
CA55 MDI
JD56A RS-232C serial port 1 / Serial spindle
JD36A RS-232C serial port 2
JA40 High-speed DI
JD51A I/O Link
JA41 Serial spindle
CPD16A 24VDC-IN
JGM Back panel interface
CA79A Video signal interface
CA88A PCMCIA interface
CK20A Soft key (horizontal type)
CK21A Soft key (vertical type)
CA87A Inverter
CD38A Ethernet
129
B-63947EN/01
Card and power supply unit mounting location
Connector
Connector
(1) Axis control (2) CPU card

card
6
Connector
(3) Power
supply unit
No. Name Specification Function Remarks

(1) Axis control A20B-3300-0445 HRV2: Up to 4 axes The maximum
card HRV3: Up to 3 axes number of
HRV4: Up to 1 axis axes is also
A20B-3300-0448 HRV2: Up to 8 axes limited
HRV3: Up to 6 axes depending on
HRV4: Up to 2 axes the model.
For the 32i,
A20B-3300-0447 HRV2: Up to 12 axes HRV4 is
HRV3: Up to 9 axes inapplicable.
HRV4: Up to 3 axes
A20B-3300-0442 HRV2: Up to 16 axes
HRV3: Up to 12 axes
HRV4: Up to 4 axes
A20B-3300-0440 HRV2: Up to 24 axes
HRV3: Up to 18 axes
HRV4: Up to 6 axes
(2) CPU card A20B-3300-0477 Standard version,
DRAM 32MB
A20B-3300-0474 Standard version,
DRAM 64MB
DRAM 128MB
A20B-3300-0470 High-speed version,
DRAM 64MB
DRAM 128MB
A20B-3300-0491 Dedicated to the 32i,
DRAM 32MB
DRAM 64MB
DRAM 128MB
(3) Power A20B-8101-0010
supply unit
130
6 HARDWARE
DIMM module mounting location
(1) PMC module (2) FROM/SRAM

module
Connector Connector
DIMM module
socket

(1) PMC module A20B-3900-0200
(2) FROM/SRAM A20B-3900-0160 FROM 16MB The FROM stores
module SRAM 1MB various control
A20B-3900-0161 FROM 16MB software programs,
SRAM 2MB user software
programs, and so
A20B-3900-0163 FROM 32MB forth.
SRAM 1MB The SRAM is a
A20B-3900-0164 FROM 32MB battery-backed
SRAM 2MB memory module.
A20B-3900-0166 FROM 64MB
SRAM 1MB
A20B-3900-0167 FROM 64MB
SRAM 2MB
A20B-3900-0180 FROM 16MB
SRAM 256kB
A20B-3900-0181 FROM 16MB
SRAM 512kB
A20B-3900-0182 FROM 32MB
SRAM 256kB
A20B-3900-0183 FROM 32MB
SRAM 512kB
131
B-63947EN/01
Block diagram
Main board
CPU card
CPU DRAM BOOT I/O Link

software 3,4ch
control
I/O Link
4ch
To back panel
Axis control card Display Peripheral Ethernet PMC module

control control control
I/O Link 1,2ch
control
6
DIMM module
FROM/SRAM
Power supply
unit
Calendar 5V, 3.3V, 2.5V
function
Display
unit
Lithium MDI Ethernet I/O Link

FSSB 24VDC
battery 3V RS232C 1,2,3ch
Memory card
Serial spindle
HDI
: Detachable card or module
132
6 HARDWARE
LED display
Rear of unit
(1) Alarm (red)
(2) Ethernet status

ALM1
ALM2
ALM3
LOW
COM
LINK
(3) 7-segment LED
(green) (yellow)
(1) Alarm LED (red) indication at system alarm occurrence

If any of these LEDs lights, it is likely that the hardware is defective.
Alarm LED
No. Meaning
3 2 1
1 Low battery voltage. The battery may be is running out.
2 Software detected an error and stopped the system.
3 Hardware detected a failure in the system.
4 An alarm was issued with the servo card on the main
board. The servo card or servo amplifier may be faulty, or
the FSSB may be broken.
5 An error was detected in the data of the SRAM on the
DIMM module.
The DIMM module may be faulty, the battery voltage may
have dropped, or the main board may be faulty.
6 Abnormal power supply operation.
The cause may be noise or a power supply module failure.
: On, : Off
Alarm LED Meaning

LOW The CPU card may be faulty.
(2) Ethernet status LED

Alarm LED Meaning
LINK (green) Turned on when a connection is made with the hub correctly
COM (yellow) Turned on when data is transferred
(3) 7-segment LED

See Section 19.4, “LED Display”.
133
B-63947EN/01
Jumper plug setting

TMBB (Short)
Ensure that this is short-circuited.
Main board
6
Inverter PCBs and Connector Units

Name Specification
Inverter P.C.B. For 7.2” color LCD A20B-8100-0961
For 8.4” color LCD A20B-8100-0963
For 10.4” color LCD A20B-8100-0962
Connector unit A15L-0001-0091
NOTE
The connector unit is fastened to the case with self-tapping screws.
Configuration of the inverter

Main board
Inverter (fan adapter as well)

CA87A
LCD
CP1 CN1
134
6 HARDWARE
Locations of the inverter and connector unit
Inverter Connector unit
Fan motor Fan motor
Battery
Rear of unit
6.1.4.2 Printed circuit board for 15” display unit

Name CNC model Specification
Main board B1 for 15” display unit 30i-A, 31i-A5 A20B-8101-0022
Main board B2 for 15” display unit 31i-A, 32i-A A20B-8101-0026
Main board F1 for 15” display unit 30i-A, 31i-A5 A20B-8101-0372
Main board F2 for 15” display unit 31i-A, 32i-A A20B-8101-0376
135
B-63947EN/01

Connector unit
Fan motor Fan motor
Battery
Rear of unit
(COP10A-1 and COP10A-2 are connectors

COP10A-1 COP10A-2 installed on the servo card.)
CA55 (FUSE) 6
JD56A JA40 JA41 Power
supply unit
COP
CD38S
JD54 JD51A
CPD16A
JGM CA87A CA98
CA88A
Main board
TP2 or
CA95 CA55
(FUSE)
JD56A JA40 JA41 Power
CPD12
supply unit
CK20A CD38S
CK21A JD54 JD51A
CPD16A

CA55 MDI
JD54 RS-232C serial port 2
JA40 High-speed DI
JD51A I/O Link
JA41 Serial spindle
CPD16A 24VDC-IN
CA98 Video signal interface
CA87A Fan adapter
CD38S Ethernet
TP2 or CA95 Touch panel interface
CPD12 Inverter interface
136
6 HARDWARE
(1) Main board B1, B2 for 15” display unit
Connector Connector Connector
(1) Axis control (2) CPU card (3) Display control

card card
ｺﾈｸﾀ
Connector
(4) Power supply unit

card HRV3: Up to 3 axes number of axes
HRV4: Up to 1 axis is also limited
A20B-3300-0448 HRV2: Up to 8 axes depending on the
HRV3: Up to 6 axes model.
HRV4: Up to 2 axes For the 32i,
HRV4 is
A20B-3300-0447 HRV2: Up to 12 axes inapplicable.
HRV3: Up to 9 axes
HRV4: Up to 3 axes
A20B-3300-0442 HRV2: Up to 16 axes
HRV3: Up to 12 axes
HRV4: Up to 4 axes
A20B-3300-0440 HRV2: Up to 24 axes
HRV3: Up to 18 axes
HRV4: Up to 6 axes
DRAM 32MB
DRAM 64MB
DRAM 128MB
DRAM 64MB
DRAM 128MB
DRAM 32MB
DRAM 64MB
DRAM 128MB
(3) Display A20B-3300-0420 For 15” color LCD
control card
(4) Power A20B-8101-0010
supply unit
137
B-63947EN/01
Configuration of the display control card

In the display control card, a compact Flash card is installed.
Compact Flash card
Connector
6
Compact Flash card
Display control card
socket
Connector side
Name Specification Remarks

Compact Flash card A87L-0001-0173#032MBA Production discontinued
A87L-0001-0173#128MBB
(2) Main board F1, F2 for 15” display unit
(1) Axis control (2) CPU card (3) Display control

card card
ｺﾈｸﾀ
Connector

For the 32i,
A20B-3300-0447 HRV2: Up to 12 axes HRV4 is
HRV4: Up to 3 axes
A20B-3300-0442 HRV2: Up to 16 axes
HRV3: Up to 12 axes
HRV4: Up to 4 axes
A20B-3300-0440 HRV2: Up to 24 axes
HRV3: Up to 18 axes
HRV4: Up to 6 axes
138
6 HARDWARE
DRAM 32MB
DRAM 64MB
DRAM 128MB
DRAM 64MB
DRAM 128MB
DRAM 32MB
DRAM 64MB
DRAM 128MB
(3) Display control A20B-3300-0551 For 15” color LCD
card
(4) Power supply A20B-8101-0010
unit
Compact Flash card
ｺﾈｸﾀ
Connector
In the main board, a compact Flash card is installed.

Compact Flash card A87L-0001-0173#128MBB
139
B-63947EN/01
DIMM module mounting location

(1) PMC module (2) FROM/SRAM DIMM module
module socket
ｺﾈｸﾀ
Connector

(1) PMC module A20B-3900-0200
programs, and so
A20B-3900-0166 FROM 64MB
SRAM 1MB
A20B-3900-0167 FROM 64MB
SRAM 2MB
A20B-3900-0180 FROM 16MB
SRAM 256kB
A20B-3900-0181 FROM 16MB
SRAM 512kB
A20B-3900-0182 FROM 32MB
SRAM 256kB
A20B-3900-0183 FROM 32MB
SRAM 512kB
140
6 HARDWARE
Block diagram
(1) Main board B1, B2
Main board
GUI card CPU card
DRAM Display
CPU control CPU DRAM BOOT I/O Link
software 3,4ch
BOOT Compact control
software Flash card
I/O Link
4ch
Peripheral
control 2 To back panel
Axis control card Peripheral PMC module

control 1
I/O Link
Ethernet 1,2ch control
control
DIMM module
FROM/SRAM
Power supply
unit
function
Display
unit
Ethernet RS232C Lithium battery 3V MDI 24VDC

FSSB I/O Link
Memory card Serial spindle 1,2,3ch
HDI
(2) Main board F1, F2
Main board
GUI card CPU card
DRAM Display control

CPU CPU DRAM BOOT I/O Link
software 3,4ch
BOOT control
software
I/O Link
4ch
Peripheral
Compact
Flash card
Peripheral PMC module
control 1
I/O Link
Axis control card
1,2ch control
Ethernet
control
DIMM module
FROM/SRAM
Power supply
unit
function
Display unit
RS232C
Lithium battery 3V MDI 24VDC

Ethernet Memory card FSSB I/O Link
Serial spindle 1,2,3ch
HDI
141
B-63947EN/01
LED display
Rear view
Rear of unit
(3) Alarm (red)

DNV5
DNV4
(2) GUI status (green)
DNV3
(4) GUI POWER (green)
DNV2
DNV1
(5) 7-segment LED

(1) CNC alarm (red)
LOW
ALM3
ALM2
ALM1
142
6 HARDWARE
Rear view
Rear of unit
(3) Alarm (red)

DNV5
DNV4
DNV3
DNV2
DNV1
(5) 7-segment LED

(1) CNC alarm (red)
LOW
ALM3
ALM2
ALM1
(1) Alarm LED (CNC alarm red LED) indication at CNC system
alarm occurrence
If any of these LEDs lights, it is likely that the hardware is
defective.
Alarm LED
No. Meaning
3 2 1
1 Low battery voltage.
The battery may be is running out.
DIMM module.
6
Abnormal power supply operation.
: On, : Off
Alarm LED Meaning
143
B-63947EN/01
(2) Changes in status LED at power-on time (Display control side

status: green LED)
Status LED
No. (DNV1 to 3) Status
3 2 1
1 State where the power is not tuned on, or state where the
system was started up successfully and is running
normally
2 State immediately after the power is turned on
3 The interface between the CPU card and display control
card is being initialized. If the status does not proceed
further beyond this indication, the CPU card, display
control card, or main board may be faulty. 6
4 Start-up on the display control card side is being awaited. If
the status does not proceed further beyond this indication,
the display control card or main board may be faulty.
5 The CPU card screen is being output to the display control
card, or a RAM error occurred in the interface between the
CPU card and display control card.
If the status does not proceed further beyond this
indication, the CPU card, display control card, or main
board may be faulty.
: On, : Off
(3) LED (red) indication at display control system alarm occurrence

If any of these LEDs lights, it is likely that the hardware is
defective.
Alarm LED Meaning
DNV4 Common RAM error.
The main board may be faulty.
(4) Display control POWER (green LED) indicates that power is

supplied to the display control card.
Alarm LED Meaning
LINK (green) Turned on when a connection is made with the hub
correctly
(6) 7-segment LED

See Section 19.4, “LED Display”.
144
6 HARDWARE
Jumper plug setting
Main board
Power
supply unit
RESERVE (OPEN) TMIBB or TMSF1 (Short)

Ensure that this is left open. Ensure that this is short-circuited.
(The terminal may not be installed.)
Main board
Power
supply unit
RESERVE (OPEN) TMSF1 (Short)

Inverter PCBs and Connector Units

Inverter P.C.B A14L-0143-0002
Fan adapter PCB A20B-8100-0969
Conversion cable A660-4042-T047
Connection cable between main A660-2005-T469#L200R0
board and inverter
NOTE
145
B-63947EN/01
Configuration of the inverter

Main board
CA87A
CPD12
For 15.0”LCD
Fan adapter 6
CN1
15.0”LCD Inverter
unit CN02 CN01
CN03
CN04
CN05
Inverter connection cable
Conversion cable
Locations of the inverter, fan adapter, and connector unit
Fan adaoter PCB Connector unit

Inverter
Rear view
Rear of unit
Power
COP supply unit
Conversion cable (two A660-4042-T047s used)
Two types of connectors are provided on the inverter. Plug into a matching connector.
Each of the two cables from the LCD backlight section may be connected to either of
the two cables from the inverter.
146
6 HARDWARE
6.1.5 List of Units and Printed Circuit Boards
6.1.5.1 Basic unit
CNC
Name Drawing number
model
30i-A Basic unit (No slot) A02B-0303-B500
Basic unit (1 slot) A02B-0303-B501
Basic unit (2 slots) A02B-0303-B502
31i-A5 Basic unit (No slot) A02B-0306-B500
CNC
Name Drawing number
model
All Case unit (No slot) A02B-0303-C500
models Case unit (1 slot) A02B-0303-C501
Case unit (2 slots) A02B-0303-C502
A case unit includes a case, back panel, fan, and battery.
6.1.5.2 Display unit

CNC
Name Drawing number ID Remarks
model
All 7.2” color LCD A02B-0303-D504 1001
models 8.4” color LCD A02B-0303-D503 1011
10.4” color LCD A02B-0303-D500 1010
10.4” color LCD A02B-0303-D501
(with touch panel)
15” color For main A02B-0303-D513 0101 Production
LCD board B1, B2 discontinued
A02B-0303-D523
For main A02B-0303-D564
board F1, F2
15” color For main A02B-0303-D514 Production
LCD) board Main discontinued
(with touch board B1, B2 A02B-0303-D524
panel)
For main A02B-0303-D549
board F1, F2
6.1.5.3 MDI unit

CNC
Name Drawing number ID
model
All T series / English / Small keyboard A02B-0303-C120#T 04
models For 7.2”/8.4”, ONG
M series / English / Small keyboard A02B-0303-C120#M 08
For 7.2”/8.4”, ONG
T series / English / Standard keyboard A02B-0303-C121#T 40
For 7.2”/8.4”, ONG
147
B-63947EN/01
CNC
model
All M series / English / Standard keyboard A02B-0303-C121#M 02
models For 7.2”/8.4”, ONG
Horizontal type, ONG
M series / English / Standard keyboard A02B-0303-C125#M 02
Vertical type, ONG
M series / English / Standard keyboard A02B-0303-C126#M 02
Vertical type, ONG
English / Standard keyboard A02B-0303-C128 20 6
QWERTY
6.1.5.4 Printed circuit board

30i-A, 31i-A5 main board A1 A20B-8100-0980 00301
(for 7.2”/8.4”/10.4” display unit)
31i-A, 32i-A main board A2 A20B-8100-0981 00302
32i-A main board A3 (for 7.2”/8.4”/10.4” A20B-8100-0982 00303
display unit, without Ethernet)
30i-A, 31i-A5 main board A4 A20B-8101-0400 00320
31i-A, 32i-A main board A5 A20B-8101-0401 00321
32i-A main board A6 (for 7.2”/8.4”/10.4” A20B-8101-0402 00322
display unit, without Ethernet)
30i-A, 31i-A5 main board B1 A20B-8101-0022 00306
(for 15” display unit)
31i-A, 32i-A main board B2 A20B-8101-0026 00312
30i-A, 31i-A5 main board F1 A20B-8101-0372 0031A
31i-A, 32i-A main board F2 A20B-8101-0376 0031E
CPU card A1 A20B-3300-0477 0040C
(Standard version, DRAM 32MB)
CPU card A2 A20B-3300-0474 0040D
CPU card A3 A20B-3300-0475 0040E
CPU card B2 A20B-3300-0470 00406
(High-speed version, DRAM 64MB)
CPU card B3 A20B-3300-0471 00407
CPU card C1 A20B-3300-0491 00421
(Dedicated to the 32i, DRAM 32MB)
CPU card C2 A20B-3300-0490 00420
CPU card C3 A20B-3300-0492 00422
Axis control card B11 (FSSB 1-path) A20B-3300-0445 00106
148
6 HARDWARE
Axis control card B12 (FSSB 1-path) A20B-3300-0448 0010B
Axis control card B13 (FSSB 1-path) A20B-3300-0447 0010A
FROM/SRAM module A20B-3900-0160 FROM: C1
(FROM 16MB, SRAM 1MB) SRAM: 03
(FROM 16MB, SRAM 256kB) SRAM: 01
PMC module A20B-3900-0200 00700
Display control For main board B1, B2 A20B-3300-0420 0000x1
card For main board F1, F2 A20B-3300-0551 0101XX
Additional axis board A20B-8101-0070 00121
Additional spindle board A20B-8002-0320 0030C
HSSB board A20B-8101-0111 00611
Fast Ethernet board A20B-8101-0030 00701
FL-net board A20B-8101-0031 00702
PROFIBUS master board A20B-8101-0050 00704
PROFIBUS slave board A20B-8101-0100 00705
DeviceNet master board A20B-8101-0220 00706
DeviceNet slave board A20B-8101-0330 00708
Back panel (No slot) A20B-2003-0600 01
Back panel (1 slot) A20B-2003-0810 00
Back panel (2 slots) A20B-2003-0610 10
Power supply unit A20B-8101-0010 –
Inverter (for 7.2” color LCD) A20B-8100-0961 –
Inverter (for 15” color LCD) A14L-0143-0002 –
Touch panel control board A20B-8002-0310 –
(*) Refer to Subsection 6.4.1, “Optional Board” for details of Optional
board.
149
B-63947EN/01
6.1.6 I/O
Name Drawing number Remarks
Distributed I/O connector panel A20B-2002-0470 DI/DO: 72/56
I/O module A1 DI=general 16,
matrix 56, with MPG
interface
Distributed I/O connector panel A20B-2002-0520 DI/DO: 48/32, with
I/O module B1 MPG interface
I/O module B2
Distributed I/O connector panel A03B-0815-C001 DI/DO: 24/16
I/O basic module
Distributed I/O connector panel A03B-0815-C002 DI/DO: 24/16, with 6
I/O expansion module A MPG interface
I/O expansion module B
Distributed I/O connector panel A03B-0815-C004 DO: 16 (2A output)
I/O expansion module C
Distributed I/O connector panel A03B-0815-C005 Analog input
I/O expansion module D
Distributed I/O type 2 basic A03B-0815-C040 DI/DO:48/32, with
module B1 MPG interface
Distributed I/O type 2 basic A03B-0815-C041 DI/DO:48/32, without
Distributed I/O type 2 expansion A03B-0815-C042 DI/DO:48/32
module E1
Terminal block type I/O module A03B-0823-C001 DI/DO:24/16, with I/O
Basic module Link interface
Terminal block type I/O module A03B-0823-C002 DI/DO:24/16, with
Expansion module A MPG interface
Terminal block type I/O module A03B-0823-C003 DI/DO:24/16, without
Expansion module B MPG interface
Main panel machine operator’s A02B-0303-C231
panel
Sub panel A machine operator’s A02B-0236-C232
panel
Sub panel D machine operator’s A02B-0236-C244
panel
Operator’s panel connector unit A16B-2202-0731 DI/DO: 64/32
(Source type output A)
(Source type output B)
Handy machine operator’s panel A02B-0259-C221#A
Interface unit for handy machine A02B-0259-C220
operator's panel
FANUC I/O Link-AS-i converter A03B-0817-C001
(for AS-I Ver.2.0)
(for AS-I Ver.2.1)
I/O Link distributed adapter (2ch) A20B-1007-0680
150
6 HARDWARE
6.1.6.1 Others
Separate detector interface unit A02B-0303-C205
(basic 4 axes)
(additional 4 axes)
Analog input separate detector A06B-6061-C201
interface unit (basic 4 axes)
Optical I/O Link adapter A13B-0154-B001
Optical adapter A13B-0154-B003 For serial spindle
I/O Link connection unit A A20B-2000-0410
I/O Link connection unit B A20B-2000-0411
I/O Link connection unit C A20B-2000-0412
Spindle distributed adapter A13B-0180-B001
PC-side HSSB interface board A20B-8101-0162
(2CH.) Compatible with the PCI bus
Case for basic unit (No slot) A02B-0303-D100#0A
Case for basic unit (1 slot) A02B-0303-D100#1A
Case for basic unit (2 slots) A02B-0303-D100#2A
Fan for basic unit (No slot) A02B-0303-K120 40-mm square, 2 pcs
Fan for basic unit (1slots or 2 slots) A02B-0303-K121 60-mm square, 1 pc

40-mm square, 1 pc
Control unit spare part: battery A02B-0200-K102
Control unit spare part: power fuse A02B-0236-K100
(for 15” color LCD)
151
B-63947EN/01
6.2 LCD-MOUNTED TYPE Series

300is/310is/320is HARDWARE
This section describes the printed circuit boards in the LCD-mounted
type Series 300is/310is/320is control units, the functions of the card
PCBs on the printed circuit boards, and the procedures for replacing
consumables.
6.2.1 Hardware Structure.................................................................. 152
6.2.2 Overview of Hardware ............................................................. 152
6.2.3 Total Connection Diagrams ..................................................... 152
6.2.4 Configuration of Printed Circuit Board Connectors and Cards . 153
6.2.5 List of Units and Printed Circuit Boards ................................... 165
6.2.6 Backup Unit ............................................................................. 169
6.2.1 Hardware Structure 6

See Subsection 6.1.1, “Hardware Structure” for hardware structure of
Series 300is/310is/320is.

See Subsection 6.1.2, “Overview of Hardware” for hardware overview of
Series 300is/310is/320is.

For the 300is/310is/320is, the following connection is required, in
addition to the connection common to the 30i/300is/31is/310is/32i/
310is.
300is/310is/320is
control unit
24V-IN(CPD16A)
SPDL (JA41)
I/O LINK(JD51A)
The functions and connections of the connectors on the left
HDI(JA40)
are the same as for the Series 30i/31i/32i. See Subsection
MDI(CA55) 6.1.3, “Total Connection Diagrams.”
FSSB(COP10A-1)
FSSB(COP10A-2)
RS-232-C I/O device

R232-1/S.SPDL(JD56A)
Serial spindle
RS-232-C I/O device

Personal computer
R232-2/USB(JD54)
USB printer
USB keyboard
Ethernet(CD38S) HUB
Ethernet backbone cable
BACKUP POWER-IN Backup unit

(CA75 or CA113)
BUZZER for T.P. Buzzer

(CA76)
See Subsection 6.1.3, "Total Connection Diagrams" for connection other

than the above.
152
6 HARDWARE
6.2.4 Configuration of Printed Circuit Board
Connectors and Cards
6.2.4.1 Main board
Name Specification
300is-A, 310is-A5 main board C1 (10.4”) A20B-8101-0020
300is-A, 310is-A5 main board C3 (12.1”) A20B-8101-0023
300is-A, 310is-A5 main board C2 (15”) A20B-8101-0021
310is-A, 320is-A main board C4 (10.4”) A20B-8101-0024
310is-A, 320is-A main board C6 (12.1”) A20B-8101-0027
310is-A, 320is-A main board C5 (15”) A20B-8101-0025
300is-A, 310is-A5 main board G1 (10.4”) A20B-8101-0370
300is-A, 310is-A5 main board G3 (12.1”) A20B-8101-0373
300is-A, 310is-A5 main board G2 (15”) A20B-8101-0371
310is-A, 320is-A main board G4 (10.4”) A20B-8101-0374
310is-A, 320is-A main board G6 (12.1”) A20B-8101-0377
310is-A, 320is-A main board G5 (15”) A20B-8101-0375

Connector unit
Fan motor Fan motor
Battery
Rear view
Rear of unit
(COP10A-1 and COP10A-2 are connectors

COP10A-1 COP10A-2 installed on the servo card.)
CA76
CA55 (FUSE)
JA40 JA41
Power
COP supply unit
CD38S
JD56A JD54 JD51A CA75
or
CA113 CPD16A
CA98
JGM CA87A CN79A
CA88A
Main board
TP2 or CA76 CD46L

CA95
CA55
(FUSE)
JA40 JA41
Power
CPD12
supply unit
CK20A CD38S
JD56A JD54 JD51A CA75
CK21A
or
CA113 CPD16A
153
B-63947EN/01

CA55 MDI
JD54 RS-232C serial port 2 / USB
JA40 High-speed DI
JD51A I/O Link
JA41 Serial spindle
CPD16A 24VDC-IN
6
CA79A Video signal interface (for 10.4”/12.1”LCD only)
CA98 Video signal interface (for 15”LCD only)
CD46L USB interface
CA87A Inverter (for 10.4” LCD)
Fan adapter (for 12.1”/15” LCD)
CD38S Ethernet
TP2 or CA95 Touch panel interface
CPD12 Inverter interface (for 12.1”/15"LCD only)
CA75 or CA113 Bach-up unit interface
CA76 Buzzer interface
154
6 HARDWARE
(1) Axis control (2) CPU card (3) GUI card

card
ｺﾈｸﾀ
Connect
or

card HRV3: Up to 3 axes number of axes
HRV4: Up to 1 axis is also limited
A20B-3300-0448 HRV2: Up to 8 axes depending on the
HRV3: Up to 6 axes model.
HRV4: Up to 2 axes For the 320is,
HRV4 is
A20B-3300-0447 HRV2: Up to 12 axes inapplicable.
HRV3: Up to 9 axes
HRV4: Up to 3 axes
A20B-3300-0442 HRV2: Up to 16 axes
HRV3: Up to 12 axes
HRV4: Up to 4 axes
A20B-3300-0440 HRV2: Up to 24 axes
HRV3: Up to 18 axes
HRV4: Up to 6 axes
DRAM 32MB
DRAM 64MB
DRAM 128MB
DRAM 64MB
DRAM 128MB
DRAM 32MB
DRAM 64MB
DRAM 128MB
155
B-63947EN/01

(3) GUI card A20B-3300-0420 For main board
10.4” /15” LCD 64MB
C1 to C6
A20B-3300-0421 10.4” /15” LCD For main board
128MB C1 to C6
For main board
A20B-3300-0422 12.1” LCD 64MB
C1 to C6
For main board
A20B-3300-0423 12.1” LCD 128MB
C1 to C6
For main board
A20B-3300-0551 DRAM 128MB
G1 to G6
For main board
A20B-3300-0552 DRAM 256MB 6
G1 to G6
(4) Power A20B-8101-0010
supply unit
DIMM module and compact Flash card mounting location

- Main board C1 to C6
(1) PMC module (2) FROM/SRAM

module DIMM module socket
ｺﾈｸﾀ
Connector
GUI card
(3) Compact Flash card
Connector
GUI card Compact Flash card socket

(connector side)
156
6 HARDWARE
Main board G1 to G6
DIMM
(1) PMC module (2) FROM/SRAM module
module socket (3) Compact Flash card
ｺﾈｸﾀ
Connector

(1) PMC module A20B-3900-0200
programs, and so
A20B-3900-0166 FROM 64MB
SRAM 1MB
A20B-3900-0167 FROM 64MB
SRAM 2MB
A20B-3900-0180 FROM 16MB
SRAM 256kB
A20B-3900-0181 FROM 16MB
SRAM 512kB
A20B-3900-0182 FROM 32MB
SRAM 256kB
A20B-3900-0183 FROM 32MB
SRAM 512kB
(3) Compact 32MB (production
A87L-0001-0173#032MBA
Flash card discontinued)
64MB (production
A87L-0001-0173#064MB
discontinued)
A87L-0001-0173#128MBB 128MB
A87L-0001-0173#256MBB 256MB
A87L-0001-0173#512MBB 512MB
A87L-0001-0173#001GBB 1GB
A87L-0001-0173#002GBB 2GB
157
B-63947EN/01
Block diagram
Main board
GUI card CPU card
DRAM Display
CPU control CPU DRAM BOOT I/O Link
software 3,4ch
BOOT Compact control
software Flash card
I/O Link
4ch
Peripheral
Axis control card Peripheral PMC module

control 1
I/O Link
1,2ch control
USB Ethernet
control control
DIMM module
FROM/SRAM
Power supply
6
unit
function
Display
unit
USB Ethernet RS232C Lithium battery 3V MDI 24VDC

FSSB I/O Link
Memory card Serial spindle 1, 2, 3ch
HDI
- Main board G1 to G6
Main board
GUI card CPU card

CPU CPU DRAM BOOT I/O Link
software 3,4ch
BOOT control
software
I/O Link
4ch
Peripheral
Compact
Flash card
Peripheral PMC module
control 1
I/O Link
Axis control card
1,2ch control
USB
Ethernet control
control
DIMM module
FROM/SRAM
Power supply
unit
function
Display unit
RS232C
USB Memory card Lithium battery 3V MDI 24VDC

Ethernet FSSB I/O Link
Serial spindle 1,2,3ch
HDI
158
6 HARDWARE
LED display
Rear view
Rear of unit
(3) Alarm (red)

DNV5
DNV4
DNV3
DNV2
DNV1
(5) 7-segment LED

(1) CNC alarm (red)
LOW
ALM3
ALM2
ALM1
159
B-63947EN/01
Rear view
Rear of unit
(3) Alarm (red)

DNV5
DNV4
DNV3
DNV2
DNV1
(5) 7-segment LED

(1) CNC alarm (red)
LOW
ALM3
ALM2
ALM1
(1) Alarm LED (CNC alarm red LED) indication at CNC system alarm
occurrence
CNC alarm
No. LED Status
3 2 1
1 Low battery voltage.
The battery may be is running out.
DIMM module.
6
Abnormal power supply operation.
: On, : Off
Alarm LED Meaning
160
6 HARDWARE
(2) Changes in status LED (GUI side status: Green LED) indication at
power-on time
Status LED
No. (DNV1 to 3) Status
3. 2. 1
State where the power is not tuned on, or state where the
1 system was started up successfully and is running
normally
2 State immediately after the power is turned on
The interface between the CPU card and GUI card is being
initialized.
3 If the status does not proceed further beyond this
indication, the CPU card, GUI card, or main board may be
faulty.
Start-up on the GUI card side is being awaited.
4 If the status does not proceed further beyond this
indication, the GUI card or main board may be faulty.
The CPU card screen is being output to the GUI card, or a
RAM error occurred in the interface between the CPU card
5 and GUI card. If the status does not proceed further
beyond this indication, the CPU card, GUI card, or main
board may be faulty.
: On, : Off
(3) Alarm LED (red) indication at GUI system alarm occurrence

Alarm LED Meaning
Common RAM error.
DNV4
The main board may be faulty.
: On, : Off
(4) GUI POWER (green LED) indicates that power is supplied to the
GUI card (at the time of back-up operation as well).
(5) See Section 19.4, “LED Display” for details of 7-segment LED.
Jumper plug setting

Main board
Power
supply unit
RESERVE (OPEN) TMIBB or TMSF1(Short)

161
B-63947EN/01
Main board
Power
6
supply unit
RESERVE (OPEN) TMSF1 (Short)

6.2.4.2 Inverter PCBs, connector units, and fan adapter PCBs

Inverter For 10.4” color LCD A20B-8100-0962
P.C.B. (Used also as the fan
adapter)
For 12.1” color LCD A14L-0143-0003
For 15” color LCD A14L-0143-0002
Fan adapter For 10.4” color LCD Used also as the inverter
PCB (Used also as the fan above
adapter)
For 12.1” color LCD A20B-8100-0969
For 15” color LCD
Connection For 12.1” color LCD A660-2006-T050#L130R0
cable between For 15” color LCD A660-2005-T469#L200R0
main board
and inverter
Conversion For 15” color LCD A660-4042-T047 Quantities
cable used: 2
NOTE
162
6 HARDWARE
Details of the inverter
300is/310is/320is
main board
For 10.4" LCD
10.4" LCD unit Inverter (fan adapter as well) CA87A

CP1 CN1
CPD12
For 12.1" LCD
Fan adapter
CN1
12.1" LCD unit Inverter

CN2 CN1 Inverter connection cable
CN3
For 15.0" LCD

Fan adapter
CN1
15" LCD unit Inverter

CN02 CN01
CN03
CN04
CN05
Conversion cable
Inverter PCBs, connector units, and fan adapter PCBs

(1) For 10.4” LCD
Inverter PCB Connector unit
Rear view
Rear of unit
COP
163
B-63947EN/01
(2) For 12.1” LCD

Fan adapter PCB Connector unit
Inverter
Rear view
Rear of unit
COP
(3) For 15” LCD

Fan adapter PCB Connector unit
Inverter
Rear view
Rear of unit
COP
Conversion cable for the inverter

When a 15" LCD is used, a conversion cable needs to be run between
the LCD backlight cable and the inverter connector.
Two types of connectors are provided on the inverter PCB. Plug into a
matching connector.
Each of the two cables from the LCD backlight section may be
connected to either of the two cables from the inverter.
164
6 HARDWARE
6.2.5 List of Printed Circuit Boards and Units

6.2.5.1 List of printed circuit boards
Name Parent type Drawing number Remarks
Main C1 (300is-A, for A02B-0303-H105 A20B-8101-0020 ID=
board 10.4”LCD) 00304
C3 (300is-A, for A02B-0303-H106 A20B-8101-0023 ID=
12.1”LCD) 00307
C2 (300is-A, for A02B-0303-H107 A20B-8101-0021 ID=
15”LCD) 00305
C1 (310is-A5, for A02B-0306-H105 A20B-8101-0020 ID=
10.4”LCD) 00304
C3 (310is-A5, for A02B-0306-H106 A20B-8101-0023 ID=
12.1”LCD) 00307
C2 (310is-A5, for A02B-0306-H107 A20B-8101-0021 ID=
15”LCD) 00305
C4 (310is-A, for A02B-0307-H105 A20B-8101-0024 ID=
10.4”LCD 00310
C6 (310is-A, for A02B-0307-H106 A20B-8101-0027 ID=
12.1”LCD) 00313
C5 (310is-A, for A02B-0307-H107 A20B-8101-0025 ID=
15”LCD) 00311
C4 (320is-A, for A02B-0308-H105 A20B-8101-0024 ID=
10.4”LCD) 00310
C6 (320is-A, for A02B-0308-H106 A20B-8101-0027 ID=
12.1”LCD) 00313
C5 (320is-A, for A02B-0308-H107 A20B-8101-0025 ID=
15”LCD) 00311
G1 (300is-A, for A02B-0303-H103 A20B-8101-0370 ID=
10.4”LCD) 00318
G3 (300is-A, for A02B-0303-H104 A20B-8101-0373 ID=
12.1”LCD) 0031B
G2 (300is-A, for A02B-0303-H108 A20B-8101-0371 ID=
15”LCD) 00319
G1 (310is-A5, for A02B-0306-H103 A20B-8101-0370 ID=
10.4”LCD) 00318
G3 (310is-A5, for A02B-0306-H104 A20B-8101-0373 ID=
12.1”LCD) 0031B
G2 (310is-A5, for A02B-0306-H108 A20B-8101-0371 ID=
15”LCD) 00319
G4 (310is-A, for A02B-0307-H103 A20B-8101-0374 ID=
10.4”LCD) 0031C
G6 (310is-A, for A02B-0307-H104 A20B-8101-0377 ID=
12.1”LCD) 0031F
G5 (310is-A, for A02B-0307-H108 A20B-8101-0375 ID=
15”LCD) 0031D
G4 (320is-A, for A02B-0308-H103 A20B-8101-0374 ID=
10.4”LCD) 0031C
G6 (320is-A, for A02B-0308-H104 A20B-8101-0377 ID=
12.1”LCD) 0031F
G5 (320is-A, for A02B-0308-H108 A20B-8101-0375 ID=
15”LCD) 0031D
165
B-63947EN/01

GUI For For 10.4” A02B-0303-H140 A20B-3300-0420 ID=
card main /15” LCD, 0000X1
board DRAM
C1 to 64MB
C6 For 10.4” A02B-0303-H142 A20B-3300-0421 ID=
/15” LCD, 0001X1
DRAM
128MB
For 12.1” A02B-0303-H141 A20B-3300-0422 ID=
LCD, 0000X0
DRAM
64MB
For A02B-0303-H143 A20B-3300-0423 ID= 6
12.1”LCD, 0001X0
DRAM
128MB
GUI For DRAM A02B-0303-H145 A20B-3300-0551 ID=
card main 128MB 0101XX
board DRAM A02B-0303-H146 A20B-3300-0552 ID=
G1 to 256MB 0110XX
G6
Power A02B-0303-H110 A20B-8101-0010
supply
unit
Inverter For 10.4” LCD - A20B-8100-0962
printed For 12.1” LCD - A14L-0143-0003
circuit
board For 15” LCD - A14L-0143-0002
Fan For 12.1”/15” - A20B-8100-0969
adapter LCD
Backup unit printed circuit - A20B-2100-0820
board
Back No slot - A20B-2003-0600 ID=01
panel 1 slot - A20B-2003-0810 ID=00
2 slots - A20B-2003-0610 ID=10
6.2.5.2 List of units

Drawing
Name Parent type Remarks
number
LCD For 10.4” Without touch A02B-0303- A02B-0303- ID=1111
unit main LCD panel H125 D505
board With touch A02B-0303- A02B-0303-
C1 to panel H127 D506
C6
12.1” Without touch A02B-0303- A02B-0303- ID=1110
LCD panel H170 D509
With touch A02B-0303- A02B-0303-
panel H172 D510
15” Without touch A02B-0303- A02B-0303- ID=1101
LCD panel H225 D515 Production
discontinued
A02B-0303- ID=1101
D525
With touch A02B-0303- A02B-0303- ID=1101
panel H227 D516 Production
discontinued
A02B-0303- ID=1101
D526
166
6 HARDWARE
Drawing
Name Parent type Remarks
number
LCD For 10.4” Without touch A02B-0303- A02B-0303- ID=1111
unit main LCD panel H121 D563
board With touch A02B-0303- A02B-0303-
G1 to panel H129 D541
G6
12.1” Without touch A02B-0303- A02B-0303- ID=1110
LCD panel H173 D557
panel H175 D545
15” Without touch A02B-0303- A02B-0303- ID=1101
LCD panel H228 D558
panel H229 D551
Case 300is-A No slot A02B-0303- A02B-0303-
unit B600 C500
1 slot A02B-0303- A02B-0303-
B601 C501
2 slots A02B-0303- A02B-0303-
B602 C502
310is A5 No slot A02B-0306- A02B-0303-
B600 C500
1 slot A02B-0306- A02B-0303-
B601 C501
2 slots A02B-0306- A02B-0303-
B602 C502
Case 310is-A No slot A02B-0307- A02B-0303-
unit B600 C500
1 slot A02B-0307- A02B-0303-
B601 C501
2 slots A02B-0307- A02B-0303-
B602 C502
320is-A No slot A02B-0308- A02B-0303-
B600 C500
1 slot A02B-0308- A02B-0303-
B601 C501
2 slots A02B-0308- A02B-0303-
B602 C502
A case unit includes a case, back panel, fan, and battery.
6.2.5.3 Others
Compact 32MB A02B-0303-H151 A87L-0001-0173 Production
Flash card #032MBA discontinued
A87L-0001-0173 Operation
#128MBB guarantee
32MB
64MB A02B-0303-H152 A87L-0001-0173 Production
#064MB discontinued
A87L-0001-0173 Operation
#128MBB guarantee
64MB
167
B-63947EN/01

Compact 128MB A02B-0303-H153 A87L-0001-0173
Flash card #128MBB
256MB A02B-0303-H154 A87L-0001-0173
#256MBB
A87L-0001-0173
512MB A02B-0303-H155
#512MBB
A87L-0001-0173
1GB A02B-0303-H156
#001GBB
A87L-0001-0173
2GB A02B-0303-H157
#002GBB
Connection For - A660-2006-T050
cable between 12,1”LCD #L130R0 6
main board For - A660-2005-T469
and inverter 15”LCD #L200R0
Conversion cable (for 15" - A660-4042-T047
LCD backlight)
Cable for backup unit - A02B-0281-K801 For main
board C1
to C6
Cable for backup unit - A02B-0303-K801 For main
board G1
to G6
Case No slot - A02B-0303-D10
0#0A
1 slot - A02B-0303-D10
0#1A
2 slots - A02B-0303-D10
0#2A
Fan for basic unit (No slot) - A02B-0303-K120 40-mm
square,2 pcs
Fan for basic unit (1 slot / - A02B-0303-K121 60-mm
2 slots) square,1 pc
40-mm
square,1 pc
Control unit spare part: - A02B-0200-K102
battery
Fuse - A02B-0236-K101
NOTE
This section contains printed circuit boards and units specific to the
300is/310is/320is. Printed circuit boards and units common to these and
30i/31i/32i series can be found in Subsection 6.1.5, "List of Units and
Printed Circuit Boards".
168
6 HARDWARE
6.2.6 Backup Unit
Specification
Name Specification
Backup unit PCB A20B-2100-0820
Cable for backup unit (for main board C1 to C6) A02B-0281-K801
Cable for backup unit (for main board G1 to G6) A02B-0303-K801
CN9
Backup unit PCB
Front view
Connector name Function

CN9 Supplying the backup power
When the LED (PC POWER) on the main printed circuit board lights, do
not touch any parts in the basic unit and backup unit. The Series
300is/310is/320is operates for about 12 seconds after the main power is
turned off.
NOTE
For main boards C1 to C6 (cable type: A02B-0281-K801), the backup
interface connector (CA75) and the MDI connector (CA55) on the main
boards are of the same connector shape.
Take care not to insert cables erroneously.
169
B-63947EN/01
6.3 STAND-ALONE TYPE 30i SERIES

HARDWARE
This chapter describes the printed circuit boards of the CNC control unit
of the stand-alone type 30i series and card PCB functions on the printed
circuit boards. The chapter also describes procedures for replacing
consumable items.
6.3.1 Hardware Structure............................................................... 170
6.3.2 Overview of Hardware .......................................................... 171
6.3.3 Total Connection Diagrams .................................................. 172
6.3.4 Control Unit........................................................................... 175
6.3.5 Display Unit for 30i/31i/32i.................................................... 180
6.3.6 Display Unit for 300is/310is/320is ........................................ 191
6.3.7 List of Units and Printed Circuit Boards................................. 201
6.3.8 I/O......................................................................................... 209 6
6.3.1 Hardware Structure

Display unit MDI unit
Control unit
Servo motor
Servo amplifier
Optical cable
Distributed I/O module, I/O unit MODEL-A, etc.
I/O Link
Machine operator's panel, power magnetic circuit, etc.
170
6 HARDWARE
4-slot rack 2-slot rack
Main board
Slot 3 Slot 1
Slot 4 Slot 2
Options (Slot 1 to 4) Basic system

Fast Ethernet Main board
Data Server function
Ethernet communication function - CPU for controlling CNC
- Power supply
- 2-axis to 24-axis control
Additional axis board - Spindle interface
Additional axis control function - DISPLAY interface
I/O Link
- I/O Link
- PMC control function
- High-speed DI
Additional spindle control function
- RS-232C
HSSB interface board
- Memory card interface
High-speed serial bus interface
Various types of network boards

FL-net board
PROFIBUS master board
PROFIBUS slave board On a unit with optional slots, as many optional
DeviceNet master board boards as the slots can be mounted.
DeviceNet slave board
171
B-63947EN/01

Main board
24V-IN(CPD19A) 24 VDC power supply
24V-OUT(CPD19B) To I/O device
Optical fiber cable
LCD UNIT MDI UNIT
Slot
COP21A,B,M,
DISPLAY(COP21A)
24VDC CP1A CA55 CK27
CP1B
Memory card
(Touch panel)
PANEL i or personal computer
HDI(JA40) High-peed skip input

board
24VDC CPD1 JA3
I/O Link(JD51A) JD1B
JD1A
Operator's
panel
6
24VDC CPD1 Distributed
I/O board, Power
JD1B
I/O unit, magnetics
JD1A etc.
cabinet
JD1B β amplifier Servo motor

JD1A with I/O Link
R232-1(JD56A)
RS-232-C I/O device
5th, 6th spindles
R232-2(JD36A)
RS-232-C I/O device
SPDL(JA41)
Circuit breaker
200VAC
AC reactor 200VAC
MCC Circuit breaker
PSM
Position coder
3rd, 4th
spindles
SPM
Servo card To 2nd spindle Serial spindle motor
Optical fiber cable

COP10B Axis 1
FSSB(COP10A-1)
SVM servo motor
COP10A
FSSB(COP10A-2)
COP10B Axis 2
SVM servo motor
COP10A
Axis 3
COP10B
SVM servo motor
COP10A
COP10B Axis 4
SVM servo motor
COP10A
(In this figure, a 1-axis amplifier is used.)

24VDC CP11A JF101 Linear scale, axis 1

COP10B JF103 Linear scale, axis 3
COP10A JF104 Linear scale, axis 4
ETHERNET(CD38A) CNF1 JA4A Battery for absolute scale

（(Required only when an absolute scale is used)
Separate detector
interface unit 2
Ethernet
172
6 HARDWARE
When optional boards are provided
Additional spindle
board
Optional slot
SPDL(JA41L)
PSM Position coder
7th spindle
SPM
Additional axis board To 8th spindle
SVM Servo motor
COP10A
COP10B
SVM Servo motor
COP10A
COP10B
SVM Servo motor
COP10A
COP10B
SVM Servo motor
COP10A

board
24VDC CPD1 JA3
I/O Link(JD1A) JD1B Operator's
panel
JD1A
24VDC CPD1 Distributed

I/O board, I/O Power
JD1B unit, etc. magnetics
cabinet
JD1A
173
B-63947EN/01
When optional boards are provided
Fast Ethernet board
ATA card The user should provide an ATA card.

Optional slot
ETHERNET(CD38R) Ethernet
HSSB board
HSSB(COP21N) Personal Computer 6

or PANEL i
(Note 1)
PROFIBUS master
board
or another PROFIBUS device
PROFIBUS slave
board
or another PROFIBUS device
DeviceNet master
board
or another DeviceNet device
DeviceNet slave
board
or another DeviceNet device
FL-net board
FLNET(CD38N) FL-net device
Note 1 The 30i/31i/32i model is still used when a

personal computer or PANEL i is
connected using an HSSB interface.
174
6 HARDWARE
For the is series CNC display unit, the additional connection shown below is
required on the unit.
CNC control unit
Main board
HSSB(COP21A)
MDI unit
(CK27)
Display unit for is series CNC
24VDC power supply
MDI(CA55)
HSSB(COP21M)
24V-IN(CPD18)
RS-232-C I/O device

Personal computer
R232-2/USB(JD54) USB keyboard
USB printer
R232-1(JD36) RS-232-C I/O device Ethernet backbone
Ethernet(CD38S) HUB
BACKUP POWER-IN Backup unit

(CA75 or CA113)
BUZZER for T.P. Buzzer

(CA76)
6.3.4 Control Unit

CNC model Specification
30i/300i/300is-A main board A16B-3200-0520
31i/310i/310is-A5 main board
31i/310i/310is-A main board A16B-3200-0521
32i/320i/320is-A main board
175
B-63947EN/01
Mounting positions of connectors, LEDs, etc.
Battery csae BAT1: Battery
JD56A: RS232C serial port/serial spindle

JD36A: RS232C serial port
CNM1B: Memory card JD51A: I/O Link

JA40: High-speed DI
JA41 Serial spindle
LINK,COM: LED for emnedded Ethernet
CD38A: Embedded Ethernet
FUSE ALM: Fuse burn-out detection LED
CPD19A (right): 24VDC IN
CPD19B (left): 24VDC OUT 6
COP21A: Connection to LCD unit
COP10A-2: FSSB STATUS: 7-Segment LED
ALARM: Alarm LED

COP10A-1: FSSB MTSW: Rotary SW
PSW: Push SW
GND: SG connection terminal
7-segment LED STATUS

This LED usually indicates the state of the CNC. This LED is used
also for setting and maintenance using the rotary switch MTSW and
the push switch PSW.
MTSW rotary switch
This rotary switch is used for setting and maintenance operations, in
combination with the STATUS 7-segment LED and the PSW push
switch.
PSW push switch
This push switch is used for setting and maintenance operations, in
combination with the STATUS 7-segment LED and the MTSW
rotary switch.
Mounting positions of cards and DIMM modules

(5) FROM/SRAM module
(2) CPU card
(1) Axis control card

(4) PMC module
176
6 HARDWARE
Method of detaching the main board
The main board is secured to the control unit by the fan unit. So, when
the fan unit is attached to the control unit, the main board cannot be
detached.
When attaching or detaching the main board, be sure to detach the fan
unit.

For the
A20B-3300-0447 HRV2: Up to 12 axes 32i/320i/320is,
HRV3: Up to 9 axes HRV4 is
A20B-3300-0442 HRV2: Up to 16 axes
HRV3: Up to 12 axes
HRV4: Up to 4 axes
A20B-3300-0440 HRV2: Up to 24 axes
HRV3: Up to 18 axes
HRV4: Up to 6 axes
DRAM 32MB
DRAM 64MB
DRAM 128MB
DRAM 64MB
DRAM 128MB
DRAM 32MB
DRAM 64MB
DRAM 128MB
(3) Power supply A20B-8101-0011
unit
(4) PMC module A20B-3900-0200
177
B-63947EN/01

(5) FROM/SRAM A20B-3900-0160 FROM 16MB FROM stores
A20B-3900-0161 FROM 16MB software
SRAM 2MB products.
The SRAM is a
SRAM 1MB memory
A20B-3900-0164 FROM 32MB module.
SRAM 2MB
A20B-3900-0166 FROM 64MB
SRAM 1MB
A20B-3900-0167 FROM 64MB
SRAM 2MB 6
A20B-3900-0180 FROM 16MB
SRAM 256kB
A20B-3900-0181 FROM 16MB
SRAM 512kB
A20B-3900-0182 FROM 32MB
SRAM 256kB
A20B-3900-0183 FROM 32MB
SRAM 512kB
Block diagram
Main board CPU card
CPU DRAM BOOT I/O Link

software 3,4ch
control
I/O Link
4ch
To back panel
Axis control card Display Peripheral PMC module

Ethernet
control control control
I/O Link
1,2ch control
DIMM module
FROM/SRAM
Power supply
unit
function
Lithium battery 3V MDI Ethernet I/O Link 24VDC

FSSB
RS232C 1,2,3ch
Memory card
Display unit Serial spindle
HDI
178
6 HARDWARE
LED display
LED for embedded Ethernet

LINK (Upper, green)
COM (Lower, yellow)
FUSE ALM: Fuse burn-out

detection LED
STATUS: 7-segment LED
ALARM: Alarm LED

1 4
2 3
(1) Alarm LED (red) indication at system alarm occurrence

Alarm
No. LED Meaning
3 2 1
1 Low battery voltage. The battery may be is running out.
4 An alarm was issued with the servo card on the main board.
The servo card or servo amplifier may be faulty, or the FSSB
may be broken.
5 An error was detected in the data of the SRAM on the DIMM
module. The DIMM module may be faulty, the battery voltage
may have dropped, or the main board may be faulty.
6 Abnormal power supply operation.
: On, : Off
Alarm LED Meaning
4 (LOW) The CPU card may be faulty.

Alarm LED Meaning
LINK (green) Turned on when a connection is made with the hub correctly
179
B-63947EN/01
(3) 7-segment LED
Dot
Alarm LED Meaning

Dot Turned on when an LCD is not connected to the connector
COP21A.
If this LED is turned on although an LCD is connected, the
cause may be that the optical cable is disconnected, the
LCD is not turned on, the LCD is faulty, etc.
See Section 19.4, “LED Display” for others.
6.3.5 Display Unit for 30i/31i/32i 6

6.3.5.1 10.4” display unit
Unit specification
Name Unit specification
10.4” display unit A1 Without touch panel A02B-0303-C071
10.4” display unit A2 With touch panel A02B-0303-C081
10.4” display unit B1 Without touch panel A02B-0303-C074
10.4” display unit B2 With touch panel A02B-0303-C084
Printed circuit board for display unit

Name Drawing number
Display control board For display unit A1, A2 A20B-8101-0210
For display unit B1, B2 A20B-8101-0320
Inverter A20B-8100-0962
Touch panel control board (for display unit A2, B2) A20B-8002-0310
180
6 HARDWARE
(1) Display unit A1, A2
Rear of unit
CA55 JA36A
CK20A CN1
COP21A
CK21A
CA79A
CA87A
Display unit control board CA88A
CA55 COP21A
JA36A
CN1
CK21A
CK20A

CA55 MDI
JD36A Touch panel interface
CN1 24VDC
CA87A Inverter
COP21A HSSB interface
181
B-63947EN/01
(2) Display unit B1, B2
Rear of unit
CA55 JD36A
CK20A
6
CPD19B
CK21A COP21B
CP1B CP1A
CA79A
CA87A
Display unit control board CA88A
CA55 JD36A COP21B

CK20A CPD19B
CK21A
CP1B CP1A

CA55 MDI
JD36A Touch panel interface
CPD19B(CP1A, CP1B) 24VDC
CA87A Inverter
COP21A HSSB interface
182
6 HARDWARE
LED display
(1) Board for display unit A1, A2
POWER
(2) POWER (green)
(3) ERROR (red)
ERROR
(1) HSSB (green)

HSSB
LED name Meaning

Turned on when a connection is made with the CNC
HSSB (green LED)
normally and communication is possible.
POWER (green LED) Turned on when the power is supplied normally.
ERROR (red LED) Turned on if hardware detects a system fault.
(2) Board for display unit B1, B2

(2) POWER (green)
(3) ERROR (red) ERROR POWER
(1) HSSB (green)

HSSB
LED name Meaning

Turned on when a connection is made with the CNC
HSSB (green LED)
normally and communication is possible.
POWER (green LED) Turned on when the power is supplied normally.
Turned on if hardware detects a fault in this display
ERROR (red LED) unit. The cause may be that the display control board
is faulty.
183
B-63947EN/01
Inverter printed circuit board and touch panel printed circuit board
location
(1) Display unit A1 or A2
Touch panel printed circuit board
（for display unit A2） Inverter printed circuit board
Rear of unit
6
(2) Display unit B1 or B2

Touch panel printed circuit board
（for display unit B2） Inverter printed circuit board
Rear of unit
184
6 HARDWARE
6.3.5.2 15” display unit
- Unit specification
Name Unit specification
15” color LCD C1 (Soft key) A02B-0303-C091
15” color LCD C2 (Soft key, Touch panel) A02B-0303-C092
15” color LCD D1 (Soft key) A02B-0303-C093
15” color LCD D2 (Soft key, Touch panel) A02B-0303-C094
Main board
Name PCB specification
For 15” color LCD C1, C2 A20B-8101-0062
For 15” color LCD D1, D2 A20B-8101-0382
- Connector mounting location
Connector unit
Fan motor Fan motor
Display unit for stand-alone type 30i

Rear of unit
CD38S
CK20A COP21M
CPD18
CK21A
CA55
CPD12 JD54 JD36
CA98
CA87A
Display unit for stand-alone type 30i

Main board
CA88A
CA95
CD38S
CK20A COP21M
CPD18
CK21A
CA55
CPD12 JD54 JD36
185
B-63947EN/01

CA55 MDI
JD54 RS-232C serial port 2/USB
CPD18 24VDC-IN
CA98 Video signal interface
CA87A Fan adapter
COP21M HSSB interface 6
CD38S Ethernet
CA95 Touch panel interface
CPD12 Inverter interface
- Locations of cards and compact Flash cards

(1) 15” color LCD C1, C2
(Mounted at the rear of the GUI card.)
Connector
(1) GUI card
Connector
No. Name Specification Remarks

(1) Display control card A20B-3300-0420
(2) Power supply unit A20B-8101-0010
(3) Compact Flash card Production
A87L-0001-0173#032MBA
terminated
A87L-0001-0173#128MBB
186
6 HARDWARE
(2) 15” color LCD D1, D2
Connector
(1) GUI card

(3)
Compact
Flash card
Connector

(1) Display control card A20B-3300-0551
(3) Compact Flash card A87L-0001-0173#128MBB
- LED display
Rear of unit
Power supply
unit
LEDP
BSRDY
COM
(orange) (green)
(green)
(green)
LED1 LED2
(green) (green)
ALM2
(red)
LINK
(1) LED display (HSSB)

LED name Meaning
Lights when the unit can communicate with the NC via
BSRDY (green LED)
the HSSB.
187
B-63947EN/01
LED name Meaning

ALM2 (red LED) Common RAM error. The main board may be faulty.
(2) LED display (Ethernet status)

LED name Meaning
Turned on when a connection is made with the hub
LINK (green LED)
correctly
COM (orange LED) Turned on when data is transferred
(3) LED display (PC)

LED name Meaning
LEDP (green LED) Indicates that the display unit is supplied with power.
6
LED1 (green LED) Reserved
Rear of unit
Power supply
unit
DNV7(green)
DNV6(green)
DNV5(green)
LINK(green) ALM2 BSRDY
COM(orange) (red) (green)

LED name Meaning
BSRDY (green LED)
the HSSB.

LED name Meaning
LINK (green LED)
correctly

LED name Meaning
DEV5 (green LED) Indicates that the display unit is supplied with power.
188
6 HARDWARE
LED name Meaning
DEV6 (green LED) Reserved
- Jumper plug setting

Reserve (Open)
Ensure that this is left open.
Reserve (Open)
189
B-63947EN/01
Inverter PCBs, fan adapter PCBs, and connector units

Inverter P.C.B. A14L-0143-0002
Connection cable between main A660-2005-T469#L200R0
board and inverter
NOTE
6
- Inverter, fan adapter, and connector unit mounting location
Inver ter PCB
Fan adapter Connector unit
Rear of unit
- Conversion cable for the inverter

matching connector.
190
6 HARDWARE
6.3.6 Display Unit for 300is/310is/320is
6.3.6.1 Main board of display unit for is series CNC
Name Specification
Main board For A13B-0198-B021,
A20B-8101-0061
(15” color LCD specification) -B022
A20B-8101-0063
(10.4”/12.1” color LCD specification) -B002, -B011, -B012
A20B-8101-0380
(10.4” color LCD specification) -B043
A20B-8101-0381
(15” color LCD specification) -B053
A20B-8101-0383
(12.1” color LCD specification) -B063

Connector unit
Fan motor Fan motor

Rear of unit
CA75
or
CD38S CA113
CK20A COP21M
CPD18
CK21A
CA55
CPD12 JD54 JD36
CA79A CA98
CA87A

CA76 Main board
CA88A
CA95 CA75
or
CD38S CA113 CD46L
CK20A COP21M
CPD18
CK21A
CA55
CPD12 JD54 JD36

CA55 MDI
JD54 RS-232C serial port 2/USB
191
B-63947EN/01

CPD18 24VDC-IN
CA79A Video signal interface (for 10.4”/12.1”LCD only)
CA98 Video signal interface (for 15”LCD only)
CD46L USB interface
CA87A Inverter (for 10.4” LCD)
Fan adapter (for 12.1”/15”LCD)
COP21M HSSB interface
6
CD38S Ethernet
CA95 Touch panel interface
CPD12 Inverter interface (for 12.1”/15” only)
CA75 or CA113 Bach-up unit interface
CA76 Buzzer interface
Locations of cards and compact flash cards

- A13B-0198-B001,-B002,-B011,-B012,-B021,-B022
(Mounted at the rear of the GUI card.)
Connector
(1) GUI card
Connector

(1) GUI card 10.4” / 15” LCD specification,
A20B-3300-0420
DRAM 64MB specification
10.4” / 15” LCD specification,
A20B-3300-0421
12.1” LCD specification,
A20B-3300-0422
12.1” LCD specification,
A20B-3300-0423
(2) Power
supply A20B-8101-0010
unit
192
6 HARDWARE
(3) Compact A87L-0001-0173#032MBA 32MB (production terminated)
Flash card A87L-0001-0173#064MB 64MB (production terminated)
A87L-0001-0173#128MBB 128MB
A87L-0001-0173#256MBB 256MB
A87L-0001-0173#512MBB 512MB
A87L-0001-0173#001GBB 1GB
A87L-0001-0173#002GBB 2GB
- A13B-0198-B041,-B043,-B051,-B053,-B061,-B063
Connector
(1) GUI card

(3)
Compact
Flash card
Connector

(1) GUI card DRAM 128MB
A20B-3300-0551
specification
DRAM 256MB
A20B-3300-0552
specification
(3) Compact Flash card A87L-0001-0173#128MBB 128MB
A87L-0001-0173#256MBB 256MB
A87L-0001-0173#512MBB 512MB
A87L-0001-0173#001GBB 1GB
A87L-0001-0173#002GBB 2GB
193
B-63947EN/01
Block diagram
- A13B-0198-B001,-B002,-B011,-B012,-B021,-B022
Main board
GUI card
CPU
BOOT Compact
software Flash card
6
Peripheral Peripheral Power supply unit
control 2 control 1 5V, 3.3V, 2.5V
USB Ethernet
control control
Display unit
USB Ethernet RS232C HSSB 24VDC
Memory card
- A13B-0198-B041,-B043,-B051,-B053,-B061,-B063
Main board
GUI card
CPU
BOOT
software
Ethernet Peripheral Compact Peripheral

control control 2 Flash card control 1
Power supply unit
5V, 3.3V, 2.5V
Display unit
RS232C
HSSB 24VDC
Ethernet USB Memory
card
194
6 HARDWARE
LED display
- A13B-0198-B001,-B002,-B011,-B012,-B021,-B022
Rear of unit
Power supply
unit
LEDP
COM
(orange) (green)
BSRDY
(green)
(green)
LED1 LED2
(green) (green)
ALM2
(red)
LINK

LED name Meaning
BSRDY (green LED)
the HSSB.

LED name Meaning
LINK (green LED)
correctly

LED name Meaning
Indicates that the GUI card is supplied with power.
LEDP (green LED) (Also turned on during a backup operation performed
after the unit is turned on.)
195
B-63947EN/01
- A13B-0198-B041,-B043,-B051,-B053,-B061,-B063
Rear of unit
Power supply
unit
DNV7(green)
DNV6(green)
DNV5(green)
LINK(green) ALM2 BSRDY
COM(orange) (red) (green)

LED name Meaning
BSRDY (green LED)
the HSSB.

LED name Meaning
LINK (green LED)
correctly

LED name Meaning
Indicates that the GUI card is supplied with power.
DEV5 (green LED) (Also turned on during a backup operation performed
after the unit is turned on.)
196
6 HARDWARE
Jumper plug setting
- A13B-0198-B001,-B002,-B011,-B012,-B021,-B022
Reserve (Open)
- A13B-0198-B041,-B043,-B051,-B053,-B061,-B063
Reserve (Open)
197
B-63947EN/01
6.3.6.2 Inverter PCBs, fan adapter PCBs, and connector units

For 10.4” color LCD A20B-8100-0962
(Used also as the
Inverter P.C.B. fan adapter)
For 12.1” color LCD A14L-0143-0003
For 15” color LCD A14L-0143-0002
For 12.1” color LCD
For 15” color LCD
Connection cable For 12.1” color LCD A660-2006-T050#L130R0
between main For 15” color LCD A660-2005-T469#L200R0
board and
inverter 6
Conversion cable For 15” color LCD A660-4042-T047
NOTE
Details of the inverter

Main board
For 10.4" LCD

Inverter (which also serves as a CA87A
10.4" LCD unit fan adapter)
CP1 CN1
CPD12
For 12.1" LCD

Fan adapter
CN1

CN2 CN1
CN3
For 15.0" LCD

Fan adapter
CN1

CN02 CN01
CN03
CN04
CN05
Conversion cable
198
6 HARDWARE
Locations of the inverter and connector unit for a 10.4" LCD
Inverter PCB Connector unit
Rear of unit
Locations of the inverter, fan adapter, and connector unit for a 12.1" LCD
Inverter PCB Fan adapter Connector unit
Rear of unit
199
B-63947EN/01
Locations of the inverter, fan adapter, and connector unit for a 15" LCD
Inverter PCB Fan adapter Connector unit
Rear of unit
Conversion cable for the inverter

matching connector.
6.3.6.3 Backup unit

Specification
Name Specification
Backup unit PCB A20B-2100-0820
See Subsection 6.2.6, “Backup Unit”.
NOTE
For the A13B-0198-B001, -B002, -B011, -B012, -B021, and -B022 (cable
type: A02B-0281-K801), the backup interface connector (CA75) and the
MDI connector (CA55) on the main boards are of the same connector
shape.
Take care not to insert cables erroneously.
200
6 HARDWARE
6.3.7 List of Printed Circuit Boards and Units
6.3.7.1 Basic unit
CNC model Name Drawing number Remarks
30i/300i/300is-A Basic unit (2 slots) A02B-0303-B802
31i/310i/310is -A5 Basic unit (2 slots) A02B-0306-B802
31i/310i/310is -A Basic unit (2 slots) A02B-0307-B802
32i/320i/320is -A Basic unit (2 slots) A02B-0308-B802
6.3.7.2 List of printed circuit boards of control unit

30i/300i/300is-A, 31i/310i/310is-A5 A16B-3200-0520 00308
main board
31i/310i/310is-A, 32i/320i/320is-A A16B-3200-0521 00309
main board
CPU card A1 A20B-3300-0477 0040C
CPU card A2 A20B-3300-0474 0040D
CPU card A3 A20B-3300-0475 0040E
CPU card B2 A20B-3300-0470 00406
CPU card B3 A20B-3300-0471 00407
CPU card C1 A20B-3300-0491 00421
CPU card C2 A20B-3300-0490 00420
CPU card C3 A20B-3300-0492 00422
Axis control card B12 (FSSB 1-path) A20B-3300-0448 0010B
Axis control card B13 (FSSB 1-path) A20B-3300-0447 0010A
201
B-63947EN/01

PMC module A20B-3900-0200 00700
Additional axis board A20B-8101-0070 00121
Additional spindle board A20B-8002-0320 0030C 6
HSSB board A20B-8101-0111 00611
Fast Ethernet board A20B-8101-0030 00701
FL-net board A20B-8101-0031 00702
PROFIBUS master board A20B-8101-0050 00704
PROFIBUS slave board A20B-8101-0100 00705
DeviceNet master board A20B-8101-0220 00706
DeviceNet slave board A20B-8101-0330 00708
Fan connection unit A20B-9002-0350 –
Power supply unit A20B-8101-0011 –
(*) Refer to Subsection 6.4.1, “Optional Board” for details of Optional
board.
6.3.7.3 List of display unit for 30i/31i/32i

10.4”LCD specification
Specification Name Drawing number Remarks
10.4” color LCD A1 Display control A20B-8101-0210 ID=0061A
(Without touch panel) board
A02B-0303-C071 Inverter A20B-8100-0962
LCD unit A02B-0303-D071 ID=1010
10.4” color LCD B1 Display control A20B-8101-0320 ID=0061B
(Without touch panel) board
A02B-0303-C074 Inverter A20B-8100-0962
LCD unit A02B-0303-D500 ID=1010
10.4” color LCD A2 Display control A20B-8101-0210 ID=0061A
(With touch panel) board
A02B-0303-C081 Inverter A20B-8100-0962
Touch panel A20B-8002-0310
Touch panel A660-2042-T145#L200R0
cable
LCD unit A02B-0303-D081 ID=1010
10.4” color LCD B2 Display control A20B-8101-0320 ID=0061B
(With touch panel) board
A02B-0303-C084 Inverter A20B-8100-0962
Touch panel A20B-8002-0310
Touch panel A660-2042-T145#L200R0
cable
LCD unit A02B-0303-D501 ID=1010
202
6 HARDWARE
15”LCD specification
15” color LCD C1 Main board A20B-8101-0062
(Without touch Display control A20B-3300-0420
panel) card
A02B-0303-C091
Compact A87L-0001-0173#03MBA Production
Flash card discontinued
A87L-0001-0173#128MBB
Power supply A20B-8101-0010
unit
Inverter A14L-0143-0002
Connection A660-2005-T469#L200R0
cable between
inverter and
main PCB
Conversion A660-4042-T047
cable
Fan adapter A20B-8100-0969
LCD unit A20B-0303-D519 ID=1101
Production
discontinued
A02B-0303-D529 ID=1101
Case A02B-0303-D100#0A
Fan A02B-0303-K120 40-mm
square, 2 pcs
15” color LCD C2 Main board A20B-8101-0062
(With touch panel) Display control A20B-3300-0420
A02B-0303-C092 card
Compact A87L-0001-0173#03MBA Production

Flash card discontinued
A87L-0001-0173#128MBB
unit
cable between
inverter and
main PCB
cable
LCD unit A20B-0303-D520 ID=1101
Production
discontinued
A02B-0303-D530 ID=1101
Case A02B-0303-D100#0A
Fan A02B-0303-K120 40-mm
square, 2 pcs
203
B-63947EN/01

15” color LCD D1 Main board A20B-8101-0382
(Without touch Display control A20B-3300-0551
panel) card
A02B-0303-C093
Compact A87L-0001-0173#128MBB
Flash card
unit
cable between
inverter and
main PCB 6
cable
LCD unit A20B-0303-D562 ID=1101
Case A02B-0303-D100#0A
Fan A02B-0303-K120 40-mm
square, 2 pcs
15” color LCD D2 Main board A20B-8101-0382
(With touch panel) Display control A20B-3300-0551
A02B-0303-C094 card
Compact A87L-0001-0173#128MBB
Flash card
unit
cable between
inverter and
main PCB
cable
LCD unit A20B-0303-D553 ID=1101
Case A02B-0303-D100#0A
Fan A02B-0303-K120 40-mm
square, 2 pcs
6.3.7.4 Display unit for 300is/310is/320is

Display Unit for is series CNC: Basic unit
A13B-0198-B001 Main board A20B-8101-0063
10.4” color LCD Power supply unit A20B-8101-0010
Without touch
panel Inverter A20B-8100-0962
LCD unit A02B-0303-D507 ID=1111
Case A02B-0303-D100#0A
Fan A02B-0303-K120 40-mm
square, 2 pcs
204
6 HARDWARE
A13B-0198-B002 Main board A20B-8101-0063
With touch panel
LCD unit A02B-0303-D508 ID=1111
Case A02B-0303-D100#0A
Fan A02B-0303-K120 40-mm
square, 2 pcs
A13B-0198-B011 Main board A20B-8101-0063

Without touch
panel Inverter A14L-0143-0003
Connection cable A660-2006-T050#L130R0
between inverter
and main PCB
LCD unit A02B-0303-D511 ID=1110
Case A02B-0303-D100#0A
Fan A02B-0303-K120 40-mm
square, 2 pcs
A13B-0198-B012 Main board A20B-8101-0063
With touch panel
between inverter
and main PCB
LCD unit A02B-0303-D512 ID=1110
Case A02B-0303-D100#0A
Fan A02B-0303-K120 40-mm
square, 2 pcs
A13B-0198-B021 Main board A20B-8101-0061
15” color LCD Power supply unit A20B-8101-0010
Without touch
between inverter
and main PCB
LCD unit A20B-0303-D517 ID=1101
Production
discontinued
A02B-0303-D527 ID=1101
Case A02B-0303-D100#0A
Fan A02B-0303-K120 40-mm
square, 2 pcs
205
B-63947EN/01

A13B-0198-B022 Main board A20B-8101-0061
With touch panel
between inverter
and main PCB
LCD unit A20B-0303-D518 ID=1101
Production
discontinued
6
A02B-0303-D528 ID=1101
Case A02B-0303-D100#0A
Fan A02B-0303-K120 40-mm
square, 2 pcs
A13B-0198-B041 Main board A20B-8101-0380

Without touch
panel Inverter A20B-8100-0962
LCD unit A02B-0303-D559 ID=1111
Case A02B-0303-D100#0A
Fan A02B-0303-K120 40-mm
square, 2 pcs
A13B-0198-B043 Main board A20B-8101-0380
With touch panel
LCD unit A02B-0303-D543 ID=1111
Case A02B-0303-D100#0A
Fan A02B-0303-K120 40-mm
square, 2 pcs
A13B-0198-B051 Main board A20B-8101-0383

Without touch
LCD unit A02B-0303-D560 ID=1110
between inverter
and main PCB
Case A02B-0303-D100#0A
Fan A02B-0303-K120 40-mm
square, 2 pcs
A13B-0198-B053 Main board A20B-8101-0383
With touch panel
LCD unit A02B-0303-D547 ID=1110
between inverter
and main PCB
Case A02B-0303-D100#0A
Fan A02B-0303-K120 40-mm
square, 2 pcs
206
6 HARDWARE
A13B-0198-B061 Main board A20B-8101-0381
Without touch
between inverter
and main PCB
LCD unit A02B-0303-D561 ID=1101
Case A02B-0303-D100#0A
Fan A02B-0303-K120 40-mm
square, 2 pcs
A13B-0198-B063 Main board A20B-8101-0381

With touch panel
between inverter
and main PCB
LCD unit A02B-0303-D555 ID=1101
Case A02B-0303-D100#0A
Fan A02B-0303-K120 40-mm
square, 2 pcs
GUI card
- A13B-0198-B001,-B002,-B011,-B012,-B021,-B022
Item Parent type Drawing number Remarks
GUI card for DRAM A13B-0198-H140 A20B-3300-0420 ID=0000X1
10.4”/15” LCD 64MB
DRAM A13B-0198-H142 A20B-3300-0421 ID=0001X1
128MB
GUI card for DRAM A13B-0198-H141 A20B-3300-0422 ID=0000X1
12.1” LCD 64MB
DRAM A13B-0198-H143 A20B-3300-0424 ID=0001X1
128MB
- A13B-0198-B041,-B043,-B051,-B053,-B061,-B063
GUI DRAM 128MB A13B-0198-H145 A20B-3300-0551 ID=0101XX
card DRAM 256MB A13B-0198-H146 A20B-3300-0552 ID=0110XX
- Compact Flash card

32MB A13B-0198-H151 A87L-0001-0173#032MBA Production
Compact discontinued
Flash card A87L-0001-0173#128MBB Operation
guarantee
32MB
207
B-63947EN/01

64MB A13B-0198-H152 A87L-0001-0173#064MB Production
Compact discontinued
Flash card A87L-0001-0173#128MBB Operation
guarantee
64MB
128MB A13B-0198-H153 A87L-0001-0173#128MBB
Compact
Flash card
256MB A13B-0198-H154 A87L-0001-0173#256MBB
Compact
Flash card
512MB A13B-0198-H155 A87L-0001-0173#512MBB 6
Compact
Flash card
1GB A13B-0198-H156 A87L-0001-0173#001GBB
Compact
Flash card
2GB A13B-0198-H157 A87L-0001-0173#002GBB
Compact
Flash card
Backup unit
Backup A02B-0303-H160 A20B-2100-0820 For mounting at
unit the rear of an
MDI unit
A02B-0303-C161 For mounting
inside a cabinet
Cable A02B-0281-K801 A660-2042-T196#L500R0A For
for A13B-0198-B001,
backup -B002, -B011,
unit -B012, -B021,
-B022
A02B-0303-K801 A660-2006-T312#L500R0 For
A13B-0198-B041,
-B043, -B051,
-B053, -B061,
-B063
6.3.7.5 MDI unit

CNC model Name Drawing number ID
30i/31i/32i/ T series / English / A02B-0303-C120#T 04
300is/310is/320is Small keyboard
For 7.2”/8.4”, ONG
M series / English / A02B-0303-C120#M 08
Small keyboard
For 7.2”/8.4”, ONG
T series / English / A02B-0303-C121#T 40
Standard keyboard
For 7.2”/8.4”, ONG
Standard keyboard
For 7.2”/8.4”, ONG
Standard keyboard
208
6 HARDWARE
CNC model Name Drawing number ID
30i/31i/32i/ M series / English / A02B-0303-C125#M 02
300is/310is/320is Standard keyboard
Standard keyboard
Vertical type, ONG
Standard keyboard
Vertical type, ONG
English / Standard keyboard A02B-0303-C128 20
QWERTY
300i/310i/ T series / English / A02B-0303-C320#T 40
320i Standard keyboard
Standard keyboard
Standard keyboard
Vertical type, ONG
Standard keyboard
Vertical type, ONG
English / Standard keyboard A02B-0303-C328 20
QWERTY
300i/310i/ FA Full keyboard (English) A02B-0236-C131#EC
320i FA Full keyboard (Japanese) A02B-0236-C131#JC
FA Full keyboard (English, A08B-0082-C150#EC
with punch panel cover)
FA Full keyboard (Japanese, A08B-0082-C150#JC
with punch panel cover)
FA Full keyboard (English, A08B-0082-C151#EC
with punch panel)
FA Full keyboard (Japanese, A08B-0082-C151#JC
with punch panel)
6.3.8 I/O
I/O module A1 DI=general 16,
matrix 56, with
MPG interface
Distributed I/O connector panel A20B-2002-0520 DI/DO: 48/32, with
I/O module B1 MPG interface
I/O module B2
I/O basic module
Distributed I/O connector panel A03B-0815-C002 DI/DO: 24/16, with
I/O expansion module A MPG interface
I/O expansion module B
Distributed I/O connector panel A03B-0815-C004 DO: 16 (2A output)
I/O expansion module C
209
B-63947EN/01

Distributed I/O connector panel A03B-0815-C005 Analog input
I/O expansion module D
Distributed I/O type 2 basic A03B-0815-C040 DI/DO:48/32, with
Distributed I/O type 2 basic A03B-0815-C041 DI/DO:48/32,
module B2 without MPG
interface
Distributed I/O type 2 expansion A03B-0815-C042 DI/DO:48/32
module E1
Terminal block type I/O module A03B-0823-C001 DI/DO:24/16, with
Basic module I/O Link interface
Terminal block type I/O module A03B-0823-C002 DI/DO:24/16, with 6
Expansion module A MPG interface
Terminal block type I/O module A03B-0823-C003 DI/DO:24/16,
Expansion module B without MPG
interface
Main panel machine operator’s A02B-0303-C231
panel
Sub panel A machine operator’s A02B-0236-C232
panel
Sub panel D machine operator’s A02B-0236-C244
panel
(Source type output A)
(Source type output B)
Handy machine operator’s panel A02B-0259-C221#A
Interface unit for handy machine A02B-0259-C220
operator's panel
(for AS-I Ver.2.0)
(for AS-I Ver.2.1)
6.3.8.1 Others
(basic 4 axes)
(additional 4 axes)
Analog input separate detector A06B-6061-C201
interface unit (basic 4 axes)
Optical I/O Link adapter A13B-0154-B001
Optical adapter A13B-0154-B003 For serial spindle
I/O Link connection unit A A20B-2000-0410
I/O Link connection unit B A20B-2000-0411
I/O Link connection unit C A20B-2000-0412
Spindle distributed adapter A13B-0180-B001
210
6 HARDWARE
Fan unit for 2 slots A02B-0303-C101 With fan
A02B-0303-C103
Fan unit for 4 slots A02B-0303-C102 With fan
Fan for basic unit for (2 slots) A02B-0303-K120 40-mm square, 2 pcs
Fan for basic unit for (4 slots) A02B-0303-K122 80-mm square, 1 pc
Control unit spare part: battery A02B-0200-K102

Display unit spare part: power fuse A02B-0303-K101
(for 10.4” color LCD)
Display unit spare part: power fuse A02B-0236-K100
(for 15” color LCD, is series display
unit)
211
B-63947EN/01
6.4 MATTERS COMMON TO BOTH

LCD-MOUNTED TYPE AND STAND-ALONE
TYPE (HARDWARE)
This chapter describes printed-circuit boards and units common to
LCD-mounted and stand-alone types. It also explains conditions for
installing them and how to replace their consumable parts.
6.4.1 Optional Board...................................................................... 212
6.4.2 Other Units ........................................................................... 232
6.4.1 Optional Board

6.4.1.1 Fast Ethernet board
Specification
Name Specification 6
Fast Ethernet board A20B-8101-0030
NOTE
It is also used as a Data Server.
JG2
S-BUS back-plane connector
CNH6
CD38R

CNH6 ATA card interface
CD38R 100BASE-TX Ethernet interface
212
6 HARDWARE
LED display
The board is provided with nine LEDs.
The figure below shows the locations of these LEDs. The table below
explains the LED lighting states.
Detailed view of LEDs
CD38R
ALM (red)
COM (yellow)
LIL (green)
COL (red)
BTX (green)
4(STASUS) (green)
3(STATUS) (green)
2(STATUS) (green)
1(STATUS) (green)
In the following explanations, the LED lighting states are expressed as

follows:
: Off, : On, : Blinking, ◊: Don't care
- LED display transition for LED1, LED2, LED3, and LED4 (during
power-on)
LED
display Status Meaning
L4L3L2L1
Power-off
Immediately Initial state entered immediately after
after power-on.
power-on If the board is stopped in this condition, the
cause is one of the following:
→ The firmware is not stored in the Flash
ROM of the CNC.
→ The board is defective.
Start of The board has started.
board If the board is stopped in this condition, the
board may be defective.
Completion The firmware has been downloaded to the
of firmware board.
downloading If the board is stopped in this condition, the
Firmware The firmware OS has started.
OS started. If the board is stopped in this condition, the
→ The firmware stored in the Flash ROM of
the CNC is destroyed.
Completion Initialization of the firmware OS is completed.
of firmware If the board is stopped in this condition, the
OS cause is one of the following:
initialization The firmware stored in the Flash ROM of the
CNC is destroyed.
The board is defective.
213
B-63947EN/01
LED
L4L3L2L1
Completion The Ethernet parameters have been read.
of parameter If the board is stopped in this condition, the
reading cause is one of the following:
→ The Ethernet option or Data Server option
is not installed.
→ The IP address or subnet mask is not set.
Start The board has started normally.
completion
- LED display for LED1, LED2, LED3, and LED4 (during normal
operation) 6
LED display
Status Meaning
L4L3L2L1
Normal status The board is operating normally.
- LED display for BTX, LIL, COM, and ALM (during normal operation)
LED display Status Meaning
BTX 100BASE-TX connection The communication rate is
in progress 100BASE-TX.
BTX 10BASE-T connection in The communication rate is
progress 10BASE-T.
LIL Connected to hub The board is connected to the
hub.
COM Transmission/reception Data is being transmitted or
in progress received.
ALM No alarm No alarm is issued.
- LED display for LED1, LED2, LED3, and LED4 (when abnormality
occurs)
The STATUS LEDs are turned on and off repeatedly with long on-time
and short on-time.
LED LED
display display
[Long [Short Status Description
on-time] on-time]
4321 4321
Error on another A defect on another board or a
board problem on another board was
detected.
Bus error Software has a problem, or the
board is defective.
Parity alarm The board is defective.
Illegal general Software has a problem, or the
instruction board is defective.
Illegal slot Software has a problem, or the
instruction board is defective.
CPU address error Software has a problem, or the
board is defective.
NOTE
If an error occurs with the LEDs turned on and off with long on-time and
short on-time in a manner not indicated above, contact FANUC.
214
6 HARDWARE
- LED display for COL, LIL, and ALM (when abnormality occurs)
LED Status Description
display
COL Collision occurs. The LED is on or blinks at short intervals
COL (Data collision occurs.) when the Ethernet communication traffic
(communication amount) is high or
ambient noise is high.
LIL Not connected to hub The board is not connected to the hub
properly. The LIL LED stays off also
when the power to the hub is off.
Check whether the board is connected
to the hub properly.
ALM Parity error occurs. A parity error occurred in memory on the
board. The board is defective.
215
B-63947EN/01
6.4.1.2 Additional axis board

Specification
Name Specification
Additional axis board A20B-8101-0070
JGP
JD1A
COP10A
CA69A

COP10A FSSB
JD1A I/O LINK
CA69A Servo check
Block diagram
Servo control
FSSB I/F
DV/RV I/O Link (4th ch)
BACKPLANE
LED display
JGP
JD1A
COP10A
CA69A
FSSB_OP
LED name Meaning

FBBS_OP ON: FSSB connected (FSSB OPEN)
216
6 HARDWARE
6.4.1.3 Additional spindle board
Specification
Name Specification
Additional spindle board A20B-8002-0320
JGP
(JA41L: Additional spindle board B only)
JA41L

JA41L Serial spindle
Block diagram
Spindle control
Serial spindle
BACKPLANE
217
B-63947EN/01
6.4.1.4 HSSB interface board

Specification
Name Function Specification
HSSB interface board HSSB × 1 channel A20B-8101-0111
JGP
6
COP21N

COP21N High-speed serial bus interface
Block diagram
LSC Optical Either the local bus

CDR connector expansion or
Local (ASIC) (COP21N)
bus open-connection function
(GTL+) can be used.
Connector for local bus connection
LED display
LEDR (red)
BRDYA (green)
LED Meaning
LEDR Lights to indicate a common RAM parity alarm
condition in the LSC.
BRDYA Lights to indicate that a link has been established.
218
6 HARDWARE
6.4.1.5 FL-net board
Specification
Name Specification
FL-net board A20B-8101-0031
LSI
MPU
CD38N
219
B-63947EN/01
LED indicators and their meanings

The board is provided with nine LEDs.
The figure below shows the locations of these LEDs. The table below
explains the LED lighting states.
6
CD38N
ALM (red)
COM (yellow)
LIL (green)
COL (red)
BTX (green)
4(POK) (STASUS) (green)
3(LNK) (STATUS) (green)
2(RES) (STATUS) (green)
1(ROS) (STATUS) (green)
NOTE
The face plate is indicated with dotted line.

follows:
- LED display transition for LED1, LED2, LED3, and LED4 (during
power-on)
LED
4321
Power-off
Immediately after Initial state entered immediately after
power-on power-on.
If the board is stopped in this condition, the
→ The firmware is not stored in the Flash
ROM of the CNC.
Start of board The board has started.
If the board is stopped in this condition, the
Completion of The firmware has been downloaded to the
firmware board.
downloading If the board is stopped in this condition, the
Firmware OS The firmware OS has started.
started. If the board is stopped in this condition, the
→ The firmware stored in the Flash ROM
of the CNC is destroyed.
220
6 HARDWARE
LED
4321
Completion of Initialization of the firmware OS is completed.
firmware OS If the board is stopped in this condition, the
initialization cause is one of the following:
→ The firmware stored in the Flash ROM
of the CNC is destroyed.
◊◊ Start completion The board has started normally.
- LED display for LED1, LED2, LED3, and LED4 (during normal
operation)
ROS Normal software Blinks at 1-second intervals when the
operation communication software on the
FL-net board operates normally.
RES Normally OFF Normally, off
LNK Participating in network Turned on when the node participates
in the FL-net network
POK Normal parameters Turned on when all FL-net
parameters are valid.
- LED display for BTX, LIL, COM, and ALM (during normal operation)
BTX 10BASE-T connection The communication rate is
in progress 10BASE-T.
LIL Connected to hub The board is connected to the hub.
COM Transmission/reception Data is being transmitted or received.
in progress
ALM No alarm No alarm is issued.
(HER)
-LED display for LED1, LED2, LED3, and LED4 (when abnormality
occurs)
The STATUS LEDs are turned on and off repeatedly with long on-time
and short on-time.
LED display LED display
[Long on-time] [Short on-time] Status Description
4321 4321
Error on A defect on another board or
another board a problem on another board
was detected.
Bus error Software has a problem, or
the board is defective.
Parity alarm The board is defective.
Illegal general Software has a problem, or
instruction the board is defective.
Illegal slot Software has a problem, or
instruction the board is defective.
CPU address Software has a problem, or
error the board is defective.
NOTE
If an error occurs with the LEDs turned on and off with long on-time and
short on-time in a manner not indicated above, contact FANUC.
221
B-63947EN/01
- LED display for COL, LIL, and ALM (when abnormality occurs)
LED display Status Description
COL Collision occurs. When a data collision occurs on the
COL (Data collision occurs.) network, the LED is lit or blinks. (Note)
LIL Not connected to hub The board is not connected to the hub
properly. The LIL LED stays off also
when the power to the hub is off.
Check whether the board is
connected to the hub properly.
ALM Parity error occurs. A parity error occurred in memory on
(HER) the board. The board is defective.
NOTE 6
The FL-net manages the token-based transmission right so that no
collision occurs. If this LED is turned on frequently, a communication error
has occurred due to noise, or an Ethernet compliant product other than the
FL-net is connected.
In such a case, check the devices connected to the network and the
network installation status.
222
6 HARDWARE
6.4.1.6 PROFIBUS board
Specification
PROFIBUS Master board A20B-8101-0050 Master function only
PROFIBUS Slave board A20B-8101-0100 Slave function only

- PROFIBUS Master board
MPU
DC/DC
converter
LSI
CN1
LSI
- PROFIBUS Slave board
DC/DC
converter
LSI
CN2
LSI

- LED indicators for DP-Master function
CN1
LED2 LED1
NOTE
223
B-63947EN/01
Name Color Description

Indicates that the CPU on this board has started
running.
LED1 Green ON: RESET has been released, allowing the CPU to
start running.
The LED is turned off when the power is turned on.
Indicates whether communication is being normally
carried out.
LED2 Green ON: Communication is being normally carried out.
OFF: Communication is not being carried out.
- LED indicators for DP-Slave function 6
CN2
LEDB LED3 LED2 LED1
NOTE
Name Color Description

Indicates that the CPU on this board has started running.
ON: RESET has been released, allowing the CPU to start
LED1 Green
running.
Indicates that communication has started.
ON: Communication has started.
LED2 Green The LED is turned off when the power is turned on or if:
- No parameter configuration data has been received.
- Invalid parameter configuration data has been received.
Indicates whether communication is being normally carried
out.
LED3 Green ON: Communication is being normally carried out.
OFF: Communication is not being carried out.
Indicates that a RAM parity alarm condition has occurred
on this board.
LEDB Red ON: A RAM parity alarm condition has occurred.
The LED is turned off when the power is turned on. Once it
has been turned on, it stays on until the power is turned off.
224
6 HARDWARE
6.4.1.7 DeviceNet board
Specification
DeviceNet Master board A20B-8101-0220
DeviceNet Slave board A20B-8101-0330
Connector and LED mounting location

- Master board
LSI
Daughter board
From left to right
LEDWD
LED3
LED2 NS MS (LED)
LED1
LED0
Outside line connector

TBL
Face plate
- Slave board
LED
(green) LED3
(green) LED2
(green) LED1
(green) LED0
LED
(green)
(green)
LEDWD (red)
(red)
(red)
MS NS
Outside line connector

TBL
Face plate
225
B-63947EN/01

- Master board
This board provides four green LEDs and one red LED for status
indication. In addition, the internal daughter board has two LEDs that
emit red and green light.
Name Color Meaning
LED0 to Indicates the activation state of the DeviceNet application
Green
LED3 software.
LEDWD Red Indicates an error on the daughter board.
Red / MS (Module Status) indicates the states of nodes.
MS
Green
Red / NS (Network Status) indicates the state of the network.
NS
Green 6

follows:
LED display transition for LED0, LED1, LED2, and LED3 (during
power-on)
LED
State and cause when Action when stopped after
display
stopped after power-on power-on
L3L2L1L0
Power-off
After power-on, the Store the DeviceNet application
DeviceNet application software in the Flash ROM of the
software does not start. CNC.
Initializing the firmware on Replace the DeviceNet master
the daughter board. board.
Checking memory on the
daughter board.
Recognizing the firmware
on the daughter board.
Reading DeviceNet Enable the DeviceNet master
parameters. function (software option).
Verifying that DeviceNet Set DeviceNet parameter
parameter "NETWORK" is "NETWORK" to "ONLINE."
set to "ONLINE."
Setting the bus parameter Replace the DeviceNet master
in DeviceNet parameters. board.
Setting the slave Set the slave parameter in
parameter in DeviceNet DeviceNet parameters correctly.
parameters. Or, replace the DeviceNet master
board.
Checking duplicate MAC Check duplication with the MAC
IDs. ID of a slave device. Check if
cables are connected correctly.
Check if power for
communication is correctly
supplied. Check if slave devices
are turned on.
The DeviceNet application
software has been
initialized and I/O
communication starts.
226
6 HARDWARE
LED indication of LEDWD
Daughter board The daughter board failed.
failure Replace the DeviceNet master board.
LED indication of MS and NS (during normal operation)

MS Immediately after The MPU on the daughter board is being
NS power-on reset.
MS (green) Initializing The firmware on the daughter board is
NS making an initialization.
MS (green) Checking The firmware on the daughter board is
NS duplication of checking duplicated MAC IDs.
MAC IDs
MS (green) I/O The firmware on the daughter board is
NS (green) communication stopping I/O communication.
stopped
MS (green) I/O The firmware on the daughter board is
NS (green) communication successfully performing I/O
in advance communication.
LED indication of MS and NS (during occurrence of an error)

LED display Status Error and action
MS (red) Daughter board The daughter board failed.
NS ◊ failure Replace the DeviceNet master board.
MS (red) Daughter board The daughter board failed.
NS failure Replace the DeviceNet master board.
MS ◊ Duplicate MAC MAC IDs are duplicate.
NS (red) IDs Verify the following:
→ MAC IDs are not duplicate by check
the MAC IDs of all nodes.
Busoff detection Communication stopped because a
communication error occurred frequently.
Verify the following:
→ The communication rates of all nodes
are set to the same value.
→ The cable length is appropriate.
→ The cable is not loose or broken.
→ A terminal is placed on only both ends
of the main line.
→ There are not much noise.
MS ◊ Network power Power for communication is not supplied.
NS failure Verify the following:
→ Power for communication is properly
supplied.
Transmission Transmission is not completed
error successfully.
Verify the following:
→ All slaves are turned on.
→ There is no other master on the
network.
of the main line.
227
B-63947EN/01

MS ◊ Slave not No slaves are present.
NS (red) present Verify the following:
→ The slave is turned on.
of the main line.
Slave I/O size The slave I/O size setting does not match
mismatch the setting of the actual slave.
Verify the following: 6
→ The slave I/O size setting matches the
setting of the actual slave.
I/O I/O communication timed out.
communication Verify the following:
error → The communication rates of all nodes
of the main line.
- Slave board
This board provides four green LEDs (LED0 to LED3) and one red LED
(LEDWD) for status indication. In addition, there are two LED sets (MS
and NS) that consist of one red LED and one green LED.
Name Color Meaning
LED0 to Green Indicates the activation state of the DeviceNet application
LED3 software.
LEDWD Red Indicates an error on the board.
Green Indicates the unit status, which is the status of the local
MS
Red node.
Green Indicates the network status, which is the status of the
NS
Red entire network including the local node.

follows:
: Off, : On, : Blinking, ◊: Don't care, ?: Undefined
LED display transition for LED0, LED1, LED2, and LED3

LED State and cause when Action when stopped after
display stopped after power-on power-on
L3L2L1L0
Power-off
After power-on, the Store the DeviceNet application
DeviceNet application software in the Flash ROM of the
software does not start. CNC. Or, confirm that the
Or, the DeviceNet slave DeviceNet slave function (software
function (software option) has been purchased.
option) is disabled.
Initializing the firmware Remove the noise factor and then
on the board. turn the slave power off and back
on again. When the error persists,
replace the DeviceNet slave board.
228
6 HARDWARE
L3L2L1L0
The board firmware has Remove the noise factor and then
been initialized. turn the slave power off and back
on again. When the error persists,
replace the DeviceNet slave board.
A line baud rate check These faults are recoverable.
is in progress. When communication is normally
A MAC ID duplication established, the status changes to
check is in progress. "I/O communication is normal".
Each status corresponds to
Waiting for I/O DeviceNet MPU status transition
communication to be (Note)
.
established.
I/O communication is
normal.
I/O communication has
timed out.
I/O communication is
idle.

L3L2L1L0
These faults are not Check the following and then turn
↑↓ recoverable on the the slave power off and back on
board side. again.
(Repetition) MAC ID duplication has → MAC IDs are not duplicate by
been detected. check the MAC IDs of all
nodes.
These faults are not Check the following and then turn
↑↓ recoverable on the the slave power off and back on
board side. again.
(Repetition) Busoff was detected → The communication rates of all
due to frequent nodes are set to the same
occurrence of a value.
communication error. → The cable length is appropriate.
→ The cable is not loose or
broken.
→ A terminal is placed on only
both ends of the main line.
Any of other Remove the noise factor and then
↑↓ unrecoverable failures turn the slave power off and back
??? occurred on the board. on again. When the error persists,
(Repetition) The pattern indicated by replace the DeviceNet slave board.
LED0 to LED2 is other
than the above two
patterns.
An unrecoverable Contact FANUC.
↑↓ failure occurred on the
CNC side.
(Repetition)
NOTE
When a transition to the "I/O communication normal" status is not made,
confirm that the power for communication is correctly supplied because a
network power failure may have occurred.
229
B-63947EN/01
LED indication of LEDWD

Board failure Remove the noise factor and then turn the slave
power off and back on again. When the error
persists, replace the DeviceNet slave board.
LED indication of MS and NS (during normal operation)

In the "during normal operation" status, when communication is normally
established, a transition to the "I/O communication normal" status is
made.
MS (green) Immediately after The onboard firmware is being initialized
MS (red) power-on when the onboard MPU is in the reset
NS (green) status or reset release status. 6
NS (red)
MS (green) Communication The onboard firmware performs
MS (red) under processing in the order below.
NS (green) preparation <1> Waits for the DeviceNet application
NS (red) software to be initialized.
<2> Checks the baud rate.
<3> Checks MAC ID duplication.
MS (green) Waiting for Each status corresponds to DeviceNet
MS (red) establishment of MPU status transition (Note).
NS (green) I/O
NS (red) communication
to be established
MS (green) I/O
MS (red) communication
NS (green) normal
NS (red)
MS ◊ (green) I/O
MS ◊ (red) communication
NS (green) timeout
NS (red)
NOTE
When a transition to the “I/O communication normal” status is not made,
confirm that the power for communication is correctly supplied because a
network power failure may have occurred.
LED indication of MS and NS (during occurrence of an

unrecoverable failure)
In the "during occurrence of an unrecoverable failure" status, once an
error occurred, recovery is not performed unless this slave station is
powered off and back on again.
MS ◊ (green) Duplicate MAC Check the following and then turn the
MS ◊ (red) IDs slave power off and back on again.
NS (green) → MAC IDs are not duplicate by check
NS (red) the MAC IDs of all nodes.
Busoff Check the following and then turn the
detection slave power off and back on again.
of the main line.
230
6 HARDWARE
MS (green) Other Remove the noise factor and then turn the
MS (red) unrecoverable slave power off and back on again.
NS ◊ (green) onboard When the error persists, replace the
NS ◊ (red) failures DeviceNet slave board.
6.4.1.8 Mounting locations of optional boards

As for the mounting of optional boards, the slots to which to mount them
are specified. If you mount additional optional boards and perform
maintenance on them, follow the rules described below.
1 For the LCD-mounted, 2-slot type and the stand-alone , 2-slot type
Check the optional boards to be mounted with table 1, and mount
the optional board with the smallest number to slot 1, the one with
the second smallest number to slot 2, and so on.
2 For the stand-alone, 4-slot type
Check the optional boards to be mounted with table 1, and mount
them to slots 1, 3, 4, and 2 in the order of smallest to largest
number.
Table 6.4.1.8
No. Name
1 PROFIBUS master board
2 Fast Ethernet board (Also used as a data server.)
3 FL-net board
4 DeviceNet master board
5 DeviceNet slave board
6 PROFIBUS slave board
7 HSSB board
8 Additional spindle board
9 Additional axis board
LCD-mounted type Stand-alone type

4-slot lack 2-slot lack
Slot 2
Slot 1
Slot 3 Slot 1
Slot 4 Slot 2
231
B-63947EN/01
6.4.2 Other Units

6.4.2.1 Separate detector interface unit
Specification
Name Specification
Basic unit A02B-0303-C205
Additional unit A02B-0236-C204

CNF1 (CNF2)
6
JF101 (JF105)
JF102 (JF106)
JF103 (JF107)
JF104 (JF108)
JA4A
The parenthesized connector names are for the additional unit.

CP11A 24 VDC power input
CP11B 24 VDC power output
COP10A Back stage of the FSSB interface
COP10B Front stage of the FSSB interface
JF101 to JF104 Separate detector interface
(JF105 to JF108)
JA4A Connection of a battery for the absolute detector
CNF1(CNF2) Connection of the additional unit
232
6 HARDWARE
LED display
Status indication LEDs are installed on the board in the basic unit case.
Two green LEDs (POWER and LINK) and two red LEDs (ERR1 and
ERR2) are provided. The figure below shows the locations of these
LEDs. The table below explains the LED lighting states.
POWER
ERR1,ERR2 LINK
- LED indication
No. LED Meaning
1 POWER Turned on when the power is on
2 LINK Turned on when FSSB communication is performed
3 ERR1 Turned on when COP10A (back stage) is disconnected
4 ERR2 Turned on when COP10B (front stage) is disconnected
233
B-63947EN/01
6.4.2.2 Analog input separate detector interface unit

Specification
Name Specification
Basic unit A06B-6061-C201
No dedicated additional unit is available for the analog input separate
detector interface unit. The additional unit A02B-0236-C204 mentioned
in the previous subsection can be used with this interface unit.

CNF1
6
JF111
JF112
JF113
JF114
JA4A

CP11A 24 VDC power input
CP11B 24 VDC power output
COP10A Back stage of the FSSB interface
COP10B Front stage of the FSSB interface
JF111 to JF114 Separate detector interface
JA4A Connection of a battery for the absolute detector
CNF1 Connection of the additional unit
234
6 HARDWARE
LED display
Status indication LEDs are installed on the board in the basic unit case.
Two green LEDs (POWER and LINK) and two red LEDs (ERR1 and
ERR2) are provided. The figure below shows the locations of these
LEDs. The table below explains the LED lighting states.
POWER
ERR1,ERR2 LINK
LED indication
No. LED Meaning
1 POWER Turned on when the power is on
2 LINK Turned on when FSSB communication is performed
3 ERR1 Turned on when COP10A (back stage) is disconnected
4 ERR2 Turned on when COP10B (front stage) is disconnected
235
7 PARAMETERS
7.1 HOW TO ENTER THE PARAMETERS
Setting procedure of parameters
Parameter writing is enabled with following steps 1 to 3.
1 Set to MDI mode or emergency stop state.
2 Press function key several times or press soft key [SETING]
to display SETTING (HANDY) screen.
3 Set the cursor to PARAMETER WRITE and, press and
keys in this order. Here alarm 100 will be displayed.
4 Press function key several times to display the following
screen.
(To make the cursor display in bit unit, press the cursor keys
or .)
5 Press soft key [(OPRT)] and the following operation menu is
displayed.
<1> Soft key [NO.SRH] :
Searched by number.
Example) Parameter number → [NO.SRH]
<2> Soft key [ON : 1] :
Item with cursor position is set to 1. (Bit parameter only)
<3> Soft key [OFF : 0] :
Item with cursor position is set to 0. (Bit parameter only)
<4> Soft key [+INPUT] :
Input value is added to the value at cursor. (Word type only)
<5> Soft key [INPUT] :
Input value is replaced with the value at cursor.
<6> Soft key [READ] :
Parameters are input from reader/puncher interface.
<7> Soft key [PUNCH] :
Parameters are output to reader/puncher interface.
6 After the parameters have been input, set PARAMETER WRITE on
the SETTING screen to 0. Press key to release alarm 100.
7 Convenient method
<1> To change parameters in bit unit, press cursor move key
or , then the cursor becomes bit length and you can set
parameters bit by bit (Bit parameter only).
237
B-63947EN/01
<2> To set data consecutively, use key.

(Example 1)
This key sequence sets data as follows:

0 → 1 2 3 4
0 4 5 6 7
0 9 9 9 9
0 0
(Example 2)

0 → 1 2 3 4
0 0 7
0 9 9 9 9
0 0
<3> To set the same data sequentially, press “=”.

(Example)
"=“ "="
0 → 1 2 3 4
0 1 2 3 4
0 1 2 3 4
0 0
<4> Bit parameters can be set as follows:

(Example)
"=“
00000000→ 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0
00000000→ 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0
00000000→ 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0
00000000→ 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
8 After the required parameters are set, set PARAMETER WRITE to
0.
238
7 PARAMETERS
7.2 PARAMETER LIST
7.2.1 Setting ................................................................... (No. 00000~)
7.2.2 DNC1/DNC2 Interface ........................................... (No. 00300~)
7.2.3 System Configuration ............................................ (No. 00980~)
7.2.4 Axis Control ........................................................... (No. 01000~)
7.2.5 Coordinate System ................................................ (No. 01201~)
7.2.6 Stroke Limit Check................................................. (No. 01300~)
7.2.7 Chuck and Tail Stock Barrier ................................. (No. 01330~)
7.2.8 Feedrate ................................................................ (No. 01401~)
7.2.9 Acceleration/Deceleration Control.......................... (No. 01601~)
7.2.10 Servo ..................................................................... (No. 01800~)
7.2.11 DI/DO .................................................................... (No. 03001~)
7.2.12 Display and Edit..................................................... (No. 03100~)
7.2.13 Programs ............................................................... (No. 03400~)
7.2.14 Pitch Error Compensation...................................... (No. 03601~)
7.2.15 Spindle Control ...................................................... (No. 03700~)
7.2.16 Serial Spindle ........................................................ (No. 04000~)
7.2.17 Spindle Control 2 ................................................... (No. 04800~)
7.2.18 Tool Compensation................................................ (No. 05000~)
7.2.19 Canned Cycle ........................................................ (No. 05101~)
7.2.20 Rigid Tapping ........................................................ (No. 05200~)
7.2.21 Scaling/Coordinate Rotation .................................. (No. 05400~)
7.2.22 Single Direction Positioning ................................... (No. 05431~)
7.2.23 Polar Coordinate Interpolation ............................... (No. 05450~)
7.2.24 Normal Direction Control........................................ (No. 05480~)
7.2.25 Index Table............................................................ (No. 05500~)
7.2.26 Involute Interpolation ............................................. (No. 05610~)
7.2.27 Exponential Interpolation ....................................... (No. 05630~)
7.2.28 Flexible Synchronous Control ................................ (No. 05660~)
7.2.29 Straightness Compensation................................... (No. 05700~)
7.2.30 Inclination Compensation....................................... (No. 05861~)
7.2.31 Custom Macros...................................................... (No. 06000~)
7.2.32 Skip Functions ....................................................... (No. 06200~)
7.2.33 External Data Input ................................................ (No. 06300~)
7.2.34 Manual Handle Retrace ......................................... (No. 06400~)
7.2.35 Graphic Display ..................................................... (No. 06510~)
7.2.36 Screen Display Colors ........................................... (No. 06581~)
7.2.37 Run Hour and Parts Count Display ........................ (No. 06700~)
7.2.38 Tool Life Management ........................................... (No. 06800~)
7.2.39 Position Switch ...................................................... (No. 06900~)
7.2.40 Manual/Automatic Operation Functions ................. (No. 07001~)
7.2.41 Manual Handle ...................................................... (No. 07181~)
7.2.42 Reference Position with Mechanical Stopper ......... (No. 07100~)
7.2.43 Software Operator's Panel ..................................... (No. 07200~)
7.2.44 Program Restart .................................................... (No. 07300~)
7.2.45 Software Operator's Panel 2 .................................. (No. 07352~)
7.2.46 High-speed Cutting ................................................ (No. 07501~)
7.2.47 Fixture Offset ......................................................... (No. 07570~)
7.2.48 Polygon Turning..................................................... (No. 07600~)
7.2.49 Electric Gear Box (EGB) ........................................ (No. 07700~)
7.2.50 Axis Control by PMC.............................................. (No. 08001~)
7.2.51 Multi-path............................................................... (No. 08100~)
7.2.52 Interference Check for Each Path .......................... (No. 08140~)
7.2.53 Synchronous/Composite Control and
Superimposed Control ........................................... (No. 08160~)
7.2.54 Angular Axis Control .............................................. (No. 08200~)
7.2.55 Axis Synchronous Control...................................... (No. 08301~)
7.2.56 Sequence Number Comparison and Stop.............. (No. 08341~)
7.2.57 Chopping ............................................................... (No. 08360~)
7.2.58 AI Contour Control ................................................. (No. 08451~)
7.2.59 High-speed Position Switch ................................... (No. 08500~)
7.2.60 Others.................................................................... (No. 08650~)
7.2.61 Maintenance .......................................................... (No. 08900~)
7.2.62 Macro Executor...................................................... (No. 09000~)
7.2.63 Wrong Operation Prevention Function ................... (No. 10000~)
7.2.64 Screen Display Colors 2 ........................................ (No. 10421~)
239
B-63947EN/01
7.2.65 Dual Check Safety ................................................. (No. 10500~)

7.2.66 Diagnosis............................................................... (No. 10600~)
7.2.67 Three-dimensional Error Compensation ................ (No. 10800~)
7.2.68 Rotation Area Interference Check.......................... (No. 10900~)
7.2.69 Spindle Control Based on Servo Motor/
Cs Contour Control ................................................ (No. 11000~)
7.2.70 Path Table Operation Function .............................. (No. 11100~)
7.2.71 PMC ...................................................................... (No. 11900~)
7.2.72 Dual Check Safety 2 .............................................. (No. 11950~)
7.2.73 Embedded Macro Functions .................................. (No. 12020~)
7.2.74 High-speed Position Switch 2 ................................ (No. 12201~)
7.2.75 Malfunction Protection ........................................... (No. 12255~)
7.2.76 Manual Handle 2.................................................... (No. 12300~)
7.2.77 Display and Edit 2.................................................. (No. 13101~)
7.2.78 Tool Management Functions ................................. (No. 13200~)
7.2.79 Straightness Compensation 2 ................................ (No. 13301~)
7.2.80 Machining Condition Selection Functions .............. (No. 13600~)
7.2.81 Dual Check Safety 3 .............................................. (No. 13821~) 7
7.2.82 FSSB ..................................................................... (No. 14000~)
7.2.83 Embedded Ethernet............................................... (No. 14880~)
7.2.84 Rotation Area Interference Check 2....................... (No. 14900~)
7.2.85 Pitch Error Compensation 2................................... (No. 14985~)
7.2.86 AI Contour Control 2 .............................................. (No. 19500~)
7.2.87 Optimum Torque Acceleration/Deceleration .......... (No. 19540~)
7.2.88 Nano Smoothing .................................................... (No. 19580~)
7.2.89 Tool Compensation 2............................................. (No. 19600~)
NOTE
1 With some parameter numbers, the range of setting is restricted.
2 Some parameters can be entered on the setting screen.
3 In the description of a bit parameter, the explanation on the left side of a
slash (/) corresponds to the setting of 0, and the explanation on the right
side corresponds to the setting of 1.
4 <Axis> indicated for a parameter in the right-hand column of the parameter
table means that the parameter is specified for each axis.
5 <T series> indicated for a parameter in the right-hand column of the
parameter table means that the parameter can be used only with a lathe
system. Similarly, <M series> indicated for a parameter in the right-hand
column of the parameter table means that the parameter can be used only
with a machining center system.
240
7 PARAMETERS
7.2.1 Setting
(The parameters below can be set on the setting screen.)
00000 Setting
#0 TVC TV check is, not performed (0) / performed (1)
#1 ISO The code used for data output is, EIA code (0) / ISO
code(1)
#2 INI The unit of input is, mm (0) / inch (1)
#5 SEQ Automatic insertion of sequence numbers is, not
performed (0) / performed (1)
00001 Tape format
#1 FCV FS16 standard format (0) / FS15 format (1)
00002 Reference position return, Remote diagnosis
#7 SJZ For manual reference position return, deceleration M series
dogs are used when a reference position is not PRM
established, and positioning is performed when a 1005#3=1
reference position is established (0) / deceleration
dogs are used at all times (1)
00010 Output format
#0 PZS When a part program is punched out, the O number is,
not zero-suppressed (0) / zero-suppressed (1)
#1 PRM When parameters are output, the parameters whose
values are 0 are, output (0) / not output (1)
#2 PEC When pitch error compensation data is output, the
data whose value is 0 is, output (0) / not output (1)
00012 Axis detach, Move command, Mirror image <Axis>
#0 MIR Mirror image for each axis is, OFF (0) / ON (1) PRM
#7 RMV Assignment of the control axis for each axis is, not 1005#7=1
released (0) / released (1)
00020 Selection of an input/output device, Selection of a PRM110#0
foreground input device
Setting Description (I/O device selected)
0 Channel 0 (RS-232-C serial port 1)
4 Memory card
5 Data Server
6 DNC operation is performed or M198 is specified by
FOCAS2/Ethernet.
15 M198 is specified by FOCAS2/HSSB.
(Parameter (No. 8706#1) = 1)
16 DNC operation is performed or M198 is specified by
FOCAS2/HSSB (PORT2).
20 to 35 Data is transferred to and from a Power Mate CNC
manager in group n (n: 0 to 15) via the I/O Link.
[Setting value 20 → Group 1]
Specifi-
Setting Common Output Transfer Transfer
cation Connector
value setting format rate method
number
0 No.101 No.102 No.103 JD36A
1 No.100 No.111 No.112 No.113 Not set
2 No.121 No.122 No.123 JD36B
00021 Foreground output device setting
00022 Background input device setting
00023 Background output device setting
00024 Setting of communication with the ladder development
tool (FANUC LADDER-III, ladder editing package)
0 The settings on the PMC online monitor setting screen are not
modified.
1 RS-232-C serial port 1 (JD36A)
2 RS-232-C serial port 2 (JD36B)
10 High-speed interface (HSSB(COP7) or Ethernet)
11 High-speed interface or RS-232-C serial port 1
12 High-speed interface or RS-232-C serial port 2
255 Communication is terminated forcibly (as with the [EMGSTP]
soft key).
241
B-63947EN/01
00100 Output format common to all channels

#1 CTV Character counting for TV check in the comment
section of a program is, performed (0) / not performed
(1)
#2 CRF When an EOB is output by ISO code, the setting of the PRM100#3
parameter is followed (0) / CR and LF are used (1)
#3 NCR When an EOB is output by ISO code, LF, CR, and CR
are used (0) / CR is used (1)
#6 IOP Stopping a program input or output operation by a ALM 001
reset is, enabled (0) / disabled (1)
#7 ENS When an NULL code is found during read of EIA code,
an alarm is generated (0) / the NULL code is ignored
(1)
00101 Output format (when I/O = 0)
#0 SB2 The number of stop bits is, 1 (0) / 2 (1)
#3 ASI Code used at data input is, EIA or ISO code
(automatically distinguished) (0) / ASCII code (1)
#7 NFD Before and after data, feed is, output (0) / not output 7
(1)
00102 Spec. No. of the I/O device (when I/O = 0)
0 RS-232-C (Used control codes DC1 to DC4)
1 CASSETTE B1/B2 (BUBBLE CASSETTE)
2 FLOPPY CASSETTE ADAPTOR F1
3 PROGRAM FILE Mate, FANUC FA Card, FSP-H, FLOPPY
CASSETTE, Handy File
4 RS-232-C (Not used control codes DC1 to DC4)
5 Portable tape reader
6 PPR, FSP-G, FSP-H
00103 Baud rate (when I/O = 0)
8: 1200bps, 9: 2400bps, 10: 4800bps, 11: 9600bps, 12: 19200bps
00110 Separate control of I/O channel numbers
#0 IO4 Separate control of I/O channel numbers is, not PRM
performed (0) / performed (1) 20 - 23
#7 NFD Before and after data, feed is, output (0) / not output
(1)
00112 Spec. No. of the I/O device (when I/O = 1) PRM102
00113 Baud rate (when I/O = 1) PRM103
#7 NFD Before and after data, feed, is output (0) / not output
(1)
00122 Spec. No. of the I/O device (when I/O = 2) PRM102
00123 Baud rate (when I/O = 2) PRM103
00138 Memory card I/O, Loader I/O
#0 MDP To the extension of a file to be punched or read, a
path number is, not added (0) / added (1)
#5 SCH The scheduled operation function is, disabled (0) /
enabled (1)
#7 MNC External subprogram call from the memory card is, not PRM20=4
7.2.2 DNC1/DNC2 Interface

00300 CNC screen display functions, Memory card interface
#0 PCM When a memory card interface is provided on the NC PRM20
side, and the CNC screen display function is activated,
the memory card interface on the NC side is used (0) /
the memory card interface on the personal computer
side is used (1)
242
7 PARAMETERS
00960 Power Mate CNC manager
#1 MD1 The input/output destination of slave parameters is, PRM
program memory (0) / memory card (1) 960#2=0
#2 MD2 The parameter is, always set to 0 (0) / reserved (1)
MD2 MD1
0 0 Program memory
0 1 Memory card
#3 PMN The Power Mate CNC manager is, enabled (0) /
disabled (1)
#4 PPE Slave parameter setting by the Power Mate CNC
manager, is always possible (0) / follows the setting of
PWE of the host CNC (1)
00961 I/O LINK β, Program number
#3 PMO The O number of a program for saving and restoring
the I/O Link β parameter is set based on, group
number and channel number (0) / group number only
(1)
7.2.3 System Configuration

00980 Machine group number to which each path belongs
00981 Absolute path number to which each axis belongs <Axis>
00982 Absolute path number to which each spindle belongs
00983 Path control type of each path
0: Lathe system
1: Machining system
00984 Loader control
#0 LCP The path is, not a loader control path (0) / loader
control path (1)
7.2.4 Axis Control

01000 Extended axis name, Extended spindle name
#0 EEA An extended axis name and extended spindle PRM
name are, invalid (0) / valid (1) 1025,1026
01001 Least command increment
#0 INM Least command increment on the linear axis is,
metric system (0) / inch system (1)
01002 Reference position return, Number of axes
controlled simultaneously in manual operation
#0 JAX The number of axes controlled simultaneously in
manual operation is, 1 (0) / 3 (1)
#3 AZR If G28 is used when no reference position is set, PRM1005#1
deceleration dogs are used (0) / alarm (PS0304) is
issued (1)
#4 XIK When an axis-by-axis interlock signal is applied PRM1401#1
during nonlinear positioning, only the interlocked
axis is stopped (0) / all axes are stopped (1)
#7 IDG When the reference position is set without dogs,
automatic setting of parameter (No. 1012#0) is, not
01004 Least input increment
#7 IPR Least input increment of each axis is set to, 1 time
(0) / 10 times (1), of the least command increment
01005 Control axis detach, External deceleration, <Axis>
Reference position return
#0 ZRN If automatic operation is performed without ALM
reference position return, an alarm is issued (0) / PS0224
no alarm is issued (1)
#1 DLZ The function for setting the reference position
without dogs is, disabled (0) / enabled (1)
#3 HJZ For manual reference position return performed PRM1005#1
when a reference position is established,
deceleration dogs are used (0) / the setting of
parameter (No. 00002#7) is followed (1)
243
B-63947EN/01
#4 EDP External deceleration in the positive (+) direction in PRM1426

cutting feed is, invalid (0) / valid (1)
#5 EDM External deceleration in the negative (-) direction in
cutting feed is, invalid (0) / valid (1)
#6 MCC At control axis detach time, the MCC signal is,
turned off (0) / not turned off (1)
#7 RMB Control axis detachment is, invalid (0) / valid (1) PRM12#7
01006 Controlled axes <Axis>
#0 ROT PRM3624
#1 ROS ROS ROT Meaning
Linear axis
(1) Inch/metric conversion is done.
0 0
(2) Coordinate values are not rounded in 0 to 360°.
(3) Stored pitch error compensation is linear axis type
Rotary axis (A type)
Machine coordinate values are rounded in 0 to 360°.
0 1
Absolute and relative coordinate values are rounded or
not rounded by parameter (No. 1008#0 or #2).
Rotary axis (B type) 7
1 1
All coordinate values are not rounded in 0 to 360°.
Except for the Setting is invalid (unused)
above
#3 DIA The move command for each axis is based on,
radius programming (0) / diameter programming (1)
#4 TCH The axis is, not a torch rotation controlled axis (0) /
a torch rotation controlled axis (1)
#5 ZMI The direction of manual reference position return
is, + direction (0) / - direction (1)
01007 Rotary axis command <Axis>
#0 RTL When manual reference position return is
performed on a rotary axis (A type) before a
reference position is established, a movement is
made at, reference position return feedrate FL (0) /
rapid traverse rate (1)
#1 ALZ In automatic reference position return (G28), rapid
traverse is used (0) / the same sequence as for
manual reference position return is used (1)
#3 RAA Rotary axis control is, not exercised (0) / exercised PRM
(1) 1008#0, #1=1
#4 GRD When matching between the machine position and
the position by the absolute position detector is not
completed, setting of the reference position without
dogs is, not performed two or more times (0) /
performed two or more times (1)
#5 G90 A command for rotary axis control, follows
G90/G91 (0) / is regarded as an absolute command
at all times (1)
01008 Rotary axis setting <Axis>
#0 ROA The roll-over function of a rotary axis is, invalid (0) / PRM1006#0
valid (1)
#1 RAB In an absolute command, a movement on the axis PRM1008#0
is made, in the shortcut direction (0) / according to
the sign of the command value (1)
#2 RRL Relative coordinates are, not rounded by the PRM1260
amount of shift per rotation (0) / rounded by the
amount of shift per rotation (1)
#4 SFD In reference position return based on the grid
method, the reference position shift function is,
invalid (0) / valid (1)
#5 RMC When machine coordinate system selection (G53)
is specified, parameter (No. 1008#1) and
parameter (No. 1007#3) are, invalid (0) / valid (1)
01012 Reference position setting without DOG <Axis>
#0 IDG The function for setting the reference position again PRM1002#7
without dogs is, not inhibited (0) / inhibited (1)
244
7 PARAMETERS
01013 Least input increment <Axis>
#0 ISA Increment system ISE ISD ISC ISA
#1 ISC IS-A 0 0 0 1
#2 ISD IS-B 0 0 0 0
#3 ISE IS-C 0 0 1 0
IS-D 0 1 0 0
IS-E 1 0 0 0
#7 IESP When IS-E or IS-D is used, the input values of
speed-related parameters, cannot be increased (0)
/ can be increased (1)
01014 PMC axis control, Cs axis contour control <Axis>
#7 CDM The Cs contour control axis is, not a virtual Cs axis
(0) / virtual Cs axis (1)
01015 Reference position return, Workpiece origin offset,
Increment system
#4 ZRL In automatic reference position return (G28), the PRM
tool path from the middle point to the reference 1401#1=1
position and machine coordinate positioning (G53)
are based on, positioning of nonlinear interpolation
type (0) / positioning of linear interpolation type (1)
#6 WIC In direct input of a measured workpiece origin M series
offset, an external workpiece origin offset is, not
considered (0) / considered (1)
#7 DWT When a dwell time is specified by P, the time
depends on the increment system (0) / does not
depends on the increment system (1 ms) (1)
01020 Program axis name for each axis <Axis>
X : 88 Y : 89 Z : 90
A : 65 B : 66 C : 67
U : 85 V : 86 W :87
01022 Setting of each axis in the basic coordinate system <Axis>
0 : Neither the basic three axes nor a parallel axis
1 : X axis of the basic three axes
2 : Y axis of the basic three axes
3 : Z axis of the basic three axes
5 : Axis parallel to the X axis
6 : Axis parallel to the Y axis
7 : Axis parallel to the Z axis
01023 Number of the servo axis for each axis <Axis>
01025 Servo axis name 2 for each axis <Axis>
01026 Servo axis name 3 for each axis PRM
1000#0=1
01031 Reference axis
7.2.5 Coordinate System

01201 Coordinate system
#0 ZPR When manual reference position return is performed, Workpiece
a coordinate system is, not set automatically (0) / set coordinate
automatically (1) system
#2 ZCL When manual reference position return is performed,
the local coordinate system is, not canceled (0) /
canceled (1)
#3 FPC When a floating reference position is set, the relative
position indication is, not preset to 0 (0) / preset to 0
(1)
#6 NWS The workpiece coordinate system shift amount setting T series
screen is, displayed (0) / not displayed (1)
#7 WZR When parameter (No. 3402#6) is set to 0, the G code
of group number 14 is, reset (0) / not reset (1)
01202 Workpiece origin offset
#0 EWD The shift direction of the external workpiece origin
offset is, the same as the sign of the offset (0) /
opposite to the sign of the offset (1)
#1 EWS The external workpiece origin offset is, valid (0) / T series
invalid (1)
245
B-63947EN/01
#2 G92 If a command for coordinate system setting is

specified when the workpiece coordinate system
option is enabled, no alarm is issued (0) / the alarm
(PS0010) is issued (1)
#3 RLC The local coordinate system is, not canceled by reset
(0) / canceled by reset (1)
01203 Extended external machine zero point shift,
3-dimensional coordinate system conversion
#0 EMS The extended external machine zero point shift
function is, disabled (0) / enabled (1)
#4 WZP In the 3-dimensional coordinate system conversion
mode, a modification to the workpiece coordinate
system from the MDI is, not prohibited (0) / prohibited
(1)
01205 Reference position output
#4 RP1 The output of the signal for the reference position is,
disabled (0) / enabled (1)
#5 RP2 The output of the signal for the 2nd reference position 7
is, disabled (0) / enabled (1)
01220 External workpiece origin offset value in each axis <Axis>
01221 Workpiece origin offset value in workpiece coordinate <Axis>
system 1 (G54) [Increment system]
01240 Coordinate value of the 1st reference position in the <Axis>
machine coordinate system [Increment system]
01241 Coordinate value of the 2nd reference position in the <Axis>
01242 Coordinate value of the 3rd reference position in the <Axis>
01243 Coordinate value of the 4th reference position in the <Axis>
01244 Coordinate value of the floating reference position in <Axis>
the machine coordinate system
01250 Coordinate system of the reference position used <Axis>
when automatic coordinate system setting is
performed
01260 Amount of a shift per one rotation of a rotary axis <Axis>
01280 Start address of signals used with the extended PRM
external machine zero point shift function 1203#0=1
01290 Distance between two opposite tool posts in mirror T series
image PRM1031
7.2.6 Stroke Limit Check

01300 Stored stroke check
#0 OUT The inhibition area of stored stroke check 2 is, inside
(0) / outside (1)
#1 NAL When the tool enters the inhibition area of stored PRM
stroke limit 1, the overtravel alarm signal is, not output 1320,1321
(0) / output (1) 1326,1327
#2 LMS The EXLM signal for switching stored stroke check 1 PRM
is, disabled (0) / enabled (1) 1301#0
#5 RL3 The stored stroke check 3 release signal RLSOT3 is,
246
7 PARAMETERS
#7 BFA When a stored stroke check alarm, inter-path
interference alarm, or chuck/tail stock barrier alarm is
issued, the tool stops, after entering the prohibited
area (0) / before entering the prohibited area (1)
01301 Stored limit check before move
#0 DLM The stored stroke limit switching signals G104 and EXLM
G105 for each axial direction are, disabled (0) /
enabled (1)
#2 NPC As part of the stroke limit check performed before Stroke
movement, the movement specified in G31 (skip) and before
G37 (automatic tool length measurement) blocks is, movement
checked (0) / not checked (1)
#4 OF1 If the tool is moved into the range allowed on the axis
after an OT alarm is raised by stored stroke check 1,
the alarm is not canceled before a reset is made (0) /
the alarm is immediately canceled (1)
#6 OTS When the overtravel alarm is issued, no signal is
output to the PMC (0) / the overtravel alarm signal is
output to the PMC (1)
#7 PLC Stroke check before movement is, not performed (0) /
performed (1)
01310 Stored stroke check for each axis <Axis>
#0 OT2 Stored stroke check 2 for each axis is, disabled (0) /
enabled (1)
#1 OT3 Stored stroke check 3 for each axis is, disabled (0) /
enabled (1)
01311 Stored stroke check <Axis>
#0 DOT Stored stroke check immediately after power-on is,
01320 Coordinate value I of stored stroke check 1 in the <Axis>
positive direction on each axis [Increment system]
01321 Coordinate value I of stored stroke check 1 in the <Axis>
negative direction on each axis [Increment system]
01322 Coordinate value of stored stroke check 2 in the <Axis>
01326 Coordinate value II of stored stroke check 1 in the <Axis>
positive direction on each axis [Increment system] PRM
01327 Coordinate value II of stored stroke check 1 in the 1300#2
negative direction on each axis [Increment system] 1301#0
7.2.7 Chuck and Tail Stock Barrier

01330 Profile of a chuck T series
0: Holds a workpiece on the inner surface
1: Holds a workpiece on the outer surface
01331 Length (L) of the claw of the chuck [Increment system] T series
01332 Width (W) of the claw of the chuck [Increment system] T series
01333 Dimensions of the part of a claw at which a workpiece T series
is held (L1) [Increment system]
01334 Dimensions of the part of a claw at which a workpiece T series
is held (W1) [Increment system]
01335 X coordinate of a chuck (CX) [Increment system] T series
01336 Z coordinate of a chuck (CZ) [Increment system] T series
01341 Length (L) of the tail stock [Increment system] T series
01342 Diameter (D) of the tail stock [Increment system] T series
Diameter
01343 Length (L1) of the tail stock [Increment system] T series
01344 Diameter (D1) of the tail stock [Increment system] T series
Diameter
247
B-63947EN/01
01345 Length (L2) of the tail stock [Increment system] T series

01346 Diameter (D2) of the tail stock [Increment system] T series
01347 Diameter (D3) of the tail stock [Increment system] Diameter
01348 Z coordinate of a tail stock (TZ) [Increment system] T series
7.2.8 Feedrate
01401 Feedrate
#0 RPD Manual rapid traverse before completion of return to
the reference position is, disabled (0) / enabled (1)
#1 LRP Positioning (G00) is, nonlinear (0) / linear (1)
#2 JZR Manual return to the reference position at the JOG
feedrate is, not performed (0) / performed (1)
#4 RF0 When cutting feedrate override is 0% during rapid
traverse, the machine tool, does not stop moving (0) /
stops moving (1)
#5 TDR Dry run during thread cutting and canned cycles (G74,
G84) is, enabled (0) / disabled (1) 7
#6 RDR Dry run for a rapid traverse command is, disabled (0) /
enabled (1)
01402 Manual per revolution feed
#0 NPC Feed per revolution without the position coder is,
#1 JOV Jog override is, enabled (0) / disabled (tied to 100%)
(1)
#3 OV2 The secondary feedrate override is, 1% (0) / 0.01% (1)
#4 JRV Jog feed or incremental feed is performed, at feed per
minute (0) / at feed per revolution (1)
01403 Thread cutting, Helical interpolation
#3 EDT The corner control function (for the gas stopper) is, M series
#4 ROC Rapid traverse override for retraction after threading T series
is, enabled (0) / disabled (100%) (1)
#5 HTG The feedrate for helical interpolation/helical involute
interpolation/3-dimensional circular interpolation is
specified, using the feedrate along the tangent to an
arc/involute curve/ 3-dimensional arc (0) / using the
feedrate along axes including a linear axis (1)
#7 RTV Overriding during retraction in a threading cycle, is T series
enabled (0) / disabled (1)
01404 Manual reference position return, Increment system
#1 DLF After a reference position has been established, a PRM
manual reference position return operation is 1420,1424
performed, at the rapid traverse rate (0) / at the
manual rapid traverse rate (1)
#2 FM3 The increment system of an F command without a T series
decimal point in feed per minute is, [1 mm/min] (0.01
inch/min for inch input) (0) / [0.001 mm/min] (0.00001
inch/min for inch input) (1)
01405 Increment system, Feedrate
#1 FR3 The increment system of an F command without a M series
decimal point in feed per revolution is,
[0.01 mm/rev] (0.0001 inch/rev for inch input) (0) /
[0.001 mm/rev] (0.00001 inch/rev for inch input)(1)
#2 PCL The function for constant surface speed control is, not
used (0) / used (1)
#5 EDR As the external deceleration rate for positioning of PRM
linear interpolation type, the external deceleration rate 1426,1427
for cutting feed is used (0) / the external deceleration
rate for the 1st axis in rapid traverse is used (1)
01406 External deceleration
#0 EX2 External deceleration function setting 2 is, invalid (0) /
valid (1)
#1 EX3 External deceleration function setting 3 is, invalid (0) /
valid (1)
248
7 PARAMETERS
01408 Feedrate on a rotary axis, Unit of cutting feedrate <Axis>
#0 RFD Feedrate control on a rotary axis is exercised, using
the conventional method (0) / the method that
specifies a feedrate on the virtual circle of the rotary
axis (1)
#3 IRC The increment system for a parameter (No. 1430/No. PRM
1432) for specifying a maximum cutting feedrate is, 11000#7=1
not multiplied by 10 (0) / multiplied by 10 (1)
01410 Dry run rate [mm/min]
01411 Cutting feedrate [mm/min]
M series
01414 Feedrate for retrace [mm/min]
<Axis>
M series
01420 Rapid traverse rate for each axis [mm/min] <Axis>
01421 F0 rate of rapid traverse override for each axis <Axis>
[mm/min]
01423 Feedrate in jog feed for each axis [mm/min] <Axis>
01424 Manual rapid traverse rate for each axis [mm/min] <Axis>
01425 FL rate of the reference position return for each axis <Axis>
[mm/min]
01426 External deceleration rate of cutting feed [mm/min] PRM
1005#4,#5
01427 External deceleration rate of rapid traverse for each <Axis>
axis [mm/min] PRM
1005#4,#5
01428 Reference position return feedrate before a reference <Axis>
position is established M series
Before reference After reference position
position establishment establishment
Reference position Not Not
Applied Applied
return feedrate (1428) applied applied
G28 PRM PRM
G00 1420 1420
Manual Without PRM PRM
reference dogs PRM 1428 1420, 1424 (*2)
position 1424 PRM
return With dogs PRM 1428
1424
Manual rapid traverse PRM 1423, 1424 (*1) PRM 1424
*1 Selected with parameter (No. 1401#0)

*2 Selected with parameter (No. 1404#1)
01430 Maximum cutting feedrate for each axis [mm/min] <Axis>
01432 Maximum cutting feedrate for all axes in the acc./dec. <Axis>
before interpolation [mm/min] PRM1430
01434 Maximum manual handle feedrate for each axis <Axis>
[mm/min]
01440 External deceleration rate setting 2 in cutting feed
[mm/min]
01441 External deceleration rate setting 2 for each axis in <Axis>
rapid traverse [mm/min]
01442 Maximum manual handle feedrate setting 2 for each <Axis>
axis [mm/min]
[mm/min]
rapid traverse [mm/min]
axis [mm/min]
01450 Change of feedrate for one graduation on the manual
pulse generator during 1-digit F code feed
Fmax1 or Fmax2
ΔF =
100 × s etting
Fmax1: PRM1460, Fmax2: PRM1461
01451 Feedrate for F1 [mm/min] M series
249
B-63947EN/01

01460 Upper limit of feedrate for F1 to F4 [mm/min] M series
01461 Upper limit of feedrate for F5 to F9 [mm/min] M series
01465 Virtual radius for feedrate on a virtual circle about a <Axis>
rotary axis [Input unit] PRM
1408#0
01466 Feedrate for retraction in threading cycle G92 or G76 T series
[mm/min] PRM
1611#0=1
1420
01474 Feedrate used to assume zero accumulated pulse <Axis>
[mm/min] M series 7
01495 Torch rotation speed [mm/min] M series
01496 Automatic exact stop check critical angle [deg] M series
01497 Automatic exact stop check miniature block travel M series
distance [Increment system]
7.2.9 Acceleration/Deceleration Control

01601 Acceleration/deceleration control
#4 RTO Block overlap in rapid traverse is, disabled (0) / PRM1722
enabled (1)
#5 NCI An in-position check confirms, acc./dec. delay and PRM1827
machine position (0) / only acc./dec. delay (1)
#3 BS2 Acc./dec. after interpolation during acc./dec. before
interpolation
#6 LS2 BS2 LS2 Acceleration/deceleration
0 0 Exponetial acc./dec.
0 1 Linear acc./dec.
1 0 Bell-shaped acc./dec.
#4 PRT Acceleration/deceleration for rapid traverse of linear
interpolation type is performed with, a constant
acc./dec. rate (0) / a constant time (1)
01604 AI contour control
#0 SHP When automatic operation is started, the state
equivalent to the specification of G5.1Q1 for AI
contour control is, not set (0) / set (1)
01606 Interrupt <Axis>
#0 MNJ In manual pulse generator interrupt or automatic
manual simultaneous operation (interrupt type), only
cutting feed acc./dec. is enabled (0) / both cutting
feed acc./dec. and jog feed acc./dec. are applied (1)
01610 Acceleration/deceleration control <Axis>
#0 CTL Acc./dec. after interpolation PRM1622
#1 CTB CTBx CTLx Acceleration/deceleration
0 0 Exponetial acc./dec.
0 1 Linear acc./dec.
1 0 Bell-shaped acc./dec.
#4 JGL The type of acc./dec. in jog feed is, exponential type PRM
(0) / same as for cutting feed (1) 1610#0,#1
#5 THL The type of acc./dec. in a threading cycle is, 1624
exponential type (0) / same as for cutting feed (1)
01611 Thread cutting, AI contour control
#0 CFR The type of acc./dec. used for retraction after T series
threading in threading cycles G92 and G76 is, PRM
acc./dec. after interpolation for threading (0) / 1626,1627
acc./dec. after interpolation for rapid traverse (1)
250
7 PARAMETERS
#2 AOFF When AI contour control I and II are disabled and the PRM
parameter for the advanced preview feed-forward 1604#0=0
function is valid, this function is, enabled (0) / disabled
(1)
#3 TCO In a threading cycle, rapid traverse overlap operation PRM1726
is, not performed (0) / performed (1)
01612 Rapid traverse block overlap
#0 PRO For a deceleration reduction ratio for overlapping PRM
rapid traverse blocks, parameter No. 1722 is used (0) 1601#4=1
/ system variables #100851[#_ROVLP[1]] to
#100900[#_ROVLP[50]] are used (1)
01620 Time constant T or T1 used for linear acc./dec. or <Axis>
bell-shaped acc./dec. in rapid traverse for each axis
[ms]
01621 Time constant T2 used for bell-shaped acc./dec. in <Axis>
rapid traverse for each axis [ms]
01622 Time constant of acc./dec. in cutting feed for each <Axis>
axis [ms] PRM
1610#0,#1
01623 FL rate of exponential acc./dec. in cutting feed for <Axis>
each axis [mm/min]
01624 Time constant of acc./dec. in jog feed for each axis <Axis>
[ms]
01625 FL rate of exponential acc./dec. in jog feed for each <Axis>
axis [mm/min]
01626 Acceleration/deceleration time constant in threading <Axis>
cycles for each axis [ms]
01627 FL rate for acc./dec. in threading cycles for each axis <Axis>
[mm/min]
01650 Acceleration/deceleration signal timer [ms] M series
01660 Maximum allowable acceleration rate in acc./dec. <Axis>
before interpolation for each axis [mm/sec2]
01671 Maximum allowable acceleration rate in acc./dec. <Axis>
before interpolation for linear rapid traverse for each
axis, or maximum allowable reference acceleration
rate in optimum torque acc./dec. [mm/sec2]
01672 Acceleration change time of bell-shaped acc./dec. PRM1671
before interpolation for linear rapid traverse, or
acceleration change time of bell-shaped acc./dec. in
optimum torque acc./dec. [ms]
01710 Minimum deceleration ratio (MDR) for inner circular
cutting feedrate change by automatic corner override
[%]
01711 Inner determination angle (θp) for inner corner
override [deg]
01712 Override value for inner corner override [%]
01713 Start distance (Le) for inner corner override
01714 End distance (Ls) for inner corner override
01722 Rapid traverse feedrate reduction ratio for <Axis>
overlapping rapid traverse blocks [%] PRM
1601#4=1
01726 Rapid traverse rate reduction ratio for overlapping <Axis>
threading cycle blocks [%] PRM
1611#3=1
01732 Minimum allowable feedrate for the deceleration PRM1735
function based on acceleration in circular interpolation Involute
[mm/min] interpolation
01735 Maximum allowable acceleration rate for the <Axis>
deceleration function based on acceleration in circular Involute
interpolation for each axis [mm/sec2] interpolation
01737 Maximum allowable acceleration rate for the <Axis>
deceleration function based on acceleration in AI PRM1735
contour control for each axis [mm/sec2]
251
B-63947EN/01
01738 Minimum allowable feedrate for the deceleration

function based on acceleration in AI contour control
[mm/min]
01763 FL rate for acc./dec. after cutting feed interpolation for <Axis>
each axis in the acc./dec. before interpolation mode
[mm/min]
01769 Time constant for acc./dec. after cutting feed <Axis>
interpolation in the acc./dec. before interpolation
mode [ms]
01772 Acceleration change time of bell-shaped acc./dec. PRM1660
before interpolation [ms]
01783 Maximum allowable feedrate difference for feedrate <Axis>
determination based on corner feedrate difference
01788 Maximum allowable acceleration change rate in <Axis>
feedrate determination based on acceleration change
for each axis
01789 Maximum allowable acceleration change rate in <Axis>
7
feedrate determination based on acceleration change PRM1788
for each axis (linear interpolation)
01790 Ratio of change time of the rate of change of PRM
acceleration in smooth bell-shaped acc./dec. before 1672,1722
interpolation [%]
01791 Acceleration rate on each axis for the outage-time <Axis>
deceleration stop function [mm/sec2]
7.2.10 Servo
01800 Backlash compensation applied separately for
cutting feed and rapid traverse, DRDY alarm
#1 CVR When velocity control ready signal VRDY is on ALM
before position control ready signal PRDY comes SV0401
on, an alarm is generated (0) / no alarm is
generated (1)
#3 FFR Feed-forward control in rapid traverse is,
#4 RBK Backlash compensation applied separately for PRM
cutting feed and rapid traverse is, not performed 1851,1852
(0) / performed (1)
01801 In-position width at cutting
#4 CCI Parameter number setting for in-position width at
cutting time
#5 CIN CIN CCI PRM1826 PRM1827
0 0 Same as rapid traverse (Not used)
1 0 Same as rapid traverse (Not used)
When the next block When the next block
0 1 specifies an operation other specifies cutting feed
than cutting feed
When rapid traverse is When cutting feed is
1 1 performed, independently performed, independently
of the next block of the next block
01802 Servo control <Axis>

#1 DC4 When a reference position is established on a
linear scale with reference marks, three
reference marks are detected (0) / four reference
marks are detected (1)
#2 DC2 Reference position establishment operation for a PRM
linear scale with reference marks is performed, 1817#4
by following the setting of parameter
(No.1802#1) (0) / by establishing an absolute
position through detection of two reference
marks (1)
#4 BKL15 In travel direction determination, the backlash
compensation value is, not considered (0) /
considered (1)
252
7 PARAMETERS
01803 Torque control
#0 TQI Within a torque limit, an in-position check is,
made (0) / not made (1)
#1 TQA Within a torque limit, an excessive stop-time /
move-time error is, checked (0) / not checked (1)
#4 TQF When torque control is performed by the PMC
axis control, follow-up operation is, not performed
(0) / performed (1)
#7 NFP If position matching between the machine
position and absolute position detector is not
performed even once, follow-up operation is, not
01804 VRDY OFF ignore signal
#4 IVO When an attempt is made to release an
emergency stop state while the VRDY OFF alarm
ignore signal is 1, the emergency stop state is not
released until the signal is set to 0 (0) / the
emergency stop state is released immediately (1)
#5 ANA When an unexpected disturbance torque is PRM1881
detected for an axis, movement along all axes is
stopped and a servo alarm is issued (0) / no
servo alarm is issued and movement along only
the axes of the group containing the axis with the
unexpected disturbance torque is stopped in
interlock mode (1)
#6 SAK When the VRDY OFF alarm ignore signal
IGNVRY is 1, or when the IGNVRY signals for all
axes are 1, the servo ready signal SA is, "0" (0) /
"1" (1)
01805 PMC axis torque control
#1 TRE When parameter (No. 1803#4) is set to 0, the PRM1885
servo error counter is, updated (0) / not updated ALM
(1) SV0423
SV0422
#3 TSA As the unexpected disturbance torque detection PRM
level during dwell, M code execution, and 2142, 2104
automatic operation halt state, the threshold 2200#3=1
value for rapid traverse is used (0) / the threshold
value for cutting feed is used (1)
#4 TSM As the unexpected disturbance torque detection PRM
level in the jog feed mode (excluding manual 2142, 2104
rapid traverse) and manual handle feed mode, 2200#3=1
the threshold value for rapid traverse is used (0) /
the threshold value for cutting feed is used (1)
01814 Cs axis contour control <Axis>
#7 ALG The servo axis loop gain in the Cs contour control
mode is, not matched with the Cs contour control
loop gain (0) / matched with the Cs contour
control loop gain (1)
01815 Position detector <Axis>
#1 OPT As a position detector, a separate Pulsecoder is,
not used (0) / used (1)
#2 DCL As a separate position detector, a linear scale
with reference marks or a linear scale with an
absolute address zero point is, not used (0) /
used (1)
#3 DCR As a scale with absolute address reference PRM
marks, a rotary encoder with absolute address 1815#2
reference marks is, not used (0) / used (1)
#4 APZ When an absolute position detector is used,
matching with the machine position is, not
completed (0) / completed (1)
#5 APC The position detector is, not an absolute position
detector (0) / an absolute position detector (1)
253
B-63947EN/01
#6 RON In the case of rotation speed of A type, an PRM

absolute position detector with a scale that has 1006#0=1
no rotation speed data is, not used (0) / used (1) 1006#1=0
01817 Tandem control, Backlash <Axis>
#2 SBL Smooth backlash compensation is, disabled (0) /
enabled (1)
#4 SCP For two-point measurement, the scale zero point PRM
direction is, on the minus side (0) / on the plus 1802#2=1
side (1)
#6 TAN Tandem control is, not used (0) / used (1)
01818 Linear scale I/F with absolute address referenced <Axis>
mark (A/B phase)
Linear scale with distance-coded reference
marks (serial)
#0 RFS If G28 is specified for an axis for which a
reference position is not established when a
linear scale with absolute address reference
marks or a linear scale with an absolute address 7
zero point is used, a movement is made to the
reference position after reference position
establishment operation (0) / no movement is
made to the reference position but the operation
is completed (1)
#1 RF2 If G28 is specified for an axis for which a
reference position is already established when a
linear scale with absolute address reference
marks or a linear scale with an absolute address
zero point is used, a movement is made to the
reference position (0) / no movement is made to
the reference position but the operation is
completed (1)
#2 DG0 When a linear scale function with absolute
address reference marks is used, reference
position establishment operation based on the
G00 command and jog feed is, disabled (0) /
enabled (1)
#3 SDC A linear scale with an absolute address zero PRM1815#1
point is, not used (0) / used (1)
01819 Follow-up, Feed forward <Axis>
#0 FUP When the servo system is turned off, follow-up
operation is, performed based on *FLWU (0) / not
performed (1)
#1 CRF When a servo alarm from SV0445 to SV447 or, PRM1815#4
servo alarm SV0421 is issued, the reference
position established state is not affected (0) / the
reference position unestablished state is
assumed (1)
#2 DAT When a linear scale with an absolute address PRM1815,
zero point or a linear scale with absolute address 1821, 1882
reference marks is used, the automatic setting of
parameter No. 1883 and No. 1884 at manual
reference position return time is, not performed
(0) / performed (1)
#7 NAH In the advanced preview control mode, advanced
preview feed-forward is, used (0) / not used (1)
01820 Command multiplier for each axis (CMR) <Axis>
Least command increment
CMR = CMR
Detection unit
CMR < 1 Setting = (1/CMR) + 100
CMR ≥ 1 Setting = 2 × CMR
01821 Reference counter size for each axis <Axis>
01822 Value of the numerator of arbitrary command Arbitrary
multiplier n/m command
01823 Value of the denominator of arbitrary command multiplier
multiplier n/m
254
7 PARAMETERS
01825 Servo loop gain for each axis [0.01sec-1] <Axis>
Usually,3000
01826 In-position width for each axis [Detection unit] <Axis>
01827 In-position width in cutting feed for each axis <Axis>
[Detection unit] PRM1801#4
=1
01828 Positioning deviation limit for each axis in <Axis>
movement [Detection unit] PRM
Setting =
Rapid traverse
×
1
× 1.2
1420,1825
60 × Servo loop gain Detection unit
01829 Positioning deviation limit for each axis in the <Axis>
stopped state [Detection unit]
01830 Positional deviation limit at servo-off time for <Axis>
each axis [Detection unit] PRM1829
01832 Feed stop positioning deviation for each axis <Axis>
[Detection unit]
01836 Servo error amount where reference position <Axis>
return is possible [Detection unit] Usually set 0.
01838 Positional deviation limit for each axis during <Axis>
movement in safety monitoring [Detection unit]
01839 Positional deviation limit for each axis during halt <Axis>
in safety monitoring [Detection unit]
01840 Positional deviation limit for each axis at servo-off <Axis>
time [Detection unit]
01841 Positional deviation limit for each axis during <Axis>
movement in other than safety monitoring PRM1828
[Detection unit]
01842 Positional deviation limit for each axis during halt <Axis>
in other than safety monitoring [Detection unit] PRM1829
01844 Distance to the 1st grid point after the <Axis>
deceleration dog is turned off in the case where PRM1850
the reference position shift amount of the
reference position shift function is 0
[Detection unit]
01846 Distance for starting the 2nd stage of smooth <Axis>
backlash compensation [Detection unit]
01847 Distance for ending the 2nd stage of smooth <Axis>
backlash compensation [Detection unit]
01848 Value of the 1st stage of smooth backlash <Axis>
compensation [Detection unit]
01850 Grid shift and reference position shift for each <Axis>
axis [Detection unit] PRM1008#4
01851 Backlash compensating value for each axis <Axis>
[Detection unit]
01852 Backlash compensating value used for rapid <Axis>
traverse for each axis [Detection unit] PRM1800#4
Cutting feed to Rapid traverse Rapid traverse Cutting feed to
cutting feed to rapid traverse to cutting feed rapid traverse
Same direction 0 0 ±α ±(-α)
Opposite direction ±A ±B ±(B+α) ±(B+α)
A: Backlash amount in cutting feed
B: Backlash amount in rapid traverse
α=(A-B)/2
* The positive or negative direction for
compensating values is the direction of
movement.
01874 Numerator of the conversion coefficient for <Axis>
inductosyn position detection, or numerator of
the flexible feed gear for the built-in operation
detector in temporary absolute coordinate setting
01875 Denominator of the conversion coefficient for <Axis>
inductosyn position detection, or denominator of
the flexible feed gear for the built-in position
detector in temporary absolute coordinate setting
255
B-63947EN/01
01876 One-pitch interval of the inductosyn <Axis>

01880 Unexpected disturbance torque detection alarm
timer [ms]
01881 Group number when an unexpected disturbance <Axis>
torque is detected PRM
1804#5=1
01882 Interval of mark 2 of a linear scale with reference <Axis>
marks [Detection unit]
01883 Distance 1 from the scale zero point to reference <Axis>
position [Detection unit]
01884 Distance 2 from the scale zero point to reference <Axis>
position [Detection unit]
01885 Maximum allowable value for total travel during <Axis>
torque control [Detection unit] PRM
1803#3
01886 Positional deviation when torque control is <Axis>
canceled [Detection unit] PRM1803#3 7
01890 Servo motor detection speed [min-1] <Axis>
01891 Start value of the Y address for motor speed PRM
detection signal output 1890, 11800
01895 Servo motor axis number used for a milling tool
01898 Number of gear teeth on the servo motor axis <Axis>
side PRM1895≠0
01899 Number of gear teeth on the milling axis side <Axis>
PRM1895≠0
01902 FSSB, High-speed HRV, Dual check safety
#0 FMD The FSSB setting mode is, automatic setting
mode (0) / manual setting 2 mode (1)
#1 ASE When automatic setting mode is selected for PRM1902#0
FSSB setting, automatic setting is, not completed
(0) / completed (1)
#6 DCE The dual check safety function is, disabled (0) /
enabled (1)
01904 Dual check safety <Axis>
#6 DCN The dual check safety function for each target
axis is, checked (0) / not checked (1)
01905 Type of servo interface <Axis>
#1 PM3 The 3rd separate detector interface unit is, not PRM
used (0) / used (1) 1902#0
#2 PM4 The 4th separate detector interface unit is, not PRM
used (0) / used (1) 1936,1937
#6 PM1 The 1st separate detector interface unit is, not 1938,1939
used (0) / used (1)
#7 PM2 The 2nd separate detector interface unit is, not
used (0) / used (1)
01936 Connector number of the 1st separate detector <Axis>
interface unit
01937 Connector number of the 2nd separate detector <Axis>
interface unit
01938 Connector number of the 3rd separate detector <Axis>
interface unit
01939 Connector number of the 4th separate detector <Axis>
interface unit
01945 Timer for safety I/O signal check [ms]
01946 Timer for MCC shut-off test [ms]
01948 Timer for MCC OFF [ms]
01950 Timer for the brake signal [ms] *BRK
02000 Initial setting, Feedback pulse multiplied by 10 <Axis>
#0 PLC0 The values of parameter No. 2023 and No. 2024
are, directly used (0) / multiplied by 10 internally
(1)
#1 DGPR When the power is turned on, the standard digital
servo parameter value is, set (0) / not set (1)
#4 PGEX The position gain setting unit is, not multiplied by
8 (0) / multiplied by 8 (1)
256
7 PARAMETERS
02001 Arbitrary AMR <Axis>
#0 AMR0 AMR AMR AMR AMR AMR AMR AMR PRM
#1 AMR1 Motor 2112
6 5 4 3 2 1 0
#2 AMR2 2138
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 αi/βi motor
#3 AMR3
#4 AMR4
#5 AMR5
#6 AMR6
02002 Separate detector <Axis>
#3 PFSE A separate position detector is, not used (0) / Automatically
used (1) set by
parameter
(No. 1815#1)
02003 Digital servo functions <Axis>
#1 TGAL The detection level for the position detection PRM2064
disconnection alarm is, set to the standard value
(0) / set by another parameter (1)
#2 OBEN The velocity control observer is, not used (0) / PRM2047,
used (1) 2050, 2051
#3 PIEN Velocity control is based on, I-P control (0) / PI
control (1)
#4 NPSP The N pulse suppression function is, not used (0)
/ used (1)
#5 BLEN The backlash acceleration function is, not used PRM2048
(0) / used (1)
#6 OVSC Overshoot compensation is, not used (0) / used PRM2045
(1)
#7 VOFS VCMD is, not offset (0) / offset (1)
02004 Control method setting <Axis>
#0 TIA0 TRW1 TRW0 TIB0 TIA0 Control method PRM
#1 TIB0 0 0 1 1 HRV2,3,4 control N2013#0
#2 TRW0 N2014#0
#3 TRW1
#1 FEED The feed-forward function is, not used (0) / used PRM
(1) 2068, 2069,
2092, 2144
#6 BRKC The gravity shaft break control function is, not PRM2083
used (0) / used (1)
#7 SFCM The static friction compensation function is, not PRM
used (0) / used (1) 2071, 2072,
2073, 2347
#0 FCBL In a closed loop, backlash compensation is, PRM1851
reflected in the position (0) / not reflected in the
position (1)
#0 ESP2 The servo alarm two-axis simultaneous monitor
function is, not used (0) / used (1)
#1 IGNV When two seconds has elapsed after the servo
alarm two-axis simultaneous monitor function
holds the alarm state, the alarm state is, not reset
(0) / reset (1)
#7 FRCA Torque control is, not exercised (0) / exercised PRM2203#4
(1)
02008 Tandem control <Axis>
#1 TNDM Tandem control is, disabled (0) / enabled (1) Automatically
set by
parameter
(No. 1817#6)
#2 VFBA The feedrate feedback average function is, Main axis
disabled (0) / enabled (1) only
#7 LAXD Damping compensation is, valid for the sub-axis Main axis
only (0) / valid for both the main axis and only
sub-axis (1)
257
B-63947EN/01
02009 Backlash acceleration, dummy functions <Axis>

#0 SERD The serial Pulsecoder dummy function is, not PRM2165
used (0) / used (1)
#6 BLCU Backlash acceleration is valid, for rapid traverse
and cutting (0) / for cutting only (1)
#7 BLST The backlash acceleration stop function is, not PRM2082
used (0) / used (1)
02010 Backlash acceleration, Punch/laser switching <Axis>
#2 LINE Linear motor control is, not exercised (0) /
exercised (1)
#3 BLTE The backlash acceleration rate is, not multiplied PRM2048
by 10 (0) / multiplied by 10 (1)
#4 HBPE A pitch error compensation is added to the error
counter, on the closed loop side (0) / on the
semi-closed loop side (1)
#5 HBBL A backlash compensation amount is added to the
error counter, on the semi-closed loop side (0) /
on the closed-loop side (1) 7
#7 POLE The punch/laser switch function is, not used (0) /
used (1)
02011 EGB functions, Torque limit variable function <Axis>
#0 SYN The EGB function is, not used (0) / used (1)
#1 FFAL Regardless of the mode, feed-forward control is,
disabled at all times (0) / enabled at all times (1)
#5 RCCA The torque limit variable function based on the No change is
actual current is, not used (0) / used (1) required.
#1 MSFE The machine velocity feedback function is, not
used (0) / used (1)
#7 STNG In velocity command mode, a software
disconnection alarm is, detected (0) / ignored (1)
#0 HRV3 HRV3 current control is, not used (0) / used (1) PRM
2334,2335
#7 APTG α Pulsecoder software disconnection monitoring
is, performed (0) / not performed (1)
#0 HRV4 HRV4 current control is, not used (0) / used (1) PRM
2334,2335
02015 High-speed positioning functions <Axis>
#0 PGTW The position gain polygonal line function is, not PRM2028
used (0) / used (1)
#1 SSG1 The integration function for low speed is, not PRM
used (0) / used (1) 2029,2030
#6 BLAT The two-stage backlash acceleration function is,
#7 BZNG When a separate position detector is used, the
battery alarm for the built-in Pulsecoder is,
ignored (0) / not ignored (1)
#0 ABNT The unexpected disturbance torque detection PRM
function is, not used (0) / used (1) 2104, 2087
#3 PK2VDN The function for changing the proportional gain in PRM2119
the stop state is, not used (0) / used (1)
#4 SPS Servo motor spindle synchronization is, disabled
(0) / enabled (1)
#0 DBST The stop distance reduction function is, not used PRM
(0) / used (1) 2005#6,2083
#4 HTNG In velocity command mode, the hardware
disconnection alarm of a separate detector is,
detected (0) / ignored (1)
#7 PK2V25 High-speed velocity loop proportional processing
is, not used (0) / used (1)
258
7 PARAMETERS
#0 RVRSE The signal direction of the separate detector is,
not reversed (0) / reversed (1)
#1 MOVOBS The observer stop time disable function is, not
used (0) / used (1)
#2 OVR8 The two-stage backlash acceleration override
format is, based on the 4096 standard (0) / based
on the 256 standard (1)
#7 PFBCPY The motor feedback signal for the main axis is, Sub-axis only
not shared by the sub-axis (0) / shared by the
sub-axis (1)
02019 Digital servo functions (option required) <Axis>
#1 TANDMP The tandem disturbance elimination control
#3 LBUFEX The learning memory expansion function is, not
used (0) / used (1)
#5 INVSYS The preview repetitive control function is, not
used (0) / used (1)
#6 SLEN The learning control function is, not used (0) /
used (1)
#7 DPFB The dual feedback function is, not used (0) / used
(1)
02020 Motor ID number <Axis>
02021 Load inertia ratio <Axis>
02022 Motor rotation direction <Axis>
111: CW when viewed from the Pulsecoder
-111: CCW when viewed from the Pulsecoder
02023 Number of velocity pulses <Axis>
2000#0=0 2000#0=1
αi,βi Pulsecoder 8192 819
02024 Number of position pulses <Axis>

1 Position detection by a Pulsecoder built into the PRM2185
motor
2000#0=0 2000#0=1
αi,βi Pulsecoder 12500 1250
2 When a separate Pulsecoder is used, set the
number of position feedback pulses per motor
revolution. When parameter (No. 2000#0) is set
to 1, set a value produced by division by 10.
02028 Position gain switching speed <Axis>
PRM2015#0
02029 Effective speed for integral acceleration at low <Axis>
speed PRM2015#1
02030 Effective speed for integral deceleration at low
speed
02033 Vibration-damping control function: number of <Axis>
position feedback pulses
02034 Vibration damping control gain <Axis>
02036 Tandem control/damping compensation gain <Axis>
(main axis) PRM2008#7
Tandem control/damping compensation phase
coefficient (sub-axis)
02038 Spindle feedback magnification (R) <Axis>
PRM2016#4
02039 2nd-stage acceleration for two-stage backlash <Axis>
acceleration PRM2015#6
02040 Current loop integral gain <Axis>,
02041 Current loop proportional gain No change is
02042 Current loop gain required.
02043 Velocity loop integral gain <Axis>
02044 Velocity loop proportional gain <Axis>
02045 Velocity loop incomplete integral gain <Axis>
259
B-63947EN/01
02046 Velocity loop gain <Axis>,

No change is
required.
02047 Observer parameter <Axis>
02048 Backlash acceleration <Axis>
02049 Maximum dual position feedback amplitude <Axis>
02050 Observer gain <Axis>
02051 Observer gain <Axis>
02053 Current dead zone compensation <Axis>,
02054 Current dead zone compensation No change is
02055 Current dead zone compensation required.
02056 Variable current loop gain during deceleration
02057 Phase D current at high-speed
02058 Phase D current limit at high-speed
02060 Torque limit
02062 Overload protection coefficient
02063 Overload protection coefficient 7
02064 Soft disconnection alarm level <Axis>
02065 Overload protection coefficient <Axis>,
No change is
required.
02066 Acceleration feedback gain <Axis>
02067 Torque command filter <Axis>
02068 Feed forward coefficient [0.01%] <Axis>
02069 Velocity feed forward coefficient [%] <Axis>
02070 Backlash acceleration timing <Axis>
02071 Time during which backlash acceleration is <Axis>
effective, Static friction compensation count
02072 Static friction compensation <Axis>
02073 Static friction compensation: Stop judgment <Axis>
parameter
02074 Current loop gain variable with velocity <Axis>,
No change is
required.
02077 Overshoot compensation counter <Axis>
PRM2003#6
02078 Conversion coefficient for dual position feedback <Axis>
(numerator)
02079 Conversion coefficient for dual position feedback <Axis>
(denominator)
02080 1st-order lag time constant for dual position <Axis>
feedback
02081 Zero width for dual position feedback <Axis>
02082 Backlash acceleration stop amount <Axis>
02083 Brake control timer [ms] <Axis>
PRM2005#6
02084 Flexible feed gear (numerator) (N) <Axis>
02085 Flexible feed gear (denominator) (M) <Axis>
02086 Rated current parameter <Axis>,
No change is
required.
02087 Torque offset <Axis>
Tandem control/Preload value
02088 Machine speed feedback gain <Axis>
PRM2012#1
02089 2-stage backlash acceleration function : stage-2 <Axis>
end magnification
02091 Nonlinear control parameter <Axis>
02092 Advanced preview feed forward coefficient <Axis>
[0.01%]
02094 Backlash acceleration amount in the negative <Axis>
direction
02095 Feed-forward timing adjustment coefficient <Axis>
02097 Static friction compensation stop parameter <Axis>
260
7 PARAMETERS
02099 N-pulse suppression level <Axis>
PRM2003#4
02101 Overshoot compensation effective level <Axis>
02102 Final clamp value for actual current limit <Axis>,
No change is
required.
02103 Amount of track back upon detection of <Axis>
unexpected disturbance torque
02104 Unexpected disturbance torque detection alarm <Axis>
level
02105 Torque constant for Torque control <Axis>,
No change is
required.
02107 Override for velocity loop gain cutting <Axis>
02110 Magnetic saturation compensation <Axis>,
(base/coefficient) No change is
02111 Deceleration torque limit (base/coefficient) required.
02112 AMR conversion coefficient 1 <Axis>
02113 Resonance elimination filter 1: center frequency <Axis>
[Hz] PRM
2177, 2359
02114 Backlash acceleration function : acceleration <Axis>
amount override
02116 Unexpected disturbance torque detection: <Axis>
dynamic friction compensation value
02118 Excessive error level between semi-closed and <Axis>
closed loops PRM
2078, 2079
02119 Stop level with variable proportional gain <Axis>
02126 Tandem control , time constant for switching <Axis>
position feedback
02127 Non-interacting control coefficient <Axis>,
02128 Weak magnetic flux compensation (coefficient) No change is
02129 Weak magnetic flux compensation (base/limit) required.
02130 Smoothing compensation performed twice per <Axis>
pole pair
02131 Smoothing compensation performed four times <Axis>
per pole pair
02132 Smoothing compensation performed six times <Axis>
per pole pair
02133 Deceleration phase delay compensation <Axis>,
coefficient No change is
02134 Deceleration phase delay compensation required.
coefficient
02137 Stage 1 acceleration amount override for <Axis>
two-stage backlash acceleration
02138 AMR conversion coefficient 2 <Axis>
02139 AMR offset <Axis>
02142 Unexpected disturbance torque detection alarm <Axis>
level in rapid traverse
02144 Position feed forward coefficient for cutting <Axis>
[0.01%]
02145 Velocity feed forward coefficient for cutting [%] <Axis>
02146 End timer for two-stage backlash acceleration <Axis>
02156 Torque command filter (at rapid traverse) <Axis>
02161 OVC magnification at a stop <Axis>,
02162 2nd overload protection coefficient No change is
02163 2nd overload protection coefficient required.
02164 2nd overload protection coefficient
02165 Maximum amplifier current
02167 Stage 2 acceleration amount offset for two-stage <Axis>
backlash acceleration
261
B-63947EN/01
02177 Resonance elimination filter 1: attenuation <Axis>

bandwidth [Hz] PRM
2113, 2359
02179 Reference counter size (denominator) <Axis>
PRM1821
02185 Position pulses conversion coefficient <Axis>
PRM2024
#0 OVSP The feedback mismatch alarm is, detected (0) / PRM2201#1
not detected (1)
#2 IQOB The effect of voltage saturation on unexpected PRM2016#0
disturbance torque detection is, not eliminated
(0) / eliminated (1)
#3 ABGO When an unexpected disturbance torque is
detected, setting of a threshold separately for
each of cutting and rapid traverse is, not
#6 P2EX An action for internal velocity loop proportional PRM2044 7
gain overflow is, not taken (0) / taken (1)
#0 CROF The function for obtaining current offsets upon an
emergency stop is, not used (0) / used (1)
#1 RNLV Feedback mismatch alarm detection is started PRM2200#0
with, 600min-1 or more (0) / 1000min-1 or more (1)
#6 CPEE The actual current display peak hold function is,
#1 VGCCR The velocity loop gain switch function for each of PRM
cutting and rapid traverse is, not used (0) / used 2107,2335
(1)
#2 PIAL When the velocity loop gain switch function for PRM2203#2
each of cutting and rapid traverse is used, the
current 1/2PI function in rapid traverse is,
disabled automatically (0) / enabled at all times
(1)
#3 OVS1 Overshoot compensation is valid only once after PRM2003#6
the termination of a move command (1)
#4 DUAL Dual position feedback zero width is determined, PRM2081
only by setting = 0 (0) / by a set value (1)
#2 CRPI The current loop 1/2PI function is, used (0) / not PRM2202#2
used (1)
#4 FRC2AX2 Torque control type 2 is, not exercised (0) / PRM2007#7
exercised (1)
#1 HSTP10 The valid increment system for speed used with PRM
the high-speed positioning function is: 2028,2029,
0: 0.01 min-1(rotary motor), 0.01 mm/min (linear 2030
motor)
1: 0.1 min-1 (rotary motor), 0.1 mm/min (linear
motor)
#5 PGTWN2 Position gain switch type 2 is, not used (0) / used PRM2028
(1)
#7 DBS2 At emergency stop time, the quick stop function
#2 FULDMY The separate detector dummy function is, not
used (0) / used (1)
#3 HD2O The axis to which the stop distance reduction
function is applied at separate detector hardware
disconnection time is, not a synchronization
control axis (0) / a synchronization control axis
(1)
262
7 PARAMETERS
#4 HDIS At separate detector hardware disconnection
time, the stop distance reduction function is, not
used (0) / used (1)
#2 HBSF A backlash compensation amount and pitch error PRM
compensation are, selected with parameter (No. 2010#5,#4
2010) (0) / added simultaneously on both of the
closed loop side and semi-closed loop side (1)
#3 PK2D50 When the variable proportional gain function is PRM2016#3
used at stop time, the stop-time magnification is,
75% (0) / 50% (1)
#2 PK12S2 The current gain internally 4 times function is, not No change is
used (0) / used (1) required.
#5 ESPTM0 Emergency stop delay timer setting
#6 ESPTM1 ESPTM1 ESPTM0 Delay time PRM
0 0 50 ms 2005#6,2083
0 1 100 ms
1 0 200 ms
1 1 400 ms
#1 PHCP At deceleration time, the phase lag No change is
compensation function is, not used (0) / used (1) required.
#7 QVCK When the OVC or OVL alarm is issued, the quick
stop function is, not used (0) / used (1)
#7 MGPOS The pole position detection function is, not used
(0) / used (1)
#4 FFCHG The feed-forward function for each of cutting and
rapid traverse is, not used (0) / used (1)
#7 QVCK When the OVC or OVL alarm is issued, the quick
stop function is, not used (0) / used (1)
#2 TCPCLR At emergency stop time, the torque offset cancel
#7 ABT2 Unexpected disturbance torque detection Type-2
for each of cutting and rapid traverse is, not used
(0) / used (1)
#0 DECAMR For a synchronous built-in servo motor, the αiCZ PRM
768S sensor is, not used (0) / used (1) 2112,2138
#0 DISOBS The disturbance elimination filter function is, not
used (0) / used (1)
#7 BLCUT2 The backlash acceleration function is enabled,
for both of cutting and rapid traverse (0) / for
cutting feed only (1)
(learning)
#0 QUCKST Learning control is started, with a command
specifying a nonzero value (0) / at the start of
G05 (1)
#6 PRFCLR In the compensation data mode, the learning
memory data is, preserved at an arbitrary time
(0) / cleared (1)
#7 MEMCLR The learning memory data is cleared, when
learning ends (1)/depending on ICM (0)
(learning)
#0 PARTLN The parts machining learning function is, not
used (0) / used (1)
#1 ERRCHK Error monitoring is, disabled (0) / enabled (1)
263
B-63947EN/01
#2 GOKAN High-speed proportional processing is, standard

(0) / compatible with the conventional one (1)
#4 ANGREF The reference signal is, on the command side (0) Main axis
/ on the feedback side (1)
#5 ANGLNG Learning control is based on, time Main axis
synchronization method (0) / angle
synchronization method (1)
The reference axis is on, the main axis side (0) / Sub-axis
the sub-axis side (1)
#0 ABSEN The pole position detection function is based on,
incremental detector (0) / absolute detector (1)
#6 STPRED The step shock reduction function is, disabled (0) (learning)
/ enabled (1)
#7 TAWAMI The deflection compensation function is, disabled PRM2536
(0) / enabled (1)
#0 AMR60 The AMR offset setting range is, -45 to 45 deg (0) PRM2139 7
/ -60 to 60 deg (1)
#3 ACREF The active disturbance elimination filter function
#5 DSTWAV The input disturbance waveform is, SIN wave (0)
/ square wave (1)
#6 DSTTAN Disturbance is input, for one axis at a time (0) /
for two axes simultaneously (1)
#7 DSTIN The disturbance input function is, not used (0) /
used (1)
#2 RETR2 When an unexpected disturbance torque is PRM2016#0
detected, the simultaneous two-axis retraction
#1 WSVCPY The position tandem integrator copy function is,
#4 POA1NG For calculation of an observer coefficient (POA1), PRM2047
a load inertia ratio is, considered (0) / not
considered (1)
#5 EGBEX The automatic phase matching function of EGB
is based on, the ordinary method (0) / the
extended method (1)
#6 EGBFFG For the EGB ratio, FFG is, not considered (0) /
considered (1)
#7 DBTLIM During brake control, the torque limit setting PRM2375
#0 HP2048 A 2048-fold internal circuit (position detection
circuit H or C) is, not used (0) / used (1)
#0 800PLS When RCN723 or RCN223 is used, the setting of
a reference counter is based on, 1/8 revolution
(0) / 1 revolution (1)
#1 RCNCLR At APC time, speed data is, not cleared (0) / PRM2394
cleared (1)
(Used with RCN723, RCN223, and so forth)
#3 ISE64 The feed-forward speed limitation is, applied as
conventionally done (0) / extended by a factor of
64 (1)
#0 NOG54 To start the high-speed current control mode PRM2013#0
under servo HRV3 control, G5.4Q1 is, needed
(0) / not needed (1)
#0 HRVEN The HRV extension function is, not used (0) /
used (1)
264
7 PARAMETERS
#2 DD A DD motor is, not used (0) / used (1)
#7 CKLNOH Overheat detection via the PMC is, not used (0) /
used (1)
02318 Disturbance elimination filter: gain <Axis>
PRM2223#0
02319 Disturbance elimination filter: inertia ratio <Axis>
02320 Disturbance elimination filter: inverse function <Axis>
gain
02321 Disturbance elimination filter: time constant <Axis>
02322 Disturbance elimination filter: acceleration <Axis>
feedback limit
02323 Variable current PI rate <Axis>
PRM2203#2
02324 Variable proportional gain function in the stop <Axis>
state : arbitrary magnification at a stop PRM2016#3
02325 Tandem disturbance elimination control function: <Axis>
integral gain (main axis) PRM2019#1
Tandem disturbance elimination control function:
phase coefficient (sub-axis)
02326 Disturbance input : gain <Axis>
PRM2270#7
02327 Disturbance input: start frequency [Hz] <Axis>
02328 Disturbance input: end frequency [Hz] <Axis>
02329 Number of disturbance input measurement <Axis>
points
02333 Tandem disturbance elimination control function: <Axis>
incomplete integral time constant (main axis)
02334 Current loop gain magnification (enabled only <Axis>
during high-speed HRV current control) PRM
02335 Velocity loop gain magnification (enabled only 2013, 2014
during high-speed HRV current control)
02338 Backlash acceleration function: acceleration <Axis>
amount limit value
2-stage backlash acceleration function: stage-2
acceleration amount limit value
02339 2-stage backlash acceleration function: stage-2 <Axis>
acceleration amount (negative direction)
02340 Backlash acceleration function: acceleration <Axis>
amount override (negative direction)
Backlash acceleration function: Acceleration
amount override (negative direction)
02341 2-stage backlash acceleration function: stage-2 <Axis>
acceleration amount limit value (negative
direction)
2-stage backlash acceleration function: stage-2
acceleration amount limit value (negative
direction)
02345 Disturbance estimation function: dynamic friction <Axis>
compensation value in the stop state
02346 Disturbance estimation function: dynamic friction <Axis>
compensation limit value
02347 Static friction compensation amount (- direction) <Axis>
02352 Active resonance elimination filter: detection level <Axis>
PRM2270#3
02359 Resonance elimination filter 1: damping [%] <Axis>
PRM
2113, 2177
02360 Resonance elimination filter 2: attenuation center <Axis>
frequency [Hz]
bandwidth [Hz]
frequency [Hz]
265
B-63947EN/01

bandwidth [Hz]
frequency [Hz]
bandwidth [Hz]
02369 Smoothing compensation performed twice per <Axis>
pole pair (negative direction)
02370 Smoothing compensation performed four times <Axis>
per pole pair (negative direction)
02371 Smoothing compensation performed six times <Axis>
per pole pair (negative direction)
02373 Lifting function against gravity at emergency <Axis>
stop : distance to lift PRM2204#7
02374 Lifting function against gravity at emergency <Axis> 7
stop: Lifting time
02375 Torque limit magnification during brake control <Axis>
PRM2273#7
02394 Number of data mask digits <Axis>
PRM2275#1
#1 IAHDON To the feed-forward timing adjustment PRM2095
parameter, the default value is, not applied (0) /
applied (1)
(learning)
#1 ADAPT Preview repetitive control is exercised in, fixed
mode (0) / applicable mode (1)
#2 TRASMT The applicable feed-forward coefficient is, not PRM
updated (0) / updated (1) 2544 - 2549
#5 ADERSL Application is based on, positional deviation (0) /
speed deviation (1)
(learning)
#4 LCON Learning is based on, halt mode (0) / PRM2513
continuation mode (1)
#6 ICM The learning memory is placed in, clear mode (0)
/ compensation data mode (1)
02455 Number of pulses per revolution, integer part (α) <Axis>
02456 Number of pulses per revolution, exponent part <Axis>
(β)
02510 Total number of profiles <Axis>
02511 Profile number (learning)
02513 Learning halt count
02512 Band pass filter [Hz]
02514 Learning start time
02515 Step repetition count
02516 1st learning count
02517 1st learning period [ms]
02518 2nd learning count
02519 2nd learning period [ms]
02520 3rd learning count
02521 3rd learning period [ms]
02522 4th learning count
02523 4th learning period [ms]
02524 5th learning count
02525 5th learning period [ms]
02526 Dynamic characteristic compensation element
(Gx) highest degree
(Gx) lowest degree
266
7 PARAMETERS
02528 Dynamic characteristic compensation element <Axis>
(Gx) highest coefficient (learning)
(Gx) lowest coefficient
02534 Shock reduction counter
02535 Manual thin-out count
02536 Deflection compensation amount
02537 Extended learning period
02543 Adaptive advanced preview control:
Application coefficient
Feed-forward coefficient 1
02550 Error monitor level [detection unit]
02551 Error monitor start time [ms]
02552 Error monitor end time [ms]
7.2.11 DI/DO
03001 ST signal, High-speed MST interface, RRW signal
#1 SON Automatic operation is started, on the falling edge
("1"→"0") of the automatic operation start signal ST
(0) / on the rising edge ("0"→"1") of the automatic
operation start signal ST (1)
#2 RWM When the start of a program is being found in the
program memory, the rewind signal is, not output (0) /
output (1)
#7 MHI Exchange of strobe and completion signals for the M,
S, T, and B codes is, normal (0) / high-speed (1)
03002 Override polarity
#2 MFD When the high-speed M, S, T, or B interface is used,
and the block specifying the M code, S code, T code,
or B code includes neither a move command nor a
dwell command, the distribution completion signal
(DEN) and the strobe signal (MF, SF, TF, or BF) of
each function are, output with the distribution
completion signal lagging (0) / output at the same time
(1)
#4 IOV Override-related signal logic is used in such a way
that, negative logic signals are used based on
negative logic, and positive logic signals are used
based on positive logic (0) / logic is reversed (1)
#6 POV The dwell/auxiliary function time override function is,
#7 OVM When the dwell/auxiliary function time override
function is used, override on M02 and M30 is, disabled
(0) / enabled (1)
03003 Interlock signals
#0 ITL The interlock signals for all axes are, valid (0) / invalid *IT
(1)
#2 ITX The interlock signal for each axis is, valid (0) / invalid IT1 - *IT8
(1)
#3 DIT The interlock signal for each axis direction is, valid (0)
/ invalid (1)
267
B-63947EN/01
#4 DAU When parameter (No. 3003#3) is set to 0, the interlock T series

signal for each axis direction is, valid only in manual
operation (0) / valid in either manual operation or
automatic operation (1)
#5 DEC The deceleration signals for reference position return *DEC1 -
specify deceleration, when the signals are 0 (0) / when *DEC8
the signal are 1 (1)
03004 Overtravel
#0 BSL The block start interlock signal and cutting block start *BSL
interlock signal are, invalid (0) / valid (1) *CSL
#1 BCY When more than one operation is performed as in a
canned cycle, the block start interlock signal is,
checked only at the beginning of the 1st cycle (0) /
checked at the beginning of every cycle (1)
#5 OTH The overtravel signal is, checked (0) / not checked (1)
03006 Reference position return deceleration signal
#0 GDC As the reference position return deceleration signal,
X0009 is used (0) / G0196 is used (1) 7
#1 EPN In external workpiece number search, signals for PRM
workpiece number specification are selected. 3006#3
EP2 EPN Signal
External workpiece number search signals PN1…PN16
0 0
are used. (A number from 1 to 31 may be specified.)
Extended external workpiece number search signals
0 1 EPN0… EPN13 are used. (A number from 1 to 9999 may
be used.)
Extended external workpiece number search signals
1 1 EWN0…. EWN26 are used. (A number from 1 to
99999999 may be specified.)
#2 EPS As the signal for starting external workpiece number
search, the automatic operation start signal is used (0)
/ the external workpiece number search start signal is
used (1)
#3 EP2 In external workpiece number search, signals for PRM
workpiece number specification are selected. 3006#1
03008 PMC signals
#2 XSG A signal assigned to an X address is, fixed at the PRM
address (0) / able to be reassigned to an arbitrary 3012,3013
address (1) 3014,3019
03010 Time lag in strobe signals MF, SF, TF, and BF [ms]
03011 Acceptable width of M, S, T, and B function
completion signal (FIN) [ms]
03012 Skip signal assignment address PRM
3008#2＝1
03013 X address to which the deceleration signal for <Axis>
reference position return is assigned PRM
3008#2=1
03014 Bit position of an X address to which the deceleration <Axis>
signal for reference position return is assigned PRM
3008#2=1
03017 Output time of reset signal RST [16ms]
03018 Percentage (%) when the 1% rapid traverse override
signal for auxiliary function execution is 0% [%]
03019 Address to which the PMC axis control skip signal, the
measurement position arrival signal, and the tool
offset write signal are assigned
03020 Correspondence between workpiece numbers and
program numbers in external workpiece number
search (PN)
03021 Address to which an axis signal is assigned <Axis>
03022 Address to which a spindle signal is assigned
03030 Allowable number of digits for the M code
03031 Allowable number of digits for the S code
03032 Allowable number of digits for the T code
268
7 PARAMETERS
03033 Allowable number of digits for the B code (2nd PRM
auxiliary function) 3450#0
7.2.12 Display and Edit

03101 Screen
#1 KBF When the screen or mode is changed, the contents of
the key-in buffer are, cleared (0) / not cleared (1)
03104 Position display
#0 MCN The machine position is, not displayed according to PRM
the input system (0) / displayed according to the input 0000#2
system (1)
#3 PPD When a coordinate system is set, the relative position
display is, not preset (0) / preset (1)
#4 DRL For relative position display, tool length compensation M series
is, considered (0) / not considered (1)
#5 DRC For relative position display, tool radius and tool nose
radius compensation is, considered (0) / not
considered (1)
#6 DAL For absolute position display, tool length M series
compensation is, considered (0) / not considered (1)
#7 DAC For absolute position display, tool radius and tool nose
radius compensation is, considered (0) / not
considered (1)
03105 Data display
#0 DPF The actual speed is, not displayed (0) / displayed (1)
#1 PCF The movements of the PMC controlled axes are, PRM1010
added to the actual speed display (0) / not added to
the actual speed display (1)
#2 DPS The spindle speed is, not displayed (0) / displayed (1)
03106 Operation history
#4 OPH The operation history screen is, not displayed (0) /
displayed (1)
#5 SOV A spindle override value is, not displayed (0) / PRM
displayed (1) 3105#2
#6 DAK When absolute coordinates are displayed in the
3-dimensional coordinate system conversion mode,
the tilted working plane command mode, or the work
setting error compensation mode, coordinates in the
program coordinate system are displayed (0) /
coordinates in the workpiece coordinate system are
displayed (1)
03107 Program display
#4 SOR In program directory display, programs are listed, in
the order of program registration (0) / in a sorted order
(in the ascending order of program names by default)
(1)
03108 T code display, Speed display
#2 PCT For modal T code display, a specified T value is PRM
displayed (0) / HD.T and NX.T are displayed (1) 13200#1
#4 WCI On the workpiece coordinate system screen, counter
input is, disabled (0) / enabled (1)
#6 SLM The spindle load meter is, not displayed (0) / displayed
(1)
#7 JSP On the current position display screen and program
check screen, the jog feedrate or dry run feedrate is,
not displayed (0) / displayed (1)
03109 Display of tool compensation
#1 DWT When a tool wear/geometry compensation amount is Offset
displayed, the character G or W is, displayed to the left memory B
of each number (0) / not displayed (1)
#2 IKY On the tool offset screen and workpiece shift screen
(T series), soft key [INPUT] is, displayed (0) / not
displayed (1)
269
B-63947EN/01
03111 Adjustment screen, Screen switching

#0 SVS The servo setting screen and servo tuning screen are,
not displayed (0) / displayed (1)
#1 SPS The spindle tuning screen is, not displayed (0) /
displayed (1)
#2 SVP As a spindle synchronization error displayed on the
spindle tuning screen, an instantaneous value is
displayed (0) / a peak-hold value is displayed (1)
#5 OPM The operating monitor is, not displayed (0) / displayed
(1)
#6 OPS The speedometer on the operating monitor screen
indicates, spindle motor speed (0) / spindle speed (1)
#7 NPA When an operator message is entered in response to
an issued alarm, the screen display is, switched to the
alarm message screen (0) / not switched (1)
03112 History
#2 OMH The external operator message history screen is, not
displayed (0) / displayed (1) 7
#3 EAH In the alarm/operation history, external alarm/macro PRM
alarm messages are, not recorded (0) / recorded (1) 3196#7=0
03113 Soft key, Touch panel
#5 DCL The touch panel compensation screen is, disabled (0) Usually, set
/ enabled (1) 0.
03114 Changing the screens
#0 IPO When the [POS] function key is pressed while the
position display screen is being displayed, the screen
is, changed (0) / not changed (1)
#1 IPR When the [PROG] function key is pressed while the
program screen is being displayed, the screen is,
changed (0) / not changed (1)
#2 IOF When the [OFS/SET] function key is pressed while the
offset/setting screen is being displayed, the screen is,
#3 ISY When the [SYSTEM] function key is pressed while the
system screen is being displayed, the screen is,
#4 IMS When the [MESSAGE] function key is pressed while
the message screen is being displayed, the screen is,
#5 IGR When the [GRAPH] function key is pressed while the
graphic screen is being displayed, the screen is
#6 ICU When the [CUSTOM] function key is pressed while the
custom screen is being displayed, the screen is,
03115 Current position display <Axis>
#0 NDP The current position is, displayed (0) / not displayed
(1)
#1 NDA In the absolute coordinate system and relative
coordinate system, the current position and remaining
move amount are, displayed (0) / not displayed (1)
#3 NDF In calculation for actual feedrate display, the feedrate
on a selected axis is, considered (0) / not considered
(1)
#5 APL When the active offset value modification mode based
on manual feed is selected, the relative position
display is automatically, not preset (0) / preset (1)
03116 Clearing an alarm, Setting of screen display
#2 PWR Alarm SW0100 (PARAMETER ENABLE SWITCH PRM
ON) is cleared by "CAN"+"RESET" (0) / "RESET" or 8900#0
an external reset ON (1)
#7 MDC All maintenance information, cannot be cleared (0) /
can be cleared (1)
270
7 PARAMETERS
03117 Position coder
#1 SPP When a serial spindle is used, position coder signal
pulse data from the one-rotation signal is, not
displayed (0) / displayed (1), on the diagnostic screen
03119 Touch panel
#2 DDS The touch panel is, enabled (0) / disabled (1)
#3 TPA When the option for the external touch panel interface
is selected, the external touch panel interface
connection is, valid (0) / invalid (1)
03122 Time interval used to record time data in operation
history [min]
03123 Screen saver start time [min]
03124 Modal G code display
#0 D01 On the program check screen, the G codes of group
01 are, displayed (0) / not displayed (1)
271
B-63947EN/01

03129 Position display 7
#0 DRP For relative coordinate display, a tool offset (tool T series
movement) is, considered (0) / not considered (1)
#1 DAP For absolute coordinate display, a tool offset (tool T series
movement) is, considered (0) / not considered (1)
#2 MRE When mirror image is used, relative coordinates are
updated with respect to, the machine coordinates (0) /
the absolute coordinates (1)
03130 Display order on the current position display screen <Axis>
03131 Subscript of axis name <Axis>
Setting Meaning
value
Each axis is set as an axis other than a parallel axis,
0 synchronization control axis, and tandem control axis.
1 to 9 A set value is used as a subscript.
65 to 90 A set letter (ASCII code) is used as a subscript.
03132 Axis name (absolute coordinate) for current position <Axis>
display GSB,GSC
PRM1020
03133 Axis name (relative coordinate) for current position <Axis>
display GSB,GSC
PRM1020
03134 Data display order of each axis on the workpiece <Axis>
coordinate system screen and workpiece shift screen
03135 Number of decimal places in actual feedrate display
03141 Path name (1st character)
03142 Path name (2nd character)
03143 Path name (3rd character)
03144 Path name (4th character)
03160 Setting of MDI unit type
Setting Type
value
0 Depends on the system type and indicator type.
1 Standard MDI unit for the lathe system
2 Standard MDI unit for the machining center system
3 Small MDI unit for the lathe system
4 Small MDI unit for the machining center system
When 3160 = 0
System Type of indicator Type
When T Type of 12 horizontal Standard MDI unit for the lathe
series is soft keys system
used with Type of 7 horizontal Small MDI unit for the lathe system
path 1 soft keys
When M Type of 12 horizontal Standard MDI unit for the machining
series is soft keys center system
used with Type of 7 horizontal Small MDI unit for the machining
path 1 soft keys center system
272
7 PARAMETERS
03191 Data input
#2 WSI On the workpiece origin offset screen, the soft key
[INPUT] is, displayed (0) / not displayed (1)
#3 SSF When data is input on the setting screen, the soft key
for confirming data input is, not displayed (0) /
displayed (1)
03192 Touch panel, Screen display
#1 T2P If two or more points are pressed on the touch panel, it
is assumed that, the gravity center position is pressed
(0) / the 1st pressed point is pressed (1)
#2 TRA If a point on the touch panel is held down for the time ALM
specified in parameter (No. 3197) or longer, no alarm SR5303
is issued (0) / an alarm is issued (1)
#7 PLD In the current position display field on the left side of T series
the single-path display screen, or on the program
check screen for simultaneous multi-path display, the
servo axis load meter and spindle load meter display
03193 Program screen display
#4 ODR On the program directory screen, the unit of program
size is, KB (0) / page (512 bytes) (1)
03194 Diameter/radius programming
#2 DPA The absolute coordinates, relative coordinates, and
remaining move amount during diameter/radius
programming switching are displayed, according to
the specification during switching (0) / according to the
setting of parameter (No. 1006#3) (1)
#3 DPM The machine coordinates during diameter/radius
programming switching are displayed, according to
the setting of parameter (No. 1006#3) (0) / according
to the specification during switching (1)
03195 Operation history
#5 HKE A key operation history is, recorded (0) / not recorded
(1)
#6 HDE A DI/DO history is, recorded (0) / not recorded (1)
#7 EKE The soft key [CLEAR ALL] is, not displayed (0) /
displayed (1)
03196 History modification
#0 HTO A history of tool offset data modifications is, not
recorded (0) / recorded (1)
#1 HWO A history of workpiece offset data/extended workpiece
offset data/workpiece shift amount (T series)
modifications is, not recorded (0) / recorded (1)
#2 HPM A parameter modification history is, not recorded (0) /
recorded (1)
#3 HMV A custom macro common variable modification history
is, not recorded (0) / recorded (1)
#6 HOM A history of external operator messages is, recorded
(0) / not recorded (1)
#7 HAL When an alarm is issued, in the operation history and
alarm history, modal data, absolute coordinates, and
machine coordinates are, recorded (0) / not recorded
(1)
03197 Detection time of continuous pressing on the touch PRM
panel [sec] 3192#2
03201 Program registration
#1 RAL When programs are registered by I/O external device
control, all programs are registered (0) / only one
program is registered (1)
#2 REP When an attempt is made to reregister a program that
has an existing program number, an alarm is issued
(0) / the existing program is replaced with the new one
(1)
#5 N99 When an M99 block is specified, program registration PRM
is, terminated (0) / not terminated (1) 3201#6=0
273
B-63947EN/01
#6 NPE When M02, M30, or M99 is specified, program

registration is, terminated (0) / not terminated (1)
03202 Program protection
#0 NE8 Editing of programs with program numbers 8000 to
8999 is, not inhibited (0) / inhibited (1)
#4 NE9 Editing of programs with program numbers 9000 to
9999 is, not inhibited (0) / inhibited (1)
#6 PSR Search for the program number of a protected
program is, disabled (0) / enabled (1)
03203 MDI operation
#5 MZE During MDI operation, program editing is, enabled (0) /
disabled (1)
#6 MER When MDI operation is terminated in single block
mode, program deletion is, not performed (0) /
performed (1)
#7 MCL A program coded in the MDI mode is, not cleared by a
reset (0) / cleared by a reset (1)
03204 Small type MDI
7
#0 PAR When a small MDI unit is used, the keys "[" and "]" are
used as, "[" and "]" (0) / "(" and ")" (1)
#3 P8E Editing of subprograms with subprogram numbers
80000000 to 89999999 is, not inhibited (0) / inhibited
(1)
#4 P9E Editing of subprograms with subprogram numbers
90000000 to 99999999 is, not inhibited (0) / inhibited
(1)
#5 SPR To specific program numbers in the nine thousands,
90000000 is, not added (0) / added (1)
#6 MKP When M02, M30, or EOR(%) is executed during MDI
operation, the created MDI program is, deleted (0) /
not deleted (1)
03205 Tool offset display
#4 OSC On the offset screen, offset value erasure by a soft key
is, enabled (0) / disabled (1)
03206 Dual display based on the CNC screen display
function
#1 MIF Editing on the maintenance information screen is, not
prohibited (0) / prohibited (1)
#5 S2K In dual display based on the CNC screen display PRM
function, key control switching is performed, by using 3206#5
the DI signal (G0295#7) (0) / by pressing the
upper-left corner of the screen (with a touch panel
needed) (1)
#7 NS2 Dual display based on the CNC screen display
03207 External operator messages
#1 EXS Soft key extension based on the machine menu
#4 SRM External operator messages, when displayed, are, not
sorted by number (0) / sorted by number (1)
#5 VRN On the custom macro variable screen, the variable
names of common variables #500 and up are, not
displayed (0) / displayed (1)
03208 Tool offset display
#4 OFY On the offset screen, display and input of a Y-axis T series
offset is, disabled (0) / enabled (1)
#5 PSC At the time of path switching based on the path
switching signal or loader switching operation, the
screen display is switched to the most recently
selected screen (0) / the same screen as for the path
selected before switching is displayed (1)
03210 Program protection (PSW) PRM3211
03211 Program protection key (KEY)
03220 Password (PSW)
03221 Keyword (KEY)
274
7 PARAMETERS
03222 Program protection range (minimum value) (PMIN) PRM
03223 Program protection range (maximum value) (PMAX) 3220,3221
03225 Key lock password for the parameters related to dual
check safety
03226 Key lock keyword for the parameters related to dual
check safety
03227 Machine menu data number selection (horizontal soft
key)
03228 Machine menu data number selection (vertical soft
key)
03233 Program editing
#0 PCE Program editing is performed, in the word editing
mode (0) / in the character editing mode (1)
#1 PDM When the program directory screen displays a list of
programs stored in the CNC file management format
on the data server, the data server mode is selected
(0) / the CNC management format mode is selected
(1)
03241 Character blinking in the AI contour control I mode AICC1
(1st character)
03242 Character blinking in the AI contour control I mode
(2nd character)
(3rd character)
(4th character)
(5th character)
(6th character)
(7th character)
03251 Character blinking in the AI contour control II mode AICC2
(1st character)
03252 Character blinking in the AI contour control II mode
(2nd character)
(3rd character)
(4th character)
(5th character)
(6th character)
(7th character)
03280 Display language
#0 NLC Dynamic display language switching is, enabled (0) / PRM3281
disabled (1)
03281 Display language
03290 Protection of data input
#0 WOF Input of a tool wear offset data with MDI keys is, not PRM
inhibited (0) / inhibited (1) 3294,3295
#1 GOF Input of a tool geometry offset value with MDI keys is, PRM
not inhibited (0) / inhibited (1) 3294,3295
#2 MCV Input of a macro variable with MDI keys is, not
inhibited (0) / inhibited (1)
#3 WZO Input of a workpiece origin offset or workpiece
coordinate system shift amount (T series) with MDI
keys is, not inhibited (0) / inhibited (1)
#4 IWZ Input of a workpiece origin offset or workpiece
coordinate system shift amount with MDI keys in the
automatic operation halt state is, not inhibited (0) /
inhibited (1)
275
B-63947EN/01
#5 GO2 Input of a 2nd geometry tool offset value with MDI T series
keys is, inhibited (0) / not inhibited (1)
#6 MCM Macro variable input with the MDI keys is, enabled
regardless of which mode is set (0) / enabled in the
MDI mode only (1)
#7 KEY For memory protection keys, the KEY1 to KEY4
signals are used (0) / only the KEY1 signal is used (1)
03291 Protection of data input
#0 WPT A tool wear offset value is input, by using the KEY1
signal (0) / by not using the KEY1 signal (1)
03294 Start number of tool offset values whose input by MDI PRM
is disabled 3290#0
03295 Number of tool offset values (from the start number) 3290#1
whose input by MDI is disabled
03301 Screen hard copy
#0 H16 The bit map data of a screen hard copy is based on,
256 colors (0) / 16 colors (1)
7
#7 HDC The screen hard copy function is, disabled (0) /
enabled (1)
03321 Screen number assigned to the 1st vertical soft key
03322 Screen number assigned to the 2nd vertical soft key
03323 Screen number assigned to the 3rd vertical soft key
03324 Screen number assigned to the 4th vertical soft key
7.2.13 Programs
03400 Auxiliary functions, Positioning
#0 MGO If the program restart M/S/T/B code output function is PRM
used, an M code is output according to a combination 7300#7=1
with parameter MOA (No. 7300#6).
MGO MOA Meaning
0 0 The last M code is output.
0 1 M codes are output in specification order.
1 0 The last M code of each group is output.
1 1 M codes are output in group order.
#1 MGC When a single block specifies multiple M commands, PRM
an M code group check is, made (0) / not made (1) 3441-3444
#5 PGD Programmable diameter/radius programming
switching (G10.9) is, disabled (0) / enabled (1)
#6 SMX An S code specified in a block that specifies G92 (G
code system A: G50 (T series)) is, regarded as a
maximum spindle speed command (0) / regarded as a
spindle speed command (1)
03401 G code, Calculator-type input
#0 DPI When a decimal point is omitted, the least input
increment is assumed (0) / the unit of mm, inches, or
sec is assumed (1)
#4 MAB In MDI operation, switching between the absolute and GSB,GSC
incremental commands is performed, by G90 or G91
(0) / according to parameter (No. 3401#5) (1)
#5 ABS In MDI mode, a move command is assumed, as an GSB,GSC
incremental command (0) / as an absolute command PRM
(1) 3401#4=1
276
7 PARAMETERS
#6 GSB The G code system of a lathe is A/B/C type. T series
#7 GSC GSC GSB G code system
0 0 G code system A
0 1 G code system B
1 0 G code system C
03402 G code in the initial state
#0 G01 At power-on time or in the cleared state, the mode is,
G00 (0) / G01 (1)
#1 G18 At power-on time or in the cleared state, the mode is, M series
G17 (0) / G18 (1)
#2 G19 At power-on time or in the cleared state, the mode, M series
follows the setting of parameter (No. 3402#1) (0) / is
G19 (1)
#3 G91 At power-on time or in the cleared state, the mode is,
G90 (0) / G91 (1)
#4 FPM At power-on time or in the cleared state, feed per T series
revolution is set (0) / feed per minute is set (1)
#5 G70 The commands for inch input and metric input are, M series
G20 and G21 (0) / G70 and G71 (1)
#6 CLR The “RESET” key, external reset signal, RRW signal,
and emergency stop signal cause, the reset state (0) /
the cleared state (1)
#7 G23 When the power is turned on, G22 is set (0) / G23 is
set (1)
03403 Circular interpolation
#5 CIR When none of R, I, J, and K is specified in circular ALM
interpolation or helical interpolation, a movement is PS0022
made by linear interpolation (0) / an alarm is issued (1)
03404 M functions
#0 NOB In program execution, a block consisting of only O,
EOB, and N is, not ignored (0) / ignored (1)
#2 SBP P in M198 specifies, a file number (0) / a program
number (1)
#4 M30 When M30 is read, the cursor returns to the start of
the program (0) / does not return to the start of the
program (1)
#5 M02 When M02 is read, the cursor returns to the start of
the program (0) / does not return to the start of the
program (1)
#7 M3B The number of M codes that can be specified in one
block is, one (0) / up to three (1)
03405 Dwell, Calculator-type input, Direct drawing dimension
programming
#0 AUX As the command unit of the 2nd auxiliary function
specified with a decimal point, the same unit is used
for metric input and inch input (0) / the unit for metric
input is multiplied by 10 for inch input (1)
#1 DWL Dwell operation is based on, dwell per second at all
times (0) / dwell per second (G94) or dwell per rotation
(G95) (1)
#3 G36 As G codes for automatic tool compensation, G36 and T series
G37 are used (0) / G37.1 and G37.2 are used (1)
#4 CCR For chamfering, addresses "I", "J", and "K" are used, T series
and ",R", ", C", and ",A" are used in direct drawing
dimension programming (0) / address "C" is used, and
"R", "C", and "A" are used in direct drawing dimension
programming (1)
#5 DDP For angle commands in direct drawing dimension T series
programming, normal specification is used (0) / a
supplementary angle is given (1)
03406 G code clearing
#1 C01 Upon reset, the G codes in group 01 are, cleared (0) / PRM
not cleared (1) 3402#6=1
#2 C02 Upon reset, the G codes in group 02 are, cleared (0) /
not cleared (1)
277
B-63947EN/01

not cleared (1)
not cleared (1)
not cleared (1)
not cleared (1)
not cleared (1)
not cleared (1)
not cleared (1)
#3 C11 Upon reset, the G codes in group 11 are, cleared (0) / 7
not cleared (1)
not cleared (1)
not cleared (1)
not cleared (1)
not cleared (1)
not cleared (1)
not cleared (1)
not cleared (1)
not cleared (1)
not cleared (1)
not cleared (1)
not cleared (1)
not cleared (1)
not cleared (1)
not cleared (1)
not cleared (1)
not cleared (1)
#7 OFH Upon reset, the F, H, D, and T codes are cleared (0) or
not cleared (1).
03410 Tolerance of arc radius [Increment system]
03411 M code 1 preventing buffering
278
7 PARAMETERS
03421 Range specification 1 of M codes that do not perform
buffering (lower limit)
buffering (upper limit)
03436 Range specification 1 of 2nd auxiliary function codes
that do not perform buffering (lower limit)
that do not perform buffering (upper limit)
that do not perform buffering (lower limit)
that do not perform buffering (upper limit)
03441 Start number of M codes for which an M code group
can be set (1)
can be set (2)
can be set (3)
can be set (4)
03450 2nd auxiliary function command
#0 AUP A 2nd auxiliary function command specified in the
calculator-type decimal point input format, specified
with a decimal point, or specified with a negative value
#7 BDX When ASCII code is called using the same address as PRM3460
for the 2nd auxiliary function, a combination of
parameter (No. 3450#0) set to 1 with an option
selection, changes the argument unit (0) / does not
change the argument unit (1)
03451 Thread cutting, Local coordinate system
#0 GQS The threading start angle shift function (Q) is, disabled M series
(0) / enabled (1)
#4 NBN When parameter (No. 3404#0) is set to 1, a block
consisting of a sequence number only is, ignored (0) /
not ignored (1)
279
B-63947EN/01
03452 Thread cutting, Programmable data input, Macro call

#0 GG0 For a command in the grooving mode based on
continuous circular motion, an alarm is issued (0) / the
G01 command is assumed (1)
#4 GCC When grooving path operation based on continuous
circular motion is stopped, the continuous circular
motion is, stopped (0) / continued (1)
#6 THH When continuous threading is specified, the precision
of a block joint is, not improved (0) / improved (1)
#7 EAP When parameter (No. 3455#0) is set to 1, macro PRM
calling in the calculator-type decimal point input format 3401#0=0
03453 Chamfering/corner R, Direct drawing dimension
programming
#0 CRD When both of the chamfering/corner R option and the T series
direct drawing dimension programming option are
selected, chamfering/corner R is enabled (0) / direct
drawing dimension programming is enabled (1) 7
03455 Handling of the decimal point <Axis>
#0 AXD If a decimal point is omitted for an axis address, the
value is determined, in accordance with the least input
increment (0) / in millimeters, inches, or seconds (1)
03457 Search folder
#0 LIB The common program folder is, set as a search folder
for subprogram call/macro call (0) / not set as a search
folder for subprogram call/macro call (1)
#1 MC2 MTB dedicated folder 2 is, set as a search folder for
subprogram call/macro call (0) / not set as a search
#2 MC1 MTB dedicated folder 1 is, set as a search folder for
#3 SYS The system folder is, set as a search folder for
#6 SCC To the search order for subprogram call/macro call,
the same folder as for the main program is, not added
(0) / added (1)
#7 SCF A search folder for subprogram call/macro call is, not
added (0) / added (1)
03460 2nd auxiliary function specification address PRM1020
03471 Allowable difference between the specified end <Axis>
position and the end position obtained from the
increase/decrease and frequency in spiral
interpolation or conical interpolation
03472 Minimum radius needed to maintain the actual speed
in spiral or conical interpolation
03490 Acceleration clamp value for continuous circular PRM3490
motion [mm/sec2]
7.2.14 Pitch Error Compensation

03601 Cs contour control axis pitch error compensation
during simple spindle synchronization
#1 EPC The pitch error compensation on an axis of Cs contour
control on the slave spindle side during simple spindle
control is, the same as that on the master spindle (0) /
just for the slave spindle (1)
03605 Error compensation function setting <Axis>
#0 BDP Bidirectional pitch error compensation is, not used (0) / PRM3620 -
used (1) 3627
#1 IPP Interpolation type pitch error compensation is, not PRM3620 -
used (0) / used (1) 3624
#2 IPC The interpolation type straightness compensation PRM3620 -
function is, not used (0) / used (1) 3624,5700-
, 13381 -
280
7 PARAMETERS
03620 Number of the pitch error compensation position for <Axis>
the reference position for each axis
03621 Number of the pitch error compensation position at <Axis>
extremely negative position for each axis
03622 Number of the pitch error compensation position at <Axis>
extremely positive position for each axis
03623 Magnification for pitch error compensation for each <Axis>
axis
03624 Interval between pitch error compensation positions <Axis>
for each axis [Increment system]
03625 Travel distance per revolution in pitch error <Axis>
compensation of rotary axis type [Detection unit] PRM
Travel distance per revolution 1006#0,#1
= compensation value × compensation interval
03626 Number of the bi-directional pitch error compensation <Axis>
position at extremely negative position (for movement PRM3621
in the negative direction)
03627 Pitch error compensation at reference position when a <Axis>
movement to the reference position is made from the PRM
direction opposite to the direction of reference position 1006#5
return
03661 Number of a pitch error compensation position for the PRM
reference position for each slave axis when 3601#1
independent pitch error compensation is performed
under simple spindle synchronous control
03666 Number of the pitch error compensation position at PRM
extremely negative position for each slave axis when 3601#1
extremely positive position for each slave axis when 3601#1
extremely negative position for each slave axis when 3601#1
independent bi-directional pitch error compensation is
performed under simple spindle synchronous control
03681 Pitch error compensation value at the reference PRM
position when a movement is made to the reference 1006#5
position in the direction opposite to the reference 3601#1
position return direction for each slave axis in the case
where independent bi-directional pitch error
compensation is performed under simple spindle
synchronous control
7.2.15 Spindle Control

03700 Cs contour control
#0 CRF Reference position setting at an arbitrary position PRM
under Cs contour control is, not used (0) / used (1) 3700#1
#1 NRF For the 1st positioning after switching to the Cs
contour control mode, a reference position return
operation is once performed (0) / a normal positioning
operation is performed (1)
03702 Multi-spindle
#1 EMS The multi-spindle control function is, used (0) / not
used (1)
03703 Multi-spindle
#0 2P2 When a multi-path system is used, inter-path spindle PRM
control allows, configuration where the spindle that 3703#2
belongs to one path only is shared between path 1
and path 2 (0) / configuration where the spindles that
belong to path 1 and path 2 are shared between the
two paths (1)
281
B-63947EN/01
#2 MPM When a multi-path system is used, inter-path spindle

control, follows the setting of parameter (No. 3703#0)
(0) / allows the spindles of arbitrary paths to be shared
among arbitrary paths (1)
#3 MPP In multi-spindle control, a spindle selection using a G027
programmed command instead of using the SWS1 to #0 - #2,
SWS4 signals, is not made (0) / made (1) G026#3
PRM3781
#4 SPR Rigid tapping using the spindle of another path is, not
03704 Spindle synchronous control
#4 SSS Synchronous spindle control by each spindle is, not PRM4831
#5 SSY Simple synchronous spindle control by each spindle PRM4821
#7 CSS On each spindle, Cs contour control is, not performed
(0) / performed (1)
03705 Parameters for spindle gear switching 7
#0 ESF When constant surface speed control is used with the PRM
spindle control function or when parameter (No. 3705#4
3706#4) is set to 1, S codes and SF are output for all
S commands (0) / S codes and SF are not output if
constant surface speed control is used or the spindle
speed is clamped (1)
#1 GST The SOR signal is used for, spindle orientation (0) / M series
gear shift (1) PRM
3706#4
3751,3752
#2 SGB The gear switching method is, method A (parameter
No. 3741 to No. 3743) (0) / method B (parameter No.
3751 to No. 3752) (1)
#3 SGT The gear switching method during a tapping cycle is, PRM
method A (0) / method B (1) 3761,3762
#4 EVS When an S command is specified, the spindle control T series
function, does not output S codes and SF (0) / outputs PRM
S codes and SF (1) 3705#0
#5 NSF When a T type gear is selected and an S command is M series
specified, SF is output (0) / SF is not output (1) PRM
3706#4=1
#6 SFA The SF signal is output, when gears are switched (0) /
regardless of whether gears are switched (1)
03706 Output polarity
#2 MPA When a spindle is to be selected using a P command PRM
in multi-spindle control, and a P command is not 3703#3=1
specified together with an S command, an alarm is
issued (0) / the last P command specified or the value
of parameter No. 3775 is used (1)
#3 PCS When multi-spindle control is used with a multi-path
system, the position coder selection signals are, the
signals of the path selected by the inter-path spindle
feedback selection signal (0) / the signals of the local
path (1)
#4 GTT The spindle gear selection method is, type M (0) / type M series
T (1)
#5 ORM The voltage polarity during spindle orientation is,
positive (0) / negative (1)
#6 CWM Voltage polarity when the spindle speed is output
#7 TCW TCW CWM Meaning
0 0 Both of M03 and M04 are positive.
0 1 Both of M03 and M04 are negative.
1 0 M03 is positive, and M04 is negative.
1 1 M03 is negative, and M04 is positive.
03708 Spindle speed arrival signal, Spindle speed fluctuation
detection
#0 SAR The spindle speed arrival signal is, not checked (0) /
checked (1)
282
7 PARAMETERS
#1 SAT Check of the spindle speed arrival signal at the start of T series
executing the thread cutting block is, performed
according to the setting of SAR (0) / performed at all
times (1)
#5 SOC During constant surface speed control, the maximum PRM3772
spindle speed clamp command clamps the spindle,
before spindle speed override (0) / after spindle speed
override (1)
#6 TSO During a threading or tapping cycle, the spindle G30#0 - #7
override is, disabled (tied to 100%) (0) / enabled (1)
03709 Spindle speed, Multi-spindle
#0 SAM The sampling frequency to obtain the average spindle Usually, 0
speed is, 4 (0) / 1 (1)
#1 RSC In the constant surface speed control mode, the
surface speed of a rapid traverse block is calculated,
in accordance with the coordinates of the end point (0)
/ in accordance with the current value, as in cutting
feed (1)
#2 MSI In multi-spindle control, the SIND signal is valid, only
when the 1st spindle is selected (0) / for each spindle
(1)
#3 MRS When the actual spindle speed signals and S 12-bit
code signals are output in multi-spindle control, the
signals common to the 1st spindle and 2nd spindles
are used (0) / separate signals are used (1)
03712
#2 CSF The coordinate system establishment function based PRM
on Cs contour control is, disabled (0) / enabled (1) 4353#5
03713 Multi-spindle
#3 MSC Multi-spindle control type C is, used (0) / not used (1) PRM
3709#2=1
#4 EOV Each spindle override signal is, not used (0) / used (1) PRM
3713#3=1
#5 MSP The spindle control M/S/P format is, invalid (0) / valid PRM
(1) 3703#3=1
3713#3=1
#6 MPC In accordance with a selected spindle, the position PRM
coder feedback signal to be used for threading, feed 3713#3=1
per minute, and so forth is, not automatically switched
(0) / automatically switched (1)
03715 Spindle speed arrival signal <Axis>
#0 NSA When a move command is executed for an axis, the
spindle speed arrival signal for the axis is, checked (0)
/ not checked (1)
03716 Type of spindle motor
#0 A/S The type of spindle motor is, analog (0) / serial (1) PRM
1000#0
03717 Motor number to each spindle
03718 Subscript for display of a serial spindle (main spindle) PRM
03719 Subscript for display of a serial spindle (sub spindle) 1000#0
03720 Number of position coder pulses [Detection unit]
03721 Number of gear teeth on the position coder side
03722 Number of gear teeth on the spindle side
03729 Cs contour control, Spindle orientation
#0 ORT The spindle orientation function of stop position
external setting type based on the position coder is,
#1 FPR With each spindle, feed per revolution (without a
position coder) is, not used (0) / used (1)
#2 CSN When the Cs contour control mode is off, in-position
check is, enabled (0) / disabled (1)
#3 NCS When the Cs contour control mode is on, the
completion of mode switching, waits for spindle
activation to be turned on (0) / does not wait for
spindle activation to be turned on (1)
283
B-63947EN/01
03730 Data used for adjusting the gain of the analog output
of spindle speed [0.1%]
10(V)
Set value = × 1000
Measured voltage (V)
03731 Compensation value for the offset voltage of spindle
speed analog output [V]
- 8191× Offset voltage (V)
Set value =
12.5
03732 The spindle speed during spindle orientation or the PRM
spindle motor speed during spindle gear shift 3705#0
Set value =
Spindle speed during spindle gear shift
×n
4020
Maximum spindle motor speed
Serial spindle: n=16383
Analog spindle: n=4095
03735 Minimum clamp speed of the spindle motor M series
Minimum clamp speed of spindle motor
Set value = × 4095
Maximum spindle motor speed 7
03736 Maximum clamp speed of the spindle motor M series
Maximum clamp speed of spindle motor
Set value = × 4095
Maximum spindle motor speed
03738 Spindle name 2 of each spindle PRM
03739 Spindle name 3 of each spindle 1000#0
3703#3
3798#1
3706#4
03740 Time elapsed prior to checking the spindle speed
arrival signal [ms]
03741 Maximum spindle speed for gear 1 [min-1]
03751 Spindle motor speed when switching from gear 1 to M series
gear 2 PRM
03752 Spindle motor speed when switching from gear 2 to 3705#2
gear 3
Setting value =(Spindle motor speed when the gears
are switched / Maximum spindle motor speed) × 4095
03761 Spindle speed when switching from gear 1 to gear 2 M series
during tapping [min-1] PRM
03762 Spindle speed when switching from gear 2 to gear 3 3705#3=1
during tapping [min-1]
03770 Axis as the calculation reference in constant surface
speed control
03771 Minimum spindle speed in constant surface speed
control mode (G96) [min-1]
03772 Maximum spindle speed for each spindle [min-1]
03775 Default P command value for spindle selection in PRM
multi-spindle control 3703#3=1
3706#2=1
03781 P code for selecting the spindle in multi-spindle control PRM
3703#3=1
03796 Spindle switching group number
03797 Dual Check Safety function
#0 DCN With the dual check safety function, each target
spindle is, checked (0) / not checked (1)
284
7 PARAMETERS
03798 Spindle alarm, Spindle speed command
#0 ALM The spindle alarm for all spindles is, enabled (0) /
ignored (1)
#1 ESN Programmed spindle command PRM
3798#1 3703#3 Selection method 1000#0
0 0 Signal selection 3738, 3739
0 1 P command
1 0 Signal selection
1 1 Spindle name
#6 SSW The spindle switch function is, not performed (0) /
performed (1)
03799 Spindle function check
#0 NAL An alarm detected on the spindle amplifier side is, PRM
displayed (0) / not displayed (1) 3798#0
#1 NDP When an analog spindle is used, a position coder PRM
disconnection check is, made (0) / not made (1) 3716#0
3799#0
#2 ASD When a serial spindle is used, a spindle speed is
calculated based on, feedback pulses from the
position coder (0) / speed monitor (1)
#3 SVP As synchronization errors displayed on the spindle
screen, monitor values are displayed (0) / peak-hold
values are displayed (1)
#4 NCA A spindle analog output voltage is, checked (0) / not
checked (1)
#5 SSH Display of all spindle speed data on the diagnostic
screen is, disabled (0) / enabled (1)
03841 Servo motor spindle control number PRM
2016#4
03842 Maximum speed under servo motor spindle control [Input unit]
03843 Acceleration/deceleration time constant under servo motor
spindle control [ms]
03844 Master spindle number
03900 Servo axis number used for interpolation with a Cs contour
control axis (1st group)
03901 Loop gain for the servo axis used for interpolation with a Cs
contour control axis (High gear) (1st group) [0.01/sec]
contour control axis (Medium High gear) (1st group) [0.01/sec]
contour control axis (Medium Low gear) (1st group) [0.01/sec]
contour control axis (Low gear) (1st group) [0.01/sec]
control axis (2nd group)
contour control axis (High gear) (2nd group) [0.01/sec]
contour control axis (Medium High gear) (2nd group) [0.01/sec]
contour control axis (Medium Low gear) (2nd group) [0.01/sec]
contour control axis (Low gear) (2nd group) [0.01/sec]
control axis (3rd group)
contour control axis (High gear) (3rd group) [0.01/sec]
contour control axis (Medium High gear) (3rd group) [0.01/sec]
contour control axis (Medium Low gear) (3rd group) [0.01/sec]
contour control axis (Low gear) (3rd group) [0.01/sec]
control axis (4th group)
285
B-63947EN/01
contour control axis (High gear) (4th group) [0.01/sec]
contour control axis (Medium High gear) (4th group) [0.01/sec]
contour control axis (Medium Low gear) (4th group) [0.01/sec]
contour control axis (Low gear) (4th group) [0.01/sec]
control axis (5th group)
contour control axis (High gear) (5th group) [0.01/sec]
contour control axis (Medium High gear) (5th group) [0.01/sec]
contour control axis (Medium Low gear) (5th group) [0.01/sec]
03944 Loop gain for the servo axis used for interpolation with a Cs 7
contour control axis (Low gear) (5th group) [0.01/sec]
7.2.16 Serial Spindle

04000 Setting of rotation direction
#0 ROTA1 The spindle and spindle motor rotate, in the same
direction (0) / in the opposite directions (1)
#1 ROTA2 In Cs contour control, a command for movement in
the positive (+) direction moves the spindle, in the
counterclockwise direction (0) / in the clockwise
direction (1)
#3 RETRN In Cs contour control, the direction of reference
position return is, counterclockwise (0) / clockwise
(1)
#4 RETSV In the servo mode, the direction of reference position When
return is, counterclockwise (0) / clockwise (1) viewed from
the spindle
#5 DEFFNC The differential speed control function is, not used
(0) / used (1)
#6 DEFDRT In differential speed control, the direction of
differential speed is, the same as the direction of the
feedback signal (0) / opposite to the direction of the
feedback signal (1)
04001 Magnetic sensor, Spindle sensor, MRDY signal
#0 MRDY1 The MRDY signal is, not used (0) / used (1)
#3 MGDIR The magnetic sensor and spindle motor rotate, in the
opposite directions (0) / in the same direction (1)
#4 SSDIRC The spindle sensor and spindle motor rotate, in the same
04002 Spindle sensor, Rotation direction function
#0 SSTYP0 Type of spindle sensor
#1 SSTYP1 SSTYP3 SSTYP2 SSTYP1 SSTYP0 Spindle sensor
#2 SSTYP2 None (Position control is not
0 0 0 0
exercised.)
#3 SSTYP3 The motor sensor is used for
0 0 0 1
position feedback.
0 0 1 0 αi position coder
Separate αiBZ sensor, αiCZ
0 0 1 1
sensor
0 1 0 0 α position coder S
#4 CSDRCT In Cs contour control, the rotation direction function is,
#5 SVMDRT In the servo mode, the rotation direction function is, enabled
(0) / disabled (1)
#6 SYCDRT In spindle synchronization control, the rotation direction
function is, enabled (0) / disabled (1)
286
7 PARAMETERS
04003 Spindle sensor, Orientation
#0 PCMGSL The system of orientation is, position coder system (0) /
magnetic sensor system (1)
#2 DIRCT1 Rotation direction at spindle orientation
#3 DIRCT2 DIRCT2 DIRCT1 Rotation direction
Direction of rotation immediately before
0 0
(Counterclockwise for the 1st time after power-on)
Direction of rotation immediately before
0 1
(Clockwise for the 1st time after power-on)
1 0 Counterclockwise when viewed from the motor shaft
1 1 Clockwise when viewed from the motor shaft
#4 PCTYPE Setting of the number of spindle sensor teeth

#5 PCPL0 PCPL2 PCPL1 PCPL0 PCTYPE Number of spindle sensor teeth
0 0 0 0 256 λ/rev
#6 PCPL1
0 0 0 1 128 λ/rev
#7 PCPL2 0 1 0 0 512 λ/rev
0 1 0 1 64 λ/rev
1 0 0 0 768 λ/rev
1 0 0 1 1024 λ/rev
1 1 0 0 384 λ/rev
04004 External one-rotation signal
#2 EXTRF The external one-rotation signal is, not used (0) / used (1)
#3 RFTYPE The external one-rotation signal is detected, on its rising edge
(0) / on its falling edge (1)
04005 Resolution in Cs contour control
#0 CS360M The detection unit in Cs contour control is, 0.001° (0) /
0.0001° (1)
04006 Gear ratio, Motor speed setting unit, Analog override
#1 GRUNT0 The gear ratio resolution is, 0.01 (0) / 0.001 (1) PRM
4056 - 4059
-1 -1
#2 SPDUNT The unit of motor speed is, 1 min (0) / 10 min (1)
#3 SYCREF In spindle synchronization, the one-rotation signal is,
automatically detected (0) / not automatically
detected (1)
#5 ALGOVR The spindle analog override is, 0% to 100% (0) / 0%
to 120% (1)
#7 RGTCMR In rigid tapping, the arbitrary gear ratio (CMR)
function on the command side is, not used (0) / used
(1)
04007 Alarms related to feedback signals
#5 PCLS Detection of a feedback signal disconnection is, enabled (0) /
disabled (1)
#6 PCALCH Detection of alarms (41, 42, 47, 81, 82, 83, 85, 86, 87) related
to the position feedback signal (in a mode other than the Cs
contour control mode) is, enabled (0) / disabled (1)
#7 - Induction (HRV): Not used
EPFSIG Synchronous (HRV): As the pole position detection start
signal, SFR or SRV is used (0) / EPFSTR is used (1)
04008 SSM, Pole position

#4 PLMALW Output restriction method setting
SSMUSE Synchronous (HRV): SSM (sub-module SM) is, not used (0) /
used (1)
NEGREF Synchronous (HRV): As a reference pole position in pole
determination, the one-rotation signal is, used (0) / not used
(1)
04009 Unit of velocity loop gain setting
#0 VLPGAN The setting of a velocity loop gain is, used without
modification (0) / used after division by 16 (1)
#2 ALSP When a serial communication alarm is issued, the power is,
turned off after the motor stops (0) / turned off immediately (1)
287
B-63947EN/01
#4 LDTOUT During acc./dec., the load detection signal is, not output (0) /
output (1)
#6 OVRTYP The type of analog override is, linear function type (0) /
quadratic function type (1)
04010 Type of motor sensor
#0 MSTYP0 Type of motor sensor
#1 MSTYP1 MSTYP2 MSTYP1 MSTYP0 Type of motor sensor
#2 MSTYP2 0 0 0 αiM sensor
0 0 1 αiMZ, αiBZ, αiCZ sensor
04011 Setting of the number of motor sensor teeth

#0 VDT1 Setting of the number of motor sensor teeth
#1 VDT2 VDT3 VDT2 VDT1 Number of motor sensor teeth
0 0 0 64 λ/rev
#2 VDT3
0 0 1 128 λ/rev
0 1 0 256 λ/rev
0 1 1 512 λ/rev
1 0 0 192 λ/rev 7
1 0 1 384 λ/rev
#3 POLE1 Number of motor poles
#4 MXPW Specification of maximum output at acceleration time
POLE2 POLE1 Number of motor poles
0 0 2 poles
0 1 4 poles
1 0 8 poles
1 1 6 poles
04012 Spindle HRV function setting, Induction motor/synchronous
motor selection
#0 PWM1 PWM setting
#1 PWM2
#2 PWM3
#6 SYSP Selection of induction motor (0) / synchronous motor (1)
#7 SPHRV The spindle HRV function is enabled (1)
04013 Setting of current dead zone data
#2 DS1 Setting of current dead zone data
#3 DS2 Amplifier model Parameter setting
#4 DS3 200 V input 400 V input (HV) DS5 DS4 DS3 DS2 DS1
αiSP 2.2 to 15 αiSP 5.5HV to 15HV 0 0 0 1 1
#5 DS4 αiSP 22 to 37 αiSP 30HV to 45HV 1 0 1 0 0
#7 PWM3K PWM setting
04014 Spindle switching
#0 AXISSL Spindle switching is, disabled (0) / enabled (1)
#2 AXSLCT The spindle switching (between the main spindle and
sub-spindle) MCC contact check function is based on, the
power state signal MCFN (0) / the contacts of both magnetic
poles (1)
#3 CHGSLT Output switching (between high speed and low speed) MCC
contact check is based on, the power state check signal RCH
(0) / the contacts of both magnetic contactors (1)
#6 SYCORI During spindle synchronization control, the orientation
#7 DUALFB The dual position feedback function is, enabled (0) / disabled
(1)
04015 Orientation function, Load monitor function, Output switching
function
#0 ORIENT The orientation function is, used (0) / not used (1)
#1 SPLDMT The spindle load monitor function is, disabled (0) / enabled (1)
#2 SPDSW The output switching function is, not used (0) / used (1)
#3 SPDTDM The spindle tandem function is, not provided (0) / provided (1)
#7 DCS The dual check safety function is, not provided (0) / provided
(1)
288
7 PARAMETERS
04016 Cs contour control
#3 FFSMTH The feed-forward smoothing function is, disabled (0) /
enabled (1)
#4 IDLPTN Induction (HRV): Usually (0) / when a value less than 100 is
set as the motor voltage (No. 4086) in Cs contour control or
as the motor voltage (No. 4085) in the servo mode (1)
- Synchronous (HRV): Not used
#5 RFCHK1 The alarms (82, 83, 85, 86) related position feedback (in the
Cs contour control mode) are, not detected (0) / detected (1)
#6 RFCHK2 The alarm (46) related to threading position detection signal
feedback is, not detected (0) / detected (1)
#7 RFCHK3 The function for detecting the one-rotation signal again before
the position control mode is entered is, disabled (0) / enabled
(1)
04017 Orientation, Differential speed control
#0 VINTDC Induction (HRV): Setting of an integral time constant
operation in differential speed control (1)
#7 NRROEN When a command for orientation from the stop state is
specified, the shortcut function is, disabled (0) / enabled (1)
04018 High-speed orientation
#5 HSVCM High-speed orientation speed command compensation is,
#6 HSORI The high-speed orientation function is, disabled (0) / enabled
(1)
04019 Speed clamp, Automatic parameter setting function
#2 SSTTRQ When the speed is 0, speed clamping is, enabled (0) /
disabled (1)
#4 SDTCHG In switching from high speed to low speed at output switching
time, the function for switching based on the speed detection
signal SDT set to 1 is, disabled (0) / enabled (1)
#7 PRLOAD Automatic parameter setting is, not performed (0) / performed
(1)
04020 Maximum motor speed [min-1]
04021 Maximum speed on Cs contour control mode [min-1]
04022 Speed arrival detection level [0.1%]
04023 Speed detection level [0.1%]
04024 Zero speed detection level [0.01%]
04025 Limited torque [%]
04026 Load detection level 1 [%]
04028 Limited output pattern
04029 Output limit [%]
04030 Soft start/stop time [min-1/s]
04031 Stop position of position coder method orientation
04032 Acceleration on spindle synchronous control [min-1/s]
04033 Spindle synchronous speed arrival level [min-1]
04034 Shift during synchronous control of spindle phase
04035 Compensation data for spindle phase synchronous control
04036 Feed-forward coefficient [%]
04037 Feed-forward coefficient of velocity loop
04038 Spindle orientation speed [min-1]
04039 Induction (HRV): Slip compensation gain
Synchronous (HRV): Not used
04040 Velocity loop proportional gain on velocity control mode(High)
04041 Velocity loop proportional gain on velocity control mode (Low)
04042 Velocity loop proportional gain on orientation (High)
04043 Velocity loop proportional gain on orientation (Low)
04044 Velocity loop proportional gain on servo mode/spindle
synchronous control (High)
289
B-63947EN/01
04045 Velocity loop proportional gain on servo mode/spindle

synchronous control (Low)
04046 Velocity loop proportional gain on Cs contour control(High)
04047 Velocity loop proportional gain on Cs contour control (Low)
04048 Velocity loop integral gain on velocity control mode (High)
04049 Velocity loop integral gain on velocity control mode (Low)
04050 Velocity loop integral gain on orientation (High)
04051 Velocity loop integral gain on orientation (Low)
04052 Velocity loop integral gain on servo mode/spindle
synchronous control (High)
synchronous control (Low)
04054 Velocity loop integral gain on Cs contour control (High)
04055 Velocity loop integral gain on Cs contour control (Low)
04056 Motor speed per spindle revolution (High) [×100]
7
04057 Motor speed per spindle revolution (Medium High) [×100]
04058 Motor speed per spindle revolution (Medium Low) [×100]
04059 Motor speed per spindle revolution (Low) [×100]
04060 Position gain on orientation (High)
04061 Position gain on orientation (Medium High)
04062 Position gain on orientation (Medium Low)
04063 Position gain on orientation (Low)
04064 Ordinary orientation: Rate of change in position gain upon
completion of orientation [%]
High-speed orientation: Rate of change in position gain upon
completion of orientation
04065 Position gain on servo mode/spindle synchronous control
(High)
(Medium High)
(Medium Low)
(Low)
04069 Position gain on Cs contour control (High)
04070 Position gain on Cs contour control (Medium High)
04071 Position gain on Cs contour control (Medium Low)
04072 Position gain on Cs contour control (Low)
04073 Grid shift on servo mode
04074 Reference position return speed on Cs contour control/servo
mode [min-1]
04075 Detection level for orientation completion signal
04076 Ordinary orientation: Motor speed limit value on orientation
[%]
High-speed orientation: Reserved
04077 Orientation stop position shift
04078 MS signal constant
04079 MS signal gain adjustment
04080 Induction (HRV): Regenerative power limit for high-speed
zone/regenerative power limit
Synchronous (HRV): regenerative power limit
04081 Delay time until motor power is cut off [10ms]
04082 Setting of acc./dec. time [s]
04083 Induction (HRV): Motor voltage on velocity control mode
Synchronous (HRV):
Thousands and hundreds digits: Current ratio in pole
position detection operation [%]
Tens and ones digits: Stop confirmation time in pole
position detection operation [0.1sec]
290
7 PARAMETERS
04084 Induction (HRV): Motor voltage on orientation
Synchronous (HRV): AMR offset
04085 Induction (HRV): Motor voltage on servo mode/spindle
synchronous control mode
Synchronous (HRV): Fine AMR offset tuning
04086 Induction (HRV): Motor voltage on Cs contour control
Synchronous (HRV): Inductance ratio
04087 Overspeed level [%]
04088 Level for detecting excess velocity error when motor is
restrained [0.01%]
04089 Level for detecting excess velocity error when motor rotates
[0.1%]
04090 Overload detection level [%]
04091 Rate of change in position gain during reference position
return on servo mode [%]
return on Cs contour control [%]
04093 Value displayed on load meter at maximum output
04094 Acceleration feedback gain
04095 Adjusted output voltage of speedometer [0.1%]
04096 Adjusted output voltage of load meter [0.1%]
04097 Feedback gain of spindle speed
04098 Maximum speed for position feedback signal detection [min-1]
04099 Delay time for motor excitation [ms]
04100 Induction (HRV): Base speed of motor output specifications
Synchronous (HRV): Base speed of motor output
specifications
04101 Induction (HRV): Output limit for motor output specifications
Synchronous (HRV): Output limit for motor output
specifications
04102 Induction (HRV): Excitation voltage saturation speed at
no-load
Synchronous (HRV): q-phase current limit start speed
04103 Induction (HRV): Base speed limit ratio
Synchronous (HRV): d-phase current command start speed
(magnetic field weakening start speed)
04104 Induction (HRV): Current loop proportional gain
Synchronous (HRV): Current loop proportional gain
04106 Induction (HRV): Current loop integral gain
Synchronous (HRV): Current loop integral gain
04108 Induction (HRV): Velocity at which the current loop integral
gain is zero
Synchronous (HRV): Velocity at which the current loop
integral gain is zero
04109 Induction (HRV): Filter time constant for processing saturation
related to the voltage command
Synchronous (HRV): Filter time constant for processing
saturation related to the voltage command
04110 Induction (HRV): Current conversion constant
Synchronous (HRV): Current conversion constant
04111 Induction (HRV): Secondary current coefficient
Synchronous (HRV): Maximum current coefficient
04112 Induction (HRV): Criterion level for saturation related to the
voltage command/PWM command clamp value
Synchronous (HRV): Criterion level for saturation related to
the voltage command/PWM command clamp value
04113 Induction (HRV): Slip constant
Synchronous (HRV): Current coefficient for magnetic flux
weakening
04114 Induction (HRV): Slip compensation coefficient for a
high-speed zone/slip compensation coefficient at deceleration
291
B-63947EN/01
04115 Induction (HRV): PWM command clamp value at deceleration

Synchronous (HRV): PWM command clamp value at
deceleration
04116 Induction (HRV): Motor leakage constant
Synchronous (HRV): Back electromotive voltage
compensation coefficient
04117 Induction (HRV): Regular-time voltage compensation
coefficient for high-speed zone/regular-time motor voltage
coefficient
Synchronous (HRV): Interference voltage compensation
coefficient
04118 Induction (HRV): Acceleration-time voltage compensation
coefficient for high-speed zone/acceleration-time motor
voltage coefficient
04119 Induction (HRV): Deceleration-time excitation current change
time constant/excitation current change time constant 7
Synchronous (HRV): Interference voltage compensation
04120 Induction (HRV): Dead-band rectangular wave component
zero voltage/dead-band data
Synchronous (HRV): Dead-band rectangular wave
component zero voltage/dead-band data
04121 Time constant for changing the torque (TCMD filter time
constant) [0.5ms]
04122 Time constant for velocity detecting filter [0.1ms]
04123 Short-time overload detection time [s]
04124 Induction (HRV): Not used
04128 Induction (HRV): maximum torque curve compensation
coefficient
04129 Induction (HRV): Secondary current coefficient for rigid
tapping
04130 Induction (HRV): Current loop proportional gain speed
coefficient/current phase delay compensation coefficient
Synchronous (HRV): Current phase delay compensation
coefficient
04131 Time constant for velocity detecting filter (on Cs contour
control) [0.1ms]
04133 Motor model code
04134 Motor overheat detect level (2-word)
04135 Grid shift during Cs contour control mode (2-word)
04137 Induction (HRV): Motor voltage on servo mode/spindle
synchronous control mode
no-load
gain is zero
292
7 PARAMETERS
coefficient
voltage coefficient
04155 Induction (HRV): Reserved
constant) [0.5ms]
04158 Induction (HRV): maximum torque curve compensation
coefficient
tapping
04160 Hysteresis of speed detection level [min-1]
04162 Integral gain of velocity loop during cutting feed on Cs contour
control mode (High)
04163 Integral gain of velocity loop during cutting feed on Cs contour
control mode (Low)
04165 Induction (HRV): Excitation current change time constant
04168 Current overload alarm detection level
04169 Temperature monitoring time constant
04171 Denominator of arbitrary gear ratio between motor sensor and
spindle (High)
04172 Numerator of arbitrary gear ratio between motor sensor and
spindle (High)
spindle (Low)
spindle (Low)
04176 Setting of rotation direction
#0 ROTA1 The spindle and spindle motor rotate, in the same
#4 RETSV In the servo mode, the direction of reference position When
return is, counterclockwise (0) / clockwise (1) viewed from
the spindle
04177 Magnetic sensor, Spindle sensor, MRDY signal
#0 MRDY1 The MRDY signal is, not used (0) / used (1)
#3 MGDIR The magnetic sensor and spindle motor rotate, in the
opposite directions (0) / in the same direction (1)
#4 SSDIRC The spindle sensor and spindle motor rotate, in the same
293
B-63947EN/01
04178 Spindle sensor, Rotation direction function

#0 SSTYP0 Type of spindle sensor
#1 SSTYP1 SSTYP3 SSTYP2 SSTYP1 SSTYP0 Spindle sensor
None (Position control is not
#2 SSTYP2 0 0 0 0
exercised.)
#3 SSTYP3 The motor sensor is used
0 0 0 1
for position feedback.
0 0 1 0 αi position coder
Separate αiBZ sensor, αiCZ
0 0 1 1
sensor
0 1 0 0 α position coder S
#5 SVMDRT In the servo mode, the rotation direction function is, enabled
(0) / disabled (1)
04179 Spindle sensor, Orientation
#0 PCMGSL The system of orientation is, position coder system (0) /
magnetic sensor system (1)
#2 DIRCT1 Rotation direction at spindle orientation
7
#3 DIRCT2 DIRCT2 DIRCT1 Rotation direction
Rotation direction immediately before
0 0
(Counterclockwise for the 1st time after power-on)
Rotation direction immediately before
0 1
(Clockwise for the 1st time after power-on)
1 0 Counterclockwise when viewed from the motor shaft
1 1 Clockwise when viewed from the motor shaft
#4 PCTYPE Setting of the number of spindle sensor teeth

#5 PCPL0 PCPL2 PCPL1 PCPL0 PCTYPE Number of spindle sensor teeth
#6 PCPL1 0 0 0 0 256 λ/rev
0 0 0 1 128 λ/rev
#7 PCPL2 0 1 0 0 512 λ/rev
0 1 0 1 64 λ/rev
1 0 0 0 768 λ/rev
1 0 0 1 1024 λ/rev
1 1 0 0 384 λ/rev
04180 External one-rotation signal

#2 EXTRF The external one-rotation signal is, not used (0) / used (1)
#3 RFTYPE The external one-rotation signal is detected, on its rising edge
(0) / on its falling edge (1)
04182 Gear ratio, Motor speed setting unit, Analog override
#1 GRUNT0 The gear ratio resolution is, 0.01 (0) / 0.001 (1) PRM
4216,4217
-1 -1
#2 SPDUNT The unit of motor speed is, 1 min (0) / 10 min (1)
#5 ALGOVR The spindle analog override is, 0% to 100% (0) / 0%
to 120% (1)
#7 RGTCMR In rigid tapping, the arbitrary gear ratio (CMR)
function on the command side is, not used (0) / used
(1)
04183 Alarms related to feedback signals
#5 PCLS Detection of a feedback signal disconnection is, enabled (0) /
disabled (1)
#6 PCALCH Detection of alarms (41, 42, 47, 81, 82, 83, 85, 86, 87) related
to the position feedback signal (in a mode other than the Cs
contour control mode) is, enabled (0) / disabled (1)
04184 Output restriction method
#4 PLMALW Output restriction method setting
04185 Unit of velocity loop gain setting
#0 VLPGAN The setting of a velocity loop gain is, used without
modification (0) / used after division by 16 (1)
#2 ALSP When a serial communication alarm is issued, the power is,
turned off after the motor stops (0) / turned off immediately (1)
#4 LDTOUT During acc./dec., the load detection signal is, not output (0) /
output (1)
#6 OVRTYP The type of analog override is, linear function type (0) /
quadratic function type (1)
294
7 PARAMETERS
04186 Motor sensor type
#0 MSTYP0 Motor sensor type
#1 MSTYP1 MSTYP2 MSTYP1 MSTYP0 Spindle sensor type
#2 MSTYP2 0 0 0 αiM sensor
0 0 1 αiMZ, αiBZ, αiCZ sensor
04187 Number of teeth setting of motor sensor

#0 VDT1 Number of teeth setting of motor sensor
#1 VDT2 VDT3 VDT2 VDT1 Number of teeth setting of motor sensor
0 0 0 64 λ/rev
#2 VDT3 0 0 1 128 λ/rev
0 1 0 256 λ/rev
0 1 1 512 λ/rev
1 0 0 192 λ/rev
1 0 1 384 λ/rev
#4 MXPW Specification of maximum output at acceleration time
POLE2 POLE1 Number of motor poles
0 0 2 poles
0 1 4 poles
1 0 8 poles
1 1 6 poles
04188 Spindle HRV function setting, Induction motor/synchronous
motor selection
#0 PWM1 PWM setting
#1 PWM2
#2 PWM3
#6 SYSP Induction motor (0)
#7 SPHRV The spindle HRV function is enabled (1)
04189 Setting of current dead zone data
#2 DS1 Setting of current dead zone data
#3 DS2 Amplifier model Parameter setting
#4 DS3 200 V input 400 V input (HV) DS5 DS4 DS3 DS2 DS1
αiSP 2.2 to 15 αiSP 5.5HV to 15HV 0 0 0 1 1
#7 PWM3K PWM setting

04191 Orientation function, Load monitor function, Output switching
function
#0 ORIENT The orientation function is, used (0) / not used (1)
#1 SPLDMT The spindle load monitor function is, disabled (0) / enabled (1)
#2 SPDSW The output switching function is, not used (0) / used (1)
#3 SPDTDM The spindle tandem function is, not provided (0) / provided (1)
#7 DCS The dual check safety function is, not provided (0) / provided
(1)
04192 Servo mode
#3 FFSMTH The feed-forward smoothing function is, disabled (0) /
enabled (1)
#4 IDLPTN Induction (HRV): Usually (0) / when a value less than 100 is
set as the motor voltage (No. 4086) in Cs contour control or
as the motor voltage (No. 4238) in the servo mode (1)
- Synchronous (HRV): Not used
#6 RFCHK2 The alarm (46) related to threading position detection signal
feedback is, not detected (0) / detected (1)
#7 RFCHK3 The function for detecting the one-rotation signal again before
the position control mode is entered is, disabled (0) / enabled
(1)
04193 Orientation
#7 NRROEN When a command for orientation from the stop state is
specified, the shortcut function is, disabled (0) / enabled (1)
295
B-63947EN/01
04194 High-speed orientation

#5 HSVCM High-speed orientation speed command compensation is,
#6 HSORI The high-speed orientation function is, disabled (0) / enabled
(1)
04195 Speed clamp, Automatic parameter setting function
#2 SSTTRQ When the speed is 0, speed clamping is, enabled (0) /
disabled (1)
#4 SDTCHG In switching from high speed to low speed at output switching
time, the function for switching based on the speed detection
signal SDT set to 1 is, disabled (0) / enabled (1)
#7 PRLOAD Automatic parameter setting is, not performed (0) / performed
(1)
04196 Maximum motor speed [min-1]
04197 Speed arrival detection level [0.1%]
04198 Speed detection level [0.1%]
7
04199 Zero speed detection level [0.01%]
04200 Limited torque [%]
04202 Limited output pattern
04203 Output limit [%]
04204 Stop position of position coder method orientation
04205 Spindle orientation speed [min-1]
04206 Velocity loop proportional gain on velocity control mode(High)
04207 Velocity loop proportional gain on velocity control mode (Low)
04208 Velocity loop proportional gain on orientation (High)
04209 Velocity loop proportional gain on orientation (Low)
04210 Velocity loop proportional gain on servo mode (High)
04211 Velocity loop proportional gain on servo mode (Low)
04212 Velocity loop integral gain on velocity control mode (common
to High and Low)
04213 Velocity loop integral gain on orientation (common to High
and Low)
synchronous control (common to High and Low)
04215 Primary delay time constant in dual position feedback
04216 Motor speed per spindle revolution (High) [×100]
04217 Motor speed per spindle revolution (Low) [×100]
04218 Position gain on orientation (High)
04219 Position gain on orientation (Low)
04220 Standard orientation: Ordinary orientation: Rate of change in
position gain upon completion of orientation [%]
High-speed orientation: Acceleration limitation ratio at
deceleration time
04221 Position gain on servo mode (High)
04222 Position gain on servo mode (Low)
04223 Grid shift on servo mode
04224 Maximum amplitude in dual position feedback
04225 Dual position feedback zero width
04226 Detection level for orientation completion signal
04227 Ordinary orientation: Motor speed limit value on orientation
[%]
High-speed orientation: Not used
04228 Orientation stop position shift
04229 MS signal constant
296
7 PARAMETERS
04230 MS signal gain adjustment
04231 Induction (HRV)(H): Regenerative power limit for high-speed
04232 Delay time until motor power is cut off [10ms]
04233 Setting of acc./dec. time [s]
04234 Spindle load monitor observer gain 1
04237 Induction (HRV): Motor voltage on orientation
04238 Induction (HRV): Motor voltage on servo mode
return on servo mode [%]
04240 Feed-forward coefficient [%]
spindle (High)
spindle (High)
spindle (Low)
spindle (Low)
04248 Spindle load monitor torque constant
no-load
gain is zero
coefficient
voltage coefficient
constant) [0.5ms]
04275 Induction (HRV): Maximum torque curve compensation
coefficient
297
B-63947EN/01

tapping
04278 Time constant for velocity detecting filter
time constant/excitation current change time constant
04285 Induction (HRV): Motor voltage on servo mode
7
no-load
gain is zero
coefficient
voltage coefficient
constant) [0.5ms]
04304 Induction (HRV): Compensation coefficient between the
specification and true base/maximum torque curve
compensation coefficient
tapping
time constant/excitation current change time constant
04309 Motor model code
04310 Motor overheat detect level (2-word)
04320 Motor acceleration at deceleration time (High) [10min-1/s]
04321 Motor acceleration at deceleration time (Medium High)
[10min-1/s]
04322 Motor acceleration at deceleration time (Medium Low)
[10min-1/s]
298
7 PARAMETERS
04323 Motor acceleration at deceleration time (Low) [10min-1/s]
04324 Motor acceleration at deceleration time (High) [10min-1/s]
04325 Motor acceleration at deceleration time (Low) [10min-1/s]
04326 Acceleration limitation start speed at deceleration time (High)
[min-1]
04327 Acceleration limitation start speed at deceleration time (High)
[min-1]
04328 Command multiplication for spindle orientation by position
coder
04329 Command multiplication for spindle orientation by position
coder
04330 Acceleration limitation start speed at deceleration time (Low)
[min-1]
04331 Acceleration limitation start speed at deceleration time (Low)
[min-1]
04334 Number of motor sensor arbitrary teeth
04335 Number of motor sensor arbitrary teeth
04336 Switching point used for an acc./dec. time constant used for
spindle synchronous control [min-1]
04340 Bell-shaped acc./dec. time constant during spindle
synchronous control [ms]
04341 Unexpected disturbance torque detection level [0.01%]
04344 Advanced preview feed-forward coefficient [0.01%]
04345 Serial spindle motor detection speed
04346 Incomplete integration factor
04347 Master-slave speed difference state signal output setting
[min-1]
04349 Temperature monitoring time constant
04351 Current detection offset compensation
04352 Valid feed-forward range, EGB
#1 PKHALW The load meter output peak hold
#4 FFALWS Feed-forward is enabled, only in
cutting feed (0) / at all times (1)
#6 SLAVE Spindle-amplifier communication is, Tandem slave axis
disabled (0) / slave axis (1) specification when
parameter (No. 4015#3) is
set to 1
#7 MASTER Spindle-amplifier communication is, Tandem master specification
disabled (0) / master axis (1) when parameter (No.
4015#3) is set to 1
04353 Tandem control
#1 VFBAV For the velocity feedback signal in
the torque tandem mode, only the
motor speed on the master side is
used (0) / the average speed of the
master and slave is used (1)
#2 RVSVC2 In the torque tandem mode, the Functions in combination
master motor and slave motor with parameter (No.
rotate, in the same direction (0) / in 4009#1).
the opposite directions (1)
#5 CSPTRE The position data transfer function
for Cs origin establishment is,
04354 Excessive semi-closed loop/closed loop position error alarm
(alarm 61) detection level
04355 Motor sensor signal amplitude ratio compensation
299
B-63947EN/01
04356 Motor sensor signal phase difference compensation

04357 Spindle sensor signal amplitude ratio compensation
04358 Spindle sensor signal phase difference compensation
04360 Preload value
04361 Number of spindle sensor arbitrary teeth
04362 Load meter compensation 1
04369 Spindle synchronous orientation deceleration coefficient [%]
04372 Safety limit speed 1 for each spindle [min-1]
04376 Load meter compensation 1 7
04386 Spindle EGB: master side detector pulse count
04387 Spindle EGB: synchronous ratio numerator
04388 Spindle EGB: synchronous ratio denominator
04391 Resonance elimination filter 1: attenuation center frequency
[Hz]
04392 Resonance elimination filter 1: attenuation bandwidth [Hz]
04393 Resonance elimination filter 1: damping [%]
04394 One-rotation signal detection
#2 ZPHDTC The lower limit of one-rotation signal detection speed is,
spindle speed 10 min-1 or more (0) / not applicable (1)
#5 A21DEN Detection of the spindle sensor polarity setting error alarm
(alarm 21) is, enabled (0) / disabled (1)
04395 Disturbance function setting
#2 ESYEGB The simple spindle EGB function is, disabled (0) / enabled (1)
#3 PRIMED Parameters transferred from the CNC are, enabled one
second later (0) / enabled immediately (1)
#6 DTQTRG The disturbance input function is, disabled (0) / enabled (1)
#7 DTQFNC When disturbance is input, a transition from 0 to 1 starts
measurement and a transition from 1 to 0 ends measurement.
04398 Pole detect method
#2 SELMET The pole detect method is based on, DC activation (0) /
automatic mode (1)
#3 WNDTDM The twin-drive function is, not provided (0) / provided (1)
#6 A130DN In torque tandem mode, a speed polarity error (alarm 130) is,
detected (0) / not detected (1)
04399
#1 CTLSTP When the safety speed exceeded alarm (alarm 69) is
detected, a free-run stop occurs (0) / a controlled stop occurs
(1)
04406 Acceleration/deceleration time constant for reference position
return in Cs contour control [ms]
04409 Feed-forward timing adjustment coefficient
04410 Disturbance input function: measurement start frequency [Hz]
04411 Disturbance input function: measurement end frequency [Hz]
300
7 PARAMETERS
04412 Disturbance input function: measurement frequency interval
[Hz]
04413 Disturbance input function: number of measurements per
frequency
04414 Disturbance input function: disturbance torque command
amplitude [%]
04415 Disturbance input function: motor speed command for
measurement [min-1]
[Hz]
[Hz]
[Hz]
04448 Spindle stop judgment level [min-1]
04449 Direction detection current/polarity determination current for
automatic mode pole position detection
04450 Allowable travel distance magnification/velocity feedback
threshold for automatic mode pole position detection
04467
#2 ZPHDTC Setting of the detection lower limit of the one-rotation signal
#5 A21DEN Whether to detect the alarm (alarm 21) related to spindle
sensor polarity erroneous setting
04468
#6 DTQTRG Triggering of the disturbance input function (vibration
application function)
#7 DTQFNC Setting of the disturbance input function (vibration application
function)
04481 Feed-forward timing adjustment coefficient
04498 Spindle EGB master side: denominator of arbitrary gear ratio
between motor sensor and spindle
04499 Spindle EGB master side: numerator of arbitrary gear ratio
between motor sensor and spindle
04500 Denominator of arbitrary gear ratio between spindle sensor
and spindle (High)
04501 Numerator of arbitrary gear ratio between spindle sensor and
spindle (High)
04502 Denominator of arbitrary gear ratio between spindle sensor
and spindle (Low)
04503 Numerator of arbitrary gear ratio between spindle sensor and
spindle (Low)
04508 Rate of change in acceleration at soft start/stop [min-1/s2]
04515 Excessive speed deviation alarm detection level on spindle
synchronous control [min-1]
04516 Excessive positional deviation alarm detection level on
spindle synchronous control
04520 Primary delay time constant in dual position feedback
[for servo mode]
301
B-63947EN/01
04521 Maximum amplitude in dual position feedback

[for servo mode]
04522 Dual position feedback zero width [for servo mode]
04523 Excessive semi-closed loop/closed loop position error alarm
(alarm 61) detection level [for servo mode]
7.2.17 Spindle Control 2

04800 Spindle synchronous control, Simple spindle
synchronous control
#5 SCB The master axis/slave axis combination in spindle
synchronous control follows, the setting of parameter
(No. 3704#4) (0) / compatibility with the conventional
16TT system (1)
#6 EPZ If the parking signal is switched in Cs contour control
during simple spindle synchronous control when a
reference position is already established, the reference
position establishment state is, continued (0) / canceled 7
(1)
#7 SPK The parking signals used for simple spindle
synchronous control are, G122#6 and #7 (0) / G031#6
and #7 (1)
04801 Spindle rotation direction
#0 SND In spindle synchronous control, each spindle motor
rotates, in the same direction as the sign of the
command (0) / in the direction opposite to the sign of
the command (1)
04810 Error pulse between two spindles when synchronizing
phases in the spindle synchronization control mode
04811 Allowable error count for the error pulses between two
spindles in the spindle synchronization control mode
04821 Master axis of each slave spindle under simple PRM
synchronous spindle control 3704#5
04826 Allowable error count for the error pulses between two F043#0-#3
spindles in the simple synchronization spindle control F044#4
mode
04831 Master axis of each slave spindle under spindle PRM
synchronous control 3704#4
04832 Master axis (logical spindle number) of each slave
spindle in spindle synchronous control
04900 Spindle fluctuation detection
#0 FLR The unit of an allowable ratio and fluctuation ratio set by
parameter (No. 4911) and (No. 4912) is, 1% (0) / 0.1%
(1)
#7 FDT Spindle speed fluctuation detect is started, when the set
spindle speed range is reached or parameter (No.
4914) is satisfied (0) / only when parameter (No. 4914)
is satisfied (1)
04911 Allowable speed ratio (q) used to assume that the PRM4900
spindle has reached a specified speed
04912 Spindle variation ratio (r) for not issuing a spindle speed PRM4900
fluctuation detection alarm
04913 Spindle speed fluctuation width (i) for not issuing a
spindle speed fluctuation detection alarm [min-1]
04914 Time (p) from the change of a specified speed until
spindle speed fluctuation detection is started [ms]
04950 Spindle positioning
#0 IOR Resetting the system in the spindle positioning mode,
does not release the mode (0) / releases the mode (1)
#1 IDM The direction of spindle positioning using an M code is,
positive (0) / negative (1)
#2 ISZ When an M code for spindle positioning is specified,
spindle orientation is performed (0) / only switching to
the spindle positioning mode is performed (1)
302
7 PARAMETERS
#5 TRV The rotation direction of spindle positioning is, not
reversed (0) / reversed (1)
#6 ESI The unit of rapid traverse rate on the spindle positioning
axis is, not increased by a factor of 10 (0) / increased by
a factor of 10 (1)
#7 IMB Half-fixed angle positioning based on M codes uses,
specification A (0) / specification B (1)
04959 Spindle positioning <Axis>
#0 DMD A machine coordinate on the spindle positioning axis is PRM
displayed in, degrees (0) / pulses (1) 4950#0=1
04960 M code specifying the spindle orientation
04961 M code releasing the spindle positioning mode
04962 M code for specifying a spindle positioning angle PRM
4963,4964
04963 Basic angle for half-fixed angle positioning [deg]
04964 Number of M codes for specifying a spindle positioning PRM4962
angle
04970 Position gain
04971 Position gain multiplier (1st stage)
04972 Position gain multiplier (2nd stage)
04973 Position gain multiplier (3rd stage)
04974 Position gain multiplier (4th stage)
7.2.18 Tool Compensation

05000 Tool compensation
#0 SBK With a block created internally for tool radius and tool
nose radius compensation, the single block mode is,
#1 MOF If the tool length compensation shift type (parameter
TOS (No. 5006#6) = 1) is used, and a tool length
compensation amount change is made in the tool length
compensation mode and block look-ahead state,
compensation for the changed amount is performed as
move type (0) / compensation for the changed amount
is not performed until a tool length compensation
command (offset number) and an absolute command
for the compensation axis are specified (1)
#4 ASG When tool compensation memory B/C (M series) or the
tool geometry/wear compensation function (T series) is
valid, the compensation amount to be modified by the
active offset value modification function based on
manual feed is, geometry compensation value (0) / wear
compensation value (1)
#0 TLC Selection of tool length compensation type M series
#1 TLB TLB TLC Type
0 0 Tool length compensation A
1 0 Tool length compensation B
- 1 Tool length compensation C
#3 TAL When two or more axes are offset in tool length M series
compensation C, an alarm is issued (0) / no alarm is
issued (1)
#4 EVR When a tool compensation value change is made in tool M series
radius and tool nose radius compensation, the change
is enabled starting from, the block where the next D or H
code is specified (0) / the block where buffering is next
performed (1)
#6 EVO If a tool compensation value modification is made for
tool length compensation A or B, the new value
becomes valid, in the block where the next G43, G44 or
H code is specified (0) / in the block where buffering is
next performed (1)
303
B-63947EN/01
05002 Tool offset, Tool geometry/wear compensation T series

#1 LGN The geometry compensation number of tool offset is, PRM5028
the same as the wear compensation number (0) / tool
selection number (1)
#2 LWT Tool wear compensation is performed by, moving the
tool (0) / shifting the coordinate system (1)
#4 LGT Tool geometry compensation is performed by, shifting
the coordinate system (0) / moving the tool (1)
#5 LGC When tool geometry compensation based on coordinate
system shifting is specified with offset number 0, the
compensation is, not canceled (0) / canceled (1)
#6 LWM Tool offset operation based on tool movement is
performed, in a block where a T code is specified (0) /
together with a command for movement along an axis
(1)
#7 WNP The imaginary tool tip number is, geometry
compensation number (0) / wear compensation number
(1) 7
05003 Tool radius compensation start-up/reset
#0 SUP Start-up/cancellation type of tool radius and tool noise
radius compensation
#1 SUV SUV SUP Type
0 0 Type A
0 1 Type B
1 - Type C
#6 LVK Tool length compensation vector is, canceled by reset
(0) / not canceled by reset (1)
#7 TGC Tool geometry compensation based on coordinate T series
system shifting is, not canceled by reset (0) / canceled
by reset (1)
05004 Tool offset, Tool radius and tool nose radius
compensation
#1 ORC A tool offset value is set by, diameter value (0) / radius T series
value (1) PRM
1006#3
#2 ODI A tool radius and tool nose radius compensation value M series
is set by, radius value (0) / diameter value (1)
#3 TS1 For touch sensor contact detection with the function for T series
direct input of offset value measured B, four-contact
input is used (0) / one-contact input is used (1)
05005 Tool offset value input
#0 CNI On the offset screen, Y-axis offset screen, and macro T series
screen, the soft key [INP.C] is, used (0) / not used (1)
#2 PRC For direct input of a tool offset value or workpiece T series
coordinate system shift amount, the PRC signal is not
used (0) / the PRC signal is used (1)
#5 QNI When the tool measurement function or the function for
direct input of offset value measured B is used, a tool
offset number is selected by, MDI key operation (0) /
PMC signal (1)
05006 Tool offset, Tool length offset
#1 TGC If a T code is specified in a block where G50, G04, or T series
G10 is specified, no alarm is issued (0) / the alarm
(PS0245) is issued (1)
#3 LVC Tool offset based on tool movement and wear T series
compensation based on coordinate system shifting are,
not canceled by reset (0) / canceled by reset (1)
#6 TOS Tool length compensation is performed by, moving the
tool on an axis (0) / shifting the coordinate system (1)
05007 Tool length measurement, Workpiece origin offset
measurement, 3-dimensional coordinate system
conversion
#0 TC2 Tool change position of the tool changer M series
304
7 PARAMETERS
#1 TC3 TC3 TC2 Tool change position PRM
0 0 1st reference position 1240-1243
0 1 2nd reference position
1 0 3rd reference position
1 1 4th reference position
#2 TMA Tool length measurement is enabled, along the Z-axis M series
only (0) / along each axis (1) PRM1022
#3 WMA Surface-based measurement of a workpiece origin M series
offset is enabled, along the Z-axis only (0) / along each
axis (1)
#4 WMH Hole-based measurement of a workpiece origin offset M series
value is, disabled (0) / enabled (1)
#5 WMC An axis for measurement of a workpiece origin offset M series
value is selected by, entering the axis name (0) / using PRM
the cursor (1) 5007#3=1
#6 3OC If tool length compensation is not canceled before ALM
3-dimensional coordinate system conversion is PS0049
specified, no alarm is issued (0) / an alarm is issued (1)
#7 3OF If commands for 3-dimensional coordinate system ALM
conversion and for tool length compensation are not PS0049
nested with each other, no alarm is issued (0) / an alarm
is issued (1)
05008 Tool radius and tool nose radius compensation
#1 CNC Interference check during tool radius and tool noise PRM
radius compensation 19607#5
#3 CNV CNV CNC Type of check
0 0 Direction and arc angle check
0 1 Arc angle check only
1 - Interference check disabled
#4 MCR If tool radius and tool nose radius compensation is ALM
specified in the MDI mode, no alarm is issued (0) / an PS5257
alarm is issued (1)
05009 Function for direct input of offset value measured B,
Imaginary tool tip direction
#0 GSC When the function for direct input of offset value T series
measured B is used, an offset write input signal is input PRM
from, machine side (0) / PMC side (1) 3003#3
#4 TSD When the function for direct input of offset value T series
measured B is used, the travel direction judgment PRM
specification is, invalid (0) / valid (1) 5004#3=0
#5 TIP The imaginary tool tip direction is, not used (0) / used (1)
05010 Limit for ignoring the small movement resulting from tool
radius and tool nose radius compensation
05011 Constant denominator for 3-dimensional tool
compensation or tool length compensation in a specified
direction
05013 Maximum value of tool wear compensation PRM
5042#0 - 3
05014 Maximum value of incremental input for tool wear PRM
compensation 5042#0 - 3
05015 Distance to X-axis + contact surface of touch sensor 1 T series
(X1P)
05016 Distance to X-axis - contact surface of touch sensor 1 T series
(X1M)
05017 Distance to Z-axis + contact surface of touch sensor 1 T series
(Z1P)
05018 Distance to Z-axis - contact surface of touch sensor 1 T series
(Z1M)
05020 Tool offset number used with the function for direct inputT series
of offset value measured B PRM
5005#0
05021 Number of interpolation cycles of pulses stored until the T series
tool is about to touch the touch sensor PRM
5004#3=1
305
B-63947EN/01
05022 Distance (L) from reference tool tip position to the <Axis>
reference measurement surface M series
05024 Number of tool compensation values PRM5029
05028 Number of digits of an offset number used with a T code T series
command PRM3032
05029 Number of tool compensation value memories common PRM5024
to paths
05032 Direction of tool offset B M series
05033 Tool offset B function M series
#0 GOB The tool offset B function (for the gas stopper) is,
05040 Automatic tool change
#0 OWD When a tool offset value is set based on radius T series
programming, both geometry and wear compensation PRM
values are based on radius programming (0) / geometry 5004#1=1
compensation is based on radius programming and
wear compensation is based on diameter programming 7
for an axis based on diameter programming (1)
#2 MOF As the DI/DO signals used with the active offset value
modification function based on manual feed, G297#4 to
#6 and F297#5 are used (0) / G203#4 to #6 and F199#5
are used (1)
#3 TCT The tool change method is based on, turret rotation (0) / T series
automatic tool changer (1)
#4 TLG When the automatic tool changer is used, tool offset T series
operation is specified by, G43.7 (0) / G43 (1)
#6 NOY The Y-axis offset function is, used (0) / not used (1) T series
#7 NO4 The 4th-axis offset function is, used (0) / not used (1) T series
05041 Active offset value modification function based on
manual feed
#0 ACR When the active offset value modification mode based
on manual feed is selected in the reset state or cleared
state, the tool offset value is, changeable (0) / not
changeable (1)
#6 AON If a change is made to a tool offset value (or tool length PRM
compensation value used with tool length compensation 5001#6=0
A/B in the case of the M series) with the active offset
value modification function based on manual feed, the
change becomes effective, starting with the block
specifying the next G43, G44 or H code (M series) or
the block specifying the next T code (T series) (0) /
starting with the next block to be buffered (1)
#7 NM2 If overcutting can occur during tool offsetting because a ALM
block specifying no movement is specified, no alarm is PS0041
issued (0) / an alarm is issued (1)
05042 Tool offset value
#0 OFA OFE OFD OFC OFA Unit (mm) Valid data range (mm)
#1 OFC 0 0 0 1 0.01 ±9999.99
#2 OFD 0 0 0 0 0.001 ±9999.999
#3 OFE 0 0 1 0 0.0001 ±9999.9999
0 1 0 0 0.00001 ±9999.99999
1 0 0 0 0.000001 ±999.999999
OFE OFD OFC OFA Unit (inch) Valid data range (inch)
0 0 0 1 0.001 ±999.999
0 0 0 0 0.0001 ±999.9999
0 0 1 0 0.00001 ±999.99999
0 1 0 0 0.000001 ±999.999999
1 0 0 0 0.0000001 ±99.9999999
05043 Axis number for which the Y-axis offset function is used T series
05044 Axis number for which the 4th-axis offset function is T series
used PRM
5004#7
306
7 PARAMETERS
05051 Tool setter function for one-turret/two-spindle lathes T series
#0 2NR When the tool setter function for one-turret/two-spindle
lathes is used, one touch sensor is used (0) / two touch
sensors are used (1)
#1 2AT When a workpiece coordinate system shift amount is
set in the workpiece coordinate system memory with the
tool setter function for one-turret/two-spindle lathes, a
setting is made at the current cursor position (0) / an
automatic selection is made (1)
05053 Tool compensation number shift amount for the T series
one-turret/two-spindle tool setter function PRM5024
05054 Workpiece coordinate system memory for spindle 1 T series
05055 Workpiece coordinate system memory for spindle 2 PRM
5051#1=1
05056 Distance to X-axis + contact surface of touch sensor 2 T series
(X2P)
05057 Distance to X-axis - contact surface of touch sensor 2 T series
(X2M)
05058 Distance to Z-axis + contact surface of touch sensor 2 T series
(Z2P)
05059 Distance to Z-axis - contact surface of touch sensor 2 T series
(Z2M)
05071 Axis number of the 1st axis of the compensation plane M series
in grinding-wheel wear compensation
05072 Axis number of the 2nd axis of the compensation plane M series
in grinding-wheel wear compensation
05081 Coordinate of the 1st axis of compensation center 1 in M series
grinding-wheel wear compensation
05082 Coordinate of the 2nd axis of compensation center 1 in M series
7.2.19 Canned Cycle

05101 Canned cycle
#0 FXY The drilling axis in the drilling canned cycle or the cutting
axis in the grinding canned cycle is, Z-axis always in the
drilling canned cycle or X-axis always in the grinding
canned cycle (M series), Y-axis in the case of G75 and
G77, or Z-axis in the case of G78 and G79 (T series) (0)
/ axis selected by the program (1)
#1 EXC G81 specifies, drilling canned cycle (0) / external
operation command (1)
#2 RTR G83 and G87 specify, high-speed peck drilling cycle (0) / T series
peck drilling cycle (1)
#7 M5B In drilling canned cycles G76 and G87, M05 is output M series
before spindle orientation execution (0) / M05 is not
output before spindle orientation execution (1)
05102 Format for FS15, Canned cycle T series
#2 QSR Before a multiple repetitive turning canned cycle (G70 to
G73) is started, whether address Q is present is, not
checked (0) / checked (1)
#3 F16 When the Series 15 format is specified, a drilling canned PRM
cycle is specified using, Series 15 format (0) / Series 16 0001#0=1
format (1)
307
B-63947EN/01
#6 RAB When a drilling canned cycle using the Series 15 format PRM
is specified, address R, specifies an incremental 0001#0=1
command (0) / specifies an absolute command with G 5102#3=0
code system A or follows G90 and G91 with G code 3401#6,#7
system B or C (1)
#7 RDI When a drilling canned cycle using the Series 15 format PRM
is specified, address R is based on, radius programming 0001#0=1
(0) / diameter/radius programming of the drilling axis (1) 5102#3=0
1006#3
05103 Format for FS15, Canned cycle
#0 SIJ When the Series 15 format is used, a shift value for the M series
drilling canned cycle G76 or G87 is specified by, address PRM
Q (0) / address I, J, or K (1) 0001#0=1
5148
#2 DCY When an axis (different from the drilling axis) PRM
perpendicular to the positioning plane is specified in a 5101#0=1
drilling canned cycle, the drilling axis is, the specified
axis (0) / the axis specified in the block where the G code 7
is specified (1)
#3 PNA When a plane where no axis is present is specified in a T series
drilling canned cycle using the Series 15 format, an PRM
alarm is issued (0) / no alarm is issued (1) 0001#0=1
5102#3=0
#6 TCZ In a tapping cycle (excluding rigid tapping), a check for PRM
zero accumulated pulse is, not made (0) / made (1) 2005#1
05104 Canned cycle
#2 FCK In a multiple repetitive turning canned cycle (G71/G72), T series
the machining profile is, not checked (0) / checked (1)
05105 Canned cycle
#0 SBC In a drilling canned cycle, chamfer cycle, or corner
rounding cycle, a single block stop is, not performed (0) /
performed (1)
#1 RF1 In a multiple repetitive turning canned cycle (G71/G72) T series
of type I, roughing is, performed (0) / not performed (1) PRM
0001#0=1
#2 RF2 In a multiple repetitive turning canned cycle (G71/G72) T series
of type II, roughing is, performed (0) / not performed (1) PRM
0001#0=1
#3 M5T When the rotation direction of the spindle is reversed in a
tapping cycle, M05 is, output before M04 or M03 (0) / not
output before M04 or M03 (1)
#4 K0D When K0 is specified in a drilling canned cycle (G80 to T series
G89), drilling data storage operation only is performed
(0) / one drilling operation is performed (1)
#5 TFA When a canned cycle is specified during tool center ALM
point control or during tool length compensation in the PS5424
tool axis direction, the rotary axis position is, not
checked (0) / checked (1)
#6 GIJ If the signs of I, J, and K do not match when a grinding ALM
canned cycle for M series is executed, an alarm is PS0455
issued (0) / operation compatible with the FS16i is
performed (1)
05106 Canned cycle G code
#0 GFX When a multiple repetitive turning canned cycle and
grinding canned cycle are enabled, the specification of
G71 to G74 is handled as, multiple repetitive turning
canned cycle (0) / grinding canned cycle (1)
05110 M code for C-axis clamping in a drilling canned cycle T series
05111 Dwell time when C-axis unclamping is specified in T series
drilling canned cycle [ms] PRM
1013#0-#3
05112 Spindle forward-rotation M code in drilling canned cycle T series
05113 Spindle reverse-rotation M code in drilling canned cycle T series
05114 Return value of high-speed peck drilling cycle
05115 Clearance value in a peck drilling cycle
308
7 PARAMETERS
05130 Cutting value (chamfering value) in thread cutting cycles T series
G92 and G76
05131 Cutting angle in thread cutting cycles G92 and G76 T series
[deg]
05132 Depth of cut in multiple repetitive turning canned cycles T series
G71 and G72 Radius
05133 Escape in multiple repetitive turning canned cycles G71 T series
and G72 Radius
05134 Clearance value in multiple repetitive turning canned T series
cycles G71 and G72 Radius
05135 Retraction distance in the multiple repetitive turning T series
canned cycle G73 (2nd axis on the plane) Radius
05136 Retraction distance in the multiple repetitive turning T series
canned cycle G73 (1st axis on the plane) Radius
05137 Number of divisions in the multiple repetitive turning T series
canned cycle G73 [cycle]
05139 Return in multiple repetitive turning canned cycles G74 T series
and G75 Radius
05140 Minimum depth of cut in the multiple repetitive turning T series
canned cycle G76 Radius
05141 Finishing allowance in the multiple repetitive turning T series
canned cycle G76 Radius
05142 Repetition count of final finishing in multiple repetitive T series
turning canned cycle G76 [cycle]
05143 Tool nose angle in multiple repetitive turning canned T series
cycle G76 [deg]
05145 Allowable value 1 in multiple repetitive turning canned T series
cycles G71 and G72 PRM
5104#2
05146 Allowable value 2 in multiple repetitive turning canned T series
cycles G71 and G72 PRM
5104#2
05148 Tool retraction direction after orientation in a fine boring M series
cycle or back boring cycle <Axis>
05149 Override for retraction in a boring cycle (G85 and G89)
[%]
05160 Small-hole peck drilling cycle
#1 OLS When an overload torque detection signal is received in
a small-hole peck drilling cycle, the feedrate and spindle
speed are, not changed (0) / changed (1)
#2 NOL When the depth of cut per action is satisfied although no
overload torque detection signal is received in a
small-hole peck drilling cycle, the feedrate and spindle
speed are, not changed (0) / changed (1)
#3 CYM When a subprogram call is specified in a block
specifying other commands in the canned cycle mode,
no alarm is issued (0) / an alarm is issued (1)
05163 M code that specifies the small-hole peck drilling cycle
mode
05164 Percentage of the spindle speed to be changed at the
start of the next advancing after an overload torque
detection signal is received [%]
S2=S1×d1÷100
S1: Spindle speed to be changed
S2: Spindle speed changed
d1: Value set in parameter No. 5164 [%]
05165 Percentage of the spindle speed to be changed at the
start of the next advancing when no overload torque
S2=S1×d2÷100
S1: Spindle speed to be changed
S2: Spindle speed changed
d2: Value set in parameter No. 5165 [%]
309
B-63947EN/01
05166 Percentage of the cutting feedrate to be changed at the

start of the next cutting after an overload torque
F2=F1×b1÷100
F1: Cutting feedrate to be changed
F2: Cutting feedrate changed
b1: Value set in parameter No. 5166 [%]
05167 Percentage of the cutting feedrate to be changed at the
start of the next cutting when no ovarload torque
F2=F1×b2÷100
F1: Cutting feedrate to be changed
F2: Cutting feedrate changed
05168 Lower limit of the percentage of the cutting feedrate in a
small-hole peck drilling cycle [%]
FL=F×b3÷100
F: Specified cutting feedrate 7
FL: Changed cutting feedrate
05170 Number of the macro variable to which to output the total
number of retractions during cutting
05171 Number of the macro variable to which to output the total
number of retractions because of the reception of an
overload torque detection signal
05172 Feedrate of retraction to point R when no address I is
specified [mm/min]
05173 Feedrate of advancing to the position just before the
bottom of a hole when no address I is specified[mm/min]
05174 Clearance in a small-hole peck drilling cycle
05176 Grinding axis number in traverse grinding cycle (G71) ALM
execution (T series)/grinding axis number in plunge PS0456
grinding cycle (G75) execution (M series)
05177 Grinding axis number in traverse direct constant-sized ALM
grinding cycle (G72) execution (T series)/grinding axis PS0456
number in plunge grinding cycle (G77) execution (M
series)
05178 Grinding axis number in oscillation grinding cycle (G73) ALM
execution (T series)/grinding axis number in continuous PS0456
feed plane grinding cycle (G78) execution (M series)
05179 Grinding axis number in oscillation direct constant-sized ALM
grinding cycle (G74) execution (T series)/grinding axis PS0456
number in intermittent feed plane grinding cycle (G79)
execution
05180 Dressing axis number in plunge grinding cycle G75 (M M series
series) ALM
05181 Dressing axis number in plunge direct constant-sized PS0456
grinding cycle G77 (M series)
05182 Dressing axis number in continuous feed plane grinding
cycle G78 (M series)
05183 Dressing axis number in intermittent feed plane grinding
cycle G79 (M series)
7.2.20 Rigid Tapping

05200 Rigid tapping
#0 G84 An M code specifying the rigid tapping mode is, used (0) PRM5210
/ not used (1)
#2 CRG When a rigid mode cancel command is executed, the
rigid mode is canceled, after the RGTAP signal is set to
0 (0) / before the RGTAP signal is set to 0 (1)
#3 SIG When gears are changed, the use of the SIND signal is,
not permitted (0) / permitted (1)
#4 DOV Override during extraction in rigid tapping is, disabled (0) PRM
/ enabled (1) 5211,5381
310
7 PARAMETERS
#5 PCP A high-speed peck tapping cycle is, used (0) / not used
(1)
#6 FHD During rigid tapping, feed hold and single block
operations are, disabled (0) / enabled (1)
#7 SRS To select a spindle used for rigid tapping in multi-spindle T series
control, the spindle selection signals (shared for
multi-spindle control) are used (0) / the rigid tapping
spindle selection signals (dedicated to rigid tapping) are
used (1)
05201 Rigid tapping, Override
#2 TDR For a cutting time constant in rigid tapping, the same PRM
parameter is used for cutting and extraction (0) / a 5261-5264
different parameter is used for each of cutting and 5271-5274
extraction (1)
#3 OVU The increment unit of override for rigid tapping extraction PRM5211
is, 1% (0) / 10% (1)
#4 OV3 Override programmed for extraction is, disabled (0) /
enabled (1)
05202 Rigid tapping
#0 ORI When rigid tapping is started, spindle orientation is, not PRM4073
#3 CHR Conventional rigid tapping is performed (0) /
interpolation type rigid tapping is performed (1)
#4 IRR At the time of movement from point I to point R in rigid PRM
tapping, the in-position width of point R is, dedicated to 5300,5302
rigid tapping (0) / normal in-position width (1) 5304,5306
1826
05203 Rigid tapping by the manual handle
#0 HRG Rigid tapping by the manual handle is, disabled (0) /
enabled (1)
#1 HRM When the tapping axis moves in the negative direction in
rigid tapping by the manual handle, the spindle rotates,
in the forward direction in the G84 mode and in the
reverse direction in the G74 mode (0) / in the reverse
direction in the G84 mode and in the forward direction in
the G74 mode (1)
#2 RFF In rigid tapping, feed forward is, disabled (0) / enabled Serial
(1)
#4 OVS In rigid tapping, override by the feedrate override select
signal and cancellation of override by the override cancel
signal are, disabled (0) / enabled (1)
#5 RBL As acc./dec. for rigid tapping cutting feed, linear
acc./dec. is used (0) / bell-shaped acc./dec. is used (1)
05210 Rigid tapping mode specification M code
05211 Override value during rigid tapping extraction [%] PRM
5200#4=1
5201#3
05213 Return in peck rigid tapping cycle PRM
5200#5
05214 Setting of an allowable rigid tapping synchronization
error range [Detection unit]
05221 Number of gear teeth on the spindle side in rigid tapping
(1st gear)
(2nd gear)
(3rd gear)
05224 Number of gear teeth on the spindle side in rigid tapping T series
(4th gear)
05231 Number of gear teeth on the position coder side in rigid
tapping (1st gear)
tapping (2nd gear)
tapping (3rd gear)
311
B-63947EN/01
05234 Number of gear teeth on the position coder side in rigid T series
tapping (4th gear)
05241 Maximum spindle speed in rigid tapping (1st gear)
[min-1]
05242 Maximum spindle speed in rigid tapping (2nd gear)
[min-1]
05243 Maximum spindle speed in rigid tapping (3rd gear)
[min-1]
05244 Maximum spindle speed in rigid tapping (4th gear) T series
[min-1]
05261 Time constant for acc./dec. in rigid tapping for each gear
(1st gear) [ms]
(2nd gear) [ms]
(3rd gear) [ms]
05264 Time constant for acc./dec. in rigid tapping for each gear T series 7
(4th gear) [ms]
05271 Time constant for acc./dec. in rigid tapping extraction
(1st gear) [ms]
(2nd gear) [ms]
(3rd gear) [ms]
05274 Time constant for acc./dec. in rigid tapping extraction T series
(4th gear) [ms]
05280 Position control loop gain for the spindle and tapping
axis in rigid tapping (common to gears) [0.01/sec]
axis in rigid tapping (1st gear) [0.01/sec]
axis in rigid tapping (2nd gear) [0.01/sec]
axis in rigid tapping (3rd gear) [0.01/sec]
05284 Position control loop gain for the spindle and tapping T series
axis in rigid tapping (4th gear) [0.01/sec]
05291 Loop gain multiplier for the spindle in rigid tapping
(1st gear)
(2nd gear)
(3rd gear)
05294 Loop gain multiplier for the spindle in rigid tapping T series
(4th gear)
05300 Tapping axis in-position width in rigid tapping <Axis>
(1st spindle) [Detection unit]
05301 Spindle in-position width in rigid tapping [Detection unit]
(2nd spindle) [Detection unit]
(3rd spindle) [Detection unit]
(4th spindle) [Detection unit]
05310 Positional deviation limit imposed during tapping axis <Axis>
movement in rigid tapping (1st spindle) [Detection unit]
05311 Limit value of spindle positioning deviation during
movement in rigid tapping [Detection unit]
05312 Positional deviation limit imposed while the tapping axis <Axis>
is stopped in rigid tapping (1st spindle) [Detection unit]
05313 Positional deviation limit imposed while the spindle is
stopped in rigid tapping [Detection unit]
05321 Spindle backlash in rigid tapping (1st-stage gear)
[Detection unit]
312
7 PARAMETERS
05322 Spindle backlash in rigid tapping (2nd-stage gear)
[Detection unit]
05323 Spindle backlash in rigid tapping (3rd-stage gear)
[Detection unit]
05324 Spindle backlash in rigid tapping (4th-stage gear) T series
[Detection unit]
movement in rigid tapping (2nd spindle) [Detection unit]
is stopped in rigid tapping (2nd spindle) [Detection unit]
movement in rigid tapping (3rd spindle) [Detection unit]
is stopped in rigid tapping (3rd spindle) [Detection unit]
movement in rigid tapping (4th spindle) [Detection unit]
is stopped in rigid tapping (4th spindle) [Detection unit]
05365 Bell-shaped acc./dec. time constant in rigid tapping
(1st-stage gear) [ms]
(2nd-stage gear) [ms]
(3rd-stage gear) [ms]
05368 Bell-shaped acc./dec. time constant in rigid tapping T series
(4th-stage gear) [ms]
05381 Override value during rigid tapping return [%] PRM
5200#4=1
05382 Amount of return for rigid tapping return
7.2.21 Scaling/Coordinate Rotation

05400 Coordinate system rotation, Scaling
#0 RIN A command (R) for angle of coordinate system rotation
(G68) is, specified by an absolute method (0) / based on
G90 and G91 (1)
#2 D3R The 3-dimensional coordinate system conversion mode
can be canceled by, G69(M), G69.1(T), a reset, or a
CNC reset through signal input from the PMC (0) /
G69(M) or G69.1(T) only (1)
#5 LV3 During 3-dimensional coordinate system conversion,
system variables #100101 to #100132 (current position
coordinates) and #100151 to #100182 (skip coordinates)
are read, in the workpiece coordinate system (0) / in the
program coordinate system based on 3-dimensional
coordinate system conversion (1)
#6 XSC Axis-by-axis scaling is, disabled (0) / enabled (1) PRM
5401#0
#7 SCR The scaling magnification unit is, 0.00001 times (0) /
0.001 times (1)
05401 Axis-by-axis scaling <Axis>
#0 SCL Scaling on this axis is, disabled (0) / enabled (1) PRM
5400#6
05410 Rotation angle used when no coordinate system rotation
angle is specified [0.001 deg]
05411 Scaling (G51) magnification PRM
5400#6,#7
05412 Rapid traverse rate for a drilling cycle in 3-dimensional
coordinate system conversion mode
05421 Scaling magnification for each axis <Axis>
PRM
5400#6,#7
313
B-63947EN/01
7.2.22 Single Direction Positioning

05431 Single direction positioning
#0 MDL The code for single direction positioning (G60) is, one-shot G
code (group 00) (0) / modal G code (group 01) (1)
#1 PDI In the G60 mode, an in-position check at a stop position is,
not made (0) / made (1)
05440 Positioning direction and overrun distance in single direction <Axis>
positioning
7.2.23 Polar Coordinate Interpolation

05450 Polar coordinate interpolation
#0 PDI When the 2nd axis on the plane in the polar coordinate
interpolation mode is based on radius programming, radius
programming is used (0) / diameter programming is used (1)
#2 PLS The polar coordinate interpolation shift function is, not used (0)
/ used (1)
7
05460 Axis (linear axis) specification for polar coordinate interpolation
05461 Axis (rotary axis) specification for polar coordinate interpolation
05463 Automatic override tolerance ratio for polar coordinate
interpolation [%]
05464 Compensation for error on hypothetical axis of polar coordinate
interpolation
7.2.24 Normal Direction Control

05480 Number of the axis for controlling the normal direction
05481 Feedrate of rotation of the normal direction controlled axis <Axis>
[deg/min]
05482 Limit value concerning the rotation of the normal direction
controlled axis [deg]
05483 Limit value of movement that is executed at the normal
direction angle of a preceding block
05490 Axis number assigned to the torch control axis of each axis <Axis>
M series
7.2.25 Index Table

05500 Index table indexing
#0 DDP As the method for inputting a decimal point in a command PRM
for the index table indexing axis, the conventional method 3401#0
is used (0) / the calculator-type method is used (1)
#1 REL The position display of the index table indexing axis in the
relative coordinate system is, not rounded by one rotation
(0) / rounded by one rotation (1)
#2 ABS The position display of the index table indexing axis in the PRM
absolute coordinate system is, not rounded by one rotation 5500#3
(0) / rounded by one rotation (1)
#3 INC When the M code that specifies rotation in the negative PRM
direction is not set, rotation in the G90 mode is made, not 5511
in the shortcut direction (0) / in the shortcut direction (1)
#4 G90 A command for the index table indexing axis, follows G90
and G91 (0) / is an absolute command at all times (1)
#6 SIM When the same block includes a command for the index
table indexing axis and a command for another controlled
axis, the setting of parameter (No. 5502#2) is followed (0) /
the commands are executed (1)
#7 IDX Type of operation sequence of the index table indexing
axis is, type A (0) / type B (1)
#0 ITI The index table indexing function is, enabled (0) / disabled
(1)
#1 ISP Servo-off operation for an index axis at the time of
completion of clamping is, processed by the CNC (0) / not
processed by the CNC (1)
314
7 PARAMETERS
#0 IXS When the same block includes a command for the index
table indexing axis and a command for another controlled
axis, alarm PS1564 is issued (0) / the commands are
executed (1)
05510 Controlled axis number of the index table indexing axis
05511 M code that specifies rotation in the negative direction for PRM
index table indexing 5500#2
=1, #3
05512 Minimum positioning angle for the index table indexing axis
7.2.26 Involute Interpolation

05610 Limit of initial permissible error during involute interpolation
05620 Lower override limit in automatic feedrate control during
involute interpolation [%]
7.2.27 Exponential Interpolation

05630 Exponential interpolation
#0 SPN The amount of linear axis division in exponential PRM
interpolation is, specified with parameter (No. 5643) (0) / 5643
specified using address K in a block containing
G02.3/G03.3 (when address K is not specified, the value
set in parameter (No. 5643) is used) (1)
05641 Linear axis number subject to exponential interpolation
05642 Rotary axis number subject exponential interpolation
05643 Amount of linear axis division (span value) in exponential PRM
interpolation 5630#0
7.2.28 Flexible Synchronous Control

05660 Master axis number in flexible synchronous control (group A)
05661 Slave axis number in flexible synchronous control (group A)
05662 Master axis number in flexible synchronous control (group B)
05663 Slave axis number in flexible synchronous control (group B)
05664 Master axis number in flexible synchronous control (group C)
05665 Slave axis number in flexible synchronous control (group C)
05666 Master axis number in flexible synchronous control (group D)
05667 Slave axis number in flexible synchronous control (group D)
05668 Flexible synchronous control
#0 ACA For slave axes in flexible synchronous control group A, machine
coordinate updating is, performed (0) / not performed (1)
#1 ACB For slave axes in flexible synchronous control group B, machine
#2 ACC For slave axes in flexible synchronous control group C, machine
#3 ACD For slave axes in flexible synchronous control group D, machine
05670 M code for turning on the flexible synchronous control mode
(group A)
05671 M code for turning off the flexible synchronous control mode
(group A)
(group B)
(group B)
(group C)
(group C)
(group D)
(group D)
315
B-63947EN/01
05680 Numerator for determining the gear ratio for flexible synchronous
control (group A)
Gear ratio=q/(p×10k)
Numerator: q, Denominator: p, Denominator factor: k
05681 Denominator for determining the gear ratio for flexible
synchronous control (group A)
control (group B)
synchronous control (group B)
control (group C)
synchronous control (group C)
control (group D)
05687 Denominator for determining the gear ratio for flexible 7
synchronous control (group D)
05690 Exponent for the denominator for determining the gear ratio for
flexible synchronous control (group A)
flexible synchronous control (group B)
flexible synchronous control (group C)
flexible synchronous control (group D)
7.2.29 Straightness Compensation

05700 Straightness compensation
#2 SM2 When two or more moving axes are set using the same PRM
axis number, the valid parameter-set magnification used 13391 -
with the straightness compensation function is, the 13396
magnification for the 1st moving axis (0) / the magnification
for each moving axis (1)
05711 Straightness compensation: Axis number of moving axis 1
05721 Straightness compensation: Axis number of compensation
axis 1 for moving axis 1
05731 Straightness compensation: Compensation point number a
of moving axis 1
05732 Straightness compensation: Compensation point number b
of moving axis 1
05733 Straightness compensation: Compensation point number c
of moving axis 1
05734 Straightness compensation: Compensation point number d
of moving axis 1
of moving axis 2
of moving axis 2
316
7 PARAMETERS
of moving axis 2
of moving axis 2
of moving axis 3
of moving axis 3
of moving axis 3
of moving axis 3
05761 Compensation corresponding compensation point number
a of moving axis 1 [Detection unit]
b of moving axis 1 [Detection unit]
c of moving axis 1 [Detection unit]
d of moving axis 1 [Detection unit]
7.2.30 Inclination Compensation

05861 Inclination compensation: Compensation point number a for <Axis>
each axis
05862 Inclination compensation: Compensation point number b for <Axis>
each axis
05863 Inclination compensation: Compensation point number c for <Axis>
each axis
05864 Inclination compensation: Compensation point number d for <Axis>
each axis
05871 Inclination compensation: Compensation α at compensation <Axis>
point number a for each axis [Detection unit]
05872 Inclination compensation: Compensation β at compensation <Axis>
point number b for each axis [Detection unit]
05873 Inclination compensation: Compensation γ at compensation <Axis>
point number c for each axis [Detection unit]
05874 Inclination compensation: Compensation δ at compensation <Axis>
point number d for each axis [Detection unit]
7.2.31 Custom Macros

06000 Custom macros
#0 G67 If G67 is specified when the modal macro call ALM
(G66/G66.1) mode is not set, an alarm is issued (0) / G67 PS1100
is ignored (1)
#1 MGO When a GOTO statement is executed, a high-speed
branch to 20 sequence numbers executed from the start
of the program is, not made (0) / made (1)
317
B-63947EN/01
#2 HMC A custom macro is executed, at normal speed (0) / at high

speed (1)
#3 V15 As system variable numbers for tool offset values, the M series
standard system variable numbers for the Series 16 are
used (0) / the same system variable numbers as those
used for the Series 15 are used (1)
#4 HGO When a GOTO statement is executed, a high-speed
branch to the 30 sequence numbers immediately before
the executed statement is, not made (0) / made (1)
#5 SBM The custom macro statement, does not cause a single PRM
block stop (0) / causes a single block stop (1) 6000#7
#7 SBV The custom macro statement, does not cause a single PRM
block stop (0) / follows system variable #3003 (1) 6000#5
06001 Custom macros
#0 MIF The custom macro interface signals are based on,
standard specification (0) / extended specification (1)
#1 PRT For leading zeros at the time of data output using the
DPRNT command, spaces are output (0) / no data is 7
output (1)
#3 PV5 The output custom macro common variables are, #500 to
#549 (0) / #100 to #149 and #500 to #549 (1)
#4 CRO After completion of data output in ISO code with the
BPRNT or DPRNT command, only ”LF” is output (0) / ”LF”
and "CR” are output (1)
#5 TCS By using a T code, custom macros (subprograms) are,
not called (0) / called (1)
#6 CCV Common variables #100 to #149 cleared by power-off
are, cleared to <null> by a reset (0) / not cleared to <null>
by a reset (1)
06003 Custom macro interrupt
#1 MSK During a custom macro interrupt, absolute coordinates #5061 or
are, not set as skip coordinates (0) / set as skip later
coordinates (1)
#2 MIN When a custom macro is interrupted, the block currently
being executed is interrupted (0) / the end of the block
currently being executed is awaited (1)
#3 TSE The custom macro interrupt signal UINT is based on,
edge trigger method (0) / status trigger method (1)
#4 MPR The M code for enabling/disabling a custom macro
interrupt, is M96/M97 (0) / follows parameter No. 6033
and No. 6034 (1)
#5 MSB The local variable of the interrupt program is, of macro
type (0) / of subprogram type (1)
#7 MUS Interrupt-type custom macros are, not used (0) / used (1)
06004 Operation command, System variable
#0 NAT The results of the operation commands ATAN (with 2
arguments) and ASIN are, 0 to 360.0 (ATAN) and 270.0
to 0 to 90.0 (ASIN) (0) / -180.0 to 0 to 180.0 (ATAN) and
-90.0 to 0 to 90.0 (ASIN) (1)
#2 VHD With system variables #5121 to #5140, the tool offset T series
value in the block currently being executed is read (0) / an Tool
interrupt travel distance based on manual handle interrupt geometry
is read (1) / wear
compen-
sation
#5 D15 For reading or writing tool offset values for D code when M series
tool compensation memory C is used, the same system PRM
variables, #2401 to #2800, as used with the Series 15 6000#3
are, not used (0) / used (1)
06007 Subprogram call, Macro call
#0 DPG Calling a G code with a decimal point specified is,
#1 SCS Calling a subprogram with an S code is, disabled (0) /
enabled (1)
#2 BCS Calling a subprogram with the 2nd auxiliary function is,
318
7 PARAMETERS
#3 MGE Modal G code calling is performed, for each block (0) /
after movement (1)
#4 CVA Macro call arguments are passed, in the NC format
without modification (0) / after being converted to the
macro format (1)
#6 VER For the workpiece coordinates (#5041 - #5060, #100101 -
#100150) and system variables, acc./dec. and positional
deviations are, not considered (0) / considered (1)
06008 Operation command
#0 F16 The precision of operation results is based on, new
specification (0) / FS16i-compatible specification (1)
#1 MCA The alarm number displayed with a macro alarm using
system variable #3000 is, the number obtained by adding
3000 to the value assigned to #3000 (0) / the number
assigned to #3000 (1)
#2 DSM On the custom macro screen, the rewriting of a system
variable that can be specified on the left side with MDI
keys is, disabled (0) / enabled (1)
#3 KOP When the NC is reset in the state where the line is made
open by POPEN, communication continues with the line
left open (0)/communication stops with the line closed (1)
#4 ISO The code used to specify the bit patterns of codes that PRM
substitute for [, ], #, *, =, ?, @, &, and _ by using 6010-
parameters is, EIA (0) / ISO/ASCII (1) 6018
#5 ADD When the number of digits in the integer part, a, in the
format specification [a,b] of the DPRNT statement is less
than the number of digits in the integer part of an output
variable value, just the specified number of digits are
output (0) / an alarm for excessive digits is issued (1)
#6 GMP The calling of M, S, T, a 2nd auxiliary function code, or a
particular code during the calling of a G code, and the
calling of a G code during the calling of M, S, T, a 2nd
auxiliary function code, or a particular code are, not
allowed (0) / allowed (1)
#7 IJK For addresses I, J, and K specified as arguments,
argument specification I or II is automatically determined
(0) / argument specification I is used at all times (1)
06010 Code bit pattern “*”
#0 *0 The bit of EIA or ISO/ASCII code indicating * is, 0(0)/1(1) PRM
#1 *1 6008#4
#2 *2
#3 *3
#4 *4
#5 *5
#6 *6
#7 *7
06011 Code bit pattern “=”
#0 =0 The bit of EIA or ISO/ASCII code indicating = is, 0(0)/1(1) PRM
#1 =1 6008#4
#2 =2
#3 =3
#4 =4
#5 =5
#6 =6
#7 =7
06012 Code bit pattern “#”
#0 #0 The bit of EIA or ISO/ASCII code indicating # is, 0(0)/1(1) PRM
#1 #1 6008#4
#2 #2
#3 #3
#4 #4
#5 #5
#6 #6
#7 #7
319
B-63947EN/01
06013 Code bit pattern “[”

#0 [0 The bit of EIA or ISO/ASCII code indicating [ is, 0(0)/1(1) PRM
#1 [1 6008#4
#2 [2
#3 [3
#4 [4
#5 [5
#6 [6
#7 [7
06014 Code bit pattern “]”
#0 ]0 The bit of EIA or ISO/ASCII code indicating ] is, 0(0)/1(1) PRM
#1 ]1 6008#4
#2 ]2
#3 ]3
#4 ]4
#5 ]5
#6 ]6
#7 ]7
7
06015 Code bit pattern “?”
#0 ?0 The bit of EIA or ISO/ASCII code indicating ? is, 0(0)/1(1) PRM
#1 ?1 6008#4
#2 ?2
#3 ?3
#4 ?4
#5 ?5
#6 ?6
#7 ?7
06016 Code bit pattern “＠”
#0 ＠0 The bit of EIA or ISO/ASCII code indicating @ is, PRM
0(0)/1(1) 6008#4
#1 ＠1
#2 ＠2
#3 ＠3
#4 ＠4
#5 ＠5
#6 ＠6
#7 ＠7
06017 Code bit pattern “&”
#0 &0 The bit of EIA or ISO/ASCII code indicating & is, 0(0)/1(1) PRM
#1 &1 6008#4
#2 &2
#3 &3
#4 &4
#5 &5
#6 &6
#7 &7
06018 Code bit pattern “_”
#0 _0 The bit of EIA or ISO/ASCII code indicating _ is, 0(0)/1(1) PRM
#1 _1 6008#4
#2 _2
#3 _3
#4 _4
#5 _5
#6 _6
#7 _7
06019 Data output
#0 MCO When data is output, the real value of macro variable data
is, output simultaneously as a comment (0) / not output
simultaneously as a comment (1)
06030 M code to execute external device subprogram calls
06031 Start number of common variables to be protected among
the common variables (#500 to #999)
06032 End number of common variables to be protected among PRM
the common variables (#500 to #999) 3031
320
7 PARAMETERS
06033 M code that validates a custom macro interrupt PRM
06034 M code that invalidates a custom macro interrupt 6003#4
06036 Number of custom macro variables common to tool path
(for #100 to #199 (#499) )
06037 Number of custom macro variables common to tool path
(for #500 to #999)
06038 Start G code used to call a custom macro
06039 Start program number of a custom macro called by G
code
06040 Number of G codes used to call custom macros PRM
6007#3
6038,
6039
06041 Start G code with a decimal point used to call a custom
macro
06042 Start program number of a custom macro called by G
code with a decimal point
06043 Number of G codes with a decimal point used to call PRM
custom macros 6007#3
6041,
6042
06044 Start M code used to call a subprogram
06045 Start program number of a subprogram called by M code
06046 Number of M codes used to call subprograms (number of PRM
subprograms called by M codes) 6044,
6045
06047 Start M code used to call a custom macro
06048 Start program number of a custom macro called by M
code
06049 Number of M codes used to call custom macros (number PRM
of custom macros called by M codes) 6047,
6048
06050 G code that calls the custom macro of program No. 9010
06060 G code with a decimal point used to call the custom macro of
program No. 9040
program No. 9041
program No. 9042
program No. 9043
program No. 9044
program No. 9045
program No. 9046
program No. 9047
program No. 9048
program No. 9049
06071 M code used to call the subprogram of program No. 9001
321
B-63947EN/01

06080 M code used to call the custom macro of program No. 9020
06089 M code used to call the custom macro of program No. 9029 7
06090 ASCII code that calls the subprogram of program No. 9004
06091 ASCII code that calls the subprogram of program No. 9005
06095 Number of programs used with the one-touch macro call
function
06096 Start program number of programs used with the one-touch
macro call function
06101 Macro variable number initially displayed when pattern menu 1
is selected
is selected
is selected
is selected
is selected
is selected
is selected
is selected
is selected
06110 Macro variable number initially displayed when pattern menu
10 is selected
7.2.32 Skip Functions

06200 Parameters for skip functions
#0 GSK As a skip signal, the skip signal SKIPP is, invalid (0) /
valid (1)
#1 SK0 The skip signal SKIP and multi-step skip signals SKIP2
to SKIP8 are assumed to be input when these signals
are, set to 1 (0) / set to 0 (1)
#4 HSS For skip signal input, the skip function, does not use
high-speed skip signals (0) / uses high-speed skip
signals (1)
#5 SLS For skip signal input, the multi-step skip function, does PRM
not use high-speed skip signals (0) / uses high-speed 6201#4
skip signal (1)
#6 SRE When a high-speed skip signal is used, the signal is
assumed to be input, on the rising edge (0) / on the
falling edge (1)
#7 SKF Dry run, override, and automatic acc./dec. for the G31
skip command are, disabled (0) / enabled (1)
322
7 PARAMETERS
06201 High-speed skip, skip functions
#1 SEB When the skip function is used and a skip signal is
turned on, the accumulated pulses and positional
deviation due to acc./dec. are, not considered (0) /
considered and compensated (1)
#2 TSE When the torque limit skip command is specified, the
skip position held in a system variables from #5061 to
#5080 (#100151 to #100182) is, offset position that has
considered a servo delay (0) / position that does not
consider a servo delay (1)
#4 IGX When the high-speed skip function is used, SKIP,
SKIPP, and SKIP2 to SKIP8 are, enabled as skip
signals (0) / disabled as skip signals (1)
#5 CSE When the continuous high-speed skip command is
used, high-speed skip signals are assumed to be input,
on the rising edge or falling edge as set by parameter
(No. 6200#6) (0) / on both of the rising edge and falling
edge (1)
#7 SKPXE When the skip function is used, the skip signal SKIP is, PRM
enabled (0) / disabled (1) 6200#0
6401#4
06202 High-speed skip signal/multi-step skip signal selection
#0 1S1 As a high-speed skip signal, the HDI0 signal is, not used
(0) / used (1). Alternatively, for G31P1/G04Q1, the SKIP
signal is, not used (0) / used (1)
(0) / used (1). Alternatively, for G31P1/G04Q1, the
SKIP2 signal is, not used (0) / used (1)
06203 Multi-step skip signal selection
#0 2S1 For G31P2/G04Q2, the SKIP signal is, not used (0) / used (1)
#1 2S2 For G31P2/G04Q2, the SKIP2 signal is, not used (0) / used (1)
323
B-63947EN/01

#0 DS1 For G04, the SKIP signal is, not used (0) / used (1)
#1 DS2 For G04, the SKIP2 signal is, not used (0) / used (1)
#7 DS8 For G04, the SKIP8 signal is, not used (0) / used (1) 7
06207 Feedrate during skip function execution
#1 SFP The feedrate used when the skip function is being PRM
executed is, feedrate of a programmed F code (0) / 6207#2
feedrate set in parameter (No. 6281) (1)
#2 SFN The feedrate used when the skip function base on PRM
high-speed skip signals or the multi-step skip function is 6200#4
being executed is, feedrate of a programmed F code (0) 6207#1
/ feedrate set in a parameter from parameter No. 6282
to (No. 6285) (1)
06210 High-speed skip, Automatic tool length measurement
(M series) / automatic tool compensation (T series)
#2 DSK Skip position reading by the detection unit is, disabled
(0) / enabled (1)
#6 MDC The measurement result of automatic tool length
measurement (M series) or automatic tool
compensation (T series) is, added to the current
compensation value (0) / subtracted from the current
compensation value (1)
06215 Cs contour control axis <Axis>
#0 CST On a Cs contour control axis, torque limit skip operation
06220 Period during which skip signal input is ignored for the
continuous high-speed skip function and EGB axis skip
function [8ms]
06221 Torque limit dead zone time for a torque limit skip <Axis>
command [ms]
06240 Automatic tool length measurement (M series) /
automatic tool compensation (T series)
#0 AE0 Measurement position arrival is assumed when the
automatic tool compensation signals XAE1 and XAE2
or the automatic tool length measurement signals
XAE1, XAE2, and XAE3 are, 1 (0) / 0 (1)
#1 AMH For automatic tool compensation signals or automatic
tool length measurement signals, a high-speed
measurement position arrival signal is, not used (0) /
used (1)
06241 Feedrate during measurement of automatic tool length
measurement
324
7 PARAMETERS
06242 Feedrate in tool measurement 2 measurement PRM6241
06243 Feedrate in tool measurement 3 measurement
06251 Deceleration position (γ value) in automatic tool length
measurement
06252 Deceleration position (γ value) in tool measurement 2 PRM6251
06253 Deceleration position (γ value) in tool measurement 3
06254 Allowable measurement position arrival signal range
(ε value) in automatic tool length measurement
06255 Allowable measurement position arrival signal range PRM6254
(ε value) in tool measurement 2
06256 Allowable measurement position arrival signal range
(ε value) in tool measurement 3
06281 Feedrate for the skip function (G31) PRM
6207#1=1
06282 Feedrate for the skip function (G31, G31 P1) PRM
06283 Feedrate for the skip function (G31 P2) 6207#2=1
06284 Feedrate for the skip function (G31 P3)
06285 Feedrate for the skip function (G31 P4)
06286 Torque limit override function <Axis>
#0 TQO The torque limit override function is, disabled (100%) (0)
/ enabled (1)
06287 Positional deviation limit in torque limit skip <Axis>
[Detection unit]
7.2.33 External Data Input

06300 Program number search
#3 ESC If a reset is input before the execution of a search using the
external program number search function, the search is,
executed (0) / not executed (1)
#4 ESR The external program number search function is, disabled (0)
/ enabled (1)
#7 EEX The PMC EXIN function is based on, conventional
specification (0) / extended specification (1)
06301 External alarm message
#0 EXA An external alarm message number from 0 to 999 can be
sent. (With the CNC, 1000 is added to each number.) (0) / An
external alarm message number from 0 to 4095 can be sent.
(With the CNC, "EX" is prefixed to each number.) (1)
#1 EXM An external operator message number from 0 to 999 can be
sent. (With the CNC, 2000 is added to each number.) (0) / An
external operator message number from 0 to 4095 can be
sent. (With the CNC, "EX" is prefixed to each number.) (1)
#2 NNO When operator messages are set by external data input, a
new line operation between one message set with a number
and another message set with a different number is,
performed (0) / not performed (1)
#3 EED To specify external tool compensation data and external
workpiece coordinate system shift data, signals ED15 to ED0
are used (0) / signals ED31 to ED0 are used (1)
06310 Setting for number addition to external operator messages
325
B-63947EN/01
7.2.34 Manual Handle Retrace

06400 Manual handle retrace function
#0 RPO With the manual handle retrace function, the rapid
traverse rate is clamped, assuming an override of, 10%
(0) / 100% (1)
#1 FWD With the manual handle retrace function, program
execution can be performed, in both of the forward and
backward directions (0) / only in the forward direction
(1)
#2 MC5 The number of M code groups and the number of M PRM
#3 MC8 codes per group are specified. 6411-6490
MC5 MC8
0 0 4 codes × 20 groups
#4 HMP When reverse or backward movement is disabled for a
path, reverse or backward movement is, not disabled 7
for other paths (0) / also disabled for other paths (1)
#5 RVN With the manual handle trace function, backward
movement of M codes other than grouped M codes is,
not disabled (0) / disabled (1)
#6 MGO During measurement-related G code execution using PRM
the manual handle retrace function, handle pulses are, 3405#3
valid (0) / invalid (1) 6200#7
#7 MG4 With the manual handle retrace function, backward
movement of a block enabling multi-step skip (G04) is,
not disabled (0) / disabled (1)
06401 Manual handle retrace
#0 ADC With the manual handle retrace function, reverse Option
movement of a block where a move command and
auxiliary function are specified simultaneously is,
disabled (0) / not disabled (1)
#2 CHS To display manual handle retrace status, one of the 6401#6=1
following conditions is selected:
0: Check mode output signal MMMOD is set to 1.
1: Output signal STL is set to 1, input signal MMOD is
set to 1, and input signal MCHK is set to 1
#6 HST With the manual handle retrace function, status is, not
displayed (0) / displayed (1), above the clock indication
on the status display line of the CNC screen
#7 STO With the manual handle retrace function, the S code
output timing and T code output timing in forward
movement and backward movement are, different from
each other (0) / same (1)
06402 Manual handle retrace
#5 MWR With the manual handle retrace function, handle
operation performed during waiting based on an M
code for waiting in backward movement, disables
reverse movement (0) / enables reverse movement (1)
06405 Rapid traverse rate clamp override value (equivalent) PRM
when the manual handle retrace function is used [%] 6400#0
06410 Travel distance per pulse of the manual pulse generator
[%]
Travel distance = Specified speed × Number of handle
pulses (sec-1) × Handle magnification × ((parameter No.
6410)/100) × (8/1000)
06411 M code (1) in group A for the manual handle retrace
06415 M code (1) in group B for the manual handle retrace
326
7 PARAMETERS
06419 M code (1) in group C for the manual handle retrace
06423 M code (1) in group D for the manual handle retrace
06427 M code (1) in group E for the manual handle retrace
06431 M code (1) in group F for the manual handle retrace
06435 M code (1) in group G for the manual handle retrace
06439 M code (1) in group H for the manual handle retrace
06443 M code (1) in group I for the manual handle retrace
06447 M code (1) in group J for the manual handle retrace
06451 M code (1) in group K for the manual handle retrace
06455 M code (1) in group L for the manual handle retrace
06459 M code (1) in group M for the manual handle retrace
06463 M code (1) in group N for the manual handle retrace
06467 M code (1) in group O for the manual handle retrace
06471 M code (1) in group P for the manual handle retrace
06475 M code (1) in group Q for the manual handle retrace
06479 M code (1) in group R for the manual handle retrace
327
B-63947EN/01

06483 M code (1) in group S for the manual handle retrace
06487 M code (1) in group T for the manual handle retrace
7.2.35 Graphic Display

06510 Specifying the graphic coordinate system
7.2.36 Screen Display Colors

06581 RGB value of color palette 1 7
06582 RGB value of color palette 2
7.2.37 Run Hour and Parts Count Display

06700 Number of machined parts
#0 PCM The total number of machined parts and the number of
machined parts are counted using, M02, M30, or the M
code specified by parameter No. 6710 (0) / only the M
code specified by parameter No. 6710 (1)
#1 PRT Upon reset, the required parts count arrival signal
(PRTSF) is, set to 0 (0) / not set to 0 (1)
06710 M code that counts the number of machined parts
06711 Number of machined parts PRM
6700#0
06712 Total number of machined parts PRM
6700#0
06713 Number of required parts
06750 Integrated value of power-on period [min]
06751 Operation time (integrated value of time during PRM6752
automatic operation) 1 [ms]
06752 Operation time (integrated value of time during
automatic operation) 2 [min]
06753 Integrated value of cutting time 1 [ms] PRM6754
06754 Integrated value of cutting time 2 [min]
06755 Integrated value of general-purpose integrating meter PRM6756
drive signal (TMRON) ON time 1 [ms]
06756 Integrated value of general-purpose integrating meter
drive signal (TMRON) ON time 2 [min]
06757 Operation time (integrated value of one automatic PRM6758
operation time) 1 [ms]
06758 Operation time (integrated value of one automatic
operation time) 2 [min]
328
7 PARAMETERS
7.2.38 Tool Life Management
06800 Number of tool life groups and number of tools
#0 GS1 Setting the combination of the number of tool life PRM6813
groups and the number of tools
#1 GS2 Number When GS1,
GS2 GS1 Number of groups GS2, and
of tools
1/8 of the maximum LTM are
0 0 32 changed,
number of sets (No. 6813)
1/4 of the maximum the data
0 1 16 needs to be
1/2 of the maximum set again
1 0 8 by
Maximum number of sets specifying
1 1 4 G10 L3;.
(No. 6813)
#2 LTM Tool life count type is specified by, count (0) / time (1)
#3 SIG When signal-based tool skip is performed, group
number input using the tool group number selection
signal is, not performed (0) / performed (1)
#4 GRS If the life of the group specified by the tool group
number selection signal has expired when the tool
change reset signal TLRST is input, the execution
data of the group is cleared (0) / the execution data of
all registered groups is cleared (1)
#5 SNG If the tool skip signal TLSKP is input while a tool not PRM
under tool life management is being used, the tools of 6800#3
the most recently used group or the specified group
are skipped (0) / the signal is ignored (1)
#6 IGI The back number of a tool is, not ignored (0) / ignored
(1)
#7 M6T A T code included in a block specifying M06 specifies,
back number (0) / next tool group (1)
06801 Tool life management functions, Tool management
functions
#1 TSM When multiple offsets are specified with the tool life T series
management function, life count operation is
performed, for each identical tool number (0) / for
each tool (1)
#2 LVF When the value of life is counted based on time with
the tool management function or the tool life
management function, the tool life count override
signals *TLV0 to *TLV9 are, invalid (0) / valid (1)
#3 EMD The mark "*" used with the tool life management
function to indicate the expiration of life is displayed,
when the next tool is used (0) / when the tool life has
expired (1)
#7 M6E If a T code is specified in a block including M06, the T PRM
code specifies a return number or the group number 6800#7
to be selected next (0) / life counting of the tool group
is started immediately (1)
329
B-63947EN/01
06802 Tool life management

#1 TCO These parameters make a selection concerning
#2 E17 information about the tools of the group currently used
or the group to be used next during automatic
operation using FOCAS2 and the PMC window
function.
6802#1(TCO)
1
Condition
0 6802#2(E17)
1 0
During Group currently Tool being used × ○
automatic used/group to be Tool not being × ○ ○
operation used next used
Not currently used/not group to be ○ ○ ○
used next
Not using automatic operation ○ ○ ○
○: Tool information can be written.

×: Tool information cannot be written. 7
When the PMC window is used, completion code
13 (REJECT ALARM) is returned.
: Tool information cannot be changed to the cleared
state.
#3 GRP The management data of the tool life notice signal PRM
TLCHB is, managed using the remaining value set in 6805#4=1
parameter (No. 6844) and (No. 6845) (0) / managed
using the remaining value in tool life management
data (1)
#4 ARL The tool life arrival notice signal TLCHB for tool life PRM
management is, output for each tool (0) / output for 6802#3=1
the last tool in a group (1)
#5 TGN With the tool life management function, the arbitrary PRM
group number function is, not used (0) / used (1) 6805#4=1
5040#3 (T
series)
#6 TSK If signal-based tool skip operation is performed for the
last tool in a group when the life counting by tool life
management is based on time, the counted life of the
last tool is, changed to the same as the life value (0) /
not changed (1)
#7 RMT The condition for turning on and off the tool life arrival PRM
notice signal TLCHB is such that, the signal is turned 6805#0
on when Remaining tool life ≤ Set remaining value,
and the signal is turned off when Remaining tool life >
Set remaining value (0) / the signal is turned on when
Remaining tool life = Set remaining value, and the
signal is turned off when Remaining tool life ≠ Set
remaining value (1)
06804 Editing of tool life data
#1 TCI During automatic operation, tool life data editing
operation is, disabled (0) / enabled (1)
06805 Life count type
#0 FCO When life counting is based on time specification, life
is counted, at intervals of 1 second (0) / at intervals of
0.1 second (1)
#1 FGL When life counting is based on time specification, life
data registration using G10 is performed, in units of 1
minute (0) / in units of 0.1 second (1)
#4 LFB The tool life management B function is, disabled (0) / PRM
enabled (1) 5040#3 (T
series)
#5 TRS The tool change reset signal TLRST is, valid when
RST signal ≠ 1 and only the reset state is set (0) / valid
when RST signal ≠ 1 and the reset state, automatic
operation stop state, or automatic operation halt state
is set (1)
330
7 PARAMETERS
#6 TRU When life counting is based on time specification and PRM
is performed at intervals of 1 second, a cutting time 6805#0
less than 1 second is not counted (0) / a cutting time
less than 1 second is rounded upward to 1 second
and counted (1)
#7 TAD When tool change method D is used, and a block PRM
specifying M06 includes no T command, the alarm 6801#7=1
(PS0153) is issued (0) / no alarm is issued (1)
06810 Tool life management ignore number
06811 M code for tool life count restart
06813 Maximum number of tool life management sets [set] To use tool
The maximum number of sets of each path is set as a life
multiple of 8 so that the total number of sets of all manage-
paths does not exceed the total number of sets of the ment, this
entire system (256 sets). parameter
needs to be
set.
06844 Remaining tool life (use count)
06845 Remaining tool life (use time) [min] PRM
6805#0
7.2.39 Position Switch

06901 Position switch functions
#1 EPW The number of position switches is, not extended
(0) / extended (1)
#2 PSA In determination of a position switch function
operation range, a servo positional deviation and a
delay amount in acc./dec. control are, not
considered (0) / considered (1)
06910 Controlled axis for which the 1st position switch
function is performed (PSWA01)
06911 Controlled axis for which the 2nd position switch
06912 Controlled axis for which the 3rd position switch
06913 Controlled axis for which the 4th position switch
06930 Maximum value of the operating range of the 1st PRM
position switch (PSW101) 1006#3
331
B-63947EN/01
06931 Maximum value of the operating range of the 2nd PRM

position switch (PSW102) 1006#3
06932 Maximum value of the operating range of the 3rd
position switch (PSW103)
06933 Maximum value of the operating range of the 4th
06939 Maximum value of the operating range of the 10th 7
06950 Minimum value of the operating range of the 1st
06951 Minimum value of the operating range of the 2nd
06952 Minimum value of the operating range of the 3rd
06953 Minimum value of the operating range of the 4th
332
7 PARAMETERS
7.2.40 Manual/Automatic Operation Functions
07001 Manual intervention, Manual numerical command
#1 ABS For the move command after manual intervention in the
manual absolute on state, a different path is used for each
of G90 and G91 (0) / the same path is used for G90 and
G91 (1)
#2 JST During operation based on manual numerical specification,
the STL signal indicating that automatic operation is being
started is, not output (0) / output (1)
#4 JSN When an S code is specified with the manual numerical
specification function, the modal display of the S code is,
not updated (0) / updated (1)
#6 JEX The number of simultaneously controlled axes for jog feed,
follows the setting of parameter (No. 1002#0) (0) / is the
maximum number of simultaneously controlled axes (1)
07002 Manual numerical command
#0 JMF In manual numerical specification, M function specification
is, allowed (0) / not allowed (1)
#1 JSF In manual numerical specification, S function specification
#2 JTF In manual numerical specification, T function specification
#3 JBF In manual numerical specification, B function specification
07010 Manual numerical command <Axis>
#0 JMV In manual numerical specification, axis movement
specification is, allowed (0) / not allowed (1)
07040 Tool retract and recover
#0 TRI The G10.6 command for tool retract and recover is,
assumed to be an absolute or incremental command
according to the setting of the absolute/incremental mode
(0) / assumed to be an incremental command at all times
(1)
#1 TRS After the completion of repositioning in tool retract and
recover, automatic operation is restarted (0) / operation
stops when the single block switch is on. When a cycle
start is executed again, automatic operation is started. (1)
#2 RPS When the tool retract signal TRESC is set to 1 after G10.6 PRM
is specified alone, the tool is, not retracted (0) / retracted 7041
(1)
#3 TRC When automatic operation is restarted after tool retract and
recover operation is executed during the execution of a
drilling canned cycle, the same drilling cycle is performed
(0) / the next drilling cycle is performed (1)
07041 Retraction distance in tool retract and recover <Axis>
PRM
7040#2
07051 Manual/automatic operation
#6 EMI When automatic/manual simultaneous operation is M series
performed, only manual operation of setup type is enabled
(0) / manual operations of interrupt type and setup type are
enabled (1)
07055 Bell-shaped acc./dec. before interpolation
#3 BCG The bell-shaped acc./dec. time constant change function
before interpolation is, disabled (0) / enabled (1)
07066 Acceleration/deceleration reference speed for the
bell-shaped acc./dec. time constant change function
333
B-63947EN/01
7.2.41 Manual Handle

#0 JHD The enabling of manual handle feed in the JOG mode or
the enabling of incremental feed in the manual handle feed
mode is, invalid (0) / valid (1)
#1 THD In the TEACH IN JOG mode, the manual pulse generator
#3 HCL The clearing of handle interrupt amount display by the soft
key [CANCEL] is, disabled (0) / enabled (1)
#5 MPX For manual handle travel distance selection, MP1 and
MP2 are used as common signals (0) / signals dependent
on the manual pulse generator are used (1)
Manual handle travel distance
Manual pulse generator
selection signal
1st unit MP1,MP2<G019#4,#5>
2nd unit MP21,MP22<G087#0,#1>
3rd unit MP31,MP32<G087#3,#4>
4th unit MP41,MP42<G087#6,#7> 7
5th unit MP51,MP52<G380#0,#1>
07102 Rotation direction <Axis>

#0 HNG The move direction on each axis is, same as the rotation
direction of the manual pulse generator (0) / opposite to
the rotation direction of the manual pulse generator (1)
#1 RTH By a reset or emergency stop, the manual handle interrupt
amount is, not canceled (0) / canceled (1)
#2 HNT The travel distance magnification for incremental PRM
feed/manual handle feed is, same as the combination of 7113,
MP1 and MP2 (0) / 10 times greater than the combination 7114
of MP1 and MP2 (1)
#3 HIT The travel distance magnification for manual handle PRM
interrupt is, same as the combination of MP1 and MP2 (0) / 7113,
10 times greater than the combination of MP1 and MP2 (1) 7114
07105 I/O Link connection
#1 HDX The manual handle for I/O Link connection is, PRM
automatically set (0) / manually set (1) 12300 -
12304,
12340 -
12344
#5 LBH Manual handle feed for the β servo unit using the I/O Link
manual pulse generator is, disabled (0) / enabled (1)
07113 Manual handle feed magnification m
07114 Manual handle feed magnification n
07117 Allowable number of pulses that can be accumulated MP1,
during manual handle feed MP2
07131 Manual handle feed magnification m2 / 2nd manual pulse generator
07132 Manual handle feed magnification n2 / 2nd manual pulse generator
07133 Manual handle feed magnification m3 / 3rd manual pulse generator
07134 Manual handle feed magnification n3 / 3rd manual pulse generator
07135 Manual handle feed magnification m4 / 4th manual pulse generator
07136 Manual handle feed magnification n4 / 4th manual pulse generator
07137 Manual handle feed magnification m5 / 5th manual pulse generator
07138 Manual handle feed magnification n5 / 5th manual pulse generator
7.2.42 Reference Position with Mechanical Stopper

07181 1st withdrawal distance in reference position setting with <Axis>
mechanical stopper PRM
07182 2nd withdrawal distance in reference position setting with 1006#5
mechanical stopper
07183 1st butting feedrate in reference position setting with <Axis>
mechanical stopper
07184 2nd butting feedrate in reference position setting with
mechanical stopper or butting feedrate in grid-based
reference position return with mechanical stopper
334
7 PARAMETERS
07185 Withdrawal feedrate (common to the 1st and 2nd butting
operations) in reference position setting with mechanical
stopper
07186 Torque limit value in reference position setting with <Axis>
mechanical stopper
07187 Torque limit value in reference position setting with <Axis>
mechanical stopper or grid-based reference position PRM
return with mechanical stopper 7186
07188 Grid-based reference position return with mechanical <Axis>
stopper
#0 GRS Grid-based reference position return with mechanical
stopper is, not performed (0) / performed (1)
#7 RNW Until the sign (positive/negative) of a servo positional
deviation is reversed in grid-based reference position
return with mechanical stopper, the grid is, not ignored (0)
/ ignored (1)
7.2.43 Software Operator's Panel

07200 Function selection
#0 OP1 Mode selection on the software operator's panel is, not
#1 OP2 Jog feed axis selection and manual rapid traverse
selection on the software operator's panel are, not
#2 OP3 Manual pulse generator axis selection and manual pulse
generator magnification selection on the software
operator's panel are, not performed (0) / performed (1)
#3 OP4 Jog feedrate override selection, feedrate override
selection, and rapid traverse rate override selection on
the software operator's panel are, not performed (0) /
performed (1)
#4 OP5 Optional block skip selection, single block selection,
machine lock selection, and dry run selection on the
software operator's panel are, not performed (0) /
performed (1)
#5 OP6 Protect key operation on the software operator's panel is,
not performed (0) / performed (1)
#6 OP7 Feed hold on the software operator's panel is, not
07201 General-purpose switch
#0 JPC For the name of a general-purpose switch function on the
software operator's panel, the use of full-size character is,
not allowed (0) / allowed (1)
07210 Jog-movement axis and its direction on software
07211 operator's panel
07212 Setting value Feed axis and direction
07213 0 Not moved
07214 1 1st axis, positive direction
07215 2 1st axis, negative direction
3 2nd axis, positive direction
07216 4 2nd axis, negative direction
07217 5 3rd axis, positive direction
6 3rd axis, negative direction
7 4th axis, positive direction
8 4th axis, negative direction
07220 Name of general-purpose switch 1 on software operator's
panel (1st character)
panel (2nd character)
panel (3rd character)
panel (4th character)
335
B-63947EN/01

07233 Name of general-purpose switch 2 on software operator's 7
336
7 PARAMETERS
337
B-63947EN/01

07292 Name of general-purpose switch 10 on software
operator's panel (1st character)
operator's panel (2nd character)
operator's panel (3rd character)
operator's panel (4th character)
07297 Name of general-purpose switch 10 on software 7
7.2.44 Program Restart

07300 Program restart
#6 MOA Before moving to the machining restart position in PRM
program restart operation, the last M, S, T, and B codes 7300#7=1
are output (0) / all M codes and the last S, T, and B codes
are output (1)
#7 MOP Before finding a block to be restarted then moving to the
machining restart position, the M, S, T, and B codes are,
not output (0) / output (1)
07301 Program restart screen
#0 ROF In restart coordinate display on the program restart
screen, values considering tool length compensation, tool
offset, tool radius compensation, and tool nose radius
compensation are displayed (0) / the settings of
parameters (No. 3104#7 and #6) and parameter (No.
3129#1) are followed (1)
07310 Ordinal number of an axis along which a movement is <Axis>
made in dry run after program restart
7.2.45 Software Operator's Panel 2

338
7 PARAMETERS
339
B-63947EN/01

7.2.46 High-speed Cutting

07501 High-speed cycle cutting
#3 BDS In the high-speed binary operation mode, the axis travel
distance data format is, special format (0) / general format (1) 7
#4 IT0 IT2 IT1 IT0 G05 data interpolation time (ms)
#5 IT1 0 0 0 8
#6 IT2 0 0 1 2
0 1 0 4
0 1 1 1
1 0 0 16
1 1 1 0.5
#7 IPC In high-speed cycle cutting and high-speed binary operation,
distribution stop monitoring is, not performed (0) / performed
(1)
#4 LC1 The servo learning function of the high-speed cycle cutting
#5 LC2 retract function is enabled or disabled as indicated below.
LC2 LC1 Meaning
0 0 Disabled when retract operation starts
0 1 Disabled when retract operation ends
1 0 Disabled when the retract cycle ends

#0 HSP When the skip function is performed during high-speed cycle
machining, skip operation is, performed considering learning
data (0) / performed immediately without considering learning
data (1)
#4 HCT For high-speed cycle cutting distribution data, the storage
start variable number is specified, by division by 10 (0) / by
division by 100 (1)
07505 High-speed cycle machining, Distribution data unit
#1 HUN The distribution data unit in high-speed cycle cutting is the <Axis>
least input increment, not multiplied by 10 (0) / multiplied by
10 (1)
07510 Number of controlled axes in high-speed machining
07514 Retract direction and retract feedrate in high-speed cycle <Axis>
cutting retract operation
07515 Number of retract operation distributions in high-speed cycle
cutting retract operation
07516 High-speed cycle cutting data area number
07517 Setting of the number of high-speed cycle cutting data items
7.2.47 Fixture Offset

07570 Fixture offset M series
#0 FTP The fixture offset type is, movement type (0) / shift type (1) M series
#3 CFA When the fixture offset function is used, and a rotary axis is M series
specified in the G91 mode after manual intervention in the
state where the manual absolute switch is on, a vector
calculation is made, using coordinates not reflecting the
manual intervention amount (0) / using coordinates
reflecting the manual intervention amount (1)
340
7 PARAMETERS
07575 Fixture offset on each axis M series,
<Axis>
#0 FAX Fixture offset on each axis is, disabled (0) / enabled (1) M series
07580 Rotary axis for fixture offset (1st group) M series
07581 Linear axis 1 for fixture offset (1st group) M series
07582 Linear axis 2 for fixture offset (1st group) M series
07583 Rotary axis for fixture offset (2nd group) M series
07584 Linear axis 1 for fixture offset (2nd group) M series
07585 Linear axis 2 for fixture offset (2nd group) M series
07586 Rotary axis for fixture offset (3rd group) M series
07587 Linear axis 1 for fixture offset (3rd group) M series
07588 Linear axis 2 for fixture offset (3rd group) M series
7.2.48 Polygon Turning

07600 Feed forward, Reference position return
#0 PFF In spindle-servo polygon turning, feed forward for the
tool rotary axis (servo axis) during polygon turning is
always, disabled (0) / enabled (1)
#7 PLZ Reference position return based on a G28 command
on the tool rotary axis for polygon turning is,
performed in the same sequence as manual reference
position return (0) / performed by positioning using the
rapid traverse rate (1)
07602 Polygon machining with two spindles
#0 MNG The rotation direction of the master axis in the
spindle-spindle polygon turning mode is, not reversed
(0) / reversed (1)
#1 SNG The rotation direction of the synchronization axis in
the spindle-spindle polygon turning mode is, not
reversed (0) / reversed (1)
#2 HDR The phase shift direction is, not reversed (0) / PRM
reversed (1) 7602#5=0
#3 HSL The spindle that is subject to phase shift operation for PRM
phase synchronization is, polygon synchronization 7602#5=0
axis (0) / master axis (1)
#4 HST When phase control is applied in the spindle-spindle PRM
polygon turning mode, and spindle-spindle polygon 4016#7
turning is specified, spindle-spindle polygon is 7602#5=0
performed, without changing the spindle speed (0) /
after stopping the spindle automatically (1)
#5 COF In the spindle-spindle polygon turning mode, phase PRM
control is, enabled (0) / disabled (1) 7602#2,#3
07603 Polygon machining with two spindles
#0 RPL Upon reset, the spindle-spindle polygon turning mode
is, released (0) / not released (1)
#1 QDR The rotation direction of the synchronization axis, ALM
depends on the sign of Q (0) / is the rotation direction PS0218
of the 1st spindle (1)
#2 SBR For spindle synchronization, speed ratio control is, not
used (0) / used (1)
#3 PLROT The machine coordinates of a tool rotary axis for
polygon turning are, rounded by the setting in
parameter (No. 7620) (0) / rounded by 360° (or the
setting in parameter (No. 1260) when parameter (No.
1008#0) is set to 1) (1)
#5 RDG The diagnostic data No. 476 (spindle-spindle polygon
phase command value (R)) displays, the specified
value (0) / the actual number of shift pulses (1)
#7 PST The polygon spindle stop signal *PLSST is, not used
(0) / used (1)
07610 Control axis number of tool rotary axis for polygon ALM
turning PS0314
07620 Movement of tool rotary axis per revolution for
polygon turning [deg]
341
B-63947EN/01
07621 Maximum allowable speed for the tool rotary axis for ALM
polygon turning [min-1] PS5018
07631 Allowable spindle speed deviation level in polygon
machining with two spindles [min-1]
07632 Steady state confirmation time duration in polygon PRM7631
machining with two spindles [ms]
07635 Ratio of slave spindle speed in spindle
synchronization control PRM
7603#2=1
07636 Maximum allowable slave spindle speed in spindle
synchronization control [min-1]
07640 Master axis in polygon machining with two spindles PRM
7641,3411
or later
07641 Polygon synchronous axis in polygon machining with PRM
two spindles 7640,3411or
later
7
07642 Master axis in polygon machining with two spindles PRM
(spindle number common to the system) 7640,7641
7643,3411or
later
07643 Polygon synchronous axis in polygon machining with PRM
two spindles (spindle number common to the system) 7640,7641
7642,3411or
later
7.2.49 Electric Gear Box (EGB)

07700 EGB synchronization, Helical compensation
#0 HBR Upon reset, EGB synchronization is, canceled (0) / not
canceled (1)
#2 HDR Direction of helical gear compensation (Usually, set
1.)
07701 EGB synchronization
#3 LZR When L (number of hob threads) = 0 is specified at the
start of EGB synchronization, synchronization is
started assuming that L = 1 is specified (0) /
synchronization is not start (1)
07702 Electric gear box
#0 TDP The specifiable number of teeth, T, of the EGB is, 1 to
1000 (0) / 0.1 to 100 (1)
#3 ART The alarm-based retract function is, disabled (0) /
enabled (1)
#6 PHS When the G81/G80 block contains no R command,
acc./dec. is not performed at the start or cancellation
of the EGB (0) / acc./dec. is performed at the start or
cancellation of the EGB for automatic phase
synchronization (1)
#7 PHD The direction of movement for automatic phase
synchronization is, positive (+) (0) / negative (-) (1)
07703 EGB synchronization
#0 ERV During EGB synchronization, feed per revolution is
performed for, feedback pulses (0) / pulses converted
to the speed for the workpiece axis (1)
#1 ARE Alarm-based retract operation is performed, during
EGB synchronization or automatic operation (0) /
during EGB synchronization (1)
#2 ARO Alarm-based retract operation is performed, during
EGB synchronization (0) / during EGB synchronization
and automatic operation (1)
07704 General-purpose retract function
#0 ACR In the AI contour control mode, the general-purpose
retract function is, not used (0) / used (1)
342
7 PARAMETERS
07705 Simple spindle EGB function
#0 SEG The simple spindle EGB function is, not used (0) /
used (1)
07709 Number of the axial feed axis for helical compensation
07710 Synchronous axis number
07717 Synchronization cancellation delay time for an EGB
axis [0.1sec]
07731 G code for EGB specification
#0 EFX For EGB specification, G80 and G81 are used (0) / Canned
G80.4 and G81.4 are used (1) cycle
#1 EHF Feed-forward control on the axial feed axis for helical PRM
compensation is, enabled only during cutting (0) / 1800#3
enabled always in the G81 synchronous mode (1)
#3 ECN When the automatic phase synchronization function
for the EGB is disabled, alarm PS1595 is issued for
the G81 or G81.5 command specified during EGB
synchronization (0) / the G81 or G81.5 command
specified during EGB synchronization is allowed (1)
#4 RTS If an OT alarm or axis system malfunction protection
alarm is issued during EGB retract operation,
movement is stopped, on only the alarm-issued axis
(0) / on all axes (1)
#5 HBR When the EGB synchronization start command G81.4
is specified, the number of teeth is specified, by T (0) /
by R (1)
07740 Feedrate during retraction <Axis>
07741 Retracted distance <Axis>
07745 Time constant for linear acc./dec. in axis-by-axis <Axis>
retract operation [ms]PRM
7704#0,
7740
07772 Number of position detector pulses per rotation about 4 pulses
the tool axis [Detection unit] with the
A/B phase
detector
07773 Number of position detector pulses per rotation about
the workpiece axis [Detection unit]
07776 Feedrate during automatic phase synchronization for PRM1420
the workpiece axis [deg/min]
07777 Angle shifted from the spindle position (one-rotation
signal position) the workpiece axis uses as the
reference of phase synchronization [deg]
07778 Acceleration for acc./dec. for the workpiece axis <Axis>
[deg/sec2]
07782 Number of pulses from the position detector per EGB <Axis>
master axis rotation [Detection unit] 4 pulses
with the
A/B phase
detector
07783 Number of pulses from the position detector per EGB <Axis>
slave axis rotation [Detection unit]
07784 Numerator of a signal-based servo EGB <Axis>
synchronization ratio
07785 Denominator of a signal-based servo EGB <Axis>
synchronization ratio
343
B-63947EN/01
7.2.50 Axis Control by PMC

08001 Function selection
#0 MLE For PMC-controlled axes, the all axis machine lock PRM
signal MLK is, valid (0) / invalid (1) 8006#1
#2 OVE The signals related to dry run and override in PMC *FV0E -
axis control are, the same as those used for the CNC *FV7E
(0) / signals specific to PMC axis control (1) OVCE,
DRNE
ROV1E,
ROV2E,
RTE
#3 RDE Dry run for rapid traverse in PMC axis control is,
#5 NCC When the program specifies a move command for a ALM
PMC controlled axis (with *EAX=1) not placed under PS0130
PMC axis control, the CNC command is valid (0) / an
alarm is issued (1) 7
#6 AUX In PMC axis control, the auxiliary function command
(12H) output size is, 1 byte (0) / 2 bytes (1)
#7 SKE As a skip signal In PMC axis control, the SKIP signal
is used (0) / the ESKIP signal is used (1)
08002 Unit of feedrate
#0 RPD The rapid traverse rate in PMC axis control follows,
the setting of parameter (No. 1420) (0) / the feedrate
data specified by a PMC axis control command (1)
#1 DWE When IS-C is used in PMC axis control, the unit of a
dwell command is, 1 ms (0) / 0.1 ms (1)
#3 F10 Unit of feedrate specification for cutting feed (feed per PRM
minute) in PMC axis control 8002#4=0
8002#5=0
F10 IS-A IS-B IS-C IS-D IS-E
Metric 0 10 1 0.1 0.01 0.001
input 1 100 10 1 0.1 0.01
Inch 0 0.1 0.01 0.001 0.0001 0.00001
input 1 1 0.1 0.01 0.001 0.0001
#4 PF1 Unit of feedrate specification for cutting feed (feed per
revolution) in PMC axis control
#5 PF2 PF2 PF1 Feedrate unit
0 0 1/1
1 1 1/10
0 1 1/100
1 0 1/1000
#6 FR1 Unit of feedrate data specification for cutting feed
(feed per revolution) in PMC axis control
#7 FR2 FR2 FR1 Metric input Inch input
0 0
0.0001 0.000001
1 1
0 1 0.001 0.00001
1 0 0.01 0.0001
08003 Feedrate <Axis>
#3 FEX The maximum feedrate for cutting feed and
continuous feed in PMC axis control is, not extended
(0) / extended (1)
08004 Alarm, Speed command unit, In-position check
#2 JFM Unit of feedrate data specification for continuous feed
in PMC axis control
Increment Metric
JFM Inch input Rotary axis
system input
0 1 0.01 0.00023
IS-B
1 200 2.0 0.046
0 0.1 0.001 0.000023
IS-C
1 20 0.2 0.0046
#5 DSL If the selection of an axis is changed when axis ALM

selection is disabled in PMC axis control, an alarm is PS0139
issued (0) / an axis selection is made (1)
344
7 PARAMETERS
#6 NCI In PMC axis control, an in-position check at the time of PRM1826
deceleration is, performed (0) / not performed (1)
08005 Travel distance on PMC-controlled axes
#0 EDC In PMC axis control, the external deceleration function
#1 CDI When a PMC-controlled axis is specified by diameter PRM
programming, a travel distance is based on radius 1006#3=1
specification (0) / a travel distance is based on
diameter specification and a feedrate command is
base on radius specification (1)
#2 R10 When parameter (No. 8002#0) is set to 1, the unit for
specifying a rapid traverse rate for the PMC axis is, 1
mm/min (0) / 10 mm/min (1)
#3 DRR For cutting feed (feed per revolution) in PMC axis
control, dry run is, disabled (0) / enabled (1)
#4 EVP A speed command in PMC axis control is based on, PRM
speed specification (0) / position specification (1) 8007#2=1
#5 IFV When parameter (No. 8001#2) is set to 1 in PMC axis
control, the feedrate override signal *EFOVx and the
override cancel signal OVC are, used on a
path-by-path basis (0) / used on a group-by-group
basis (1)
08006 Machine lock for each axis
#1 MLS When the all axis machine lock signal is disabled in PRM
PMC axis control, axis-by-axis machine lock is, 8001#0=1
#4 EFD When cutting feed (feed per minute) is used in PMC PRM
axis control, the specification unit of feedrate data is, 8002#3
unchanged (1 times) (0) / 100 times greater (1)
#6 EZR In PMC axis control, parameter (No. 1005#0) is,
08007 Speed command
#2 VCP The PMC axis control speed command is based on,
FS15 specification (0) / FS16 specification (1)
08008 Mirror image <Axis>
#0 EMR When a PMC axis control command is issued in mirror MI1 to MI8
image mode, the mirror image is, not considered (0) / PRM12#0
considered (1)
08010 Selection of the DI/DO group for each axis controlled <Axis>
by the PMC
08011 Real time custom macros <Axis>
#0 XRT The axis that uses the group specified by parameter
(No. 8010) is, not controlled by the real time custom
macro (0) / controlled by the real time custom macro
(1)
08020 FL feedrate for reference position return along each <Axis>
axis in PMC axis control PRM1425
08022 Upper limit rate of feed per revolution during PMC axis <Axis>
control
08028 Time for acc./dec. calculation when a feedrate is <Axis>
specified under PMC axis control [ms]
08030 Time constant for exponential acc./dec. in cutting feed <Axis>
or continuous feed under PMC axis control [ms]
08031 FL feedrate for exponential acc./dec. in cutting feed or <Axis>
continuous feed under PMC axis control
08032 Feedrate for acc./dec. calculation when a feedrate is <Axis>
specified under PMC axis control [min-1]
08040 Travel distance per motor revolution viewed in the <Axis>
least command increment when a position is specified
with a PMC axis control speed command
345
B-63947EN/01
7.2.51 Multi-path
08100 Multi-path control
#0 RST The pressing of the [RESET] key on the MDI panel is, valid
for all paths within the same machine group (0) / valid only
for a selected path (1)
#1 IAL When an alarm is issued with one path during automatic
operation, the other path is, stopped (0) / not stopped (1)
#6 DSB The inter-path single block check function is, disabled (0) /
enabled (1)
#7 NWP Servo activation is turned on, together with other machine
groups (0) / independently of other machine groups (1)
08103 Waiting M code
#0 MWT As the signal interface for the waiting M code, the signal PRM
interface for three paths is used (0) / the signal interface 8103#0
for two paths is used (1)
#1 MWP To specify a P command for the waiting M code/balance
cut, a binary value is used (0) / a path number combination 7
is used (1)
08104 Loader control
#0 LSL A loader path screen is selected by, path selection signal
(0) / SHIFT+HELP or signal G251.1 (1)
08110 Waiting M code range (minimum value)
08111 Waiting M code range (maximum value)
7.2.52 Interference Check for Each Path

08140 Interference check for each path T series
#0 TY0 These parameters set the coordinate system relationship
#1 TY1 between two tool posts based on the tool post of path 1.
#2 IT0 When offset number 0 is specified by a T code, checking
interference between paths is stopped until an offset
number other than 0 is specified by the next T code (0) /
checking interference between paths is continued
according to the previously specified offset number (1)
#3 IFM In the manual mode, an interference check between paths
#4 IFE An interference check between paths is, performed (0) /
not performed (1)
#5 ZCL An interference check between paths is, made along the
Z-axis (0) / not made along the Z-axis (made along the
X-axis only) (1)
#7 IPF In inter-path interference checking, interference between
two paths is checked (0) / interference among multiple
paths is checked (1)
08141 Distance along the X axis between the reference positions
of tool post 1 and tool post n in the same machine group
08143 Distance along the Z axis between the reference positions
of tool post 1 and tool post n in the same machine group
08151 Distance along the X axis between the reference positions T series
of tool posts 1 and 2
08152 Distance along the Z axis between the reference positions T series
of tool posts 1 and 2
08158 Coordinate system pattern with the reference position T series
based on the tool post of path 1 in the same machine
group
346
7 PARAMETERS
7.2.53 Synchronous/Composite Control and
Superimposed Control
08160 Synchronous, composite, and superimposed control
#4 AXS When the axis movement in-program signal (Fn102) or
the axis movement direction signal (Fn106) of the slave
axis in superimposed control is output, state output is
performed, according to the result of superimposition
(0) / according to the result of movement on each axis
(1)
#5 NCS If an overtravel occurs on an axis under synchronous,
composite, or superimposed control, synchronous,
composite, or superimposed control is, released (0) /
not released (1)
#6 SPE The synchronization deviation is, the difference PRM
between the positional deviation of the master axis and 8162#1=1
that of the slave axis (0) / the difference between the 8181
positional deviation of the master axis and that of the
slave axis plus the acc./dec. delay difference (1)
#7 NRS By a reset, synchronous, composite, or superimposed
control is, released (0) / not released (1)
08161 Synchronous/composite control
#0 NMR When an axis subject to composite control is placed in PRM
servo-off state, composite control is, canceled (0) / not 1819#0
canceled if follow-up operation for the axis is disabled
(1)
#5 CRZ If the state of the composite control axis selection signal
is switched in composite control on two axes under Cs
contour control, the reference position establishment
state of the two axes in composite control is,
maintained (0) / assumed to be unestablished (1)
#7 NSR When servo-off state occurs with an axis in PRM
synchronous control, synchronous control, is canceled 1819#0
(0) / not canceled if follow-up operation for the axis is
disabled (1)
08162 Mirror image, Synchronous, composite, and <Axis>
superimposed control
#0 SMR Synchronous mirror-image control is, not applied (0) /
applied (1)
#1 SER The synchronization deviation is, not detected (0) / PRM8181
detected (1)
#2 PKU In the parking state, the absolute, relative, and machine PRM
coordinates are not updated (0) / the absolute and 8167#1
relative coordinates are updated but the machine
coordinates are not updated (1)
#3 OMR Superimposed mirror-image control is, not applied (0) /
applied (1)
#4 MPM When composite control is started, the workpiece PRM
coordinate system is, not set automatically (0) / set 8184
automatically (1)
#5 MPS When composite control is terminated, the workpiece PRM1250
coordinate system is, not set automatically (0) / set
automatically (1)
#6 MCD When composite control is applied, the coordinate
system direction for the relevant axes, remains the
same without applying mirror image (0) / is reversed by
applying mirror image (1)
#7 MUM In composite control, move command specification for
the axis is, not prohibited (0) / prohibited (1)
08163 Synchronous/composite control <Axis>
#1 SPM When synchronous control is started, automatic PRM8185
workpiece system setting for the master axis is, not
#2 SPS When synchronous control is terminated, automatic PRM1250
workpiece coordinate setting for the master axis is, not
347
B-63947EN/01
#3 SCM When workpiece coordinates are calculated in

synchronous control, the workpiece coordinates are
calculated, from the machine coordinates for the slave
axis (0) / from the machine coordinates of the master
axis and slave axis (1)
#4 SCD The positive (+) directions of the master axis and slave
axis in the coordinate system in synchronous control
are, identical (0) / opposite (1)
#5 SMI In synchronous control, the manual handle interrupt
amount for the master axis or the mirror image mode is,
reflected in the slave axis (0) / not reflected in the slave
axis (1)
#6 MMI For a composite control axis, manual handle interrupt
under composite control is, enabled (0) / disabled (1)
#7 NUM When neither synchronous control nor composite ALM
control is applied, a move command for the axis is, not PS0353
disabled (0) / disabled (1)
08164 Synchronous, composite, and superimposed control <Axis> 7
#0 MWS In automatic workpiece coordinate system setting T series
performed when composite control is started, a PRM
workpiece shift and position offset are, not considered 8162#4=1
(0) / considered (1)
#1 MWE In automatic workpiece coordinate system setting T series
performed when composite control is canceled, a PRM
workpiece shift and position offset are, not considered 8162#5=1
(0) / considered (1)
#2 MCS In automatic workpiece coordinate system setting PRM
performed when composite control is started, a 8162#4=1
workpiece coordinate system is set in the normal way
(0) / the coordinate system of the other path subject to
composite control is used (1)
#3 MCE In automatic workpiece coordinate system setting PRM
performed when composite control is canceled, a 8162#5=1
workpiece coordinate system is automatically set in the
normal way (0) / the coordinate system of the other path
subject to composite control is used (1)
#5 OPS When superimposed control is canceled, control in
which an amount of movement along the master axis
subject to superimposed control is added to the
workpiece coordinate of the slave axis is, not applied
(0) / applied (1)
#6 SOK If a master axis subject to superimposed control is also
subject to synchronous control, and superimposed
control is started during synchronous control, an alarm
is issued (0) / no alarm is issued (1)
#7 MOM If the coordinate system is changed using the program
coordinate system switch function in the composite
control mode, the machine coordinate value used as
the reference for program coordinate system creation
is, machine coordinate of the local axis (0) / machine
coordinate of the composite control axis (1)
08166 Composite control interface
#1 MIX For composite control, an interface for three paths or PRM8183
more is used (0) / the conventional two-path interface is
used (1)
08167 Automatic workpiece coordinate system setting <Axis>
#1 SYW The axis is, not used as a master axis and slave axis at
the same time (0) / used as a master axis and slave
axis at the same time (1)
#2 SGM In automatic workpiece coordinate system setting at the T series
start of synchronous control, a tool offset is, considered PRM
(0) / not considered (1) 8163#1
#3 SGS In automatic workpiece coordinate system setting at the T series
end of synchronous control, a tool offset is, considered PRM
(0) / not considered (1) 8163#2
8167#6
348
7 PARAMETERS
#4 SWM In automatic workpiece coordinate system setting at the T series
start of synchronous control, a workpiece shift is, not PRM
considered (0) / considered (1) 8163#1
#5 SWS In automatic workpiece coordinate system setting at the T series
end of synchronous control, a workpiece shift is, not PRM
considered (0) / considered (1) 8163#2
8167#6
#6 SPV At the end of synchronous control, automatic workpiece PRM1250
coordinate system setting for the slave axis is, not
08168 Emergency stop, servo off, servo alarm
#0 MPA If an alarm concerning synchronous control, composite
control, or superimposed control is issued, all paths of
the machine group to which the alarm occurrence path
belongs are placed in the feed hold state (0) / only the
path including the axis with which the alarm is issued is
place in the feed hold state (1)
#1 MSO When an emergency stop, servo-off state, or servo-off PRM
alarm occurs in synchronous control, composite control, 8168#2
or superimposed control, the synchronous control,
composite control, or superimposed control state is
canceled and follow-up operation is not performed (0) /
the synchronous control, composite control, or
superimposed control state is not canceled and
follow-up operation is performed (1)
#2 SVF When an axis under composite control is placed in the PRM
servo-off state, composite control is canceled (0) / 8161#0
composite control is not canceled and follow-up 8168#1
operation follows the setting of parameter (No. 1819#0)
(1)
#3 OFF In superimposed control, feed forward is, disabled (0) /
enabled (1)
08169 Position display, rapid traverse <Axis>
#0 MDM As machine coordinates in composite control,
coordinates for the local path are displayed (0) /
coordinates for the other path in composite control are
displayed (1)
#1 MVM When machine coordinates are read in composite
control, machine coordinates for the local path are read
(0) / machine coordinates for the other path in
composite control are read (1)
#2 MRF The rapid traverse rate used in composite control is,
rapid traverse rate for the specified axis (0) / rapid
traverse rate for the move axis (1)
08180 Master axis with which an axis is synchronized under <Axis>
synchronous control
08181 Synchronization error limit of each axis <Axis>
[Detection unit] PRM
8162#1
08183 Composite control axis of the other path in composite <Axis>
control for each axis
08184 Coordinates of the reference point of an axis on the <Axis>
coordinate system of another axis under composite PRM
control 8162#4=1
08185 Workpiece coordinates on each axis at the reference <Axis>
position PRM
8163#1=1
08186 Master axis for each axis under superimposed control <Axis>
08190 Rapid traverse rate for each axis under superimposed <Axis>
control [mm/min]
08191 F0 velocity of rapid traverse override for an axis under <Axis>
superimposed control [mm/min]
08192 Linear acc./dec. time constant in rapid traverse for each <Axis>
axis under superimposed control [ms]
349
B-63947EN/01
08194 Maximum cutting feedrate for each axis under <Axis>

superimposed control [mm/min]
7.2.54 Angular Axis Control

08200 Angular axis control
#0 AAC Angular axis control is, not exercised (0) / exercised
(1)
#2 AZR During manual reference position return along the
slanted axis under angular axis control, the tool is,
moved also along the Cartesian axis (0) / not moved
along the Cartesian axis (1)
08201 Angular axis control, Stored stroke limit check
#0 AOT Stored stroke limit 1 under angular axis control is
handled as, value in the slanted coordinate system (0) /
value in the Cartesian coordinate system (1)
#1 AO2 Stored stroke limit 2 under angular axis control is
handled as, value in the slanted coordinate system (0) / 7
#2 AO3 Stored stroke limit 3 under angular axis control is
handled as, value in the slanted coordinate system (0) /
#6 A53 If a slanted axis is singly specified by a machine
coordinate command (G53) in angular axis control, this
parameter, when set to either 0 or 1, specifies that "a
movement is made along the slanted axis only".
#7 ADG The contents of diagnostic data Nos. 306 and 307 are
displayed, in the order from the slanted axis to the
Cartesian axis (0) / in the order from the Cartesian axis
to the slanted axis (1)
08210 Slant angle of a slanted axis in angular axis control
[deg]
08211 Axis number of a slanted axis subject to angular axis
control
08212 Axis number of a Cartesian axis subject to slanted axis
control
If 0 is set in either of the two parameters, the settings
are made as indicated in the following table:
Slanted axis Cartesian axis
Y-axis (PRM1022=2) of Z-axis (PRM1022=3)
M series
basic three axes of basic three axes
X-axis (PRM1022=1) of Z-axis (PRM1022=3)
T series
basic three axes of basic three axes
7.2.55 Axis Synchronous Control

08301 Axis synchronous control
#4 SYA In the servo-off state during axis synchronous control, PRM8323
the positional deviation limit values of the master axis
and slave axis are, checked (0) / not checked (1)
08302 Position matching between the machine position and
absolute position detector
#7 SMA When an absolute position detector is attached, and
parameter APZ (No. 1815#4) for an axis in synchronous
operation is set to OFF, APZ of the pairing axis in
synchronous operation is, not to set to OFF (0) / set to
OFF (1)
08303 Axis synchronous control <Axis>
#0 ATE In axis synchronous control, automatic setting for grid Slave axis
positioning is, disabled (0) / enabled (1)
#1 ATS In axis synchronous control, automatic setting for grid Slave axis
positioning is, not started (0) / started (1)
#2 SAF In axis synchronous control, a movement along a slave Slave axis
axis is, not added to actual feedrate display (0) / added
to actual feedrate display (1)
350
7 PARAMETERS
#4 SYP If the same value needs to be set in the parameter for
the master axis and the parameter for the slave axis, and
a value is set in the parameter for the master axis, the
value is, not automatically set for the slave axis (0) / set
automatically for the slave axis (1)
#7 SOF In axis synchronous control, the synchronization Slave axis
establishment function based on machine coordinates is,
08304 Modification mode, Uni-directional synchronization, <Axis>
External machine coordinate system shift
#0 SSA When the uni-directional synchronization establishment
function under axis synchronous control is used, the axis
with a larger machine coordinate is used as the
reference (0) / the axis with a smaller machine
coordinate is used as the reference (1)
#2 ADJ In axis synchronous control, this parameter specifies, an
axis along which a movement is not made in the
modification mode (0) / an axis along which a movement
is made in the modification mode (1)
#3 CLP In axis synchronous control, synchronization error Slave axis
compensation is, disabled (0) / enabled (1)
#4 MVB In the modification mode, a move command in a PRM
direction that increases a synchronization error is, invalid 8304#2
(0) / valid (1)
#5 SCA In axis synchronous control, synchronous operation is, Slave axis
performed when the axis synchronous control selection
signal SYNC for slave axes or the axis synchronous
control manual feed selection signal SYNCJ is set to 1
(0) / performed at all times (1)
#6 SMS The synchronization error smooth suppress function is, Slave axis
#7 SYE When external machine coordinate system shift is Slave axis
specified by external data input/output for the master
axis in synchronous control, the slave axis is, not shifted
(0) / shifted by the same amount as specified for the
master axis (1)
08305 Uni-directional synchronization function
#0 SSO The uni-directional synchronization function in axis
synchronous control is, disabled (0) / enabled (1)
#1 SSE After an emergency stop, the uni-directional
synchronization function in axis synchronous control is,
#2 SRF In axis synchronous control, G28, G30, or G53,
synchronizes the slave axis with the master axis (0) /
makes movements along the slave axis and master axis
independently to specified positions (1)
#3 TWJ When manual interrupt amounts are specified with the
twin table control function in the synchronous operation
mode or in the single slave axis operation mode, only the
interrupt amount for the master axis is accepted and
reflected in the master axis/slave axis (0) / the interrupt
amount for the master axis is reflected in the master
axis, and the interrupt amount for the slave axis is
reflected in the slave axis (1)
08311 Axis number of master axis in axis synchronous <Axis>
control/twin table control
08312 Enabling/disabling mirror image in axis synchronous <Axis>
control Slave axis
08314 Maximum allowable error in synchronization error check <Axis>
based on machine coordinates Slave axis
08323 Limit in positional deviation check in axis synchronous <Axis>
control [Detection unit] Slave axis
PRM
8301#4
351
B-63947EN/01
08325 Maximum compensation value in synchronization <Axis>

establishment based on machine coordinates Slave axis
PRM
8303#7
08326 Difference between master axis and slave axis reference <Axis>
counters [Detection unit] Slave axis
08327 Torque difference alarm detection timer [ms]
08330 Multiplier for a maximum allowable synchronization error PRM8332
immediately after power-up
08331 Maximum allowable synchronization error for <Axis>
synchronization error excessive alarm 1 [Detection unit] Slave axis
08332 Maximum allowable synchronization error for <Axis>
synchronization error excessive alarm 2 [Detection unit] Slave axis
08333 Synchronization error zero width for each axis <Axis>
[Detection unit] Slave axis
08334 Synchronization error compensation gain for each axis <Axis>
Compensation pulses = Slave axis 7
Synchronization error × (Compensation gain/1024)
08335 Synchronization error zero width 2 for each axis <Axis>
[Detection unit] Slave axis
PRM8333
08336 Synchronization error compensation gain 2 for each axis <Axis>
Slave axis
PRM8334
08337 M code for turning off synchronization in axis
synchronous control/twin table control
08338 M code for turning on synchronization in axis
synchronous control/twin table control
08339 M code for singular operation under twin table control
7.2.56 Sequence Number Comparison and Stop

08341 Program number subject to comparison and stop PRM8342
08342 Sequence number subject to comparison and stop
7.2.57 Chopping
08360 Chopping
#0 ROV As rapid traverse override for a section from the
chopping start point to point R, chopping override is
used (0) / rapid traverse override is used (1)
#2 CVC The feedrate along the chopping axis is changed, at the
upper or lower dead point immediately after the feedrate
change command is issued (0) / at the upper dead point
immediately after the feedrate change command is
issued (1)
#7 CHF On the chopping screen, a chopping feedrate, can be set
(0) / cannot be set (1)
08370 Chopping axis
08371 Chopping reference point (point R)
08372 Chopping upper dead point
08373 Chopping lower dead point
08374 Chopping feedrate
08375 Maximum chopping feedrate <Axis>
PRM1420
08376 Chopping compensation factor [%]
08377 Chopping compensation start tolerance [Detection unit]
7.2.58 AI Contour Control

08451 AI contour control
#4 ZAG The deceleration function based on cutting load in AI PRM
contour control (deceleration based on Z-axis fall angle) 8456-
is, not performed (0) / performed (1) 8458
#7 NOF In AI contour control, an F command is, not ignored (0) / PRM
ignored (1) 8465
352
7 PARAMETERS
08456 Override for range 2 that is applied during deceleration PRM
according to the cutting load in AI contour control [%] 19515#1
08457 Override for range 3 that is applied during deceleration 19516
according to the cutting load in AI contour control [%]
08458 Override for range 4 that is applied during deceleration
according to the cutting load in AI contour control [%]
08459 Override
#3 OVRB For deceleration based on a feedrate difference or
acceleration rate in AI contour control, override is,
08465 Maximum allowable feedrate for AI contour control PRM
8451#7
08466 Maximum allowable feedrate for AI contour control PRM
(when a rotary axis is specified singly) 8451#7,
8465
08486 Maximum travel distance of a block where smooth
interpolation or Nano smoothing is applied
08487 Angle at which smooth interpolation or Nano smoothing
is turned off [deg]
08490 Minimum travel distance of a block where smooth
interpolation or Nano smoothing is applied
08491 Maximum tolerance for a block where smooth
interpolation is applied
08492 Minimum tolerance for a block where smooth PRM
interpolation is applied 8491
7.2.59 High-speed Position Switch

08500 Number of switches
#7 HPE The maximum number of high-speed position switches is,
6 (0) / 16 (1)
08501 Function setting
#0 HPF The output signal of a high-speed position switch is output
to, address Y (0) / address F (1)
#1 HPS The current position used with a high-speed position
switch, considers a servo error (0) / does not consider a
servo error (1)
#2 HPD When a high-speed position switch of direction decision
type has reached (not passed) a set coordinate in a
specified direction, the switch, does not operate (0) /
operates (1)
08504 Switch setting
#0 E01 The n-th high-speed position switch is, enabled (0) /
#1 E02 disabled (1)
#2 E03 E01 : n=1
#3 E04 E02 : n=2
#4 E05 :
#5 E06 E08 : n=8
#6 E07
#7 E08
08505 Switch setting
#0 E09 The n-th high-speed position switch is, enabled (0) /
#1 E10 disabled (1)
#2 E11 E09 : n=9
#3 E12 E10 : n=10
#4 E13 :
#5 E14 E16 : n=16
#6 E15
#7 E16
353
B-63947EN/01
08508 Switch operation setting

#0 D01 The output type of the n-th high-speed position switch is,
#1 D02 normal type (0) / direction decision type (1)
#2 D03 D01 : n=1
#3 D04 D02 : n=2
#4 D05 :
#5 D06 D08 : n=8
#6 D07
#7 D08
08509 Switch operation setting
#0 D09 The output type of the n-th high-speed position switch is,
#1 D10 normal type (0) / direction decision type (1)
#2 D11 D09 : n=9
#3 D12 D10 : n=10
#4 D13 :
#5 D14 D16 : n=16
#6 D15
#7 D16 7
08512 Switch operation setting (Direction setting of direction
decision type when the signal is on)
#0 A01 The passage direction in which the n-th high-speed
#1 A02 position switch is turned on is,
#2 A03 Negative (-) direction (0) / positive (+) direction (1)
#3 A04 A01 : n=1
#4 A05 A02 : n=2
#5 A06 :
#6 A07 A08 : n=8
#7 A08
decision type when the signal is on)
#0 A09 The passage direction in which the n-th high-speed
#1 A10 position switch is turned on is,
#2 A11 Negative (-) direction (0) / positive (+) direction (1)
#3 A12 A09 : n=9
#4 A13 A10 : n=10
#5 A14 :
#6 A15 A16 : n=16
#7 A16
decision type when the signal is off)
#0 B01 The passage direction in which the n-th high-speed
#1 B02 position switch is turned off is,
#2 B03 Negative (-) direction (0) / positive (+) direction (1)
#3 B04 B01 : n=1
#4 B05 B02 : n=2
#5 B06 :
#6 B07 B08 : n=8
#7 B08
decision type when the signal is off)
#0 B09 The passage direction in which the n-th high-speed
#1 B10 position switch is turned off is,
#2 B11 Negative (-) direction (0) / positive (+) direction (1)
#3 B12 B09 : n=9
#4 B13 B10 : n=10
#5 B14 :
#6 B15 B16 : n=16
#7 B16
08565 Output address of the high-speed position switch signal PRM
8501#0
354
7 PARAMETERS
08570 Controlled axis for which the 1st high-speed position
switch function is performed
08571 Controlled axis for which the 2nd high-speed position
: :
08579 Controlled axis for which the 10th high-speed position
08580 Maximum value of the operation range of the 1st
high-speed position switch
08581 Maximum value of the operation range of the 2nd
: :
08589 Maximum value of the operation range of the tenth
08590 Minimum value of the operation range of the 1st
08591 Minimum value of the operation range of the 2nd
: :
08599 Minimum value of the operation range of the tenth
7.2.60 Others
08650 Setting for the C language executor
#0 RSK When the <RESET> key is pressed, the key code is, not passed
to the application (0) / passed to the application (1)
#1 CNA If a CNC alarm is issued when the user screen for the C language
executor is displayed, the screen display is, automatically
switched to the alarm screen (depending on the setting of
parameter (No. 3111#7)) (0) / not switched to the alarm screen (1)
#2 EKY The extended portion of the MDI keys is, not read (0) / read (1)
08661 Size of the variable area used by the C language executor
[K bytes]
08662 Size of the SRAM disk used by the C language executor [K bytes]
08663 Time zone setting [sec]
08760 Program number of data input/output (Power Mate CNC
manager)
08781 DRAM size used for the C language executor
08811 2-word parameter 1 for the machine tool builder
7.2.61 Maintenance
08900 Parameter setting
#0 PWE The setting, from an external device and MDI panel, of
those parameters that cannot be set by setting input is,
08901 Maintenance
#0 FAN A fan motor error is, detected (0) / not detected (1) Usually,
#7 MEN The periodic maintenance screen is, displayed (0) / not set 0.
displayed (1)
08911 Percentage for life warning display on the periodic
maintenance screen [%]
08950 Display of memory contents
#0 MEM The memory contents display screen is, not displayed (0) /
displayed (1)
355
B-63947EN/01
7.2.62 Macro Executor

09000 P-CODE macro, Program display
#0 SQN During execution of a registered program, only the
program number/sequence number of the calling user
program is displayed (0) / the program
number/sequence number of the macro being executed
is displayed (1)
#1 NDP The P-CODE variable screen is, not displayed (0) /
displayed (1)
#2 STP When a conversational macro/auxiliary macro is
executed from the debug function, the continuous
execution mode is used (0) / the single block execution
mode is used (1)
#4 RSC Upon reset, the P-CODE macro common variables are, #100-#199
not set to <null> (0) / set to <null> (1) PRM6001#6
09002 Program number of a conversational macro/auxiliary PRM9003
macro subject to break operation 7
09003 Sequence number of a conversational macro/auxiliary
macro subject to break operation
09010 Macro call from an axis address
#0 01M Macro call from the address of the n-th axis in the path PRM9020
#1 02M is, enabled (0) / disabled (1) 9021
#2 03M 01M : n=1
#3 04M 02M : n=2
#4 05M :
#5 06M 08M : n=8
#6 07M
#7 08M
09011 Conversational macro
#0 MTC Calling of a special macro/subprogram by using a T PRM9002#0
code is, enabled (0) / disabled (1) 9005#7
#2 VRM The conversational macro screen is, displayed with a
background color (0) / not displayed with a background
color (1)
09012 Special macro
#0 MDC Calling of a special macro by using a D code is,
#1 MHC Calling of a special macro by using an H code is,
#2 MSC Calling of a special macro by using an S code is,
09013 Program call by a macro
#1 MCA When the code set in a parameter for calling a custom
macro is the same as the code set in a compile
parameter for calling an execution macro, the program
called is, the execution macro(0) / the custom macro(1)
#0 09M Calling of a macro from the address of the n-th axis in PRM9010
#1 10M the path is,enabled (0) / disabled (1) 9021
#2 11M 09M : n=9
#3 12M 10M : n=10
#4 13M :
#5 14M 16M : n=16
#6 15M 16M : n=16
#7 16M
#0 17M Calling of a macro from the address of the n-th axis in PRM9010
#1 18M the path is, 9020
#2 19M enabled (0) / disabled (1)
#3 20M 17M : n=17
#4 21M 18M : n=18
#5 22M :
#6 23M 24M : n=24
#7 24M
356
7 PARAMETERS
09026 Linear interpolation <Axis>
#0 NDT Inclusion in a calculated cutting distance value is, Linear inter-
performed (0) / not performed (1) polation only
09032 Background color
#0 BGW When a monochrome LCD unit is used, the background
color is, black (0) / white (1)
09033 P-CODE macro
#0 DBG Conversational macros are placed in, normal mode (0) /
debug mode (1)
#1 SEP Auxiliary macros/conversational macros are executed,
in series (0) / in parallel (1)
#2 MVD Monochrome display is based on, two tones (0) /
brightness modulation mode (1)
#3 EV2 P-CODE variables (#10000 and up) hold, floating-point
numbers (0) / integers (1)
#4 EVF The extended P-CODE variables (#20000 and up) hold,
floating-point numbers (0) / integers (1)
#5 SHS When the high-speed cycle cutting function is enabled,
#20000 and up are, high-speed cycle cutting variables
(0) / P-CODE variables (1)
09034 P-CODE macro common variable
#0 MV0 The P-CODE macro common variables are,
#1 MV1 independent common variables (0) / shared as custom
#2 MV2 macro common variables (1)
#3 MV3 MV0 : #100 to 149
#4 MV4 MV1 : #150 to 199
#5 MV5 MV2 : #500 to 549
#6 MV6 MV3 : #550 to 599
#7 MV7 MV4 : #600 to 699
MV5 : #700 to 799
MV6 : #800 to 899
MV7 : #900 to 999
09035 Interlock for each axis direction, P-CODE macro
#0 XIT Interlock for each axis direction is, disabled (0) / PRM9070
enabled (1)
#1 RCN Upon NC reset, reader/puncher control based on
conversational macros is, not interrupted (0) /
interrupted with completion code (#8539) = 12 (1)
#3 EUI For P-CODE macros, UI00 to UI15 and UO00 to UO15
are used (0) / EUI00 to EUI15 and EUO00 to EUO15
are used (1)
#4 CWB If reader/puncher interface control data transmission
(G336) or macro variable data output (G338) is
specified, the data is output, when an EOB is detected
(0) / when the transmit buffer is full or the line is closed
(1)
#5 NPA If automatic operation is performed without selecting a ALM
main program when P-CODE workpiece number PS1079
search is enabled, the operation is not performed (0) /
an alarm is issued (1)
09036 Auxiliary macro
#2 AFT Forced termination of the auxiliary macro function is, Usually, set
disabled (0) / enabled (1) 0.
#3 AMP When an auxiliary macro is used for input/output based
on the reader/puncher interface/memory card control
function, status is, displayed (0) / not displayed (1)
#4 NOB A G310 (relative coordinate preset and PMC data
read/write function) block in an execution macro is
executed, as an NC statement (0) / as a macro
statement (1)
09048 P-CODE macro number of an execution macro
09049 P-CODE macro number of a conversation macro
09050 P-CODE macro number of an auxiliary macro
09051 Area number for P-CODE variables (#10000 and up)
357
B-63947EN/01
09052 Area number for extended P-CODE variables (#20000

and up)
09053 Number of P-CODE variables (#10000 and up)
09054 Number of extended P-CODE variables (#20000 and
up)
09066 Number of auxiliary macro execution blocks PRM9033#1
09067 Protection range of P-CODE macro common variables PRM9068
(#500 to #999) (start)
09068 Protection range of P-CODE macro common variables
(#500 to #999) (end)
09069 PMC internal relay (R area) address of an interlock
mode signal for each axis direction
09070 PMC internal relay (R area) bit position of an interlock PRM9035#0
mode signal for each axis direction
09072 Number of blocks that execute macro statements in an
execution macro program successively
7
7.2.63 Wrong Operation Prevention Function
10000 Lower limit 1 of tool offsets No.01
: :
10020 Upper limit 1 of tool offsets No.01
: :
: :
: :
: :
: :
: :
: :
: :
: :
: :
358
7 PARAMETERS
: :
10240 Lower limit 1 of a tool offset number range No.01 PRM
10241 Lower limit 1 of a tool offset number range No.02 10000 -
: : 10239
10259 Lower limit 1 of a tool offset number range No.20
10260 Upper limit 1 of a tool offset number range No.01
: :
10296 Lower limit 2 of a tool offset number range No.01 PRM
10297 Lower limit 2 of a tool offset number range No.02 10280 -
10298 Lower limit 2 of a tool offset number range No.03 10295
10299 Lower limit 2 of a tool offset number range No.04
10300 Upper limit 2 of a tool offset number range No.01 PRM
10301 Upper limit 2 of a tool offset number range No.02 10280 -
10302 Upper limit 2 of a tool offset number range No.03 0295
10304 Lower limit of workpiece origin offsets No.01 <Axis>
10305 Lower limit of workpiece origin offsets No.02
: :
10309 Lower limit of workpiece origin offsets No.06
10310 Upper limit of workpiece origin offsets No.01 <Axis>
10311 Upper limit of workpiece origin offsets No.02
: :
10315 Upper limit of workpiece origin offsets No.06
10316 Lower limit of a workpiece origin offset range No.01 PRM
10317 Lower limit of a workpiece origin offset range No.02 10304 -
: : 10315
10321 Lower limit of a workpiece origin offset range No.06
10322 Upper limit of a workpiece origin offset range No.01 PRM
10323 Upper limit of a workpiece origin offset range No.02 10304 -
: : 10315
10327 Upper limit of a workpiece origin offset range No.06
10328 Lower limit of workpiece shifts <Axis>
10329 Upper limit of workpiece shifts <Axis>
10330 Confirmation message
#0 IIC At the time of incremental input, a confirmation message
is, displayed (0) / not displayed (1)
#1 PDC At the time of program deletion, a confirmation message
#2 ADC At the time of deletion of all data, a confirmation message
#3 HSC When a cycle start is executed halfway in the program, a
confirmation message is, displayed (0) / not displayed (1)
359
B-63947EN/01
#4 MID Updated modal information is, highlighted (0) / not

highlighted (1)
#5 EBC Program sum checking is, disabled (0) / enabled (1)
#6 ASD Axis state display is, enabled (0) / disabled (1)
10331 Lower limit of external workpiece origin offsets <Axis>
10332 Upper limit of external workpiece origin offsets <Axis>
10340 Backup
#0 ABP Automatic data backup at power-on time is, disabled (0) /
enabled (1)
#1 ABI Overwrite-prohibited backup data is, disabled (0) /
enabled (1)
#2 AAP Backup of directory information and NC programs in the
FROM is, disabled (0) / enabled (1)
#6 EIB When the power to the CNC is turned on next time, PRM
overwrite-prohibited backup data is, not updated (0) / 10342
updated (1) 10340 #1
#7 EEB In the emergency stop state, backup operation is, not
executed (0) / executed (1) 7
10341 Interval of automatic and periodical data backup
10342 Number of times backup data is held
10360 Bias value of a tool offset number for each axis M series
10361 Bias value of a tool length compensation number for M series
each axis
7.2.64 Screen Display Colors 2

10421 RGB value of color palette 1 for text for color set 2
: :
: :
7.2.65 Dual Check Safety

10500 Dual check safety functions
#0 AVM The MCC-off signal (*MCFVx) is set to 0, when one of the
few types of servo-off alarms is issued (0) / regardless of
the type of servo-off alarm (1)
#1 APM The MCC-off signal (*MCFPx) is set to 0, when one of the
few types of spindle alarms (SPxxxx) is issued (0) /
regardless of the type of spindle alarm (1)
#3 STP At power-on time, an MCC shut-off test is, performed (0) /
not performed (1)
10501 Axis corresponding to the 33rd safe position switch PRM
10502 Axis corresponding to the 34th safe position switch 13880 -
: : 13911
10532 Axis corresponding to the 64th safe position switch
10533 Maximum operation range of the 33rd safe position switch PRM
10534 Maximum operation range of the 34th safe position switch 13920 -
: : 13951
10564 Maximum operation range of the 64th safe position switch
10565 Minimum operation range of the 33rd safe position switch PRM
10566 Minimum operation range of the 34th safe position switch 13960 -
: : 13911
10596 Minimum operation range of the 64th safe position switch
7.2.66 Diagnosis
10600 Waveform diagnosis
#0 IOF Waveform diagnostic data is output in, 30i/31i/32i format
(0) / 16i/18i/21i format (1)
360
7 PARAMETERS
7.2.67 Three-dimensional Error Compensation
10800 1st compensation axis for 3-dimensional error compensation
10801 2nd compensation axis for 3-dimensional error compensation
10802 3rd compensation axis for 3-dimensional error compensation
10803 Number of compensation points for 3-dimensional error
compensation (1st compensation axis)
compensation (2nd compensation axis)
compensation (3rd compensation axis)
10806 Compensation point number of the reference position for
3-dimensional error compensation (1st compensation axis)
3-dimensional error compensation (2nd compensation axis)
3-dimensional error compensation (3rd compensation axis)
10809 Magnification for 3-dimensional error compensation (1st
compensation axis)
10810 Magnification for 3-dimensional error compensation (2nd
compensation axis)
10811 Magnification for 3-dimensional error compensation (3rd
compensation axis)
10812 Compensation interval for 3-dimensional error compensation
(1st compensation axis)
(2nd compensation axis)
(3rd compensation axis)
7.2.68 Rotation Area Interference Check

10900 Axis number of the 1st axis on the plane for moving group D
10901 Axis number of the 2nd axis on the plane for moving group D
10902 Axis number of the rotary axis for rotating group D
10903 Maximum point on the 1st axis of rectangle 1 in group D
10904 Minimum point on the 1st axis of rectangle 1 in group D
10905 Maximum point on the 2nd axis of rectangle 1 in group D
10906 Minimum point on the 2nd axis of rectangle 1 in group D
10919 Center of rotation of the 1st axis for rotating group D
10920 Center of rotation of the 2nd axis for rotating group D
10921 Reference rotation angle for the rotary axis in group D [deg]
7.2.69 Spindle Control Based on Servo Motor/Cs

Contour Control
11000 Servo motor, Cs contour control <Axis>
#6 CRV The spindle control function based on Cs contour PRM11010
control is, not performed (0) / performed (1)
#7 SRV The rotary tool control function based on the servo PRM11010
motor is, disabled (0) / enabled (1)
361
B-63947EN/01
11001 Rigid tapping based on the servo motor/Cs contour <Axis>

control
#0 SRB Acceleration/deceleration after interpolation for cutting
feed in rigid tapping based on the servo motor/Cs
contour control is, linear acc./dec. (0) / bell-shaped
acc./dec. (1)
#2 DDM The motor used for rotary tool control base on the servo PRM
motor is, not a DD motor (0) / a DD motor (1) 2455, 2456
11005 Spindle synchronization in Cs contour control
#7 CSY Spindle synchronization using Cs contour control is
performed (0) / normal spindle synchronization is
performed (1)
11010 Spindle number with which the rotary tool control <Axis>
function based on the servo motor/the spindle control PRM
function based on Cs contour control is performed 11000#7,#6
11011 Travel distance per rotary tool axis revolution [deg] <Axis>
11012 Spindle indexing speed [min-1] <Axis>
7
11013 Positional deviation limit during axis-by-axis movement <Axis>
[Detection unit]
11014 Positional deviation limit at axis-by-axis stop time <Axis>
[Detection unit]
11015 Maximum motor speed [min-1] <Axis>
11020 Acceleration/deceleration switching speed for each axis <Axis>
(1st step) [min-1]
11021 Acceleration/deceleration switching speed for each axis <Axis>
(2nd step) [min-1]
11030 Acceleration/deceleration for each axis 1 (section 1) <Axis>
[min-1/s]
[min-1/s]
[min-1/s]
11040 Spindle phase synchronization compensation data
based on Cs contour control [Pulse]
11041 Spindle phase synchronization control shift amount
based on Cs contour control [deg]
11042 Spindle synchronization speed arrival level based on
Cs contour control [min-1]
11050 Maximum allowable acceleration in acc./dec. before <Axis>
interpolation for each axis
11051 Acceleration change time in bell-shaped acc./dec. PRM11050
before interpolation [ms]
11052 Time constant for acc./dec. after cutting feed <Axis>
interpolation in the mode of acc./dec. before
interpolation [ms]
11060 Time constant for rigid tapping based on the servo <Axis>
motor/Cs contour control (1st gear stage) [ms]
motor/Cs contour control (2nd gear stage) [ms]
motor/Cs contour control (3rd gear stage) [ms]
motor/Cs contour control (4th gear stage) [ms]
11065 Time constant for retraction in rigid tapping based on <Axis>
the servo motor/Cs contour control (1st gear stage)
[ms]
the servo motor/Cs contour control (2nd gear stage)
[ms]
the servo motor/Cs contour control (3rd gear stage)
[ms]
362
7 PARAMETERS
the servo motor/Cs contour control (4th gear stage)
[ms]
11090 Path with which a rotation command is specified for PRM
each axis 3702#2=0
3703#3=1
7.2.70 Path Table Operation Function

11100 M code for starting path table operation
11101 Allowable difference between the value specified in the <Axis>
start block and coordinate in path table operation
11102 Allowable difference between the value specified in the
start block and spindle speed in path table operation
[min-1]
11103 Time constant for acc./dec. at deceleration stop time or
restart time [ms]
11104 Path table operation
#0 PCA In the path table operation mode, position specification
and reference coordinates are based on, machine
coordinates (0) / absolute coordinates (1)
11108 Override change value per 4 msec (or 8 msec) in path
table operation [%]
11109 Path table operation
#1 PBB The type of acc./dec. in the path table operation mode is,
linear acc./dec. (0) / bell-shaped acc./dec. (1)
11110 Acceleration/deceleration time constant in the path table
operation mode [ms]
11200 Tool direction compensation
#0 RCM When work setting error compensation is performed with
a 5-axis machine or when tool center point control is
exercised in the 3-dimensional coordinate system
conversion/tilted working plane machining specification
mode, tool direction compensation (compensation about
the rotary axis) is, not performed (0) / performed (1)
11201 Number of fractional digits for a rotation direction error in
work setting error compensation
11202 Override value for the maximum cutting feedrate in the PRM1432
work setting error compensation mode [%] 11200#0
11203 Override value for the rapid traverse rate in the work PRM1420
setting error compensation mode [%] 11200#0
11204 Angle assumed to be a singular point attitude (work PRM
setting error compensation) [deg] 11200#0
11208 Numerator (a) for determining the inclination of an <Axis>
approximation error line for thermal deviation
compensation
11209 Denominator (b) for determining the inclination of an <Axis>
approximation error line for thermal deviation
compensation
11210 Reference position, P0, for thermal deviation <Axis>
compensation
11211 Thermal deviation compensation K0 <Axis>
11240 AI contour control mode cancel state
#0 FAE In positioning when the AI contour control mode cancel
state is set, optimum torque acc./dec. is, disabled (0) /
enabled (1)
11300 Information screen/FOCAS2
#3 ASH When "actual speed" is called through FOCAS2 and the PRM
PMC window, data updated at the conventional intervals 11313#7
(about 32 msec) is read (0) / data updated at high-speed
intervals is read (1)
#4 FPI The number of already registered programs obtained
with the cnc_rdproginfo() function, includes the number
of initial folders (0) / does not include the number of initial
folders (1)
363
B-63947EN/01
#5 MPH When "machine coordinate in the machine unit not

considering acc./dec. delay and servo delay" is read
through FOCAS2 and the PMC window, data updated at
the conventional intervals (about 32 msec) is read (0) /
data updated at high-speed intervals is read (1)
#6 ATH When "disturbance load torque" is read through FOCAS2
and the PMC window, data updated at the conventional
intervals (about 32 msec) is read (0) / data updated at
high-speed intervals is read (1)
#7 MUC When "modal data" is read through FOCAS2 and the
PMC window, data with a maximum delay of about 32
msec is read (0) / data that causes no delay in automatic
operation is read (1)
11302 Screen display in the initial state
#0 SPG In the initial state, the program screen provides,
full-screen display (0) / small-screen display (1)
#1 SPR In the initial state, the parameter screen provides,
full-screen display (0) / small-screen display (1) 7
#2 SDG In the initial state, the diagnosis screen provides,
full-screen display (0) / small-screen display (1)
#4 ADC The function for switching to the previous screen when
an alarm is reset on the alarm screen, and the function
for switching to the alarm screen when the MESSAGE
key is pressed then switching to the previous screen
when the MESSAGE key is pressed again are, disabled
(0) / enabled (1)
#5 PES When a program search is made on the program
directory screen, the cursor moves to the found program
on the program directory screen (0) / the screen display
is switched to the editing screen after the specified
program is selected as a main program (1)
#6 FPF For each path, a folder-fixed program directory is, not
displayed (0) / displayed (1)
#7 CPG The program-related screen is, not switched according to
the CNC mode (0) / switched according to the CNC mode
(1)
11303 Servo load meter axis display, Program display
#0 LDP Servo load meter axis display, interacts with coordinate
axis display (0) / does not interact with coordinate axis
display (1)
#1 SRC Upon reset in program character editing, blocks not
saved yet are, not saved (0) / saved (1)
#2 DVP On the program directory screen, folders for the
maximum number of paths that can be set in the system
are displayed (0) / folders for the number of valid paths
are displayed (1)
#3 BDP The program display position at single block stop time is, MEM
the start of the block that has been just executed (0) / the operation
start of the next block (1)
#4 DPM In MDI program execution, a block for calling an
execution macro is, not displayed (0) / displayed (1)
#5 ISQ In MDI editing, automatic sequence number insertion is,
11304 Multi-path simultaneous display group
#0 PGR At the time of path selection signal switching, display of a
multi-path simultaneous display group is, not switched (0)
/ switched to the group that includes a selected path (1)
#1 GGD The G code guidance screen is, not displayed (0) /
displayed (1)
#3 ON8 Program numbers are, 4 digits long (0) / 8 digits long (1)
11305 Extension of the number of axes displayed
simultaneously
0: 5 axes, 1: 10 axes, 2: 20 axes
364
7 PARAMETERS
11307 Coordinate display order PRM
11305
Coordinate display order
Value 1 2 3 4
0 Relative Absolute Machine Remaining move
coordinate coordinate coordinate distance
1 Relative Machine Absolute Remaining move
2 Relative Remaining move Absolute Machine
coordinate distance coordinate coordinate
3 Absolute Machine Relative Remaining move
4 Absolute Remaining move Relative Machine
5 Machine Remaining move Relative Absolute
11308 Alarm, Data output, Spindle name

#0 DOP If an alarm is issued with a path not currently displayed,
the screen display, does not switch to the alarm screen
(0) / switches to the alarm screen (1)
#1 COW If the memory card already holds a file with a name ALM
specified for output to the memory card, the file is, not SR1973
overwritten (0) / overwritten (1)
#2 EAS If the name of an extended axis or extended spindle is
used, the axis names and spindle names of the path,
must not be used (0) / may be used (1)
11309 Value set in system variable #5900
11310 Selection of a PMC for performing read/write operation
with the external touch panel
0,1: 1st PMC, 2: 2nd PMC, 3: 3rd PMC
11311 Password for the embedded macro function PRM
11312
11312 Keyword for the embedded macro function PRM
11311
11313 Acceleration/deceleration delay, Servo delay
#7 EMP Through FOCAS2 and the PMC window, machine
coordinates in the machine unit considering acc./dec.
delay and servo delay, cannot be read (0) / can be read
(1)
11400 T code for tool offset
#0 MTL8D A T code used for automatic tool offset change is, 4 digits
long (with DI signals G68 and G69 used) (0) / 8 digits
long (with DI signals G0525-G0528 used) (1)
11401 Distance to the plus (+) contact surface of the touch
sensor
11402 Distance to the minus (-) contact surface of the touch
sensor
#0 TDO With a machining center system, the setting of parameter
(No. 5004#1) is valid.
#1 QSS As the G signals for the function for direct input of offset
value measured B, G0546 and G0547 as used with a
machining center system are used.
11500 PROFIBUS master
#0 PMF Speeding up of the PROFIBUS master function is,
11600 Rotary axis rotation direction
#0 IMCW The forward rotation direction of one of the two rotation
axes that can be placed under hypothetical axis control
is, counterclockwise (0) / clockwise (1)
#4 D3A If a compensation vector is not canceled in 3-dimensional ALM
coordinate system conversion cancellation, an alarm is PS5462
issued (0) / no alarm is issued (1)
#6 PPS The unit of operation for polar coordinate interpolation is
matched, with a finer axis (0) / with the increment system
of the rotary axis (1)
365
B-63947EN/01
#7 PVC In polar coordinate interpolation, the clamp speed always

is, not recalculated at interpolation intervals (0) /
recalculated at interpolation intervals (1)
11610 Linear axis number subject to hypothetical axis control
11611 Rotary axis number subject to hypothetical axis control
11612 Eccentric amount of a tool subject to hypothetical axis
control
11613 Hypothetical axis name subject to hypothetical axis
control
11614 Positive-direction soft limit of a hypothetical axis under
hypothetical axis control
11615 Negative-direction soft limit of a hypothetical axis under
hypothetical axis control
11616 M code for turning on the hypothetical axis control mode
11617 M code for turning off the hypothetical axis control mode
11618 Setting which axis in the basic coordinate system is used
as a hypothetical axis used for hypothetical axis control 7
11651 Cutting time count in dry run
#7 DCO In dry run, cutting time is, not counted (0) / counted (1)
11800 Number of bytes of address Y to which the servo motor PRM1891
speed detection signal is output
11801 Value of address Y to which the spindle motor speed PRM4345
detection signal is output
7.2.71 PMC
11900 PMC of execution order 1 in the multi-PMC function
11905 Execution time percentage (%) of PMC of execution order 1
in the multi-PMC function
11910 I/O Link channel 1 input/output addresses
11915 Input/output address of the 2nd block of I/O Link channel 1
11920 Input/output addresses of CNC-PMC interface 1
11930 PMC execution period, Execution period of ladder level 1
11931 Ladder execution with the PMC, External message
#0 PCC For a multi-path PMC, ladder execution and stop are,
controlled individually for each PMC path (0) / controlled
simultaneously for all PMC paths (1)
#1 M16 In external data input or external message display, the
number of displayable external alarm messages or external
operator messages is, 4 (0) / 16 (1)
11932 PMC inter-path interface
11940 Type of PMC memory of the 1st-path PMC
11941 Type of PMC memory of the 2nd-path PMC
366
7 PARAMETERS
11942 Type of PMC memory of the 3rd-path PMC
7.2.72 Dual Check Safety 2

11950 1st byte address of Safety input signal for CNC CPU
11951 2nd byte address of Safety input signal for CNC CPU
11952 3rd byte address of Safety input signal for CNC CPU
11953 4th byte address of Safety input signal for CNC CPU
11960 1st byte address of Safety output signal for CNC CPU
11961 2nd byte address of Safety output signal for CNC CPU
11962 3rd byte address of Safety output signal for CNC CPU
11963 4th byte address of Safety output signal for CNC CPU
11970 1st byte address of Safety input signal for PMC CPU
11971 2nd byte address of Safety input signal for PMC CPU
11972 3rd byte address of Safety input signal for PMC CPU
11973 4th byte address of Safety input signal for PMC CPU
11980 1st byte address of Safety output signal for PMC CPU
11981 2nd byte address of Safety output signal for PMC CPU
11982 3rd byte address of Safety output signal for PMC CPU
11983 4th byte address of Safety output signal for PMC CPU
7.2.73 Embedded Macro Functions

12020 G code number for the embedded macro function (1st set)
12021 Macro program number for the embedded macro function (1st set)
12022 Number of G code macros for the embedded machine function (1st set)
12023 G code number for the embedded macro function (2nd set)
12024 Macro program number for the embedded macro function (2nd set)
12025 Number of G code macros for the embedded machine function (2nd set)
12026 G code number for the embedded macro function (3rd set)
12027 Macro program number for the embedded macro function (3rd set)
12028 Number of G code macros for the embedded machine function (3rd set)
12029 G code number for the embedded macro function (4th set)
12030 Macro program number for the embedded macro function (4th set)
12031 Number of G code macros for the embedded machine function (4th set)
367
B-63947EN/01
7.2.74 High-speed Position Switch 2

12201 Controlled axis for which the 11th high-speed position PRM
switch function is performed 8500#7
switch function is performed 7
12221 Maximum value of the operation range of the 11th
12241 Minimum value of the operation range of the 11th
7.2.75 Malfunction Protection

12255 Maximum servo motor speed <Axis>
12256 Maximum servo motor acceleration rate <Axis>
7.2.76 Manual Handle 2

12300 X address of the 1st manual handle PRM7105#1
12301 X address of the 2nd manual handle PRM7105#1
12302 X address of the 3rd manual handle PRM7105#1
12303 X address of the 4th manual handle PRM7105#1
12304 X address of the 5th manual handle PRM7105#1
12310 States of the 1st manual handle feed axis selection
signals when tool axis direction handle feed/interrupt
and table-based vertical direction handle feed/interrupt
are performed
signals when a movement is made in the 1st axis
direction in tool axis normal direction handle
feed/interrupt and table-based horizontal direction
handle feed/interrupt
368
7 PARAMETERS
signals when a movement is made in the 2nd axis
direction in tool axis normal direction handle
feed/interrupt and table-based horizontal direction
handle feed/interrupt
signals when the 1st rotary axis is turned in tool tip
center rotation handle feed/interrupt
signals when the 2nd rotary axis is turned in tool tip
center rotation handle feed/interrupt
12318 Tool length in 3-dimensional manual feed
12320 3-dimensional manual feed
#0 TWD The directions of 3-dimensional manual feed (other
than tool tip center rotation feed) when the tilted
working plane command is issued are, the same as
those not in the tilted working plane command (0) / X,
Y, and Z directions in the feature coordinate system (1)
#1 FLL The directions of tool axis normal direction feed or
table-based horizontal direction feed in the
3-dimensional manual feed mode are, tool axis normal
direction 1 (table-based horizontal direction 1) and tool
axis normal direction 2 (table-based horizontal
direction 2) (0) / longitude direction and latitude
direction (1)
#2 JFR As the feedrate of 5-axis machining jog feed or PRM
incremental feed, the dry run rate is used (0) / the jog 1410,1423
feedrate is used (1)
12321 Normal axis direction
1: Positive (+) X-axis direction / 2: Positive (+) Y-axis direction /
3: Positive (+) Z-axis direction /
0: Reference tool axis direction (PRM19697)
12322 Angle used to determine whether to assume the tool
axis direction to be parallel to the normal direction
(PRM 12321) [deg]
12323 Manual handle number subject to 3-dimensional
manual feed
12330 Pulse (channel 1) 1 of the manual pulse generator
#0 G10 When PMC group 0 (channel 1) is a Power Mate or I/O
Link β, the pulses from the manual pulse generator
connected to the I/O Link are, transferred to that group
(0) / not transferred to that group (1)
369
B-63947EN/01

7
#2 G1A When PMC group 10 (channel 1) is a Power Mate or
I/O Link β, the pulses from the manual pulse generator
#3 G1B When PMC group 11 (channel 1) is a Power Mate or
#4 G1C When PMC group 12 (channel 1) is a Power Mate or
#5 G1D When PMC group 13 (channel 1) is a Power Mate or
#6 G1E When PMC group 14 (channel 1) is a Power Mate or
#7 G1F When PMC group 15 (channel 1) is a Power Mate or
370
7 PARAMETERS
371
B-63947EN/01

7
372
7 PARAMETERS
12340 PMC path number of the 1st manual handle connected PRM
to the I/O Link 12300 -
12341 PMC path number of the 2nd manual handle 12304
connected to the I/O Link
12342 PMC path number of the 3rd manual handle connected
to the I/O Link
12343 PMC path number of the 4th manual handle connected
to the I/O Link
12344 PMC path number of the 5th manual handle connected
to the I/O Link
12350 Manual handle feed magnification, m, for each axis <Axis>
PRM7113
373
B-63947EN/01
12351 Manual handle feed magnification, n, for each axis <Axis>

PRM7114
12388 Macro program number for measurement execution
12390 M code for orientation for positioning the spindle at a
position of 0°
position of 90°
position of 180°
position of 270°
12394 User program called to make a manual tool
measurement
12395 User program called to make a manual workpiece
measurement
12396 User program called to make an automatic tool
measurement 7
12397 User program called to make an automatic workpiece
measurement
12600 Axis identification number for a programmed
synchronous, composite, or superimposed control
command
12730 Acceleration/deceleration constant in PMC axis control
#0 PTC The linear acc./dec. time constant for speed-specified PRM
continuous feed in PMC axis control is, not extended 8007#2
(0) / extended (1)
12731 Linear acc./dec. time constant 2 for speed-specified <Axis>
continuous feed in PMC axis control [msec/1000 min-1]
12735 Time constant switch speed 1 for speed-specified <Axis>
continuous feed in PMC axis control [min-1]
12750 External deceleration function
#0 EX4 External deceleration function setting 4 is, disabled (0)
/ enabled (1)
#1 EX5 External deceleration function setting 5 is, disabled (0)
/ enabled (1)
rapid traverse
axis
rapid traverse
axis
12990 G code modal group (1st) recorded in a history when
an alarm is issued
12991 G code modal group (2nd) recorded in a history when
an alarm is issued
12992 G code modal group (3rd) recorded in a history when
an alarm is issued
374
7 PARAMETERS
12993 G code modal group (4th) recorded in a history when
an alarm is issued
an alarm is issued
an alarm is issued
an alarm is issued
an alarm is issued
an alarm is issued
an alarm is issued
7.2.77 Display and Edit 2

13101 Baud rate, Monochrome LCD
#1 TPB As the baud rate used with the external touch panel, the
default (fixed at 19200 bps) is used (0) / the value set in
parameter (No. 123) for channel 2 is used (1)
#5 CSC As the cursor character and background of the monochrome
LCD unit, white and black are used, respectively. White is
used for the background other than the cursor in the update
block on the character editing screen of the monochrome
LCD unit. (0) / For the cursor character and background of
the monochrome LCD unit, black and gray are used,
respectively. Gray is used for the background other than the
cursor in the update block on the character editing screen of
the monochrome LCD unit. (1)
13102 Program editing
#5 BGD When the option for background editing is selected,
background editing on the program editing screen of the
CNC is, enabled (0) / disabled (1)
#6 BGI When the INPUT key is pressed with the cursor placed on a
program on the program directory screen, background
editing is, started (0) / not started (1)
#7 EDT During memory operation, program editing is, enabled (0) /
disabled (1)
13112 Servo or spindle information screen
#0 IDW Editing on the servo or spindle information screen is,
prohibited (0) / not prohibited (1)
#1 SVI The servo information screen is, displayed (0) / not displayed
(1)
#2 SPI The spindle information screen is, displayed (0) / not
displayed (1)
#6 NTA On the 3-dimensional manual feed screen, a table-based
pulse amount is, displayed (0) / not displayed (1)
#7 NTD On the 3-dimensional manual feed screen, a tool axis based
pulse amount is, displayed (0) / not displayed (1)
13113 Display of travel distance and feedrate for 3-dimensional
manual feed
#0 CLR Upon reset, the display of a travel distance by 3-dimensional
manual feed is, not cleared (0) / cleared (1)
#3 CFD As feedrate F, the 3-dimensional manual feed screen
displays, composite feedrate at the linear axis/rotary axis
control point (0) / feedrate at the tool tip (1)
13114 Screen mode
#0 P15 When the CNC screen display function is used on the
300i/310i/320i, the screen display mode used is, 10.4" mode
(0) / 15" mode (1)
13115 MDI key input
#0 ICT For MDI key input, the CTRL key is, enabled (0) / disabled
(1)
#1 IAT For MDI key input, the ALT key is, enabled (0) / disabled (1)
#2 ITB For MDI key input, the TAB key is, enabled (0) / disabled (1)
375
B-63947EN/01
#3 IAU For MDI key input, the AUX key is, enabled (0) / disabled (1)
#4 SI1 Soft key input of <, >, ¥, %, $, !, ~, :, ", and ' is, disabled (0) /
enabled (1)
#5 SI2 Input of (, ), ?, *, &, @,and _ by soft keys, and switching of
uppercase/lowercase input mode by soft keys are, disabled
(0) / enabled (1)
#6 KBC When lowercase letters are input on the standard
ONGP-MDI unit, '[' and ']' are, not converted to '<' and '>'
respectively (0) / converted to '<' and '>' respectively (1)
#7 P10 When the CNC screen display function is used on the
300is/310is/320is with a 15" display unit, the screen display
mode used is, 15" mode (0) / 10.4" mode (1)
13131 Group number for simultaneous display of multiple paths
13132 Simultaneous multi-path display order number
13140 1st character in spindle load meter display T
13141 2nd character in spindle load meter display series
7
7.2.78 Tool Management Functions
13200 Tool management functions
#0 TCF When a T code is specified with the tool management
function, a cartridge number and pot number found by
the NC are output (0) / the specified T code is output
without modification (1)
#1 THN When NX.T and HD.T are displayed with the tool
management function, the tool type numbers at the 1st
spindle position and the 1st standby position are
displayed (0) / the values specified from the PMC
window are displayed (1)
#2 TRT As the remaining lifetime value for outputting the tool PRM
life arrival notice signal, the remaining lifetime of the 13200#3=0
last tool is used (0) / the sum of the remaining lifetimes
of the tools with the same type number is used (1)
#3 ETE The tool life arrival notice signal is output, for each tool
type (0) / for each tool (1)
#4 TP2 The punch-out format of cartridge management data is,
new registration format (0) / modification format (1)
#5 T0O When T0 is specified, a tool search is made assuming
that the tool type number is 0 (0) / the cartridge number
and pot number are assumed to be 0 (1)
#6 NAM When a T code is specified, but a valid tool with a ALM
remaining lifetime cannot be found, an alarm is issued PS5317
(0) / the tool with the maximum tool management
number is selected from the tools of the specified tool
type number, and the TMFNFD signal (F315#6) is set
to 1 (1)
#7 NFD When a T code is specified, but a valid tool with a
remaining lifetime cannot be found in the cartridge, the
spindle position and standby position are also searched
(0) / the spindle position and standby position are not
searched (1)
13201 Tool management function screen display
#0 TDC The function for customizing the tool management data
screen is, disabled (0) / enabled (1)
#1 TDN On the screen dedicated to the tool management
function, tool life status is displayed using, up to 6
characters (0) / up to 12 characters (1)
#2 TDB Tool information is displayed, in conventional mode (0)
/ in 1/0 mode (1)
#3 TME Support for multi-edge tools with the tool management
#4 TFT Data extraction using those items that are specified on
the tool management table screen is, disabled (0) /
enabled (1)
376
7 PARAMETERS
13202 Tool management function screen display
#1 DCR On the tool management function screen, tool nose T series
radius compensation data is, displayed (0) / not Combined
displayed (1) type
#2 DOY On the tool management function screen, Y-axis offset T series
data is, displayed (0) / not displayed (1) Combined
type
#3 DOB On the tool management function screen, B-axis offset T series
data is, displayed (0) / not displayed (1) Combined
type
#4 DO2 On the tool management function screen, the 2nd T series
geometry tool offset data is, displayed (0) / not Combined
displayed (1) type
#6 DOT On the tool management function screen, the tool offset T series
data (X, Z) of the T series is, displayed (0) / not Combined
displayed (1) type
#7 DOM On the tool management function screen, the offset M series
data of the M series is, displayed (0) / not displayed (1) Combined
type
13203 Cartridge search
#0 NM1 The 1st cartridge is, searched (0) / not searched (1)
#1 NM2 The 2nd cartridge is, searched (0) / not searched (1)
#2 NM3 The 3rd cartridge is, searched (0) / not searched (1)
#3 NM4 The 4th cartridge is, searched (0) / not searched (1)
#4 TSI When support for multi-edge tools with the tool PRM
management function is enabled, a tool is found by 13201#3=1
remaining lifetime (0) / the tool placed at the spindle
position or standby position has priority in selection (1)
#5 NTS In tool search operation performed when support for PRM
multi-edge tools with the tool management function is 13201#3=1
enabled, the edge group including a tool whose edge
life has expired is, searched (0)/not searched (1)
#6 SWC When a tool is found from those with the same tool type PRM13260
number, a tool with a short lifetime is found (0) / a tool
with a small customization data number is found (1)
#7 TCN Tool life count operation is triggered by, M06/restart M
code (0) / T code (1)
13204 Tool management data protection key, Attach/detach
signal
#0 TDL The key-based protection function for tool management
data is, disabled (0) / enabled (1)
#1 ATA The tool attach signal, cartridge number signal, and pot
number signal are, used (0) / not used (1)
#2 DTA The tool detach signal, cartridge number signal, and pot
number signal are, used (0) / not used (1)
#3 MGL When the tool management function is used, the data
protection function based on the cartridge management
table signal is, disabled (0) / enabled (1)
#4 SWL When the tool management function is used, the data
protection function based on the spindle/standby
position table is, disabled (0) / enabled (1)
#5 TGI When tool management number 0 is specified in
programmable data input (G10), the CNC, does not
automatically select a free tool management number
(0) / automatically selects a free tool management
number (1)
13205 Cartridge search
#7 TMI When a tool offset command (H99, D99) is specified
with the tool management function, modal information
is based on, tool offset number set in specified tool
management data (0) / specified number (99) (1)
13220 Number of valid tools in tool management data
377
B-63947EN/01
13221 M code for tool life count restart

13222 Number of data items in the 1st cartridge
13223 Start pot number of the 1st cartridge
13227 Number of data items in the 2nd cartridge
13228 Start pot number of the 2nd cartridge
13232 Number of data items in the 3rd cartridge
13233 Start pot number of the 3rd cartridge
13237 Number of data items in the 4th cartridge
13238 Start pot number of the 4th cartridge
13240 Cartridge type
#0 MT1 The 1st cartridge is of, chain type (0) / matrix type (1) PRM13222
#1 MT2 The 2nd cartridge is of, chain type (0) / matrix type (1) PRM13227
#2 MT3 The 3rd cartridge is of, chain type (0) / matrix type (1) PRM13232
#3 MT4 The 4th cartridge is of, chain type (0) / matrix type (1) PRM13237
#6 MT7 The 7th cartridge is of, chain type (0) / matrix type (1) PRM13505 7
13241 Number of rows of the 1st cartridge (when the cartridge PRM
is of the matrix type) 13240#0
13242 Number of columns of the 1st cartridge (when the PRM
cartridge is of the matrix type) 13240#0
13243 Number of rows of the 2nd cartridge (when the PRM
13244 Number of columns of the 2nd cartridge (when the PRM
13245 Number of rows of the 3rd cartridge (when the cartridge PRM
13246 Number of columns of the 3rd cartridge (when the PRM
13247 Number of rows of the 4th cartridge (when the cartridge PRM
13248 Number of columns of the 4th cartridge (when the PRM
13250 Number of valid spindles
13251 Number of valid standby positions
13252 M code for specifying a particular tool
13260 Customization data number to be searched for PRM
13203#6
13265 Number for selecting a spindle position offset number in
tool management, and H code for enabling tool length
compensation in tool life management
13266 D code for enabling tool radius compensation in tool life
management
13267 Customization data number used as an identifier in the
PMC window for the tool management function
7.2.79 Straightness Compensation 2

of moving axis 4
of moving axis 4
of moving axis 4
of moving axis 4
of moving axis 5
of moving axis 5
of moving axis 5
of moving axis 5
378
7 PARAMETERS
of moving axis 6
of moving axis 6
of moving axis 6
of moving axis 6
13381 Number of the straightness compensation point at the
farthest end on the minus (-) side on moving axis 1
13391 Straightness compensation: Compensation magnification
of moving axis 1
of moving axis 2
of moving axis 3
of moving axis 4
of moving axis 5
of moving axis 6
13500 Start number of main tool offset numbers M series
379
B-63947EN/01

13510 Number of rows of the 5th cartridge (when the cartridge is PRM
of the matrix type) 13240#4
13511 Number of columns of the 5th cartridge (when the cartridge
is of the matrix type)
13512 Number of rows of the 6th cartridge (when the cartridge is
of the matrix type)
of the matrix type)
of the matrix type)
is of the matrix type) 7
13550 Value of M output by the M03 command PRM
13554 Value of M output by the M04 command 3713#5
13558 Value of M output by the M05 command
13562 Value of M output by the M19 command
7.2.80 Machining Condition Selection Functions

13600 Machining condition selection functions
#0 MCR When an allowable acceleration rate adjustment is made PRM
with the machining condition selection function, the 1735
deceleration function based on acceleration in circular
interpolation is, modified (0) / not modified (1)
13601 Machining parameter adjustment screen
#0 MPR The machining parameter adjustment screen is, displayed
(0) / not displayed (1)
13610 Acceleration rate for acc./dec. before look-ahead <Axis>
interpolation in AI contour control (precision level 1)
13611 Acceleration rate for acc./dec. before look-ahead <Axis>
interpolation in AI contour control (precision level 10)
13612 Acceleration rate change time (bell-shaped) when AI contour
control is used (precision level 1) [ms]
13613 Acceleration rate change time (bell-shaped) when AI contour
control is used (precision level 10) [ms]
13614 Allowable acceleration rate change amount for each axis in <Axis>
speed control based on acceleration rate change under
control on the rate of change of acceleration (precision level
1)
control on the rate of change of acceleration (precision level
10)
control on the rate of change of acceleration in successive
linear interpolation operations (precision level 1)
control on the rate of change of acceleration in successive
linear interpolation operations (precision level 10)
13618 Rate of change time of the rate of change of acceleration in
smooth bell-shaped acc./dec. before interpolation when AI
contour control is used (precision level 1) [%]
13619 Rate of change time of the rate of change of acceleration in
smooth bell-shaped acc./dec. before interpolation when AI
contour control is used (precision level 10) [%]
13620 Allowable acceleration rate when AI contour control is used <Axis>
(precision level 1)
380
7 PARAMETERS
13621 Allowable acceleration rate when AI contour control is used <Axis>
(precision level 10)
13622 Time constant for acc./dec. after interpolation when AI <Axis>
contour control is used (precision level 1) [ms]
13623 Time constant for acc./dec. after interpolation when AI <Axis>
contour control is used (precision level 10) [ms]
13624 Corner speed difference when AI contour control is used <Axis>
(precision level 1)
13625 Corner speed difference when AI contour control is used <Axis>
13626 Maximum cutting speed when AI contour control is used <Axis>
(precision level 1)
13627 Maximum cutting speed when AI contour control is used <Axis>
13628 Parameter number corresponding to arbitrary item 1 when
AI contour control is used
13629 Parameter number corresponding to arbitrary item 2 when
AI contour control is used
13630 Value with emphasis on speed (precision level 1) of the <Axis>
parameter corresponding to arbitrary item 1 when AI contour
control is used
control is used
control is used
control is used
13634 Precision level currently selected when AI contour control is
used
7.2.81 Dual Check Safety 3

13810 Timer to start safety I/O signal after power-on [ms]
13811 Hysteresis width of position switch <Axis>
13821 Safety limit speed 1 in position control for each axis <Axis>
13825 Speed regarded as axis stop <Axis>
13826 Safety limit speed 1 in velocity control for each axis [min-1] <Axis>
13831 Safety machine position 1 for each axis (+ direction) <Axis>
13832 Safety machine position 1 for each axis (- direction) <Axis>
13840 Address to which safety position switch 1 to 16 are assigned
13880 Axis corresponding to the 1st safe position switch
13881 Axis corresponding to the 2nd safe position switch
13882 Axis corresponding to the 3rd safe position switch
381
B-63947EN/01

13902 Axis corresponding to the 23rd safe position switch 7
13920 Maximum operation range of the 1st safe position switch
13921 Maximum operation range of the 2nd safe position switch
13922 Maximum operation range of the 3rd safe position switch
13942 Maximum operation range of the 23rd safe position switch
13960 Minimum operation range of the 1st safe position switch
13961 Minimum operation range of the 2nd safe position switch
13962 Minimum operation range of the 3rd safe position switch
382
7 PARAMETERS
13982 Minimum operation range of the 23rd safe position switch
7.2.82 FSSB
14000 Inch/metric switching at a point other than the
reference position
#1 INA When inch/metric switching is performed at a point <Axis>
other than the reference position, operation is
performed as conventionally done (0) / an alarm is
issued (1)
14010 Maximum allowable travel distance when a reference <Axis>
position is established for a linear scale with an ALM
absolute address reference position [Detection unit] PS5326
14310 Program coordinate system switching, Offset memory <Axis>
switching
#0 WD1X When the coordinate system is switched using the
program coordinate system switch function, the
coordinate axis directions (not applicable to a
workpiece coordinate system, for G54 and G54P1 to
G54P48) are, the same as for the machine coordinate
system (0) / opposite to those of the machine
coordinate system (1)
coordinate axis directions (for G55) are, the same as
for the machine coordinate system (0) / opposite to
those of the machine coordinate system (1)
383
B-63947EN/01

#6 WMRX When the program coordinate system switch function
is used, the GCC signal, does not switch the
coordinate system (0) / switches the coordinate
system (1)
#7 OMD The offset memory switch function is, disabled (0) / PRM
enabled (1) 14310#6=1
14340 ATR value corresponding to slave 01 on FSSB line 1 PRM
14341 ATR value corresponding to slave 02 on FSSB line 1 1902#0,#1 7
14342 ATR value corresponding to slave 03 on FSSB line 1
14376 ATR value corresponding to connector 1 on the 1st separate
detector interface unit
384
7 PARAMETERS
14384 ATR value corresponding to connector 1 on the 2nd separate
14392 ATR value corresponding to connector 1 on the 3rd separate
14400 ATR value corresponding to connector 1 on the 4th separate
14408 ATR value corresponding to slave 01 on an additional axis board
385
B-63947EN/01

detector interface unit connected to an additional axis board
14449 ATR value corresponding to connector 6 on the 1st separate 7
14476 FSSB
#1 2AX Servo software 90Dx series for servo HRV4 control is, not used
(0) / used (1)
7.2.83 Embedded Ethernet

14880 Embedded Ethernet
#0 ETH Embedded Ethernet is, used (0) / not used (1)
7.2.84 Rotation Area Interference Check 2

14900 Move direction of group B, Rotation direction of groups A and
B
#0 IB1 The move direction of the 1st axis in the moving plane in
group B is, the same as for the 1st axis in the moving plane in
group A (0) / opposite to that of the 1st axis in the moving
plane in group A (1)
#1 IB2 The move direction of the 2nd axis in the moving plane in
group B is, the same as for the 2nd axis in the moving plane
in group A (0) / opposite to that of the 2nd axis in the moving
#2 IRA In defining the rotation direction of the rotary axis for rotating
group A, the direction of rotation from the positive direction of
the 1st axis in the plane to the positive direction of the 2nd
axis in the plane is used as, positive direction (0) / negative
direction (1)
386
7 PARAMETERS
#3 IRB In defining the rotation direction of the rotary axis for rotating
group B, the direction of rotation from the positive direction of
the 1st axis in the plane to the positive direction of the 2nd
axis in the plane is used as, positive direction (0) / negative
direction (1)
14901 Setting of whether the rectangle of group A or group B
rotates when a movement is made on the rotary axis
#0 NA1 When a movement is made on the rotary axis, rectangle 1 of
group A, does not rotate (0) / rotates (1)
#4 NB1 When a movement is made on the rotary axis, rectangle 1 of
group B, does not rotate (0) / rotates (1)
14902 Move and rotation direction of group C or group D
#0 ICA1 The move direction of the 1st axis in the moving plane in
group C is, the same as for the 1st axis in the moving plane
in group A (0) / opposite to that of the 1st axis in the moving
#1 ICA2 The move direction of the 2nd axis in the moving plane in
group C is, the same as for the 2nd axis in the moving plane
#2 IDA1 The move direction of the 1st axis in the moving plane in
group D is, the same as for the 1st axis in the moving plane
in group A (0) / opposite to that of the 1st axis in the moving
#3 IDA2 The move direction of the 2nd axis in the moving plane in
group D is, the same as for the 2nd axis in the moving plane
#4 IRC In defining the rotation direction of the rotary axis in group C,
the direction of rotation from the positive direction of the 1st
axis in the plane to the positive direction of the 2nd axis in the
plane is used as, positive direction (0) / negative direction (1)
#5 IRD In defining the rotation direction of the rotary axis in group D,
the direction of rotation from the positive direction of the 1st
axis in the plane to the positive direction of the 2nd axis in the
plane is used as, positive direction (0) / negative direction (1)
14903 Setting of whether the rectangle of group C or group D
rotates when a movement is made on the rotary axis
#0 NC1 When a movement is made on the rotary axis, rectangle 1 of
group C, does not rotate (0) / rotates (1)
#4 ND1 When a movement is made on the rotary axis, rectangle 1 of
group D, does not rotate (0) / rotates (1)
387
B-63947EN/01
14910 Axis number of the 1st axis in the plane for moving group A
14911 Axis number of the 2nd axis in the plane for moving group A
14912 Axis number of the rotary axis for rotating group A
14913 Axis number of the 1st axis in the plane for moving group B
14914 Axis number of the 2nd axis in the plane for moving group B
14915 Axis number of the rotary axis for rotating group B
14916 Axis number of the 1st axis in the plane for moving group C
14917 Axis number of the 2nd axis in the plane for moving group C
14918 Axis number of the rotary axis for rotating group C
14920 Maximum point on the 1st axis of rectangle 1 in group A PRM14912
14921 Minimum point on the 1st axis of rectangle 1 in group A , 14938
14922 Maximum point on the 2nd axis of rectangle 1 in group A PRM14912
14923 Minimum point on the 2nd axis of rectangle 1 in group A , 14938
14927 Minimum point on the 2nd axis of rectangle 2 in group A , 14938 7
14936 Center of rotation of the 1st axis for rotating group A
14937 Center of rotation of the 2nd axis for rotating group A
14938 Reference rotation angle for the rotary axis in group A
[deg]
14940 Maximum point on the 1st axis of rectangle 1 in group B PRM14915
14941 Minimum point on the 1st axis of rectangle 1 in group B , 14958
14942 Maximum point on the 2nd axis of rectangle 1 in group B PRM14915
14943 Minimum point on the 2nd axis of rectangle 1 in group B , 14958
14956 Center of rotation of the 1st axis for rotating group B
14957 Center of rotation of the 2nd axis for rotating group B
14958 Reference rotation angle for the rotary axis in group B
[deg]
14960 Maximum point on the 1st axis of rectangle 1 in group C PRM14918
14961 Minimum point on the 1st axis of rectangle 1 in group C , 14978
14962 Maximum point on the 2nd axis of rectangle 1 in group C PRM14918
14963 Minimum point on the 2nd axis of rectangle 1 in group C , 14978
388
7 PARAMETERS
14976 Center of rotation of the 1st axis for rotating group C
14977 Center of rotation of the 2nd axis for rotating group C
14978 Reference rotation angle for the rotary axis in group C
[deg]
7.2.85 Pitch Error Compensation 2

14985 Number of the periodical secondary pitch compensation <Axis>
position at the extremely negative position for each axis
14986 Number of the periodical secondary pitch compensation <Axis>
position at the extremely positive position for each axis
14987 Interval between periodical secondary pitch compensation <Axis>
positions for each axis
14988 Magnification for periodical secondary pitch error <Axis>
compensation for each axis
7.2.86 AI Contour Control 2

19500 Feedrate for AI contour control
#6 FNW When a feedrate is determined according to a
feedrate difference and acceleration in AI contour
control, the maximum feedrate at which the allowable
feedrate difference and allowable acceleration for
each axis are not exceeded is used. (0) / The
maximum feedrate at which the allowable feedrate
difference and allowable acceleration for each axis
are not exceeded is used. Moreover, the feedrate is
determined so that the decreased feedrate is constant
regardless of the move direction when the profile is
the same. (1)
#7 FCC When there is an axis that requires one or more
seconds for acceleration in acc./dec. before
look-ahead interpolation, emphasis is placed on
precision (the specified feedrate may not be reached)
(0) / emphasis is placed on speed (to ensure that the
specified feedrate is produced) (1)
19501 Reference distance for feedrate determination based
on acceleration in AI contour control
#5 FRP Linear rapid traverse is based on, acc./dec. after PRM
interpolation (0) / acc./dec. before interpolation (1) 1401#1,1671
19503 Acceleration/deceleration in AI contour control
#0 HPF When a feedrate is determined based on acceleration
in AI contour control, smooth feedrate control is, not
used (0) / used (1)
#4 ZOL The deceleration function based on cutting load in AI
contour control is, enabled for all commands (0) /
enabled for linear interpolation commands only (1)
19515 Deceleration function based on cutting load in AI
contour control
#1 ZG2 When the deceleration function based on cutting load PRM
in AI contour control is used, stepwise override values 8451#4
are applied (0) / inclined override values are applied 8456 - 8458
(1) 19516
19516 Override for area 1 in deceleration based on cutting PRM
load in AI contour control [%] 19515#1
19519 Allowable acceleration rate for each axis in feedrate <Axis>
control based on acceleration in circular interpolation PRM1735
(one complete circle)
19530 Cylindrical interpolation cutting point compensation
#5 CYA With the cylindrical interpolation command (G7.1),
cylindrical interpolation cutting point compensation is,
not performed (0) / performed (1)
389
B-63947EN/01
#6 CYS When the cylindrical interpolation cutting point

compensation function is used, cutting point
compensation is, performed between blocks (0) /
performed together with a block movement if the
cutting point compensation value is less than the
setting of parameter (No. 19534) (1)
19531 Tool offset axis number for the XY plane
19532 Tool offset axis number for the ZX plane
19533 Tool offset axis number for the YZ plane
19534 Limit for changing cylindrical interpolation cutting point PRM
compensation in a single block 1422,19530
19535 Limit of travel distance moved with the cylindrical
interpolation cutting point compensation in the
previous block unchanged
7.2.87 Optimum Torque Acceleration/Deceleration

19540 Optimum torque acc./dec. 7
#0 FAP Optimum torque acc./dec. is, disabled (0) / enabled (1)
19541 Optimum torque acc./dec. (speed at P1) [0.01%] <Axis>
19542 Optimum torque acc./dec. (speed at P2) [0.01%] PRM1420
19543 Optimum torque acc./dec. (speed at P3) [0.01%]
19544 Optimum torque acc./dec. (speed at P4) [0.01%]
19545 Optimal torque acc./dec. (acceleration at P0 during <Axis>
movement in + direction and acceleration) [0.01%]
19546 Optimal torque acc./dec. (acceleration at P1 during PRM1671
19547 Optimal torque acc./dec. (acceleration at P2 during
movement in - direction and acceleration) [0.01%]
19557 Optimal torque acc./dec. (deceleration at P0 during
390
7 PARAMETERS
19566 Optimal torque acc./dec. (deceleration at P3 during <Axis>
19567 Optimal torque acc./dec. (deceleration at P4 during PRM1671
7.2.88 Nano Smoothing

19581 Tolerance smoothing for nano smoothing
19582 Minimum amount of travel of a block that makes a PRM8490
decision based on an angular difference between blocks
for nano smoothing
19587 Tolerance specification for a rotary axis subject to nano <Axis>
smoothing II
7.2.89 Tool Compensation 2

19604 Tool posture control
#0 TPC When a block including a command (G43.4/G43.5) for
starting tool center point control does not specify
address P, tool attitude control is, disabled (0) /
enabled (1)
19605 Tilted working plane machining command,
Interference check in 3-dimensional cutter
compensation
#0 NSC When a tilted working plane machining command of PRM
machine type with no tool rotary axis (parameter (No. 19665#4,
19680) = 12) is specified, control point shift operation #5
#5 NIC When the compensation plane is switched in
3-dimensional cutter compensation, an interference
check is, made (0) / not made (1)
#7 TIT When tool center point control and inverse time feed
are used at the same time on a machine of tool
rotation type, an alarm is issued (0) / tool length
compensation in the tool axis direction is performed
(1)
19607 Table rotary axis, Interference check
#1 SPG As the G code for performing 3-dimensional cutter
compensation on a machine with a table rotary axis,
G41.2/G42.2 is used (0) / G41.4/G42.4 is used for a
table rotation type machine, or G41.5/G42.5 is used
for a mixed type machine (1)
#2 CCC In the tool radius and tool nose radius compensation
mode, the outer corner connection method is based
on, linear connection (0) / circular connection (1)
#3 WCD Compensation vector direction based on the sign of a M series
grinding-wheel wear compensation value
6008 Compensation value based on D code
#3 Negative Positive
0 Direction from Direction from command
compensation center to end point to
command end point compensation center
1 Direction from command Direction from
end point to compensation center to
compensation center command end point
#5 CAV When an interference check finds that interference ALM

occurred, machining stops with an alarm (0) / PS0041
machining is continued by changing the tool path to
prevent interference from occurring (1)
391
B-63947EN/01
#6 NAA When the interference check avoidance function Usually, set

considers that avoidance operation is dangerous, the 0.
alarm (PS5447) is issued, and when the function
further considers that interference to the interference
avoidance vector occurs, the alarm (PS5448) is
issued (0) / avoidance operation is continued without
issuing any alarm (1)
#7 NAG If the gap vector length is 0 when the interference
check avoidance function for tool radius and tool noise
radius compensation is used, avoidance operation is,
performed (0) / not performed (1)
19608 Tool center point control
#1 NI5 For an interference check of tool radius
compensation, the specified position in the workpiece
coordinate system and compensation vector are used.
The interference check avoidance function cannot be
used (0) / the position at which the programmed
command specified with the table coordinate system 7
is focused onto the plane normal to the tool axis
direction and the compensation vector are used. The
interference check avoidance function can be used (1)
#2 DET When the programming coordinate system is fastened
to the table in tool center point control or
3-dimensional cutter compensation, the relative
position and absolute position of a specified path are,
displayed in the programming coordinate system (0) /
displayed in the workpiece coordinate system (1)
#5 PRI When multiple end point candidates exist for a
movement made on a rotary axis by a command such
as I, J, and K under tool center point control (type 2), a
combination in which the master (1st rotary axis)
makes a smaller angular movement (for rotation type
or table rotation type) or a combination in which the
table (2nd rotary axis) makes a smaller angular
movement (for composite type) is selected (0) / a
combination in which the slave (2nd rotary axis)
makes a smaller angular movement (for tool rotation
type or table rotation type) or a combination in which
the tool (1st rotary axis) makes a smaller angular
movement (for composite type) is selected (1)
#6 MIR When programmable mirror image is applied to a
linear axis in tool center point control (type 2), mirror
image is, not applied to a specified I, J, or K command
(0) / applied to a specified I, J, or K command (1)
#7 HEL When the tool is tilted toward the forward move
direction by a Q command in tool center point control
(type 2), a helical interpolation block tilts the tool, in
the direction of tangent to the arc (at the block end
point) (0) / toward the forward move direction involving
the helical axis (at the block end point) (1)
19609 Cancellation of the G codes in group 08
#1 CCT The cancellation of the G codes in group 08 is,
specified by G49 (0) / able to be specified by G49.1 as
well (1)
19625 Number of blocks to be read in the tool radius and tool
noise radius compensation mode
19630 Limit for assuming the block as a non-movement block
in intersection calculation for tool side compensation
(G41.2, G42.2)
19631 Angle determination fluctuation value for leading edge
offset [deg]
19632 Distance from the programmed point (pivot) to tool tip
position (cutting point)
19635 Angle used for determination in an interference check
in 3-dimensional cutter compensation [deg]
392
7 PARAMETERS
19636 Angle used to determine whether to execute the
interference check/avoidance function of
3-dimensional cutter compensation [deg]
19650 Tool axis tool length compensation function, Tool axis <Axis>
direction tool length compensation function
#0 RAM With the tool axis tool length compensation function,
the axis is, not used as a rotary axis (0) / used as a
rotary axis (1)
#1 RAP The rotary axis used with the tool axis direction tool
length compensation function is, an ordinary rotary
axis (0) / a parameter axis (1)
19655 Axis number of the linear axis to which a rotary axis <Axis>
belongs
19656 Tool axis direction
19657 Master rotary axis number
19658 Angular displacement of a rotary axis [deg] <Axis>
19659 Offset value for the angular displacement of a rotary <Axis>
axis [deg]
19660 Origin offset value of a rotary axis [deg] <Axis>
19661 Rotation center compensation vector in tool axis <Axis>
direction tool length compensation
19662 Spindle center compensation vector in tool axis <Axis>
direction tool length compensation
19665 Controlled point shift, Tool holder offset function
#4 SPR The controlled point is shifted by, automatic
calculation (0) / using parameter (No. 19667) (1)
#5 SVC The controlled point is, not shifted (0) / shifted (1) PRM
19665#4
#7 ETH The tool holder offset function in tool length
compensation is, disabled (0) / enabled (1)
19666 Tool holder offset value PRM19665#7
Radius
19667 Controlled-point shift vector <Axis>
PRM19665#4,#5
Radius
19680 Mechanical unit type PRM19696#0,#1
19681 Controlled-axis number for the 1st rotary axis PRM19696#0
19682 Axis direction of the 1st rotary axis
19683 Inclination angle when the 1st rotary axis is an inclined
axis [deg]
19684 Rotation direction of the 1st rotary axis PRM19682
19685 Rotation angle when the 1st rotary axis is a PRM
hypothetical axis [deg] 19696#0
19686 Controlled-axis number for the 2nd rotary axis PRM
19696#1
19687 Axis direction of the 2nd rotary axis
1: On X-axis
2: On Y-axis
3: On Z-axis
4: On an axis tilted a certain angle from the X-axis from the
positive X-axis to positive Y-axis
5: On an axis tilted a certain angle from the Y-axis from the
positive Y-axis to positive Z-axis
6: On an axis tilted a certain angle from the Z-axis from the
positive Z-axis to positive X-axis
19688 Inclination angle when the 2nd rotary axis is inclined PRM19687
[deg]
19689 Rotation direction of the 2nd rotary axis PRM19687
19690 Rotation angle when the 2nd rotary axis is a PRM
hypothetical axis [deg] 19696#1
19696 Rotary axis, Hypothetical axis
#0 IA1 The 1st rotary axis is, an ordinary rotary axis (0) / a
hypothetical axis (1)
#1 IA2 The 2nd rotary axis is, an ordinary rotary axis (0) / a
hypothetical axis (1)
393
B-63947EN/01
#3 NPC When a modification to the tool attitude at the end of ALM

the block that provides a tool attitude close to the PS5421
singular point attitude is suppressed by parameters
(No. 19738 and No. 19739) in tool attitude control
based on tool center point control (type 2), the
program is executed without modifying the tool
attitude (0) / an alarm is issued (1)
#5 WKP For a 5-axis machine having a table rotary axis, the PRM
programming coordinate system used for tool center 19746#4
point control or 3-dimensional cutter compensation is,
the table coordinate system (0) / the workpiece
coordinate system (1)
#6 RFC When a command that does not move the tool tip PRM1422
point with respect to the workpiece is issued in tool
center point control, the feedrate on the rotary axis is,
maximum cutting feedrate (0) / specified feedrate (1)
19697 Reference tool axis direction
19698 Angle when the reference tool axis direction is tilted 7
(reference angle RA) [deg]
19699 Angle when the reference tool axis direction is tilted
(reference angle RB) [deg]
19700 Rotary table position (X-axis of the basic three axes) PRM
19701 Rotary table position (Y-axis of the basic three axes) 19680
19702 Rotary table position (Z-axis of the basic three axes) Radius
19703 Intersection offset vector between the 1st and 2nd PRM
rotation axes of the table (X-axis of the basic three axes) 19680
19704 Intersection offset vector between the 1st and 2nd Radius
rotation axes of the table (Y-axis of the basic three axes)
19705 Intersection offset vector between the 1st and 2nd
rotation axes of the table (Z-axis of the basic three axes)
19709 Intersection offset vector between the tool axis and tool PRM
rotary axis (X-axis of the basic three axes) 19680
19710 Intersection offset vector between the tool axis and tool Radius
rotary axis (Y-axis of the basic three axes)
19711 Intersection offset vector between the tool axis and tool
rotary axis (Z-axis of the basic three axes)
19712 Intersection offset vector between the 2nd and 1st Radius
rotation axes of the tool (X-axis of the basic three axes)
rotation axes of the tool (Y-axis of the basic three axes)
rotation axes of the tool (Z-axis of the basic three axes)
19738 Angle used for determination of a tool attitude close to a
singular point attitude [deg]
19739 Angle used for suppression of modifications to the tool attitude
at the block end point [deg]
19741 Upper limit of the movement range of the 1st rotary axis [deg]
19742 Lower limit of the movement range of the 1st rotary axis [deg]
19743 Upper limit of the movement range of the 2nd rotary axis [deg]
19744 Lower limit of the movement range of the 2nd rotary axis [deg]
19746 3-dimensional cutter compensation
#1 PTD When 3-dimensional cutter compensation is
performed with a machine of table rotation type, the
tool direction is, specified by parameter (No. 19697,
(No. 19698), or No. 19699) (0) / normal to the plane
specified by G17/G18/G19 (1)
#2 LOD As the tool length for 3-dimensional manual feed, the
value of parameter (No. 12318) is used (0) / the tool
length currently used for tool length compensation is
used (1)
#3 LOZ When parameter (No. 19746#2) is set to 1 and tool
length compensation is not applied, the tool length
value for 3-dimensional manual feed is, specified in
parameter (No. 12318) (0) / zero (1)
394
7 PARAMETERS
#4 TBP When 3-dimensional cutter compensation is
performed on a 5-axis machine with a table rotary
axis, the programming coordinate system is the
workpiece coordinate system (0) / the setting of
parameter WKP (No. 19696#5) is used (1)
#6 CRS When the deviation from the path during movement at PRM
the specified cutting feedrate or rapid traverse rate 19751,
exceeds the limit in tool center point control, the 19752
feedrate or rapid traverse rate is not decreased (0) /
an allowable range is specified by parameter setting
(1)
19751 Limit of the deviation from the path (for rapid traverse) PRM
19752 Limit of the deviation from the path (for cutting feed) 19746#6
395
Index
COMMAND RANGE............................................................................. 121
Comparison .......................................................................................... 627
Configuration of Printed Circuit Board Connectors and Cards ...... 128, 153
Confirmation of Communications Based on the Ping Command........... 682
Confirmation of Connection with the Hub Unit ...................................... 681
Confirmation of Each Parameter Setting............................................... 682
Confirming the parameters required for data output ............................. 795
CONTROL COMMAND ........................................................................ 113
Control Unit .......................................................................................... 175
Coordinate System (Parameter) ........................................................... 245
Coordinate System on Part Drawing and Coordinate System Specified
by CNC - Coordinate System ................................................................. 42
Correspondence between operation mode and parameters on spindle
tuning screen........................................................................................ 760
Counter ................................................................................................ 625
CUSTOM MACRO.................................................................................. 97
Custom Macros (Parameter) ................................................................ 317
<D>
Data input ............................................................................................. 784
Data Input/Output ([I/O] Screen) ........................................................... 585
Data output........................................................................................... 784
Data search .......................................................................................... 630
Data transfer......................................................................................... 626
DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE ............................ s-1
Detailed Descriptions about Invalid Servo Parameter Setting Alarms ... 693
Details of Functional Instructions .......................................................... 625
Details of Invalid Servo Parameter Alarms (on the CNC Side).............. 691
Details of Invalid Servo Parameter Setting Alarms (on the Servo Side) 693
Details of Separate Serial Pulsecoder Alarms ...................................... 691
Details of Serial Pulsecoder.................................................................. 690
DeviceNet board................................................................................... 225
DI/DO (Parameter) ............................................................................... 267
Diagnosis (Parameter).......................................................................... 360
Diagnosis Data Related to Axis Synchronous Control .......................... 702
Diagnosis Data Related to Linear Scale with Absolute Address
Reference Marks .................................................................................. 703
Diagnosis Data Related to Rigid Tapping ............................................. 698
Diagnosis Data Related to Synchronous/Composite Control ................ 702
Diagnosis Data Related to the Dual Position Feedback Function ......... 700
Diagnosis Data Related to the Inductosyn Absolute Position Detector . 697
Diagnosis Data Related to the Serial Spindles ..................................... 697
Diagnosis Data Related to the Small-hole Peck Drilling Cycle .............. 699
DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION ...................................................................... 689
DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION................................................................ 689
DIGITAL SERVO .................................................................................. 723
Digital Servo (2).................................................................................... 701
Direct Input of Workpiece Origin Offset Value Measured........................ 35
Display and Edit (Parameter)................................................................ 269
Display and Edit 2 (Parameter)............................................................. 375
Display method..................................................................................... 755
Display of Causes of Instructions not Functioning ................................ 689
Display unit........................................................................................... 147
Display Unit for 300is/310is/320is ................................................ 191, 204
Display Unit for 30i/31i/32i ................................................................... 180
Display until the CNC Starts ................................................................. 767
Displaying a Program List ([LIST] Screen)............................................ 596
Displaying and Editing I/O Module Allocation Data
([MODULE] Screens)............................................................................ 609
Displaying and Editing Message Data ([MESAGE] Screens)................ 609
Displaying and Editing PMC Settings ([SETING] Screens) ................... 610
Displaying and Editing Symbol and Comment Data
([SYMBOL] Screens) ............................................................................ 607
Displaying and Editing Title Data ([TITLE] Screens) ............................. 606
Displaying and Entering Setting Data ..................................................... 32
Displaying and Setting Configuration Parameters
([CONFIG PARAM] Screens) ............................................................... 616
i-2
B-63947EN/01
Displaying and Setting Custom Macro Common Variables..................... 36

Displaying and Setting Parameters......................................................... 40
Displaying and Setting Parameters for the Online Function
([ONLINE] Screen) ............................................................................... 613
Displaying and Setting Pitch Error Compensation Data .......................... 46
Displaying and Setting System Parameters
([SYSTEM PARAM] Screens)............................................................... 614
Displaying and Setting the Software Operator's Panel............................ 37
Displaying and Setting the Workpiece Origin Offset Value ..................... 34
Displaying Diagnosis Screen ................................................................ 689
Displaying I/O Link Connection Status ([I/O LINK] Screen)................... 587
Displaying Servo Tuning Screen........................................................... 738
Displaying the power ON sequence...................................................... 804
Displaying the Status of PMCs and Changing the Target PMC
([PMC STATUS] Screens) .................................................................... 613
DNC1/DNC2 Interface (Parameter) ...................................................... 242
Dual Check Safety (Parameter) ............................................................ 360
Dual Check Safety 2 (Parameter) ......................................................... 367
Dual Check Safety 3 (Parameter) ......................................................... 381
Duplicate Coil Check Function.............................................................. 604
<E>
Edit operation ....................................................................................... 787
Editing a Program................................................................................... 26
Editing Ladder Programs ...................................................................... 600
Electric Gear Box (EGB) (Parameter)................................................... 342
EMBEDDED ETHERNET ..................................................................... 648
Embedded Ethernet (Parameter).......................................................... 386
Embedded Macro Functions (Parameter) ............................................. 367
Erasing History Data from the ALARM HISTORY Screen..................... 706
Erasing History Data from the External Operator Message History
Screen.................................................................................................. 707
Erasing History Data from the Operation History Screen ...................... 713
ERROR DISPLAY ON THE SPINDLE AMPLIFIER .............................. 498
Error Message (MESSAGE Key) .......................................................... 647
Error Message Screen.......................................................................... 678
Error Messages and Required Actions ................................................. 816
Error messages that may be displayed on the I/O MODULE EDITOR
screen .................................................................................................. 490
Error messages that may be displayed on the LADDER DIAGRAM
EDITOR screen .................................................................................... 482
EDITOR screen (when updating).......................................................... 483
VIEWER screen ................................................................................... 481
Error messages that may be displayed on the MESSAGE DATA
EDITOR screen .................................................................................... 489
Error messages that may be displayed on the NET EDITOR screen .... 487
Error messages that may be displayed on the PMC PARAM screen .... 492
Error messages that may be displayed on the SIGNAL STATUS
screen .................................................................................................. 491
Error messages that may be displayed on the SIGNAL TRACE
screen .................................................................................................. 492
Error messages that may be displayed on the SYMBOL & COMMENT
DATA EDITOR screen.......................................................................... 488
Error messages that may be displayed on the SYSTEM PARAMETER
screen .................................................................................................. 491
Error messages that may be displayed on the TITLE DATA EDITOR
screen .................................................................................................. 488
Error messages that may be displayed on the trace setting screen ...... 492
ETHERNET .......................................................................................... 645
ETHERNET MOUNTING LOCATIONS ................................................ 645
ETHERNET OPTIONAL BOARD.......................................................... 660
Execution of Trace................................................................................ 592
Explanation of Screens......................................................................... 823
Explanation of the MDI Keyboard ............................................................. 6
Exponential Interpolation (Parameter) .................................................. 315
i-3
Index
External Data Input (Parameter) ........................................................... 325
EXTERNAL OPERATOR MESSAGE HISTORY .................................. 707
EXTERNAL OUTPUT COMMANDS ..................................................... 120
External/Macro Alarm Display .............................................................. 706
<F>
Fast Data Server Operation Screen...................................................... 667
Fast Ethernet board.............................................................................. 212
Feedrate (Parameter) ........................................................................... 248
File Operation (PROG Key) .................................................................. 647
Fixture Offset (Parameter) .................................................................... 340
Flexible Synchronous Control (Parameter) ........................................... 315
FL-net board......................................................................................... 219
FSSB (Parameter) ................................................................................ 383
FSSB Display and Setting Screen ........................................................ 732
FSSB SETTING SCREEN.................................................................... 732
FTP File Transfer Operation Screen..................................................... 652
FUNCTION KEYS AND SOFT KEYS ....................................................... 9
FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS ........................................................... 621
Functional Instructions (Arranged in Sequence of SUB No.) ................ 639
<G>
G CODE ................................................................................................. 67
G CODE LIST IN THE LATHE SYSTEM ................................................ 73
G CODE LIST IN THE MACHINING CENTER SYSTEM........................ 69
General Screen Operations ...................................................................... 9
GENERAL WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS ............................................. s-1
Graphic Display (Parameter) ................................................................ 328
<H>
Half-size kana input .............................................................................. 790
Handle Interrupt Display ......................................................................... 20
HARDWARE ........................................................................................ 123
Hardware Configuration........................................................................ 803
Hardware Configuration Screen............................................................ 769
Hardware Structure .............................................................. 123, 152, 170
HELP FUNCTION................................................................................... 52
High-speed Cutting (Parameter) ........................................................... 340
High-speed Position Switch (Parameter) .............................................. 353
High-speed Position Switch 2 (Parameter) ........................................... 368
History Data Not Displayed on the Screen............................................ 712
HISTORY FUNCTION .......................................................................... 705
HOW TO ENTER THE PARAMETERS ................................................ 237
HSSB interface board........................................................................... 218
<I>
I/O ................................................................................................ 150, 209
I/O Communication Error Messages..................................................... 492
I/O MODULE ASSIGNMENT NAMES .................................................. 642
I/O MODULE VIEWER screen.............................................................. 609
Inclination Compensation (Parameter) ................................................. 317
Index Table (Parameter)....................................................................... 314
Initial Menu Screen................................................................................. 52
INITIAL SETTING SERVO PARAMETERS .......................................... 723
INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA .......................................................... 793
Input/output of maintenance information............................................... 789
Input/Output on the ALL IO Screen....................................................... 799
Inputting and Outputting Operation History Data .................................. 712
Inputting CNC parameters .................................................................... 797
Inputting custom macro variable values................................................ 798
Inputting part programs ........................................................................ 799
Inputting pitch error compensation amount........................................... 798
Inputting tool compensation amount ..................................................... 799
Inputting/outputting a program.............................................................. 800
Inputting/outputting custom macro common variables .......................... 802
Inputting/Outputting Data...................................................................... 794
Inputting/outputting offset data ............................................................. 801
Inputting/outputting parameters ............................................................ 800
i-4
B-63947EN/01
Interference Check for Each Path (Parameter) ..................................... 346

INTERRUPTION TYPE CUSTOM MACRO.......................................... 119
Inverter PCBs, connector units, and fan adapter PCBs ........................ 162
Inverter PCBs, fan adapter PCBs, and connector units ........................ 198
Involute Interpolation (Parameter) ........................................................ 315
IPL Display ........................................................................................... 767
IPL screen ............................................................................................ 825
<L>
LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR AND EDITOR SCREENS
([PMC LADDER]).................................................................................. 595
LADDER EXECUTION screen ............................................................. 619
LCD-MOUNTED TYPE Series 300is/310is/320is HARDWARE ........... 152
LCD-MOUNTED TYPE Series 30i/31i/32i HARDWARE ...................... 123
LED DISPLAY ...................................................................................... 818
LIST OF ADDRESSES ......................................................................... 543
LIST OF DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION (DGN) ...................................... 689
List of display unit for 30i/31i/32i .......................................................... 202
LIST OF ETHERNET-RELATED SCREENS ........................................ 646
List of Functional Instructions ............................................................... 621
List of printed circuit boards.................................................................. 165
List of Printed Circuit Boards and Units ........................................ 165, 201
List of printed circuit boards of control unit............................................ 201
LIST OF SIGNALS ............................................................................... 503
List of Signals (in Order of Addresses) ................................................. 521
List of Signals (in Order of Symbols) .................................................... 503
List of units ........................................................................................... 166
List of Units and Printed Circuit Boards ................................................ 147
Log Screen of the Embedded Ethernet Function .................................. 657
<M>
Machine Coordinates on the Angular/Cartesian Axes........................... 692
Machine Position .................................................................................. 691
Machine Remote Diagnosis Operation Screens ................................... 671
MACHINE SIGNAL INTERFACE screen .............................................. 618
Machining Condition Selection Functions (Parameter) ......................... 380
MACRO CALL ...................................................................................... 114
Macro Call Using a G Code .................................................................. 115
Macro Call Using an M Code................................................................ 116
Macro Executor (Parameter) ................................................................ 356
Main board ........................................................................................... 153
Main board of display unit for is series CNC......................................... 191
Maintenance (Parameter) ..................................................................... 355
MAINTENANCE FUNCTION ................................................................ 793
MAINTENANCE INFORMATION.......................................................... 767
MAINTENANCE INFORMATION SCREEN.......................................... 786
MAINTENANCE OF OPEN CNC (BOOT-UP AND IPL)........................ 821
Maintenance Screen............................................................................. 675
Maintenance Screen (for Data Server Function)................................... 673
Maintenance Screen for Embedded Ethernet Function......................... 653
Malfunction Prevention Function Alarms (IE Alarm).............................. 450
Malfunction Protection (Parameter) ...................................................... 368
Manual Handle (Parameter) ................................................................. 334
Manual Handle 2 (Parameter) .............................................................. 368
Manual Handle Retrace (Parameter) .................................................... 326
Manual/Automatic Operation Functions (Parameter) ............................ 333
MATTERS COMMON TO BOTH LCD-MOUNTED TYPE AND
STAND-ALONE TYPE (HARDWARE).................................................. 212
MDI unit........................................................................................ 147, 208
MEMORY CARD FORMAT screen....................................................... 815
Memory File Alarms (IO Alarm) ............................................................ 441
MEMRY CARD SLOT........................................................................... 803
MENU screen ....................................................................................... 616
MESSAGES THAT MAY BE DISPLAYED ON THE PMC SCREEN ..... 473
Method A of gear change for M series
(parameter SGB (No. 3705#2)=0) ........................................................ 753
i-5
Index
Method B of gear change for M series
(parameter SGB (No. 3705#2)=1) ........................................................ 754
Modal Call: Call After the Move Command (G66) ................................. 114
Modal Call: Each Block Call (G66.1)..................................................... 115
Monitoring Ladder Diagrams ([LADDER] Screen)................................. 597
Monitoring PMC Signal Status ([STATUS] Screen) .............................. 572
Monitoring the Network Communication Status and the PMC Signal
Status ([I/O DGN] Screen) .................................................................... 593
MONOCHROME LCD BRIGHTNESS ADJUSTMENT.......................... 831
Mounting locations of optional boards .................................................. 231
Multi-path (Parameter).......................................................................... 346
<N>
Nano Smoothing (Parameter)............................................................... 391
NET EDITOR Screen ........................................................................... 601
Next Block Display Screen ..................................................................... 25
Normal Direction Control (Parameter) .................................................. 314
<O>
Operating Monitor Display ...................................................................... 21
OPERATING THE PMC SCREEN........................................................ 569
Operation Errors ................................................................................... 481
OPERATION HISTORY........................................................................ 708
Operation instruction ............................................................................ 633
OPERATION LIST.................................................................................. 57
Operation Method Screen....................................................................... 55
Operation of soft keys........................................................................... 788
Operations for Color Setting ................................................................. 829
Operations on the System Alarm Screen.............................................. 463
Optimum Torque Acceleration/Deceleration (Parameter) ..................... 390
Option setting screen............................................................................ 827
Optional Board ..................................................................................... 212
Other Alarms (DS Alarm)...................................................................... 446
Other Screens ...................................................................................... 826
Other Units ........................................................................................... 232
Others ...........................................................................151, 167, 210, 743
Others (Parameter)............................................................................... 355
OUTPUTTING ALL HISTORY DATA.................................................... 715
Outputting CNC parameters ................................................................. 796
Outputting custom macro variable values ............................................. 796
Outputting Data .................................................................................... 719
Outputting operation history data.......................................................... 712
Outputting part program ....................................................................... 796
Outputting pitch error compensation amount ........................................ 796
Outputting tool compensation amount .................................................. 796
Overall Position Display.......................................................................... 19
Overheat Alarms (OH Alarm)................................................................ 446
Overtravel Alarms (OT Alarm) .............................................................. 440
Overview of Hardware .......................................................... 124, 152, 171
OVERVIEW OF HISTORY FUNCTION ................................................ 705
Overview of Spindle Control ................................................................. 753
<P>
Parameter..................................................................................... 784, 791
PARAMETER LIST............................................................................... 239
Parameter Setting................................................................. 708, 708, 738
Parameter Setting Screen ............................................................ 648, 660
Parameter Table Screen......................................................................... 56
Parameter Writing Alarm (SW Alarm) ................................................... 431
PARAMETERS..................................................................................... 237
PARAMETERS..................................................................................... 687
Path Table Operation Function (Parameter) ......................................... 363
PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE SCREEN ............................................. 775
Pitch Error Compensation (Parameter)................................................. 280
Pitch Error Compensation 2 (Parameter).............................................. 389
PMC ..................................................................................................... 569
PMC (Parameter) ................................................................................. 366
PMC Alarm Messages.......................................................................... 473
i-6
B-63947EN/01
PMC CONFIGURATION DATA SETTING SCREENS

([PMC CONFIG]) .................................................................................. 605
PMC DIAGNOSIS/MAINTENANCE SCREEN ([PMC MAINTE])........... 571
PMC MEMORY SETTING screen ........................................................ 620
PMC System Alarm Messages ............................................................. 478
PMC title data display screen ............................................................... 606
Polar Coordinate Interpolation (Parameter) .......................................... 314
Polygon Turning (Parameter) ............................................................... 341
Position Display in the Relative Coordinate System ............................... 17
Position Display in the Workpiece Coordinate System............................ 15
Position Error Amount .......................................................................... 691
Position Switch (Parameter) ................................................................. 331
POWER MATE CNC MANAGER FUNCTION .............................. 497, 683
PREFACE ............................................................................................. p-1
Printed circuit board.............................................................................. 148
Printed circuit board for 15” display unit................................................ 135
Printed circuit board for 7.2”/8.4”/10.4” display unit............................... 128
Procedure............................................................................................. 775
PROFIBUS board ................................................................................. 223
Program Check Screen .......................................................................... 24
Program Contents Display...................................................................... 23
Program control.................................................................................... 636
Program Folder Screen .......................................................................... 28
PROGRAM FORMAT............................................................................. 79
PROGRAM LIST EDITOR Screen........................................................ 603
Program Restart (Parameter) ............................................................... 338
Programs (Parameter).......................................................................... 276
<Q>
Quitting BOOT...................................................................................... 816
<R>
Reference Counter ............................................................................... 691
REFERENCE POSITION SETTING WITHOUT DOGS ........................ 751
Reference Position Shift Function......................................................... 691
Reference Position with Mechanical Stopper (Parameter).................... 334
Registered Data Input/Output ............................................................... 783
Rigid Tapping (Parameter) ................................................................... 310
Rotation Area Interference Check (Parameter)..................................... 361
Rotation Area Interference Check 2 (Parameter).................................. 386
Rotation control .................................................................................... 638
Run Hour and Parts Count Display (Parameter) ................................... 328
<S>
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS...................................................................... s-1
Scaling/Coordinate Rotation (Parameter) ............................................. 313
Screen configuration............................................................................. 775
Screen Configuration and Operating Procedure ................................... 806
SCREEN DISPLAY .............................................................................. 683
Screen Display ......................................................705, 707, 710, 786, 829
SCREEN DISPLAY AND OPERATION .................................................... 1
Screen Display and Operation.............................................................. 786
Screen Display and Setting .................................................................. 775
SCREEN DISPLAY AT POWER ON .................................................... 767
Screen Display Colors (Parameter) ...................................................... 328
Screen Display Colors 2 (Parameter) ................................................... 360
SCREENS DISPLAYED BY FUNCTION KEY ............................. 49
SCREENS DISPLAYED BY FUNCTION KEY (EDIT MODE)...... 26
SCREENS DISPLAYED BY FUNCTION KEY

(MEMORY MODE) ................................................................................. 23
i-7
Index
SELECTING OPERATION HISTORY SIGNALS .................................. 713
Separate detector interface unit............................................................ 232
Sequence Number Comparison and Stop (Parameter)......................... 352
SERIAL INTERFACE AC SPINDLE ..................................................... 753
Serial Spindle (Parameter) ................................................................... 286
Servo (Parameter) ................................................................................ 252
Servo Alarms (SV Alarm)...................................................................... 432
Servo Motor Temperature Information.................................................. 692
SERVO TUNING SCREEN .................................................................. 738
Setting (Parameter) .............................................................................. 241
SETTING AND DISPLAY UNITS.............................................................. 1
Setting and Displaying Counter Values ([COUNTR] Screen) ................ 575
Setting and Displaying Data Tables ([DATA] Screen) ........................... 581
Setting and Displaying Keep Relays ([KEEP RELAY] Screen) ............. 576
Setting and Displaying the Tool Offset Value.......................................... 29
Setting and Displaying Variable Timers ([TIMER] Screen).................... 573
Setting and Maintenance (SYSTEM key).............................................. 646
Setting of Trace Parameter ([TRACE SETING] Screen) ....................... 589
Setting Parameters for Input/Output ..................................................... 793
Setting screen display and setting ........................................................ 781
SIGNAL LIST (X/Y, G/F)....................................................................... 501
Signal Trace Function ([TRACE] Screen) ............................................. 589
Simple Call (G65) ................................................................................. 114
Single Direction Positioning (Parameter) .............................................. 314
Skip Functions (Parameter) .................................................................. 322
Small MDI Unit (ONG Key) ....................................................................... 5
Software Configuration Screen............................................................. 770
Software Operator's Panel (Parameter)................................................ 335
Software Operator's Panel 2 (Parameter) ............................................. 338
Spindle Alarms (SP Alarm) ................................................................... 443
Spindle Control (Parameter) ................................................................. 281
Spindle Control 2 (Parameter) .............................................................. 302
Spindle Control Based on Servo Motor/Cs Contour Control
(Parameter) .......................................................................................... 361
Spindle Error and Warning States ........................................................ 701
Spindle Information Screen .................................................................. 763
Spindle monitor screen......................................................................... 758
Spindle Setting and Tuning Screen ...................................................... 755
Spindle setting screen .......................................................................... 756
Spindle tuning screen ........................................................................... 757
SRAM DATA UTILITY screen............................................................... 814
STAND-ALONE TYPE 30i SERIES HARDWARE ................................ 170
Standard MDI Unit (ONG Key) ................................................................. 4
Standard MDI Unit (QWERTY Key) .......................................................... 4
Starting the boot system....................................................................... 805
State of High-speed HRV Current Control ............................................ 701
State of TH Alarm ................................................................................. 689
Status screen (Series 300i/310i/320i only) ........................................... 826
Status screen display and setting ......................................................... 776
Straightness Compensation (Parameter).............................................. 316
Straightness Compensation 2 (Parameter)........................................... 378
Stroke Limit Check (Parameter)............................................................ 246
Subprogram Call Using a Specific Address .......................................... 118
Subprogram Call Using an M Code ...................................................... 116
Subprogram Calls Using a Secondary Auxiliary Function ..................... 117
Subprogram Calls Using a T Code ....................................................... 117
Subprogram Calls Using an S Code ..................................................... 117
SYMBOL & COMMENT DATA VIEWER screen (basic format) ............ 607
SYMBOL & COMMENT DATA VIEWER screen (extended format) ...... 608
Synchronous/Composite Control and Superimposed Control
(Parameter) .......................................................................................... 347
SYSTEM ALARMS ............................................................................... 462
System Alarms 114 to 130 (Alarms on the FSSB) ................................ 467
System Alarms Detected by Hardware ................................................. 466
i-8
B-63947EN/01
SYSTEM ALARMS RELATED TO THE PMC AND I/O LINK ................ 469
System Configuration (Parameter) ....................................................... 243
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION SCREEN DISPLAY ................................ 768
SYSTEM DATA CHECK screen ........................................................... 809
SYSTEM DATA DELETE screen.......................................................... 811
SYSTEM DATA SAVE screen .............................................................. 813
System files and user files .................................................................... 805
System Label Check Error.................................................................... 768
SYSTEM VARIABLE .............................................................................. 97
<T>
T series ................................................................................................ 754
Thermal Growth Compensation along Tool Vector ............................... 701
Three-dimensional Error Compensation (Parameter) ........................... 361
Timer .................................................................................................... 625
Title (message) data display screen ..................................................... 607
Tool Compensation (Parameter)........................................................... 303
Tool Compensation 2 (Parameter)........................................................ 391
Tool Life Management (Parameter) ...................................................... 329
Tool Management Functions (Parameter) ............................................ 376
Total Connection Diagrams .................................................. 125, 152, 172
Tracing Data......................................................................................... 718
Transition of the PMC Screens............................................................. 570
TROUBLESHOOTING ......................................................................... 681
TYPES OF VARIABLES ......................................................................... 97
<U>
USER DATA LOADING/SYSTEM DATA LOADING screen ................. 807
<W>
Warning................................................................................ 688, 785, 792
Warning Interface ................................................................................. 762
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS RELATED TO HANDLING .................... s-4
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS RELATED TO PROGRAMMING ........... s-2
WARNINGS RELATED TO DAILY MAINTENANCE ............................. s-5
WAVEFORM DIAGNOSIS.................................................................... 717
WAVEFORM DIAGNOSIS PARAMETER SCREEN............................. 717
Wrong Operation Prevention Function (Parameter).............................. 358
<α>
αi SERVO INFORMATION SCREEN ................................................... 744
αi SERVO WARNING INTERFACE ..................................................... 748
i-9
Revision Record
FANUC Series 30i/300i/300is-MODEL A, Series 31i/310i/310is-MODEL A5,

Series 31i/310i/310is-MODEL A, Series 32i/320i/320is-MODEL A
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE HANDBOOK (B-63947EN)
Edition Date Contents
01 May, 2006 ___________________________________________

S30i - S31i - S32i Handbook B63947 En01 - v1

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

S30i - S31i - S32i Handbook B63947 En01 - v1

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

FANUC Series 30*/300*/300*s-MODEL A

FANUC Series 31*/310*/310*s-MODEL A5

FANUC Series 31*/310*/310*s-MODEL A

OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE

The products in this manual are controlled based on Japan’s

In this manual we have tried as much as possible to describe all

This manual contains the program names or device names of

DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE

• Read this manual carefully, and store it in a safe place.

GENERAL WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS

WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS RELATED TO

WARNINGS RELATED TO DAILY MAINTENANCE

(1) Applicable models

(2) Special symbols

(3) Description of parameters

(5) Related manuals of SERVO MOTOR αi series, SPINDLE MOTOR αi

2 OPERATION LIST ................................................................. 57 2

4 PROGRAM FORMAT ............................................................ 79 4

5 CUSTOM MACRO ................................................................. 97 5

6 HARDWARE ........................................................................ 123 6

7 PARAMETERS .................................................................... 237 7

9 SIGNAL LIST (X/Y, G/F) ...................................................... 501 9

11 ETHERNET .......................................................................... 645 11

12 POWER MATE CNC MANAGER FUNCTION..................... 683 12

13 DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION ............................................... 689 13

14 HISTORY FUNCTION .......................................................... 705 14

15 WAVEFORM DIAGNOSIS ................................................... 717 15

16 DIGITAL SERVO.................................................................. 723 16

17 AC SPINDLE ........................................................................ 753 17

18 MAINTENANCE INFORMATION......................................... 767 18

19 MAINTENANCE FUNCTION ............................................... 793 19

1.9.2 Alarm Detail Screen .................................................... 53

7.2.26 Involute Interpolation ................................................. 315

8 ALARM LIST ........................................................................ 397

13.2.15 Diagnosis Data Related to the Inductosyn Absolute

19.1.2.11 Inputting part programs.............................. 799

7.2" LCD CNC Display Panel ...........................................................1.1.1

1.1.1 7.2" LCD CNC Display Panel

1.1.2 8.4" LCD CNC Display Panel

1.1.3 10.4" LCD CNC Display Panel

1.1.4 12.1" LCD CNC Display Panel

1.1.6 Standard MDI Unit (ONG Key)

Shift key Input key

Page change keys Cursor move keys Function keys

- Unit with lathe system

Shift key Input key

Page change keys Cursor move keys Function keys

1.1.7 Standard MDI Unit (QWERTY Key)

CTRL key Shift

Cancel (CAN) key

Cursor move keys

- Unit with lathe system

Cancel (CAN) key

Cursor move keys

1.1.9 Explanation of the MDI Keyboard

Table 1.1 (a) Explanation of the MDI keyboard 1

Some keys have two characters on their keytop.

Edit keys : ALTER

Press theses keys to switch display screens for

Vertical soft keys

Displays operations on selected chapter.

Horizontal soft keys

- Key operation with multi-path control

FANUC Series 30/300/300*s-MODEL A

FANUC Series 31/310/310*s-MODEL A5

FANUC Series 31/310/310*s-MODEL A